User Manual
Braille Sense
OnHand
USER MANUAL
ENGLISH MANUAL
For Software Version 5.5
(July, 2010)
When there are any manual updates, the
readme files or appendices
will be added to the manual CD
and website.
HIMS Co., Ltd.
139-9, Gajung-dong, Yuseong-gu,
Daejeon, Korea 305-350
Phone: +82-42-864-4460
Fax: +82-42-864-4462
Email: hims@himsintl.com
Website: www.himsintl.com
I
Safety Precaution
1. The input voltage of the AC adapter is 100V - 240V, and the
output is DC 5V / 2A.
2. When the Braille Sense OnHand is shipped, the battery may be
separate from the unit to avoid damage. The battery may not be
fully charged when it is shipped. Before you use the Braille Sense
OnHand, you should make sure the battery is fully charged.
When you use the Braille Sense OnHand for the first time, you
may need to open the package, take the battery, and insert it into
the battery slot at the rear panel of the unit. It is possible that the
dealer or distributor from whom you purchased the Braille Sense
OnHand from has already done this for you.
3. When you use the Braille Sense OnHand with the battery for the
first time, the battery status may not be displayed accurately. In
order to avoid this, connect the Braille Sense OnHand to the AC
adapter for about three hours with turn on. If you want to use the
Braille Sense OnHand immediately after opening the box, you will
need to connect the AC adapter to the unit for more than three
hours to fully charge the battery.
4. If you want or need to take the battery out of the unit, turn the
power off, and then take the battery out of the unit. Before putting
the battery back in to the unit, make certain that the power switch
is turned off.
5. When you are using the Braille Sense OnHand on battery power
only (without the AC adapter), the status of the remaining battery
power will be announced when the battery power is low. When
the battery’s charge falls below 15 percent, connect the AC
adapter to the unit for recharging. If the remaining battery power
drops to five percent, and the unit is not connected to the AC
adapter, the Braille Sense OnHand will shut down one minute
after the announcement of the battery’s status. The amount of
II
battery life per charge will vary depending on the options you
have set.
6. Your Braille Sense OnHand needs to be handled with care. The
Braille Sense OnHand is a very delicate machine. You should
make sure to handle the unit in a proper manner. Also, the Braille
Sense OnHand is very sensitive to dust. Make sure to keep the
Braille Sense OnHand away from dusty environments.
7. The Braille cells are very sensitive parts. If any of the Braille cells
are not working properly due to dust or any other reason, please
contact our repair center, or the dealer whom you purchased the
Braille Sense OnHand from for support.
8. You will need to register your Braille Sense OnHand in order to
ensure further maintenance, service, and upgrade information.
Please visit www.himsintl.com, to register your information. If you
have any trouble when registering your information, please
contact the dealer whom you purchased your Braille Sense
OnHand product from for help.
9. Do not take apart the Braille Sense OnHand by yourself. Do not
have anyone else who is not authorized by HIMS take apart the
Braille Sense OnHand. If an unqualified person disassembles the
unit, serious damage may occur to the Braille Sense OnHand. If
an unauthorized person disassembles the Braille Sense OnHand,
the unit will be excluded from any free maintenance, and the
warranty will become void. If any liquid or external force damages
the unit, it may also be excluded from free maintenance, even if
the damage occurred during the warranty period.
10. If you let your Braille Sense OnHand remain for a long time at the
closed or high temperature places like inside of car, the battery
attached to the Braille Sense OnHand may be defected or fired.
So please don’t keep your Braille Sense OnHand at those places.
III
11. If you have any complaints or suggestions, please provide us with
your comments on our website. We will improve our product
based on your comments and suggestions. Thank you for using
the Braille Sense OnHand, and we value any comments or
suggestions you have for our product.
12. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one of the following measures:
z Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
z Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
z Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
z Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, (example -use
only shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or
peripheral devices).
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
IV
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits
set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should
be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20
centimeters between the radiator and your body. This transmitter
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
V
Congratulations on the purchase of your Braille Sense OnHand! The
Braille Sense OnHand is capable of doing everything that an ordinary
PDA can do, and more – all without the need for a screen!
I. You will find the following items when you open the Braille Sense
OnHand package:
2) Braille Sense OnHand
3) Battery (2)
4) Carrying Bag
5) AC adapter
6) USB Cable
7) USB to Parallel Cable
8) USB Gender
9) Earphone
10) User Manual (CD)
11) Braille User Manual (Hot Keys List)
12) External Battery Charger
13) External LCD display(Optional)
II. How to use this manual
Before using the Braille Sense OnHand, you should read the entire
manual to familiarize yourself with the functions of the Braille Sense
OnHand. Reading the entire manual will allow you to operate the
Braille Sense OnHand to its fullest potential. The Braille Sense
OnHand has many functions. Many of these functions operate in a
similar manner, so it is important to become familiar with all of the
functions of the Braille Sense OnHand.
You will see references to hot keys and shortcut keys. These keys
refer to ways to access menus and functions quickly by using a
combination of keystrokes. Please note that not all hot keys and
shortcut keys will work while you are in the Braille Sense OnHand.
Some hot keys and shortcut keys require that you be within a program in
order for specific hot keys and shortcut keys to work.
VI
This user manual uses a specific notation of how to press keys. When
you see, “Space-b (dots 1-2)” this means that you would press the
“space bar” and dots 1 and 2 simultaneously. This is a very important
concept to understand when using this manual.
In order to use the Braille Sense OnHand, you will need to understand
what a menu is, and how it works. You will also need to understand
what a text box is, and how to type in information in a text box. You will
want to read section 2.2 to help you understand basic concepts of
menus. It is very important that you completely understand concepts
such as this, so that you are able to use the Braille Sense OnHand to its
fullest potential.
If you find that you are unable to find a solution to a problem within the
manual, or if you need assistance with the Braille Sense OnHand,
please email us at hims@himsintl.com. Visit us on the web at
www.himsintl.com; or, you can call us at +82-42-864-4460.
VII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction ........................................................................................1
1.1 What is the Braille Sense OnHand?........................................1
1.2 Hardware....................................................................................2
1.2.1 Top Panel.........................................................................3
1.2.2 Right Side Panel .............................................................5
1.2.3 Left Side Panel................................................................5
1.2.4 Rear Panel .......................................................................6
1.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................7
1.3 Hardware Specifications of the Braille Sense OnHand.........8
1.4 Memory on the Braille Sense OnHand....................................8
2. Basic Functions of the Braille Sense OnHand..............................10
2.1 How to Use the Commands ...................................................10
2.1.1 Messages.......................................................................10
2.2 Concept of the Menu ..............................................................11
2.2.1 Control Symbols on the Braille Sense OnHand.........13
2.3 Using the Function Keys........................................................16
2.4 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack for the Braille
Sense OnHand ..............................................................................17
2.5 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files .....................18
2.6 Controlling the Volume, Rate, and the Pitch of Speech......19
2.6.1 Control the volume and speed in Media player .........20
2.7 How to use the Voice and the Braille display.......................20
2.8 How to type the character......................................................20
2.8.1 The ASCII table for a computer Braille input..............21
2.9 Multi Tasking...........................................................................23
2.10 Switching Audio mode .........................................................25
2.11 Switching Key lock ...............................................................25
2.12 Print Spool.............................................................................26
2.13 One-Handed Mode ................................................................27
2.14 Using Typing Mode...............................................................28
2.15 Common Combination Keys................................................28
3. Global options..................................................................................31
3.1 Option Menu Overview...........................................................32
3.2 Braille display..........................................................................33
3.3 Braille Cursor ..........................................................................33
3.4 Eight Dot Mode........................................................................34
3.5 View/input the Grade of Braille..............................................34
3.6 Line break................................................................................35
3.7 Message Display Time............................................................36
3.8 Voice ........................................................................................36
VIII
3.9 Punctuation Level...................................................................37
3.10 Keyboard Echo......................................................................37
3.11 Capitalization alert................................................................38
3.12 Numbers ................................................................................38
3.13 Voice Volume ........................................................................39
3.14 Voice Rate..............................................................................39
3.15 Voice Pitch.............................................................................40
3.16 Scroll Voice ...........................................................................40
3.17 Flip LCD display....................................................................41
3.18 LCD Font Size........................................................................41
3.19 Printer Port ............................................................................42
3.20 Print Paper Size.....................................................................43
3.21 Audio alerts ...........................................................................43
3.22 Play Power On/Off Sound ....................................................43
3.23 Left Scroll Buttons................................................................44
3.24 Right Scroll Buttons .............................................................45
3.25 Skip Empty Lines..................................................................46
3.26 Control Information ..............................................................46
3.27 Show passwords...................................................................47
3.28 Hot Key Information..............................................................48
3.29 Announce shortcut keys......................................................48
3.30 Power Saving Mode..............................................................49
3.31 Power Saving Kick In............................................................49
3.32 Check Today’s Schedule......................................................50
3.33 One-Handed Mode ................................................................50
3.34 Spell check Automatically....................................................51
3.35 Default Document .................................................................51
3.36 Automatically synchronize with time server......................52
3.37 Progress indicator ................................................................53
3.38 Bluetooth ...............................................................................53
3.39 Wireless LAN.........................................................................54
3.40 Mass-storage device mode..................................................54
4. File Manager .....................................................................................56
4.1 Overview..................................................................................56
4.1.1 Navigating the File List ................................................56
4.1.2 Item (Folder or File) Selection Key..............................57
4.1.3 Cancel / Exit Key...........................................................58
4.2 Using File Manager Features in the File List........................58
4.2.1 Selecting Disks .............................................................58
4.2.2 Getting in and Out of a Folder (Opening/Closing a
Folder).....................................................................................59
IX
4.2.3 Opening a File...............................................................59
4.2.4 Send To..........................................................................61
4.2.5 Copy / Move...................................................................61
4.2.6 Delete Files or Folders .................................................63
4.2.7 Rename..........................................................................63
4.2.8 New Document..............................................................64
4.2.9 New Folder ....................................................................64
4.2.10 File Conversion...........................................................65
4.2.11 Select All......................................................................66
4.2.12 Search for File.............................................................66
4.2.13 Sort Files By................................................................67
4.2.14 Set File Info .................................................................68
4.2.15 Display Only Files of Type.........................................68
4.2.16 Zip ................................................................................69
4.2.17 Unzip............................................................................69
4.2.18 Information..................................................................70
4.3 Using the Address Window ...................................................71
4.3.1 Editing............................................................................71
4.3.2 Type in Path / File Name ..............................................72
4.3.3 Opening the History List..............................................72
4.4 Hot Keys in the “File Manager” .............................................72
5. Word Processor ...............................................................................74
5.1 File Menu .................................................................................75
5.1.1 New ................................................................................75
5.1.2 Open...............................................................................76
5.1.3 Save ...............................................................................78
5.1.4 Save As..........................................................................78
5.1.5 Close Current Document .............................................79
5.1.6 Print................................................................................80
5.1.7 Settings..........................................................................82
5.1.8 Exit .................................................................................84
5.2 Edit Menu.................................................................................84
5.2.1 Start Selection...............................................................84
5.2.2 Copy...............................................................................85
5.2.3 Cut..................................................................................86
5.2.4 Paste ..............................................................................86
5.2.5 Delete.............................................................................86
5.2.6 Delete Blank Lines........................................................87
5.2.7 Add to Clipboard...........................................................87
5.2.8 Clear Clipboard.............................................................87
5.2.9 Select All........................................................................88
X
5.2.10 Insert from File............................................................88
5.2.11 Insert Date ...................................................................89
5.2.12 Changing Between Insert and Overwrite Mode .......89
5.2.13 Check Spelling............................................................90
5.3 Go to Menu ..............................................................................93
5.3.1 Find ................................................................................94
5.3.2 Find Again .....................................................................95
5.3.3 Replace..........................................................................96
5.3.4 Go to Location ..............................................................97
5.3.5 Go to Previous Page.....................................................99
5.3.6 Go to Next Page............................................................99
5.3.7 Set Mark.........................................................................99
5.3.8 Go to Mark...................................................................100
5.3.9 Go to Previous Document..........................................101
5.3.10 Go to Next Document...............................................101
5.4 Read Menu.............................................................................101
5.4.1 Read Selected Text.....................................................101
5.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text..............................102
5.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor .................................102
5.4.4 Read from Cursor to End...........................................103
5.4.5 Auto Scroll...................................................................103
5.4.6 Read Current Line.......................................................104
5.4.7 Read Current Word.....................................................104
5.4.8 Read Current Character .............................................104
5.4.9 Read Status.................................................................105
5.5 Layout ....................................................................................105
5.5.1 Braille Document Layout ...........................................105
5.5.2 Print Document Layout ..............................................107
5.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout ...........................................109
5.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout..............................................110
5.6 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting ..................................112
5.7 Cursor Location ....................................................................113
5.8 Hot keys in the word processor: .........................................113
6. Address Manager ...........................................................................117
6.1 What is the “Address Manager”?........................................117
6.2 Starting the Address Manager.............................................118
6.3 Using “Add Address”...........................................................118
6.3.1 Adding an Address.....................................................118
6.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields.......................................120
6.3.3 Using “Search Address” in “Add address” .............121
6.4 Searching For an Address ...................................................121
XI
6.4.1 Using “search address”.............................................121
6.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields ............................122
6.4.3 Using “Add Address” In “Search Address”.............123
6.5 Backing up and restoring the address list .........................123
6.5.1 Backup Address List..................................................123
6.5.2 Restore Address List..................................................124
6.5.3 Set Backup Options....................................................124
6.6 Commands in the Found Records ......................................125
6.6.1 Find again....................................................................125
6.6.2 Opening a home page ................................................126
6.6.3 Editing Addresses ......................................................126
6.6.4 Deleting Addresses ....................................................127
6.6.5 Printing addresses .....................................................128
6.6.6 Saving Addresses to a File........................................128
6.7 Importing and Exporting CSV..............................................129
6.7.1 Import from CSV .........................................................129
6.7.2 Export to CSV..............................................................133
6.8 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook...............................134
6.9 Hot Keys in the Address Manager.......................................135
7. Schedule Manager .........................................................................137
7.1 Overview................................................................................137
7.2 Starting “Schedule Manager”..............................................137
7.3 Set time and date ..................................................................137
7.4 Adding a Schedule................................................................139
7.4.1 Start date .....................................................................139
7.4.2 Start time .....................................................................139
7.4.4 End time.......................................................................140
7.4.5 Subject.........................................................................141
7.4.6 Location.......................................................................141
7.4.7 Memo ...........................................................................141
7.4.8 Alarm Time ..................................................................142
7.4.9 Set a recurring Schedule ...........................................142
7.4.10 Confirm......................................................................146
7.4.11 Cancel........................................................................146
7.5 Search Schedule...................................................................146
7.5.1 Searching with date....................................................147
7.5.2 Searching with subject...............................................148
7.6 Modify Schedule ...................................................................148
7.7 Deleting a Schedule..............................................................149
7.8 Printing a Schedule ..............................................................149
7.9 Saving Appointments as a File............................................150
XII
7.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments...............150
7.10.1 Backup Schedule......................................................150
7.10.2 Restore Schedule .....................................................151
7.10.3 Set Backup Options..................................................152
7.11 Set Alarm Options...............................................................153
7.11.1 Alarm Duration..........................................................153
7.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time .....................................154
7.11.3 Repetition Times.......................................................154
7.11.4 Confirm......................................................................154
7.11.5 Cancel........................................................................155
7.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook.............................155
7.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager .................................156
8. E-mail ..............................................................................................158
8.1 Executing E-mail and E-mail service management ...........159
8.1.1 Executing e-mail .........................................................159
8.1.2 Management e-mail service information ..................160
8.2 Receiving and Sending E-mail.............................................168
8.2.1 Receiving E-mail.........................................................168
8.2.2 Reading the Received E-mail Messages ..................169
8.2.3 Writing e-mail..............................................................174
8.3 Major features of E-mail .......................................................184
8.3.1 Deleting E-mail............................................................184
8.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail................186
8.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message...................188
8.3.4 Saving a Received E-mail as Document...................189
8.3.5 Printing E-Mail Messages ..........................................190
8.4 Additional features of E-mail ...............................................191
8.4.1 Find ..............................................................................191
8.4.2 Find Again ...................................................................192
8.4.3 Move to Next Unread Message..................................193
8.4.4 Copy or Move to mailbox...........................................193
8.5 Use the Tools Menu..............................................................198
8.5.1 Set Path .......................................................................198
8.5.2 Set Options..................................................................202
8.5.3 Spam Settings.............................................................203
8.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail..............................................................211
8.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox........................211
8.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward,
and Save in the Mail Outbox...............................................211
8.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mail Messages or Writing an
E-mail Message....................................................................212
XIII
9. Media Player ...................................................................................213
9.1 Using the Audio Buttons......................................................213
9.1.1 Play/Pause Button ......................................................213
9.1.2 Next button and previous button ..............................214
9.1.3 Record Button.............................................................214
9.1.4 Stop Button .................................................................215
9.1.5 Using the Audio buttons in file open dialog box .....215
9.2 Braille Keyboard and Extended Keys .................................216
9.2.1 Playback Information Tab..........................................216
9.2.2 Play List Tab................................................................216
9.2.3 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab and the Play List
Tab ........................................................................................217
9.3 Control the volume and speed ............................................220
9.4 How to Use the Media Player Menu.....................................220
9.4.1 File................................................................................220
9.4.2 Play ..............................................................................225
9.4.3 Record .........................................................................227
9.4.4 Position Menu .............................................................230
9.4.5 Mark .............................................................................234
9.4.6 Settings........................................................................236
9.5 Additional features ...............................................................242
9.5.1 Moving features using the cursor keys....................242
9.6 Hot Keys in the Media Player...............................................242
10. FM radio ........................................................................................244
10.1 Listening to FM radio via internal speakers.....................244
10.1.1 Control the volume...................................................245
10.2 Frequency control...............................................................245
10.3 Add of the channel and move among channels...............246
10.4 Recording FM radio sound ................................................248
10.4.1 Changing record folder............................................249
10.5 Additional features .............................................................250
10.6 Hot Keys in the FM radio....................................................250
11. Web Browser ................................................................................252
11.1 File........................................................................................252
11.1.1 Open URL ..................................................................253
11.1.2 Open...........................................................................253
11.1.3 Save As......................................................................254
11.1.4 Page Information ......................................................255
11.1.5 Exit .............................................................................256
11.2 Read .....................................................................................256
11.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor ..............................256
XIV
11.2.2 Read from Cursor to End.........................................257
11.2.3 Auto Scroll.................................................................257
11.3 Edit .......................................................................................257
11.3.1 Start selection...........................................................258
11.3.2 Copy...........................................................................258
11.3.3 Add to clipboard .......................................................258
11.3.4 Copy URL ..................................................................259
11.3.5 Copy Link ..................................................................259
11.4 Go To....................................................................................259
11.4.1 Go to Home Page......................................................259
11.4.2 Go to Previous Page.................................................260
11.4.3 Go to Next Page........................................................260
11.4.4 Go to Previous Heading...........................................261
11.4.5 Go to Next Heading ..................................................261
10.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text.........................................262
11.4.7 Refresh ......................................................................262
11.4.8 History .......................................................................263
11.4.9 Find ............................................................................264
11.4.10 Find Again ...............................................................264
11.3.11 Links list ..................................................................265
11.5 Favorites..............................................................................265
11.5.1 Set Current As Your Home Page.............................266
11.5.2 Add To Favorites ......................................................266
11.5.3 Favorites List ............................................................267
11.6 Options ................................................................................268
11.6.1 The Structure and Movement ..................................269
11.6.2 Set User Agent..........................................................269
11.6.3 Show visited links.....................................................269
11.6.4 Changing the Default Download Folder..................270
11.6.5 Clear cookies ............................................................271
11.7 Read Page............................................................................271
11.7.1 Moving Between Controls........................................272
11.7.2 Moving to a Form......................................................273
11.7.3 Table ..........................................................................274
11.7.4 Move to the Frame....................................................276
11.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files.........................276
11.8 Hot keys in the Web Browser ............................................277
11.9 What the Web Browser Does Not Support .......................280
12. DAISY Player ................................................................................281
12.1 Components of the DAISY Player .....................................282
12.2 File........................................................................................283
XV
12.2.1 Open DAISY...............................................................283
12.2.2 Voice Settings...........................................................284
12.2.3 Book-Info...................................................................286
12.2.4 Exit .............................................................................286
12.3 Document ............................................................................286
12.3.1 Play and Pause .........................................................287
12.3.2 Move by Phrase ........................................................287
12.3.3 Move by Page............................................................287
12.3.4 Move by Level ...........................................................288
12.3.5 Move by Time Index..................................................288
12.3.6 Move by Text Index...................................................289
12.4 Mark .....................................................................................289
12.4.1 Previous Mark ...........................................................290
12.4.2 Next Mark...................................................................290
12.4.3 Set Mark.....................................................................290
12.4.4 Move to Mark.............................................................291
12.4.5 Deleting a Mark .........................................................291
12.5 Heading................................................................................291
12.5.1 Move by Heading ......................................................292
12.5.2 Move to Specific Heading ........................................292
12.5.3 Find Heading.............................................................292
12.5.4 Scan Heading and Read Heading............................293
12.5.5 Find Phrase ...............................................................293
12.6 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player............................................295
13. Bluetooth Manager.......................................................................297
13.1 Bluetooth Device List .........................................................297
13.2 Bluetooth Service List........................................................300
13.2.1 Connecting Service ..................................................302
13.2.2 LAN Service...............................................................303
13.2.3 FTP Service ...............................................................303
13.2.4 ActiveSync Service...................................................310
13.2.5 Serial Port..................................................................311
13.2.6 Bluetooth keyboard service.....................................314
13.2.7 Bluetooth Headset Service ......................................315
13.2.8 Bluetooth Printer service.........................................315
13.2.9 Using Multiple Services Simultaneously................316
13.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager .........................................316
14. MSN messenger ...........................................................................318
14.1 Getting Started with MSN Messenger...............................318
14.2 Using a Contact List ...........................................................319
14.2.1 Instant Messaging ....................................................320
XVI
14.2.2 Adding, Deleting, or Viewing Contact Information320
14.2.3 Changing Your Nickname, Status and Viewing Your
Information...........................................................................322
14.2.4 Additional Features ..................................................323
14.3 Instant Message Dialog Box ..............................................326
14.3.1 Inviting Others to Start a Conversation..................327
14.3.2 Saving and Printing Your Messages.......................328
14.3.3 Copying and Pasting Instant Messages .................328
14.3.4 Searching Messages ................................................329
14.4 Hot Keys in MSN Messenger .............................................329
15. Database Manager .......................................................................331
15.1 Table Manager.....................................................................332
15.1.1 Add Table ..................................................................333
15.1.2 Modify Table..............................................................335
15.1.3 Delete table................................................................336
15.1.4 Set Default Table.......................................................337
15.2 Insert a New Record ...........................................................337
15.3 Search Records...................................................................339
15.4 List of Records Found........................................................340
15.5 Set Backup Options............................................................341
15.6 Backup Database................................................................342
15.7 Restore Database................................................................342
15.8 Hot Keys for Database Manager........................................343
16. Contents........................................................................................345
16.1 Sense Bible Help.................................................................345
16.1.1 Composition of Bible................................................345
16.1.2 Open book dialog box..............................................345
16.1.3 Menu ..........................................................................346
16.1.4 Navigating .................................................................346
16.1.5 Find & Search............................................................348
16.1.6 Search........................................................................348
16.1.7 Setting the block (Ent-b (dots-1-2)).........................350
17. Utilities ..........................................................................................357
17.1 Calculator ............................................................................358
17.1.1 General Functions ....................................................358
17.1.2 Variable Calculators .................................................360
17.1.3 Sine Functions..........................................................362
17.1.4 Cosine Functions......................................................363
17.1.5 Tangent Functions....................................................363
17.1.6 Logarithm Functions................................................364
17.1.7 Copy to Clipboard.....................................................364
XVII
17.1.8 Option Settings.........................................................365
17.1.9 Exit .............................................................................365
17.1.10 Sample Math Calculations .....................................365
17.2 Display Compass Heading.................................................369
17.2.1 Options of gyrocompass .........................................369
17.3 Set time and date ................................................................370
17.4 Display time and date.........................................................372
17.5 Wake up alarm.....................................................................372
17.5.1 Set Time.....................................................................373
17.5.2 Alarm Sound .............................................................373
17.5.3 Term...........................................................................374
17.4.4 Ringing Duration.......................................................374
17.5.5 Repeat Interval..........................................................374
17.5.6 Wakeup Call Times...................................................374
17.5.7 Confirm/Cancel .........................................................375
17.6 Calendar...............................................................................375
17.6.1 Using the Calendar...................................................375
17.7 Pronunciation Dictionary ...................................................376
17.8 Stopwatch............................................................................378
17.9 Terminal for Screen reader ................................................379
17.10 Setup Internet....................................................................380
17.10.1 Bluetooth DUN setup..............................................380
17.10.2 Setup Wireless LAN................................................382
17.11 Display network status.....................................................385
17.12 Check Power Status .........................................................385
17.13 Backup/Restore Personalized settings...........................386
17.14 Format................................................................................387
17.14.1 Formatting the disk ................................................387
17.15 Set Sleep Timer.................................................................388
17.16 Upgrade Braille Sense OnHand firmware.......................389
17.17.1 Upgrading the Braille Sense OnHand firmware
Using the Internet ................................................................390
17.17.2 Upgrading the Braille Sense OnHand firmware from
a Disk ....................................................................................391
17.17 Hot Keys for Utilities.........................................................391
18. Using the help menu....................................................................395
19. Using ActiveSync.........................................................................398
19.1 What is ActiveSync?...........................................................398
19.2 Connecting the Braille Sense OnHand to a PC................398
19.3 Setting up the Braille Sense OnHand in the ActiveSync
Program .......................................................................................398
XVIII
19.4 Transferring Files to the Braille Sense OnHand Via
ActiveSync...................................................................................399
20. Command Summary ....................................................................401
20.1 Common Combination Keys..............................................401
20.2 File Manager........................................................................402
20.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list ........402
20.2.2 Navigation Keys for the File List.............................403
20.2.3 Item (folder or File) Selection Key...........................403
20.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands ...................................403
20.3 Word Processor ..................................................................404
20.3.1 Hot Keys for the Commands ...................................404
20.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys...........................................405
20.4 Address Manager................................................................406
20.4.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu .406
20.4.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List......................406
20.4.3 Hot keys for the Commands....................................406
20.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys...........................................407
20.5 Schedule Manager ..............................................................407
20.5.1 Hot keys for the commands.....................................407
20.5.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List......................407
20.6 E-mail ...................................................................................408
20.6.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox ........................408
20.6.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply,
Forward, and Save in the Mail Outbox...............................409
20.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail
Message................................................................................409
20.7 Media Player........................................................................409
20.7.1 Hot keys for commands...........................................409
20.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab.....................411
20.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab ..................................411
20.8 FM radio...............................................................................412
20.9 Web Browser.......................................................................413
20.9.1 Hot keys for the command.......................................413
20.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
...............................................................................................414
20.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages...........................414
20.10 Daisy Player.......................................................................415
20.11 Bluetooth Manager ...........................................................416
20.12 MSN messenger................................................................417
20.13 Database Manager ............................................................418
20.14 Utilities...............................................................................419
XIX
20.14.1 Calculator ................................................................419
20.14.2 Set time and date....................................................420
20.14.3 Checking Date and Time........................................421
20.14.4 Calendar ..................................................................421
20.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary .......................................421
20.14.6 Stopwatch................................................................421
20.14.7 Display network status...........................................422
20.14.8 Check Power Status ...............................................422
20.14.9 Format......................................................................422
20.14.10 Backup/restore option..........................................422
20.14.11 Format....................................................................422
20.14.12 Sleep Timer ...........................................................422
20.14.13 Upgrading the Braille Sense firmware................422
21. Command Summary for USB Keyboards ..................................423
21.1 Common Combination Keys..............................................423
21.2 File Manager........................................................................424
21.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list ........424
21.2.2 Navigation Keys in the File List...............................424
21.2.3 Item (Folder or File) Selection Keys........................424
21.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands ...................................425
21.3 Word Processor ..................................................................425
21.3.1 Hot keys for the command.......................................425
21.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys...........................................427
21.4 Address Manager................................................................427
21.4.1 Move keys for moving from field to field in the
record or in the menu..........................................................427
21.4.2 Move Keys for Moving from Record to Record......428
21.4.3 Hot Keys for the Commands ...................................428
21.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys...........................................428
21.5 Schedule Manager ..............................................................429
21.5.1 Hot keys for the commands.....................................429
21.5.2 Movement Keys for the Search Result List............429
21.6 E-mail ...................................................................................430
21.6.1 Hot keys for reading e-mails....................................430
21.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-mail Including Reply,
Forward, and Save in the Pail Storage Box.......................430
21.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-mail messages or Writing an
E-mail Message....................................................................431
21.7 Media Player........................................................................431
21.7.1 Hot keys for commands...........................................431
21.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab.....................432
XX
21.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab ..................................433
21.8 FM radio...............................................................................434
21.9 Web Browser.......................................................................434
21.9.1 Hot keys for the command.......................................434
21.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
...............................................................................................435
21.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages...........................435
21.10 Daisy Player.......................................................................436
21.11 Bluetooth Manager ...........................................................437
21.12 MSN messenger................................................................438
21.13 Database Manager ............................................................439
21.14 Utilities...............................................................................440
21.14.1 Calculator ................................................................440
21.14.2 Setting the Date and Time......................................441
21.14.3 Checking the Date and Time..................................442
21.14.4 Calendar ..................................................................442
21.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary .......................................442
21.14.6 Stopwatch................................................................443
21.14.7 Display network status...........................................443
21.14.8 Check Power Status ...............................................443
21.14.9 Backup/restore option............................................443
21.14.10 Upgrading Braille Sense OnHand firmware .......443
22. Troubleshooting Guide................................................................445
22.1 The Braille Sense OnHand Will Not Turn On....................445
22.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard...............................................445
22.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand................................445
22.4 The Voice Pitch Is Too Low or Too High to Understand.445
22.5 Lost Your Place...................................................................445
22.6 Email ....................................................................................446
22.7 The Braille display Does Not Display Braille....................446
22.8 The Braille Sense OnHand Does Not Respond................446
23. Accessories..................................................................................447
24. Obtaining Support........................................................................448
1
1. Introduction
1.1 What is the Braille Sense OnHand?
The Braille Sense OnHand is a Braille note taker developed and
manufactured by HIMS, for people who are blind and visually impaired.
You can do the following with the Braille Sense OnHand.
1. You can use the Word Processor, and the Perkins style keyboard,
to create Braille documents.
2. You can print your text documents using any compatible ink printer.
3. You can emboss your Braille documents when you connect the unit
to a Braille printer.
4. You can open Microsoft (MS) Word documents, and read them in
Braille. The Braille Sense OnHand will import any document that
was created in MS Word, and translate it into Braille.
5. Using the E-Mail Program, you can send email messages to
sighted individuals, as well as read your email messages in Braille.
6. Using the Schedule Manager, you can enter your appointments on
the Braille Sense OnHand. The Braille Sense OnHand will then
alert you at the time of your appointments.
7. With the Address Manager, you can input information about your
contacts and the Braille Sense OnHand can retrieve the information
for those contacts.
8. Using the Braille Sense OnHand Web Browser, you can surf the
Internet with the Braille display that is located on the Braille Sense
OnHand.
9. Using the Braille Sense OnHand Media Player, you can listen to
music, or any other sounds that are recorded in mp3, wma, or a
wave file format.
10. Using the Braille Sense OnHand FM radio, you can listen to FM
radio sound.
11. You can record the voice and FM radio sound in mp3 or wav file
format.
12. On the Calculator, you can calculate algebraic equations,
including scientific calculations.
2
13. You can copy any files from your personal computer to the Braille
Sense OnHand, and vice versa.
14. You can use the Braille Sense OnHand as a Braille display with a
compatible screen reader, such as Window-Eyes.
15. You can copy, move, and delete files on the Braille Sense
OnHand.
16. You can adjust the volume, the rate, and the pitch of the speech.
You can change as many of these features as you want on the
Braille Sense OnHand.
17. You can use the Database Manager to create your own
Database for keeping and storing important information.
18. You can use MSN messenger to communicate in real time, with
others who are running the MSN messenger program.
19. The sighted person who is learning Braille for the first time can
use the LCD screen on the Braille Sense OnHand, to easily learn
Braille. Likewise, using the LCD screen, sighted people, who do
not know Braille, can teach Braille to those who are blind when
using the Braille Sense OnHand. (LCD is an external type which
needs to be connected to Braille Sense OnHand)
1.2 Hardware
In order to get the most out of your Braille Sense OnHand, you will want
to become familiar with the Braille Sense OnHand by learning where the
buttons and ports are located, as well as the function of each of these
buttons and ports.
This section explains the hardware configuration of the Braille Sense
OnHand. The dimensions of the Braille Sense OnHand are 6.7 inches
long by 3.5 inches wide by 1.1 inches high. On the bottom of the unit,
there are rubber feet in order to prevent slipping while you are using the
Braille Sense OnHand. The input keys are Perkins-style, which consist
of seven keys that represent dot one through dot six, and the space. In
addition to these seven keys, there are two function keys that
correspond to the Backspace and Enter keys. Also there are 18 cells
that make up the Braille display.
3
The first thing you should do is place the Braille Sense OnHand on a
level surface that you can use to examine the Braille Sense OnHand,
such as a table or desk. When the Braille Sense OnHand is placed on
a level surface, the shape of the entire unit will resemble a small, thin
rectangular box. The Braille Sense OnHand has six sides. You
should feel for the Braille keys and Braille display. The side that the
Braille keys and Braille display are on should be facing up. The side
that is now facing up is referred to as the top of the Braille Sense
OnHand. The side that is facing to your right is called the right side
panel. The side facing to your left is called the left side panel. The
side that is facing away from you is called the rear panel. The side that
is facing toward you is called the front panel, and the side that the Braille
Sense OnHand is sitting on is called the bottom panel.
This section of the manual describes each side of the Braille Sense
OnHand and the basic function(s) of each button and port. We will
discuss each of the panels in the following order: top panel, right side
panel, left side panel, rear panel, and front panel.
1.2.1 Top Panel
1.2.1.1 Braille Display and Cursor key
Starting with the top of the Braille Sense OnHand, you will find a Braille
display that is located close to the front panel on the Braille Sense
OnHand. Above the Braille display, there are 18 small buttons that
correspond to 18 Braille cells. These 18 small buttons are called cursor
routing keys. You can use these buttons as cursor placement keys on
the corresponding Braille cells when you are editing documents. The
cursor routing keys will also work as shortcut keys in certain situations.
1.2.1.2 Scroll button
On both the extreme right and left sides of the Braille display, are two
capsule shaped buttons. These buttons divided into two parts up and
4
down. These buttons are called scroll buttons. The upper button called
up scroll button and the lower button called down scroll button. The
scroll buttons can be used to scroll through the menus or other
information that is displayed on the Braille display. If you are on text
that has more than 18 Braille cells, the scroll buttons will scroll the Braille
display.
1.2.1.3 Function key
Above the cursor routing keys, are four rectangular shaped buttons.
The space is located between these four rectangular shaped buttons.
Two of the rectangular shaped buttons are located on the left side of the
space and the other two are located on the right of the space. These
four rectangular shaped buttons are function keys. Moving from left to
right, the key that is the farthest to the left is called the F1 key, and the
key to the right of the F1 key is called the F2 key. Then, you will feel
the spacebar. The key that is to the right of the spacebar is called the
F3 key, and the key that is to the right of the F3 key is the F4 key.
1.2.1.4 Keyboard of Perkins-style
Above the function keys, you will find the Braille keys that are Perkins-
style, including the space. If you have ever used a regular computer
keyboard, this setup is very similar to the keys on the home row on a
regular computer keyboard. When you are typing, you should place
your fingers on these 9 Perkins-style keys in the following manner:
Place your index finger, middle finger, ring finger, and pinky finger of
your left hand on the left four buttons. Then, place your index finger,
middle finger, ring finger, and pinky finger of your right hand on the right
four buttons. Finally, place both of your thumbs on the space, also
called the Space.
The button where you placed your left index finger corresponds with dot
one in Braille. The button that your left middle finger is on corresponds
to dot two, and the button that your left ring finger is on corresponds to
5
dot three. The button on which your left pinky finger is placed on is the
Backspace.
The button that your right index finger is on corresponds with dot four in
Braille. The button that your right middle finger is on is dot five, and the
button your ring finger is placed on corresponds with dot six in Braille.
The button on which your right pinky is placed is the Enter key. And,
the long bar shaped button where your thumbs are placed is called the
space.
1.2.1.5 Speaker
Speaker is located in the center of Braille Sense OnHand.
1.2.2 Right Side Panel
Next, let's discuss the right side panel of the Braille Sense OnHand.
1.2.2.1 Earphone jack and Microphone jack
We will start from the front of the unit on the right side panel, and move
our way toward the back. Toward the front of the Braille Sense
OnHand on the right side panel, you will find the internal microphone,
earphone jack and microphone jack.
1.2.2.2 SD slot
Continuing toward the back of the unit on the right side panel, you will
find the SD Slot. You can connect a SD memory in this SD Slot, for
auxiliary storage.
1.2.3 Left Side Panel
Now, let's take a look at the left side panel of the unit.
6
1.2.3.1 Key lock mode switch
You will find the key lock mode switch. This switch will be explained in
more detail in the next section.
1.2.3.2 USB OTG
Continuing toward the back of the unit on the left side panel, you will find
the USB OTG. If you connect the unit to a personal computer by using
this USB OTG, you can transfer files that are stored in the Braille Sense
OnHand to your personal computer, and vice versa.
1.2.3.3 AC adapter jack
The last thing you will find on the left side panel of the unit is the AC
adapter jack. The AC adapter will plug in to this hole, and then plug in to
a standard AC electrical outlet, so that you can use the Braille Sense
OnHand with electricity, instead of using power from the battery.
1.2.4 Rear Panel
Next, let's take a look at the rear panel of the Braille Sense OnHand.
1.2.4.1 Reset button
On the far Right of the rear panel, you will find a small button in round
groove. This is the reset button. If your unit is not responding properly,
you can press this button with your finger, which will reboot the unit via a
hard reset. Pressing the reset button is a hardware reset. Do NOT
press the reset button for more than 5 seconds. You can also do a soft
reset by pressing F2-F3-1-2-3-4-5-6. This is a software reset, instead
of a hardware reset.
If you press down dots 1-2 and the reset button at the same time while
the power is on, the Braille Sense OnHand will turn on without speech.
7
When the reset button is pressed, the Braille Sense OnHand will reboot.
It will take about fifteen seconds for your unit to complete the reboot
process.
1.2.4.2 Battery Hole
The last thing you will find on the rear side panel of the unit is a
rectangular hole that is for the detachable battery. The battery is
separated from the unit when the Braille Sense OnHand is shipped.
Insert the battery into this rectangular slot until you hear a click sound.
When you hear this sound, you will know that the battery is inserted
correctly. To remove the battery from the unit, you will need to locate
the latch that is found on the bottom of the unit. Using your left hand,
pull the latch to the right panel, and then use your right hand to pull the
battery out of the slot.
1.2.5 Front Panel
Finally, let’s take a look at the front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand.
1.2.5.1 Audio Mode Switch
On the far left of the front panel, you will find a slide switch. This slide
switch is the audio mode switch. This switch will be explained in more
detail in the next section.
1.2.5.2 Media Button
Next, to the right of the slide switch is five buttons in different shapes.
The five buttons are for playback audio and recording sounds. These
five buttons will be explained in the FM radio, Daisy and Media program
sections in this user manual.
1.2.5.3 Power Switch
To the right of the five buttons is on/off switch. It is one-way switch so
8
when you turn on and off the device, push switch to the right side.
Congratulations! You are now familiar with the very basic functions of
the buttons and ports that are located on the Braille Sense OnHand.
The rest of the manual will discuss each function in greater detail to
allow you to maximize the potential of your Braille Sense OnHand.
1.3 Hardware Specifications of the Braille Sense OnHand
1. Operating system: Windows CE 5.0.
2. Flash memory: 4GB.
3. RAM: 128MB.
4. Memory extension: SD memory or USB stick memory.
5. CPU: NHPXA270.
6. Battery: Lithium Ion (Removable and Rechargeable),
7. Keyboard: Braille keyboard with Perkins-style, 4 function keys, 18
cursor routing keys, 4 scroll buttons, 5 audio buttons.
8. Additional button and switch: Key lock switch, Audio mode switch,
Reset button.
9. Braille display: 18 refreshable Braille cells.
10. Video output: LCD (External type) - Optional.
11. Wireless: WLAN b/g, Bluetooth.
12. Interface: USB OTG, SD slot.
13. Sound: Internal mono speakers, Stereo headphone jack.
14. Voice recording: Internal microphone, External microphone jack.
1.4 Memory on the Braille Sense OnHand
The Braille Sense OnHand has 128MB of RAM (random access
memory) and 4GB of flash memory. The RAM is memory space that is
reserved for running programs. This memory space is a temporary
storage of any program files that are running or any current data located
in documents that you are editing. The data in the RAM area will
disappear if your battery goes dead, and the AC adapter is not
connected. Also, when the Braille Sense OnHand reboots for any
reason, the data in the RAM will disappear. However, the data in flash
9
memory will not disappear, even if your battery goes dead, or if your unit
reboots.
Now that you know what the Braille Sense OnHand is, move on to the
next section to learn more about the basic functions of the Braille Sense
OnHand.
10
2. Basic Functions of the Braille Sense OnHand
2.1 How to Use the Commands
All of the commands that you will use on the Braille Sense OnHand are
comprised of different combinations of the Braille keys. In this user
manual, the “-” sign is used to indicate key combinations. For example,
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” indicates that the user should press the “space
bar” and “letter z (dots 1-3-5-6)” simultaneously and then release them
at the same time. You will also find expressions like “Space-1-3-5-6” in
this manual. This means that the spacebar with dots 1, 3, 5, and 6
should be pressed and released simultaneously. You can execute most
commands by pressing the “Enter” button. If you want to cancel the
execution of any command, and return to the previous status, press
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” is a very important
command to remember, as it will allow you to back out of programs and
menus, when you may have pressed keys that you did not mean to
press.
2.1.1 Messages
If you have setup an appointment in the Braille Sense OnHand,
schedule Manager, you will be notified of your appointments by the
Braille Sense OnHand on the day of your appointment. When you are
notified of an appointment, you can interact with the Schedule Manager
as you normally would. In order to exit from the Schedule Manager, you
should press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”, and
launch another program.
If you do not want to be alerted of “today’s schedule” when you turn on
the Braille Sense OnHand, you should turn off the “Check today’s
schedule” option which will be explained in section 3.35. Please refer to
section 3.35 in this user manual for more information on this option.
If you turn off the Braille Sense OnHand while another program is
opened, and then you turn it on again, the Braille Sense OnHand will tell
11
you the name of the program that was running on the Braille Sense
OnHand when you turned it off. If you turn off the Braille Sense OnHand
while you are using the word processor, it will tell you the file name/input
mode and file protection status as well as the program name.
When you connect the AC adapter to the Braille Sense OnHand, the
Braille Sense OnHand will speak the message “AC adapter connected”.
When you disconnect it from the Braille Sense OnHand, the Braille
Sense OnHand will say, “AC adaptor disconnected”.
2.2 Concept of the Menu
The menu on the Braille Sense OnHand is similar to the concept of a
restaurant menu. For instance, a menu that is used at a restaurant will
help you select your choice of food that will be served, while the menu
on the Braille Sense OnHand provides you with choices that you can
select. If you have selected a menu item from the menu items list, and
there are sub menus, the Braille Sense OnHand will display those
choices for that particular item.
Moving among the menu items is very simple.
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and press up
scroll button or “Space-1” to move to the previous item, and press down
scroll button or “Space-4” to move to the next item. Or just press an
alphabet that follows the menu names. This is a “shortcut key”. Or you
can execute the menu item without calling up the menu by pressing
“hotkey”.
Shortcut keys are the alphabets in the parentheses that follow the menu
names. And hotkeys are the combination of a couple of keys like “Enter”,
“Space”, or “Backspace”. These are displayed after the shortcut keys.
For example, if you are in the word processor, and press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on “File”, you will hear “New (n)
pull down Enter-n”. The word “New” represents the function. The
letter “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” is the letter that you would press while you are in
12
the “File” menu in order to move directly to “New”. “Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-
5)” is what you would press to access the function “New” from anywhere
in the word processor. The “n” is the shortcut key and “Enter-n” is the
hotkey. It is important to note that not all shortcut keys work from
anywhere in the Braille Sense OnHand; some commands will only work
while you are in a specific program. For example, if you want to
activate the “new document” option in the word processor. You cannot
press “Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)” in the “program” menu to activate this
option. You must be in the word processor program in order for “Enter-
n (dots 1-3-4-5)” to activate the “new document” option.
You can also move to the next menu item by pressing “Space-4”. You
can move to the previous menu item by pressing “Space-1”. When you
want to move to the first item of the menu, you can press “Space-1-2-3”.
If you would like to move to the last item of the menu, you can press
“Space-4-5-6”. The corresponding menu name will be displayed on the
Braille display, and the menu name will be spoken through the TTS (text
to speech) engine. If you want to listen to the name of the menu again,
press “Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)”. Once you move to a menu item that you
want to execute, press “Enter” in order to execute the menu. By
pressing “Enter”, you will move to the sub menu. If there is no
submenu, the Braille Sense OnHand will execute the command from the
menu. This process is called “menu selection”. You may also move to
any menu or execute any menu by pressing an initial spelling of the
menu.
Sometimes, if a menu is executed by pressing “Enter”, the lower-level
menu is displayed. In this case, the right direction arrow sign (->) is
displayed after the name of the corresponding menu on the Braille
display. When this happens, the Braille Sense OnHand will say, “pull
down”. Or, if a menu is executed by pressing “Enter”, the dialog box is
displayed. In this case, the ellipsis sign (…) will be displayed after the
name of the corresponding menu on the Braille display. The Braille
Sense OnHand will also speak the message, “common dialog”.
Let’s begin going through the various menus. First, turn the unit on by
13
pushing the power switch toward you. Now, bring up the “program”
menu. You can bring up the “program” menu by pressing “F1”. The
“program” menu is the top menu in the Braille Sense OnHand. That is,
the “program” menu is the parent directory for everything, as there are
no directories or menus above the “program” menu. The items in the
“program” menu are file manager, word processor, address manager,
schedule manager, e-mail, media player, FM radio, web browser, daisy
player, bluetooth manager, msn messenger, database manager, utilities,
global options, and help. The first item of the “program” menu is “File
manager”. If “Space-4” is pressed, the next menu item is displayed on
the Braille display, and it is also spoken. If “Space-4” is pressed
repeatedly, the “Help” menu will be displayed. The “Help” menu is the
last item on the “program” menu.
Press “Space-4-5-6” when “File manager” is displayed. The Braille
Sense OnHand will say “Help”, as the help menu is displayed. Then,
press “Space-1-2-3”, and the Braille Sense OnHand speaks “File
manager”. It means that “Space-4-5-6” moves to the last item of the
“program” menu, and “Space-1-2-3” moves to the first item of the
“program” menu. If you want to move from the current menu to the
upper level menu, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
At any point in the “program” menu or navigating sub-menus, you can
press the “F1” key to go to the “program” menu immediately. The file
manager, which is the first item of the “program” menu, will be displayed.
2.2.1 Control Symbols on the Braille Sense OnHand
The Braille Sense OnHand has many control symbols. Those symbols
appear when you set “Before” and “After” the “Control information” in the
“Global options”. The default value is set to “After”. However, if you
are in the web browser, the control symbols will be displayed even if you
turn off the “Control information” option.
The control symbol will appear in front of the menu name or item name.
For example, you might see something like, “MN File (f) pull down”.
14
The following table shows the names and the symbols of the control
symbols that are displayed in front and back of menu names.
Name Symbol Comments
Menu MN It means the menu that has
submenus.
Menu item MI It means the menu that does not
have a submenu.
List item LI The item name after this symbol
represents the name of the item
in any list.
(Ex: “LI database” or “LI
sample.txt” in the “file list” of the
file manager)
Edit box EB The item name after this symbol
represents the edit box name.
You can find the edit box after
the edit box name. In the web
browser, the symbol “EB” may
be followed by an edit box
without an edit box name. Edit
boxes that begin with the symbol
“EB” are one line.
(Ex: “EB Last name: (cursor)”
in the address manager program
or “EB (cursor)”
Multi edit box MEB This also represents the edit
box. But you can type in more
than one line in the edit box.
(Ex: “MEB Subject: (cursor)” in
the e-mail program)
Computer edit
box
CE
It means there is an edit box to
input ASCII Braille.
The edit box after this symbol
should allow ASCII Braille to be
typed in.
15
(Ex: “CE To: (cursor) “ in the
email program)
Combo box CB It represents the combo box in
which you can choose an item
by pressing the up scroll button
or the down scroll button.
(Ex: “CB Type: *.*” in the
“Open dialog box” of the word
processor program)
Edit combo box ECB You can choose the desired item
by pressing the up or down scroll
button, or by directly typing in the
item name.
(Ex: “ECB File name: (cursor)
“ in the “Open dialog box” of the
word processor program)
Prompt button PB PB follows any question in which
you have to choose “Yes” or
“No”. You can toggle between
“Yes” and “No” by pressing the
“Space” or the “Backspace”
button.
(Ex: When you exit from the
word processor, “PB Save: Yes”)
Static box ST ST is followed by the current
status.
(Ex: “ST noname.hbl/insert
mode/write” in the word
processor program)
Link LN It means there is a link in the
web page.
Anchor ANC It means there is an anchor in
the web page.
Radio button
RB
It represents a radio button,
which allows you to choose an
item by pressing the up scroll
16
button, down scroll button,
space, or Backspace. Also it
cycles between items when
pressing this key.
(Ex: “RB Attribute: Write” in the
“Information dialog box” of the
file manager)
Radio button
select
SRB It means that the radio button is
selected in the web browser
Radio button
unselect
URB It means that the radio button is
not selected in the web browser.
Check box check SCHB It means that the check box is
selected.
Check box
uncheck
UCHB It means that the check box is
not selected.
Links, anchors, and check boxes are controls that are only used in the
web browser. The symbols enable you to understand what type of box
or menu you are working with. For example, if “MN”, “MI”, or “LI” are
displayed in front of a list, you can move from one item to the next item
or previous item by pressing the up or down scroll button. If “ECB”,
“EB”, “CB”, or “MEB” are displayed on the display, you will have to find
the cursor and input the desired letters at the cursor position. If “BT” is
displayed, you can press “Enter” to “push the button”.
2.3 Using the Function Keys
There are four function keys on the Braille Sense OnHand. When
using the Braille Sense OnHand, you can open the menus, cancel tasks,
and move to other items by using these function keys. No matter
where you are in the Braille Sense OnHand, the “F1” key will open the
Braille Sense OnHand “program” menu. You can also use “F1” and the
shortcut key for each program in the “program” menu to open each
program anywhere in the Braille Sense OnHand. For example, if you
are in the word processor, and want to open the web browser, you could
press “F1-b (dots 1-2)” to open the web browser. In each program,
17
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” and the “F2” key will open the specific menu for
each program. The “F3” key has the same function as “tab (“Space-4-
5”). If you press “Space-F3”, this will have the same function as
pressing “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. The “F4” key will function just like the
“escape” key does on a personal computer. This key performs the
same function as pressing “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. Please note that the
“escape” key does not exit a program, as does “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
You can use combinations of the function keys to allow you to do many
tasks. Pressing “F1” and “F2” at the same time will work the same as
“page up” on a personal computer. If you press the “F3” and “F4” keys
at the same time, this is the same as pressing “page down” on a
personal computer. The combination of the “F1” and “F4” keys will
move you to the Task Name (like the task bar in a computer running
Microsoft Windows). If you press the “F2” and “F3” keys simultaneously,
you can switch between the different programs that are running just like
pressing “alt-tab” in your PC. The Task Name and program switching
will be explained in greater detail in the section 2.9, entitled, “Multi-
Tasking”.
2.4 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack for the Braille Sense
OnHand
It is very useful to know what the remaining battery power when the
Braille Sense OnHand is being operated only on battery power. If the
remaining battery power is not sufficient, the Braille Sense OnHand will
indicate that the battery power is low. In this case, you need to check
the remaining battery power, especially when you are using the Braille
Sense OnHand without plugging it into an AC power supply.
To check the battery power status, press “Space-1-6”. You will find the
following 2 items:
1. Battery power level
2. Power source (battery or AC supply)
The battery power level represents the percentage of the remaining
18
battery power. The power source indicates whether power is coming
from the battery or the AC power supply. If the battery power level
drops under 15 percent, the Braille Sense OnHand will display the
battery status on the Braille display, and it will announce (through the
speakers) that the battery has less than 15 percent of its power left. If
the battery power level falls below five percent, the Braille Sense
OnHand will give you a warning indicating that your battery power level
is under five percent, and the Braille Sense OnHand will be
automatically turned off in one minute, unless you connect the Braille
Sense OnHand to an AC power supply.
Let’s explore the detachable battery pack. When the Braille Sense
OnHand is shipped, you will find the battery pack is not installed in the
Braille Sense OnHand. This is done to prevent damage during
shipping. When you insert this battery pack in to the Braille Sense
OnHand for the first time, the unit may display an inaccurate battery
power level. Before using the Braille Sense OnHand for the first time,
please charge the battery for three hours. If you need to use the unit
during the initial recharge, the unit should be connected to the AC power
supply for at least three hours in order to fully charge the battery.
When you remove the battery from the Braille Sense OnHand, make
sure your unit is turned off; especially when the AC power supply is not
connected to your unit. Otherwise, you will lose all of your data that is
stored in RAM. If you remove the battery, and do not have the Braille
Sense OnHand hooked up to the AC power supply, your data that is
stored in RAM will remain for only about an hour. In order to keep your
data that is stored in RAM, the Braille Sense OnHand must be
connected to an AC power supply or battery pack within an hour;
otherwise the data that is stored in RAM will be lost.
2.5 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files
The flash memory in the Braille Sense OnHand is similar to a big
bookshelf in a library. The piece of hardware in the Braille Sense
OnHand that is called the “disk” is similar to the idea of a bookshelf in a
library. You can make partitions on a bookshelf in order to organize
19
books into categories. Each category can be compared to what are
called “folders” on the Braille Sense OnHand. The books in each
section can be compared to what are called “files” on the Braille Sense
OnHand. You can save files into any folders at your convenience. If
you make the proper folder names for files you are saving, it will make it
easier to find saved files when you need to access them later.
When the Braille Sense OnHand is shipped from the factory, the name
of the flash memory in the Braille Sense OnHand is called “flashdisk”.
You can create folders on this “flashdisk” in any way that you prefer.
You can also expand your memory space by adding additional memory
devices, such as a USB stick memory through a USB OTG, or a Secure
Digital memory card in the SD slot. The default name of the SD card is
“SD”. The USB stick memory is called “USB”. If you decide to add any of
these memory devices, you will be able to create folders, and save files
on the additional memory devices.
2.6 Controlling the Volume, Rate, and the Pitch of Speech
You can change the volume, rate, and pitch of speech used on the
Braille Sense OnHand. To change the volume, you can press
“Backspace-F4” to raise the volume. Press “Backspace-F1” to lower
the volume. To make changes in the reading rate, you can press
“Space-F4” to make the reading rate faster. Press “Space-F1” to make
the reading rate slower. In order to make changes in pitch, press
“Enter-F4” for a higher pitch and “Enter-F1” for a lower pitch. When any
of the above combination keys are pressed, the Braille Sense OnHand
will announce the status of its volume, rate, or pitch. The changes you
made with these combination keys will remain in effect even when you
turn off the machine and turn it back on again. These changes can also
be made in the “Global options” settings. Please refer to sections 3.14,
3.15, and 3.16 in this user manual.
20
2.6.1 Control the volume and speed in Media player
You can control the volume and speed in media player.
1. Volume up: Space-Up scroll button
2. Volume down: Space-Down scroll button
3. Rate up: Dots 3-4-5
4. Rate down: Dots 1-2-6
Note: These controls can be adjusted only Media volume and speed that
means it doesn't affect the master volume and speed.
2.7 How to use the Voice and the Braille display
When using the Braille Sense OnHand, you can choose to use Braille
only or speech only for reading. You can also use both Braille and
speech at the same time for reading. However, you cannot turn off both
Braille and the speech simultaneously. You can utilize “Backspace-F2”
to turn the speech on and off. You can use “Backspace-F3” to turn the
Braille on and off. Please refer to section 3.2 in this user manual for
more information.
2.8 How to type the character
In the document, “edit box” and “multi edit box” on Braille Sense
OnHand, you can enter the grade 1 or grade 2 Braille. But in the
“computer edit box” such as “To” in email program, you have to enter the
computer Braille. If you want to enter the capital letter, you can use the
“capital sign (Space-u (dots 1-3-6))” when you enter the computer Braille.
For example, if you want to enter the “H” in computer edit box, you press
the “Space-u (dots 1-3-6)” and press the “dots 1-2-5.” If you press
“Space-u (dots 1-3-6)” twice, capitals continue until you turn off by
pressing “Space-u (dots 1-3-6).”
You can use the “Space-Backspace” instead of “capital sign (Space-u).”
Only, you have press “Space-Backspace” and “dots 1-2-5”
simultaneously. Also you can use the “capital sign” when you enter the
“at sign.” To input the “at sign,” you press the “Space-u (dots 1-3-6)” and
21
press the “dot 4.” Also you can input the “at sign” by pressing “Space-
Backspace-dot 4.” And if you want to enter the number, you can use the
“number sign (dots 3-4-5-6).” But in the computer edit box, you have to
input the number in computer Braille that lowered by one row and no
number sign.
2.8.1 The ASCII table for a computer Braille input
exclamation mark: dots 2-3-4-6
quotation mark: dot 5
number sign: dots 3-4-5-6
dollar sign: dots 1-2-4-6
percent: dots 1-4-6
ampersand: dots 1-2-3-4-6
apostrophe: dot 3
left parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6
right parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6
asterisk: dots 1-6
PLUS: dots 3-4-6
comma: dot 6
dash: dots 3-6
period: dots 4-6
slash: dots 3-4
0: dots 3-5-6
1: dot 2
2: dots 2-3
3: dots 2-5
4: dots 2-5-6
5: dots 2-6
6: dots 2-3-5
7: dots 2-3-5-6
8: dots 2-3-6
9: dots 3-5
colon: dots 1-5-6
semi colon: dots 5-6
less than: dots 1-2-6
22
equal: dots 1-2-3-4-5-6
great than: dots 3-4-5
question mark: dots 1-4-5-6
at sign: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dot 4
A: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dot 1
B: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2
C: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-4
D: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-4-5
E: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-5
F: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4
G: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4-5
H: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-5
I: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4
J: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-5
K: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3
L: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3
M: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4
N: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-5
O: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-5
P: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-4
Q: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-4-5
R: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-5
S: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-3-4
T: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-3-4-5
U: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-6
V: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-6
W: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-5-6
X: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-6
Y: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-5-6
Z: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-5-6
left bracket: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-6
back slash: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-5-6
right bracket: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4-5-6
carat: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 4-5
underline: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 4-5-6
grave accent: dots 4
23
a: dot 1
b: dots 1-2
c: dots 1-4
d: dots 1-4-5
e: dots 1-5
f: dots 1-2-4
g: dots 1-2-4-5
h: dots 1-2-5
i: dots 2-4
j: dots 2-4-5
k: dots 1-3
l: dots 1-2-3
m: dots 1-3-4
n: dots 1-3-4-5
o: dots 1-3-5
p: dots 1-2-3-4
q: dots 1-2-3-4-5
r: dots 1-2-3-5
s: dots 2-3-4
t: dots 2-3-4-5
u: dots 1-3-6
v: dots 1-2-3-6
w: dots 2-4-5-6
x: dots 1-3-4-6
y: dots 1-3-4-5-6
z: dots 1-3-5-6
left brace: dots 2-4-6
vertical bar: dots 1-2-5-6
right brace: dots 1-2-4-5-6
tilde: dots 4-5
2.9 Multi Tasking
The Braille Sense OnHand can do more than one task at the same time,
which is called multi-tasking. For example, you can work with the
word processor while you are listening to music, and you can put
24
calculations into a document at the same time. This is called a Braille
Sense OnHand multi-task. If you want to work with the word processor
while listening to music, you can first run the media player and play a
music file. While playing music, you can press the “F1” key to open the
Braille Sense OnHand menu and run the word processor.
The Braille Sense OnHand can run up to seven programs
simultaneously. You cannot have more than seven multi-tasks. That
is, you cannot run more than seven programs at the same time.
If you try to run a program that you are already running, the new
instance of the program will not start, and you will be taken to the
instance of the program that is already running. For example, while you
are working with a document called “A”, you decide to execute the “file
manager”. Next, you move to a document called “B” by pressing the
move keys in the “file list” of “file manager”, and you press “Enter”.
Then, the word processor will not load again for opening the document
“B”, but the document “B” will be opened in the word processor, which
document “A” is also running on. If you want to switch documents, you
need to open them in the word processor without running other
programs. In this case, you can switch them with “tab (Space-4-5 or
F3)” or “shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)”. Switching documents will
be explained later in detail in section 5, which covers the word processor.
After you press F1 to call up the “program” menu, or after you press F1-
F4 to open the Task Name, you can press “escape” (“Space-e” or “F4”)
to return to the previously-running program. If you want to switch
between programs while running more than one program, press the “F1”
and “F4” keys at the same time to open the Task Name. The Task
Name shows the names and numbers of the running programs, just like
the file manager. You can cycle through the running programs on the
Braille Sense OnHand with the “Space-1” or the “Space-4” and scroll
buttons. Press the “Enter” key to run the program that you want after
focusing on your selection.
The combination of the “F2” and “F3” keys can switch between all of the
running programs immediately without opening the Task Name. It
25
functions the same way as the “alt-tab” keys on your PC. If you are
running three programs and you are in the second program, pressing the
“F2” and “F3” keys at the same time will move you to the third program.
If you press “F2-F3” again, you will be on the first program.
In the above case, pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” will close the
current running program and move you to the previous program.
However, if there is only one program running, pressing “Space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)” will close the program and move you to the Braille Sense
OnHand “program” menu. Note that “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” is
different from the “escape” key, which does not close programs.
2.10 Switching Audio mode
The audio buttons on the front panel will work for different function
according to the location of Audio mode switch.
If you push the audio mode switch to the left side, the Braille Sense
OnHand will say “radio mode” and the audio buttons will work for the FM
radio program. If you set the audio mode switch to the center, the Braille
Sense OnHand will say “daisy mode” and the audio buttons will work for
the Daisy program. If you push the audio mode switch to the right side,
the Braille Sense OnHand will say “media mode” and the audio buttons
will work for the Media program.
So in order to use the audio buttons as you desire, you have to set the
audio mode switch to the proper position. For example, when you are
using Media program and the audio mode switch is located in the left
side, the audio buttons on the front panel will work for FM radio program.
The detailed function of the audio buttons will be explained in the FM
radio, Daisy and Media program sections in this user manual.
2.11 Switching Key lock
You can disable or enable any specified keys on the Braille Sense
OnHand by using Key Lock switch on the left panel.
If the key lock switch put on left, Braille Sense OnHand will say “all keys
locked”. In this case, you can’t use the all keys including the on/off
26
switch. If the key lock switch put on center, Braille Sense OnHand will
say “top panel locked”. In this case, only you can use the buttons and
switches in the front panel (audio mode switch, audio buttons and on/off
switch). If the key lock switch put on right, Braille Sense OnHand will say
“unlocked”. In this case, you can use the all keys (Braille keyboard,
audio buttons, scroll buttons, function keys, audio mode switch and
on/off switch).
But, you can use the reset button, regardless of location of key lock
switch.
2.12 Print Spool
The Braille Sense OnHand has a print spool function. This function
enables the Braille Sense OnHand to do other tasks while printing to an
ink-printer or Braille embosser. For example, if you send data to your
printer or embosser, you will be immediately returned to where you were
before the print command was executed. If you want to check the print
spool dialog box after you have given the print command, press “Space-
2-3-4-6”. Then, you will see the dialog box which has three controls.
The first control is a list that gives you information about files that are
being printed. There is also a “Cancel” button and a “Close” button.
You can cycle through the three controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. In the information list, you can move item
by item by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”. However, if you open up
the dialog box without printing anything, you will see “no items” and the
“Close” button.
While printing, the information list will contain the following: “running
program name”, “printing file name”, “printer type”, “the number of
copies”, and either “printing” or “ready”. For example, let’s assume that
we are printing one copy of “sample.hbl” in the word processor. In the
info list, you will see “program: word processor, file: sample.hbl, printer,
copy: 1, printing”. If you are using a Braille embosser, you will see
“embosser” instead of “printer”. If there is not anything printing and,
(the printer is waiting), you will see “ready” instead of “printing”. If you
27
print something out in the e-mail program, you will see “emailtemp.txt”,
instead of the file name. When you are printing something from the
address manager, or the schedule manager, you will see the message,
“prn_(time).txt”.
If you focus on any of the files in the info list, and press “Enter” on
“Cancel” after pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, you will cancel the printing of
that file. If you press “Space-4-5” repeatedly, locate “Close”, and press
“Enter” on “Close”, you will close the print spool dialog box. Pressing
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” will also close the print spool.
2.13 One-Handed Mode
Braille Sense OnHand provides a one-handed mode for users restricted
to the use of one hand for Braille input. To turn on one-handed mode,
hold down F3, while turn on the power switch. And to turn off this mode
(i.e. to return on two-handed mode), hold down F4, while turn on the
power switch. Also, by using the Option menu, you can turn on or off
this mode.
When one-handed mode turned on, the input methods are as follows:
1. To type a character, you press the dots in any combination or order.
And when you have pressed all dots, press “Space”. For example, if
you want to type the “h”, you press “dot 1” and “dot 2” separately or
together and then press “dot 5”. And finally you press “Space”.
2. To press a command that includes “Space”, you press “Space” both
before and after the other keys. For example, if you want to press
“Space-o (dots 1-3-5)”, you press “Space” and then press “dot 1”, “dot
3” and “dot 5” separately or together in any order. Then press “Space”
again.
3. To press a command that includes “Backspace” or “Enter”, you press
“Backspace” or “Enter” before the other keys. And then press other
keys. Finally you press “Space”. For example, if you want to press
“Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)”, you press “Enter” and then press “dots 1-2-3”.
And press “Space”.
28
4. To press “Space”, “Backspace” and “Enter”, you press this keys twice.
For example, if you want to press “Space” to make a space between
words, you press “Space” twice.
The operation of the scroll buttons, function keys, audio buttons remains
the same as in two-handed mode.
If one-handed mode is on, the Braille Sense OnHand will advise this
each time it is turned on, and will also advise what to do to return to the
two-handed mode.
2.14 Using Typing Mode
While typing in document, you can execute “Typing Mode”.
In order to execute the “Typing Mode”, follow these steps:
1) Press “Backspace-Enter-c (dots 1-4)”, while typing in document.
2) It shows “Start typing mode”
If you press “Space-4” while executing the “Typing Mode”, it will be typed
“Space” and “Dot 4” instead of moving to next line.
In order to cancel the “Typing Mode”, follow these steps:
1) Press “Backspace-Enter-c (dots 1-4)” in the “Typing Mode”.
2) It shows “End typing mode”.
After canceling the “Typing Mode”, it will move to the next line in
document when you press “Space-4”.
2.15 Common Combination Keys
1. Call up the program menu: F1
2. Run the individual program in the program menu F1-“shortcut key”
(varies for each program)
3. Call up the task ID list: F1-F4
4. Switch to previous program: Space-F2-F3
5. Switch to next program: F2-F3
29
6. Call up the “menu” in the individual program: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or
F2
7. Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
8. Escape: Space-e (space-1-5) or F4
9. Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
10. Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or
Space-F3)
11. Move to the previous character: Left arrow key (Space-3)
12. Move to the next character: Right arrow key (Space-6)
13. Move to the previous line/item: Up arrow key (Space-1)
14. Move to the next line/item: Down arrow key (Space-4)
15. Move to the beginning of line/item: Home key (Space-1-3)
16. Move to the end of line/item: End key (Space-4-6)
17. Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home (Space-
1-2-3)
18. Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end
(Space-4-5-6)
19. Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 18-item
group: Page up (Space 1-2-6 or F1-F2)
20. Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 18-item group:
Page down (Space 3-4-5 or F3-F4)
21. Scroll left: Up scroll button
22. Scroll right: Down scroll button
23. Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The corresponding
cursor routing key
24. Read the current item again: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
25. Say current time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
26. Check power status: Space-1-6
27. Call up the “Global options”: Space-o (dots 1-3-5)
28. Online help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
29. Checking your version: Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) only in the Braille
Sense OnHand “program” menu”.
30. Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Braille Sense
OnHand “program” menu
31. Increase the voice volume: Backspace-F4
32. Decrease the voice volume: Backspace-F1
30
33. Increase the voice rate: Space-F4
34. Decrease the voice rate: Space-F1
35. Increase the voice pitch: Enter-F4
36. Decrease the voice pitch: Enter-F1
37. One-handed mode on: hold down F3 while turning on
38. One-handed mode off: hold down F4 while turning on
39. Bluetooth on/off: Backspace-3-4-5-6
40. Wireless lan on/off: Backspace-1-4-5-6
41. Scroll voice on/off: F3-up scroll button
42. Selecting Braille cursor: F4-up scroll button
43. Selection control information: F2-down scroll button
44. Eight dot mode on/off: F1-down scroll button
45. Use typing mode: Backspace-Enter-c (dots 1-4)
31
3. Global options
The “Global options” in the Braille Sense OnHand has information on all
of your settings. You can change your preferences regarding each option.
You can access the “Global options” by pressing “F1”. Then, use “Space-
4” or “Space-1” until you find “Global options”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Global options”. By pressing the “Space-o (dots 1-3-5)”, you can open
the “Global options” while you are anywhere in the Braille Sense
OnHand. You can navigate all of the items in the “Global options” with
“Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can also use the scroll buttons for
navigating through each of the items. You can change the setting values
with the “spacebar” or “Backspace” buttons. There are many shortcut
keys which you can use to quickly move you to wherever you want to go
in the “Global options”. By pressing “Space” on an item in the “Global
options”, you can turn the setting on or off, or toggle between the various
options that are available for the item you are on.
The “Global options” is like a dialog box. To change and save the
settings in the “Global options”, you must press “Enter” once you have
selected the setting that you want to save. If you do not press “Enter” (or
select “Confirm”) on the setting that you want, the setting will not be
saved. Once you press “Enter” to save the setting, the Braille Sense
OnHand will say, “Saved options”, and you will be returned to where you
were before you entered the “Global options”. To cancel the change to
the setting, press the “F4” key, “Space-e (dots 1-5)”, or “Space-z (dots 1-
3-4-5)”. The Braille Sense OnHand will then speak the message,
“Canceled saving options”. When you are on an option, you can also use
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to go to the “Confirm” and
“Cancel” buttons. If you want to save your settings, press “Enter” on the
“Confirm” button. If you do not want to save the changes you made to
the settings, press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button.
Before we go in to detail about each option, let’s first go through a brief
overview of what you will find in the “Global options”.
32
3.1 Option Menu Overview
The “Global options” contains different settings that can be changed in
the Braille Sense OnHand. By pressing “Space-o (dots 1-3-5)”, you
can open the “Global options” while you are anywhere in the Braille
Sense OnHand. The “Global options” has five groups.
1. Braille setting (which includes Braille display, Braille cursor, eight dot
mode, view/input grade, and message display time)
2. Voice setting (which includes voice, punctuation level, keyboard echo,
capitalization alert, numbers, voice volume, voice rate, voice pitch,
and scroll voice)
3. Display setting (which includes Flip LCD display, LCD font size - LCD
is an external type which needs to be connected to Braille Sense
OnHand)
4. Print setting (which includes printer port and print paper size)
5. General setting (which includes audio alerts, play power on/off
sound, left scroll buttons, right scroll buttons, skip empty lines, control
information, show password, hot key information, announce shortcut
keys, power saving mode, power saving kick in, check today's
schedule, one-handed mode, spell check automatically, default
document type, automatically synchronize with time server, progress
indicator, Bluetooth, wireless LAN and mass-storage device mode.)
You can move between the five groups by pressing “page down
(“Space-3-4-5” or “F3-F4”)” or “page up (“Space-1-2-6” or “F1-F2”)”.
When a group is opened, a list of options will appear that can be
changed for the particular setting that you are on. A list of options under
a group, are referred to as a “list”. You can move between items in the
“list” by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can then change the
setting for each option by pressing “Space” or “Backspace” on each
option.
33
3.2 Braille display
The first item that you will find in the “Global options” is “Braille display”.
You can switch the Braille display on and off with the “Space”. The
default is set to “On” and the shortcut key is “b (dots 1-2)”. You can
toggle the Braille display on or off, by pressing “Backspace-F3” while
you are using another program in the Braille Sense OnHand, without
having to pull up the “Global options”. If you have changed the setting,
press the “Enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Confirm” button, and press “Enter”.
If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel” button, and then press “Enter”. You can
also cancel saving the setting by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.3 Braille Cursor
You can choose how you want the Braille cursor to show up on the
Braille display. The shortcut key is “c (dots 1-4)”. By default the cursor is
set to “Always up”. If you do not want the cursor set to “Always up”, you
can press the “Space” key to turn the cursor “Blinking”, and one more
press the “Space” key to turn the cursor “Off”. If you have changed the
setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting. You can also “tab (“Space-
4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Confirm” button, and press
“Enter”. If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel” button, and then press “Enter”.
You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
Note that there are three types of cursors:
1. “dots 7-8”
2. blinking “dots 7-8”
3. blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8”
The blinking “dots 7-8” will be displayed when you are in the “overwirte
mode” in the word processor. The blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8” will
appear when you are using the “Start Selection” setting in the word
34
processor and when you are in an edit box. In all other situations, the
cursor will be displayed as “dots 7-8”.
3.4 Eight Dot Mode
You can choose to use a 6-dot-Braille or 8-dot-Braille display when
using ASCII text mode. The shortcut key is “e (dots 1-5)”. By default the
8-dot-Braille display is set to off. You can switch this option to 8-dot-
Braille mode by pressing the “Space” key. You can toggle this option on
or off by pressing “F1-down scroll button” while you are using another
program in the Braille Sense OnHand, without having to pull up the
“Global options”. If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to
save the setting. You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-
1-2”)” to the “Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to
save the setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Cancel” button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving
the setting by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.5 View/input the Grade of Braille
You can choose what grade of Braille you want the Braille display to use
when reading. The shortcut key is “g (dots 1-2-4-5)”. The setting choices
are grade 1, grade 2, and ASCII. You can switch between the settings
by pressing the “space” key. You can press “space-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” to
cycle through the three settings while you are using other programs
without calling up the “Global options”. If you have changed the setting,
press the “enter” key to save the setting. You can also “tab (“space-4-
5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “confirm” button, and press “enter”.
If you do not want to save the setting, “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and then press “enter”. You can
also cancel saving the setting by pressing “space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“space-e (dots 1-5)”.
35
3.6 Line break
When you read a document, if the Line break is off, you can move to the
previous/next word one by one without breaking the line.
Move to the previous/next word: Space-2 or Space-5
Move to the previous/next character: Space-3 or Space-6
For example, when you read “New document folder name”, first, you can
see “New document” on the Braille display. When you press “Space-6”
or “Space-5”, it changes to “document folder”. When you press “Space-
6” or “Space-5” once again, it changes to “folder name”.
When the Line break is on, it changes the line automatically. For
example, when you read “New document folder name”, first, you can see
“New document” on the Braille display. When you press “Space-6” or
“Space-5”, it changes the line and shows “folder name”
To execute “Line break”, follow these steps:
1) Press “Space-o (dots 1-3-5)” to call up the option menu.
2) It shows “Braille display”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to “Line break”. Or press “a (dot 1)”.
4) It shows “Line break: On".
The default setting is "On". To change setting value, press “Space”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
36
3.7 Message Display Time
You can select how long a Braille message will be displayed on the
Braille display. This feature is available when the voice is off. When in
“Stand by” and “Ignore” mode you can turn on the voice. The shortcut
key is “m (dots 1-3-4)”. You can select among “Stand by”, “Ignore”, and
1 to 10 seconds. The default is “3 seconds”. The value is increased
when you press the “Space” key and decreased when you press the
“Backspace” key To set “Stand by” mode, press the “Space” key until
you reach “Stand by”.. In this mode, the message will disappear when
you press any key. The higher value you select, the longer the
message remains. If you skip the message before the time you set, you
can clear the message by pressing any key. If you choose “Ignore”, then
messages won’t be shown on the display. If you have changed the
setting, press the “Enter” key to save the setting. You can also press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” and press “Enter” on the
“Confirm” button”. If you do not want to save the setting, press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”and “Enter” on the “Cancel”
button”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.8 Voice
This menu will allow you to turn the Braille Sense OnHand voice on or
off. The shortcut key is “v (dots 1-2-3-6)”. By default the voice is set to
on, so you will hear the Braille Sense OnHand speak. You can turn off
the voice with the ‘“Space”. You can toggle it on and off by pressing
“Backspace-F2” while you are using another program in the Braille
Sense OnHand without having to call up the “Global options”. If you
have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting. You can
also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Confirm”
button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the setting, “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel” button, and
then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
37
You can also press “dots 1-2” while turning on the Braille Sense OnHand,
which will turn the Braille Sense OnHand on without speech. When
resetting the Braille Sense OnHand, you can also press “dots 1-2” when
you press the reset button to reset the Braille Sense OnHand, and turn
on the Braille Sense OnHand without speech.
3.9 Punctuation Level
You can choose how you want the Braille Sense OnHand to read
punctuation marks. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. The setting
options are “All”, “Off”, “Punctuation”, and “Symbol”. The default setting
is set to “All” in which the Braille Sense OnHand will say all punctuation
marks and symbols. The “Space” key allows you to cycle through all four
of the setting values. If you select “Off”, the Braille Sense OnHand will
not say any punctuation marks. The option, “Punctuation” will make the
Braille Sense OnHand say only punctuation marks, but the “Symbol”
option will say all symbols without saying punctuation marks. If you
have changed the setting, press the “Enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.10 Keyboard Echo
With this option, you can decide how the Braille Sense OnHand will
speak when you are typing. The shortcut key is “k (dots 1-3)”. The
setting values are “On with characters and words”, “On with characters”,
“On with words”, and “Off”. If you select the default “On with characters
and words”, you can hear each keystroke and a word right after it is
completed. If you select “On with characters”, you can hear each
keystroke letter by letter. If you select the “On with words” option, you
can hear each word right after it is completed, but not each letter. You
can cycle through each of the options by pressing the “Space” key. If
you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” key to save the setting.
38
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.11 Capitalization alert
You can decide how the Braille Sense OnHand will speak the "capital
character" when you type the character or read the document by using
"space-3" or "space-6" in computer edit box or ASCII mode .
The shortcut key is “u (dots 1-3-6).” The setting values are “Off,” “Say
cap,” and “Pitch.” The default value is “Pitch.” If you select the default,
you will hear higher pitch when meet the capital letter. And if you select
the “Off”, read the same regardless of capital letter and lower case letter.
And if you select the “say cap,” you will hear “cap” sound before the
capital letter. For example, when you meet the capital letter “V,” Braille
Sense OnHand will talk “cap v.”
You can cycle through each of the options by pressing the “Space” key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter.” If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter.” You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5).”
3.12 Numbers
You can choose how you want the Braille Sense OnHand to read
number. The shortcut key is “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” with the default set to “On”.
For example, if you set “On”, the “2007” will read “two thousand seven”.
And you set “Off”, “the “2007” will read “two zero zero seven”. You can
change the value by using “Space”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
39
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.13 Voice Volume
You can set the volume level of the voice on the Braille Sense OnHand.
The shortcut key is “l (dots 1-2-3)”. The setting value is 1 through 10 with
the default set on 6. When you have set this option to 1, the volume will
be set at the lowest level. If you set this option to 10, the volume is the
loudest. If you set the volume level to 1, you will almost not be able to
hear. The “Space” key increases the volume and the “Backspace”
decreases the volume by one number at a time. Please note that if you
are at volume level 10, and increase the volume by one, the volume
loops back to level 1. The same is true if you are at level 1, and
decrease the volume by one unit. You will then be at level 10. Without
opening the “Global options”, you can increase the volume with the key
combination of the “Backspace” and “F4” keys or you can decrease it
with the “Backspace” and the “F1” key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.14 Voice Rate
You can control the rate of the Braille Sense OnHand speech. The
shortcut key is “r (dots 1-2-3-5)”. The setting options are 1 through 12
with the default set to 8. The “Space” key increases the rate level and
the “Backspace” decreases the speed level by one unit at a time.
Without opening the “Global options”, you can increase the rate with the
key combination of the “Space” and “F4” keys, or you can decrease it
40
with the “Space” and the “F1” key. If you are at level 12, and increase
the rate by one unit, you will go to level 1. Also, if you are at level 1, and
decrease the rate by one unit, you will go to level 12.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.15 Voice Pitch
You can control the voice pitch of the Braille Sense OnHand. The
shortcut key is “t (dots 1-2-3-4-5)”. The available options are 1 through
10 with the default set to 6. At level 10, the voice pitch will be the
highest; and, at level 1, the voice pitch will be the lowest. The “space”
key will increase the voice pitch and the “backspace” key will decrease
the voice pitch by one level. Just as with the voice volume and voice
speed, if you are at level 10, and you increase the voice pitch by one
level, you will go to level 1. And, if you are at level 1 and decrease the
voice pitch by one level, you will go to level 10. When you are not in the
“option”, menu, you can increase the pitch by pressing, “enter” and “F4”,
or you can decrease it by pressing “enter” and “F1”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter”. If you do not want to save the setting,
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.16 Scroll Voice
You can decide if you want the Braille Sense OnHand to speak while
using the scroll buttons in the document. The shortcut key is “s (dots 2-
3-4)” with the default set to “Off”. The default setting (Off) does not allow
41
the Braille Sense OnHand to speak while scrolling. The “Space” toggles
off/on. If you set the option to “On”, you can hear the Braille Sense
OnHand while scrolling.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.17 Flip LCD display
Note: LCD is an external type which needs to be connected to Braille
Sense OnHand
You can decide if the text on the LCD screen is shown in the right or
reverse direction. By default, it is set to “Off”, You can switch the value to
“On” or “Off”. If you set this option to “Off”, the text on the LCD screen is
shown in the right direction and if you set this option to “On”, the text on
the LCD screen is shown in the reverse direction and it means the
sighted person facing you can see the text on the LCD screen in the
right direction. It is a good tool for teachers or Deaf-blinds.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.18 LCD Font Size
Note: LCD is an external type which needs to be connected to Braille
Sense OnHand
42
Here, you can change the font size on your LCD panel. The shortcut key
is “f (dots 1-2-4)”. The default is set to 19, but you can set the font size
anywhere from 12 to 20. You can increase the font by one size with the
“Space”, and you can decrease the font size with the “Backspace” key.
If you have the font size set to 20, and you increase the font by one size,
the font will go to 12. If your font size is 12, and you decrease the font by
one size, the font will go to 20.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.19 Printer Port
You can choose which port will be used for your printer port when
sending your documents to a printer. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-
4)”. The default is set to “USB”. If you want to use a USB port printer,
you keep the default setting. If you want to use a parallel port printer,
you change the setting. You can toggle the options by hitting the “Space”
key.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
For your reference, if you want to use parallel port printer, you must
connect the USB port to cable that convert USB into parallel.
43
3.20 Print Paper Size
This option allows you to select the size of the paper that an ink printer
will use, if you will be printing to an ink printer. The shortcut key for this
function is “s (dots 2-3-4)”. You can change the size for this option by
pressing “Space”. You can choose between the settings of, “Letter” (8.5
inches by 11 inches) or, “Legal” (8.5 inches by 14 inches.)
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.21 Audio alerts
You can choose whether you will hear a warning sound or not. The
shortcut key is “w (dots 2-4-5-6)”. This option is useful if the speech
setting on the Braille Sense OnHand is turned off. The default for this
option is set to “on”. If you turn off the speech, you will hear a beeping
sound when you type in keys that the Braille Sense OnHand does not
accept. If you don't want to hear the warning sound, you can press the
“space” key once to turn “off” the warning message.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter”. If you do not want to save the setting,
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5).
3.22 Play Power On/Off Sound
You can choose whether you will hear a power on/off sound or not when
you turn on the Braille Sense OnHand. The shortcut key is “s (dots 2-3-
4)”. The default for this option is set to “on”. If you keep default setting,
44
you will hear a starting sound signal when you turn on or off the Braille
Sense OnHand.
If you don’t want to hear the on/off sound signal, you can press the
“space” once to turn “off” the sound signal.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter”. If you do not want to save the setting,
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.23 Left Scroll Buttons
You can decide how scroll buttons on the left side of Braille display are
used. You can set the value with one of “Scroll line”, “Move by line”,
“Move by character”, “Move by paragraph” and “Move by sentence”.
If you set the value to “Scroll line”, left-scroll buttons are used to scroll
previous or next Braille. It means if you press left-up scroll button, you
can scroll previous Braille and if you press left-down scroll button, you
can scroll next Braille.
If you set the value to “Move by line”, left-scroll buttons are used to move
to previous or next line and it works as if you press “Space-1” or “Space-
4”.
If you set the value to “Move by character”, left-scroll buttons are used to
move to previous or next character on the Braille display. It means if you
press left-up scroll button, you can move to previous character on the
Braille display and if you press left-down scroll button, you can move to
next character on the Braille display and it works as if you press “Space-
3” or “Space-6”.
If you set the value to “Move by paragraph”, left-scroll buttons are used
to move to previous or next paragraph and it works as if you press
“Space-2-3” or “Space-5-6”.
45
If you set the value to “Move by sentence”, left-scroll buttons are used to
move to previous or next sentence and it works as if you press “Space-
2-3-5” or “Space-2-5-6”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.24 Right Scroll Buttons
You can decide how scroll buttons on the right side of Braille display are
used. You can set the value with one of “Scroll line”, “Move by line”,
“Move by character”, “Move by paragraph” and “Move by sentence”.
If you set the value to “Scroll line”, right-scroll buttons are used to scroll
previous or next Braille. It means if you press right-up scroll button, you
can scroll previous Braille and if you press right-down scroll button, you
can scroll next Braille.
If you set the value to “Move by line”, right-scroll buttons are used to
move to previous or next line and it works as if you press “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.
If you set the value to “Move by character”, right-scroll buttons are used
to move to previous or next character on the Braille display. It means if
you press right-up scroll button, you can move to previous character on
the Braille display and if you press right-down scroll button, you can
move to next character on the Braille display and it works as if you press
“Space-3” or “Space-6”.
46
If you set the value to “Move by paragraph”, right-scroll buttons are used
to move to previous or next paragraph and it works as if you press
“Space-2-3” or “Space-5-6”.
If you set the value to “Move by sentence”, right-scroll buttons are used
to move to previous or next sentence and it works as if you press
“Space-2-3-5” or “Space-2-5-6”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.25 Skip Empty Lines
You can choose to have the Braille Sense OnHand read a blank line, or
to skip empty lines. The shortcut key is “e (dots 1-5)”, and the default is
set to “Off”. If you keep the default setting, you will hear the words
“empty line” if there is a blank line. The “Space” toggles off/on. If you
choose to turn this option on, the Braille Sense OnHand will skip all
blank lines, and you will not hear the words “empty line” when there is a
blank line. If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the
setting. You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to
the “Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.26 Control Information
You can choose the display location of information regarding the files
and menus in the Braille Sense OnHand. The short cut key is “i (dots 2-
4)”, and the default is set to “After”. To toggle “Control information”
between before, after and off, press “space.
47
If you select “Before”, you will hear control information before a menu or
list item. If you select “After”, you will hear control information such as
“list item” or “menu item” after a menu or list item. If you have control
information shut off, you will not hear “list item” or “menu item”.
Note that if the Web browser is activated, the control symbols will appear
even if you turn off the “Control information” option.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.27 Show passwords
When you enter the password in computer edit box, you can select to
display either “*(dots 1-6)”or the letter exactly that you write on the
Braille display.
The short cut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, and the default is set to “off”.
When you enter the password, it will be shown as “*(dots 1-6)” on the
Braille display.
By pressing “Space”, you can change set to “on”. When you type the
password, it will be shown as the letter exactly that you write on Braille
display.
You have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” and
press “Enter” on the “Confirm” button. If you do not want to save the
setting, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” and press
“Enter” on the “Cancel” button. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
48
3.28 Hot Key Information
As described before, hot keys are keystrokes that can take you directly
to an item, such as a menu, or a particular item in a list. You can choose
the speech output method of hot key. The short cut key is “h (dots 1-2-
5)”, and the default is set to “ASCII character”. The setting values are
“ASCII character”, “Dot patterns”, and “Off”. You can cycle through each
of the options by pressing the “Space” key. For example, when you
select “ASCII character”, the “Open (o) Enter-o” will output with “Open
(o) Enter-o”. And if you select “Dot patterns”, the “Open (o) Enter-o” will
out put with “Open (o) enter dots 1 3 5”. And if you select “Off”, you can’t
hear the hot key information.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.29 Announce shortcut keys
The “Announce shortcut keys” option allows you to decide if the Braille
Sense OnHand will say the shortcut key for a function. The shortcut key
is “s (dots 2-3-4)” and the default is set to “on”.
For example, if you hear, “file f pull down”, the shortcut key is the letter
“f”. If you prefer the Braille Sense OnHand only says, “file pull down”,
you will want to turn the “announce shortcut keys” setting off. To toggle
“announce shortcut keys” between on and off, press “space”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter”. If you do not want to save the setting,
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5)”.
49
3.30 Power Saving Mode
You can choose to have the Braille Sense OnHand use the power
saving mode. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. The default setting
is set to “On”, which will use the power saving mode. By pressing
“Space”, you can switch between “On”, “Off”, and “Message”. If you don't
want to use the power saving mode, you can set the option to “Off”. If
you set the option to “Message”, you will hear a warning message that
says “power on” in 10, 20, or 30 minute increments (depending on the
setting that you will choose for power saving kick in) if you have not
pressed any keys on the Braille Sense OnHand. The next section
explains how to change the power saving kick in to 10, 20, or 30 minutes.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
For your reference, this option is available only when the AC adaptor is
connected to the unit. In other word, although you set the option to “On”
if AC adaptor is connected to the unit, the unit will not go to the sleep
mode automatically when you meet the “Power saving kick in” time.
3.31 Power Saving Kick In
When you want to use the power saving mode, you can set the time
when the power saving mode will begin. The shortcut key is “k (dots 1-
3)” with the default set at “After 10 minutes”. If you set this option to the
default, the Braille Sense OnHand will enter into power saving mode
when you have not used the Braille Sense OnHand for 10 minutes. The
“Space” key changes the option setting to 10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30
minutes.
50
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.32 Check Today’s Schedule
In the “Schedule manager” (which you will learn about later), you are
able to keep track of your appointments, using the Braille Sense
OnHand. The Braille Sense OnHand is able to check today’s schedule
when you turn it on. You can decide if you want the Braille Sense
OnHand to show today’s schedule when it powers on. The short cut key
for this option is “s (dots 2-3-4)”. To toggle this option between off and
on, press “Space”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.33 One-Handed Mode
You can choose one-handed mode on or off when you use the Braille
Sense OnHand. The shortcut key is “h (dots 1-2-5)”. The default for this
option is set to “Off”. The setting options are “On” and “Off”. The detail
information about one-handed mode refers to “2.14 One-Handed Mode”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
51
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
For your reference, this option is set to “Off” even if you are set to “On”
when connected the Braille Sense OnHand to USB keyboard. And if you
remove the USB keyboard, this option will be returned to value that
before you connected to the USB keyboard.
3.34 Spell check Automatically
You can choose whether the Braille Sense OnHand will check spelling
or not. This option is available in “multi edit boxes” in programs such as
the schedule manager, address manager, e-mail messages, the word
processor, etc. The short cut key for this option is “c (dots1-4)”.
By default this setting is set to “No” which will not check your spelling.
If you want to check spelling, press “Space” to toggle the option to “Yes”
and press “Enter”. Or, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm”
button, and press “Enter”.
If you set the option to “Yes” and enter a misspelled word, you will hear
a beep sound. You will hear a beep sound, even though you shut “No”
the audio alert discussed in section “3.22”.
If you do not want to save the changed setting, press “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” to move to the “Cancel” button, and press “Enter”. You can also
cancel saving the setting by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.35 Default Document
This function is used to set the default document type applied when you
create a new document using the word processor on the Braille Sense
OnHand. The shortcut key for this option is “q (dot 1-2-3-4-5)”. When
you create a new document in the “word processor”, “Braille document”
52
(.brl file) is selected as the file type by default. You can change the
default setting using this option.
You can choose between “Sense document”, “Braille document”, and
“Text document”. By default, it is set to “Braille document”. Press
“Space” to toggle through the three settings, and press “Enter”, or press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and press “Enter”, to
save the changed setting.
If you do not want to save the changed setting, press “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” to move to the “Cancel” button, and press “Enter”. You can also
cancel saving the setting by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or
“Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
For your reference, this option is set to “Text document” even if you are
set to “Sense document” or “Braille document” when connected the
Braille Sense OnHand to USB keyboard. And if you remove the USB
keyboard, this option will be returned to value that before you connected
to the USB keyboard.
3.36 Automatically synchronize with time server
“Automatically synchronize with time server”, the date and time
syncronize automatically, when the Braille Sense OnHand is being
connected to internet. Using this feature, you can correct the time of
Braille Sense OnHand through accurate internet time server. Once the
Braille Sense OnHand is being connected to internet, you will hear the
sound. From this point, the date and time of Braille Sense OnHand
syncronize the internet server automatically.
The default is "ON", you can check or change this option following steps.
1) Press “Space-o (dots 1-3-5) to call up the menu.
2) Press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)” or press “Space-4” until show the
“Automatically synchronize with time server” and press “Enter”.
3) By pressing “Space”, you can change setting value.
4) Press “Enter” to apply.
53
3.37 Progress indicator
Progress indicator shows the progress of opening a document, copying
files or opening any webpage. This option is used to set the progress
sign. The shortcut key is “p (dots 1-2-3-4),” and you can choose one
among “Silent,” “Beep,” and “Message.” By default, it is set to
“Message.” Press “space” to toggle through three settings, and press
“enter” to save to the changed option.
If it is set to “message”, the Braille Sense OnHand will say progress in
percentage, like 10% or 20%. If it is set to “beep”, the Braille Sense
OnHand outputs beep sound during copying or opening any documents
or webpage. If it is set to “Silent”, the Braille Sense OnHand will not hear
the any sound in progress of copying or opening.
If you have changed the setting, press the “enter” key to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the
“confirm” button, and press “enter”. If you do not want to save the setting,
“tab (“space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“space-1-2”)” to the “cancel” button, and
then press “enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing
“space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “space-e (dots 1-5)”.
3.38 Bluetooth
You can decide whether the Braille Sense OnHand will turn Bluetooth on.
The shortcut key for this option is “b (dots 1-2)”. You can choose
between “On” and “Off” by pressing “Space”. By default, it is set to “Off”.
You can toggle it on and off by pressing “Backspace-3-4-5-6” while you
are using another program in the Braille Sense OnHand without having
to call up the “Global options”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
54
For your reference, in order to use Bluetooth function of the Braille
Sense OnHand, please turn it on. And please turn it off while you are not
using the Bluetooth function to save battery power.
3.39 Wireless LAN
You can decide whether the Braille Sense OnHand will turn Wireless
LAN on. The shortcut key for this option is “w (dots 2-4-5-6)”. You can
choose between “On” and “Off” by pressing “Space”. By default, it is set
to “Off”. You can toggle it on and off by pressing “Backspace-1-4-5-6”
while you are using another program in the Braille Sense OnHand
without having to call up the “Global options”.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting by
pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
For your reference, in order to use wireless LAN function of the Braille
Sense OnHand, please turn it on. And please turn it off when you are not
using the wireless LAN to save battery power.
3.40 Mass-storage device mode
You can choose whether the Braille Sense OnHand will be used as a
mass-storage device mode or not when the Braille Sense OnHand is
connected to the personal computer (PC) via USB. The shortcut key
for this option is “d (dots 1-4-5)” with the default set to “On”. The “Space”
toggles off/on. If you keep default setting, PC recognizes the Braille
Sense OnHand as the mass-storage device mode automatically when
connecting the Braille Sense OnHand to PC.
If you select “Off”, PC doesn’t recognizes the Braille Sense OnHand. In
this case, if you want to connect the PC to the Braille Sense OnHand,
55
you need to install and execute the Active Sync program in the PC. You
can download the Active Sync program from the Microsoft website for
free.
If you have changed the setting, press the “Enter” to save the setting.
You can also “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you do not want to save the
setting, “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to the “Cancel”
button, and then press “Enter”. You can also cancel saving the setting
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
56
4. File Manager
4.1 Overview
The functions and structures of the “File manager” on the Braille Sense
OnHand are very similar to the “file manager” on a personal computer.
In order to run the “file manager”, press “f (dots 1-2-4)” or press “Enter”
when you are on “file manager” in the “program” menu.
The “File manager” includes an “address window” and a “file list”.
When you open the “file manager”, the disk name will appear. The
default disk name is “flashdisk”. You can use the up and down arrows
(“Space-1” or “Space-4”) or the scroll buttons to explore additional disks.
Press “Enter” on the disk you want to open. The Braille Sense OnHand
will show you the list of the files or folders on the disk you have opened.
When you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” on the
“file list”, you will enter into an “address window”. The “file list” and
“address window” will be explained in more detail in section 4.2 and
section 4.3 in this user manual.
For your convenience, the “File manager” provides you with menus and
“hot keys”. The menus will appear when you press “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2”. Section 4.4 will provide a more detailed explanation of the
hot keys that you can use.
It is possible to format the flashdisk, which will erase everything on the
flashdisk. Be extremely cautious when executing this command. If
you execute this command, you will loose all of your data. You will
NOT be able to get this data back once the command has been
executed. To format the flashdisk, press “Space-1-2-3”. While holding
down “Space-1-2-3”, quickly press and release the reset button.
Continue pressing “Space-1-2-3” until you hear the flashdisk formatting.
4.1.1 Navigating the File List
57
There are two kinds of lists that you will see when using the Braille
Sense OnHand. The lists are: “file list” and the “menu list”. When
you reach the end of the “menu list”, the Braille Sense OnHand will
automatically bring you back to the top of the list when you press
“Space-4”. However, when you reach the end of a “file list”, the Braille
Sense OnHand will remain at the end of the “file list”, even if you press
“Space-4”. The following is a list of the navigation keys;
1. Move to previous item: Up arrow key(Space-1) or up scroll button
2. Move to next item: Down arrow key(Space-4) or down scroll button
3. Move to the beginning of a list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)
4. Move to the end of a list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)
The following keystrokes are valid only when you are on a “file list”.
1. Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Space-5-6
2. Move between file list and address window: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) /
Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
3. Enter into a selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
4. Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
5. Fast move to the top level disk: Space-1-2-5-6
6. Move to the previous 18-item group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-
F2)
7. Move to the next 18-item group: Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4)
8. Find and move to the file or folder in the file list by pressing the first
character of the folder or file names. You must use ASCII characters.
4.1.2 Item (Folder or File) Selection Key
1. Select item by item (“Space”): Select one or more item(s) while
moving in a list. “*” is displayed in front of the selected item.
Pressing “Space” again on the selected file that has “*” displayed by it
will cancel the selection.
2. Continuous selection (“Enter-b (dots 1-2)”): This will select all of the
items from the point where this command is executed to the item
58
where the cursor is moved to. “*” will appear in front of the selected
items.
3. Select all (“Enter-a (dot 1)”): This selects all the items including files
and folders in the current path. You can use navigation keys to
move around the selected items to make sure they are selected.
You can cancel selections or reselect canceled items by pressing the
“Space” on the item. When the “Select All” command is given, the
Braille Sense OnHand will say the number of selected files, and will
display “*” in front of the selected files on the Braille display.
4.1.3 Cancel / Exit Key
Cancel (“Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “F4”): This command will cancel a
function, just like the “esc” key cancels functions on a personal computer.
Exit (“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”): This will cancel or stop a selected
function or program. This is similar to the way “alt-F4” closes a
program on a personal computer.
4.2 Using File Manager Features in the File List
When you open the “File manager”, you will see the list of disks that you
can access. You can choose a disk from the list, and then press
“Enter” to get into the selected disk. The Braille Sense OnHand will
show you the list of folders and files on that disk. The items within the
quotation marks are the folders, and the items without quotation marks
are the files. The items on the list will be followed by numbers, such as
1/5 or 2/5. The numbers after the names of the items indicate where an
item is on the list, and how many items are on the list. For example,
“database 1/5”, means that this is the first folder on a list that has five
items.
4.2.1 Selecting Disks
When you open the “File manager”, the first item on the list is “flashdisk”.
If you inserted the SD card in SD card slot, SD card will be listed on this
59
list. Any of the disks can be selected by using the up and down arrows
(“Space-1 or Space-4”). You can also use the scroll buttons to choose
one of the disks. After selecting the disk you want, press “Enter” to
open the disk you have selected. For more information on the name of
the disks, refer to section 2.5.
4.2.2 Getting in and Out of a Folder (Opening/Closing a Folder)
1. There are several ways to open a folder. You can utilize a menu to
get into a specific folder.
1) You can call up a menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”. You will have to choose the menu item called “Open” from
the list and press “Enter” to get into a selected folder.
2) Without calling the “menu”, you can also press “Enter-o (dots 1-3-
5)” to open a desired folder.
3) Another way to open a selected folder is by just pressing “Enter”
on the folder that is selected.
2. To close the current folder, you can use the “Backspace” key. Then,
you will be at the next upper level folder list.
4.2.3 Opening a File
You can open a file by pressing “Enter” on the item that is displayed.
You can also use “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” to open a file or folder. The
Braille Sense OnHand will load the appropriate application or program to
open the file you have chosen.
Another way of opening a file is using the menu. You can press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”. Then, press the
letter “o (dots 1-3-5)”, or you can press “Enter” on the item named
“Open”.
The file formats that are supported by the Braille Sense OnHand are as
follows:
60
1. Hbl, brl, txt, pwd, brf, rtf, doc and docx files are supported by the word
processor on the Braille Sense OnHand.
2. Url, and html files are supported by the Web browser on the Braille
Sense OnHand.
3. aac, asf, asx, audible files(aa, aax), m3u, m4a, mp2, mp3, mp4, ogg,
pls, wav, wax, wma, wmv, flac and midi files are supported by the
media player on the Braille Sense OnHand.
4. Daisy files are supported by the Daisy player on Braille Sense
OnHand.
If you press “Enter” on a file type other than those mentioned above, the
“Open With” dialog box appears, because the file type is not associated
with a program. Also, you can bring up the “Open With” dialog box
through the menu. By using the “Open With” menu item, you can open
the currently selected file with a program other than the program
originally associated with it. First, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to bring up the menu, press “Space-4” repeatedly until you reach “Open
With”, and then press “Enter”. You can also open the dialog box by
pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)” in the file list, or by pressing “e (dots 1-5)”
in the menu.
This dialog box consists of the “Open With” list, the “adopt” list, a
“Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move between these
elements by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
Within the list, you can select the next item by pressing “Space-4”, and
the previous item by pressing “Space-1”.
As soon as the dialog box opens, “Open with: Word processor” will be
displayed. In this list, you can select a program, which would be the
word processor, media player, or web browser. Pressing “Space-4” will
select the next program, and “Space-1” will select the previous program.
Once you have selected the program to open the file type with, press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “adopt” list. If you have selected the
word processor, pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” will take you to an
additional list called “Open mode”. Using this list, you can specify
whether the file will be opened as a Braille file or a text file. Press
61
“Space-4” or “Space-1” to select one of the two file types, and then press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Apply to” radio button. In this radio
button, you can specify whether only the currently selected file or all of
the files with the same file extension as the currently selected file will be
opened with the specified program. If you have set one of the two,
press “Enter” or “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and
then press “Enter” to apply what you have just set. If you have
specified a program that does not support the file type, nothing will be
displayed or played after the program has started.
In the “File manager”, if you activate the “Open With” menu after
focusing on folders that have Daisy or media files, you will see the
associated program, Daisy or media player. If you activate the “Open
With” menu, and encounter a folder that does not have the Daisy info file
(discinfo.html or ncc.html or *.opf), you will not be able to see the Daisy
player as an associated program. You can play all of the files after
selecting either the Daisy or media player.
4.2.4 Send To
You can use this option to copy files and folders to different disks such
as a flash disk, USB flash drive (also known as USB stick memory), SD
card. You can select files and folders by using the item selection option,
which was described in section 4.1.2. After selecting files and folders,
you can call up the “menu” with “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to choose
the “Send To” option. Then, when you press “Enter” on “Send To”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will display the list of disks that you can use to
send your files or folders to. You can choose a destination disk by
using the up and down arrow keys (“Space-1” or “Space-4”) or up and
down scroll buttons. Pressing “Enter” on the desired disk will start
copying the selected files and folders into the selected disk. Also, you
can send files and folders by pressing “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” without
calling up a menu.
4.2.5 Copy / Move
62
There are some differences between “Copy” and “Move”. “Copy”
leaves the original files and folders in their original places, while “Move”
removes original files and folders from their original places.
In the “File manager”, you can use the copy function as follows:
First, you have to select the files and folders you would like to copy.
Files and folders can be selected as explained in section 4.1.2 in this
user manual.
Second, you need to call up the “menu”, and choose “Copy” from the list
to copy selected files and folders. If you want to move files and folders,
you can choose “Cut” from the menu. When the “Copy” or “Cut”
command is executed, the Braille Sense OnHand will return to the file
list.
Third, you need to go into the destination folder and call up the “menu”,
and choose “Paste”. Press “Enter” on “Paste”, and your selected files
and folders will be copied or moved. If the destination folder is the
same folder where the selected files are, the Braille Sense OnHand will
attach “Copy1-” to your original file names for copied files. If the same
files are copied into the same folder once again, the Braille Sense
OnHand will attach “Copy2-” to the original file names for the second
copied files.
If your destination folder has the same name as the file you are copying,
the Braille Sense OnHand will say “File xxx already exists. Overwrite?
Yes”. Press “Enter” if you want to replace the file. However, if you do
not want to overwrite the file, select “No”, and press “Enter”. When “No”
is selected, the “Paste” function will be canceled.
Example: Copying “sample.txt” from the root folder to the download
folder.
1. Select “sample.txt” from the root folder by using the navigation keys
“up arrow (Space-1)” or “down arrow (Space-4)”.
63
2. Call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and choose
“Copy”. Then, press “Enter”. The Braille Sense OnHand will return
to the file list in the root folder.
3. Move to the download folder, and press “Enter”. Call up the “menu”
again to choose “Paste”. Press “Enter” on “Paste”, or press “v (dots
1-2-3-6)” after calling up the menu to complete the file copy function.
You can also use “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to do the same thing.
4.2.6 Delete Files or Folders
To delete files or folders, go to the folders or files you want to delete,
and then select them, as explained in section 4.1.2. Call up the “menu”
by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to choose the “Delete”
function. Press “Enter” on “Delete” to complete the deletion of the
selected files and folders. You can also press the letter “d (dots 1-4-5)”
after calling up the menu to have the same result as above. You can
delete selected files or folders even without calling the menu by using
hot keys. “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” and “Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” are the
hotkeys assigned to perform the delete function. However, “Space-d
(dots 1-4-5)” can be used with in the programs on the Braille Sense
OnHand. “Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” can only be used in the “File manager”.
When you delete only one file or one folder, it is not necessary to use
the select function. Instead, just use the navigation keys to go to the
file or folder you want to delete, and then you can use the delete function
from the “File manager”.
4.2.7 Rename
You can change the name of a file or folder by using this function. To
change the name of a file or folder, move to the file or folder you desire
to rename. Section 4.1.1 describes the navigation method for using the
file list. Call up the “menu” by using “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to
choose “Rename” from the menu list. Press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” after
calling up the menu to activate the rename function quickly. Otherwise,
you can use the down arrow (“Space-4”) until you reach “Rename” on
the list. Press “Enter” on this menu. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand
64
will ask for a new name. On the Braille display, “New file( or folder)
name: (current file name or folder name)” will appear. You must type in
a new file name and folder name in ASCII characters. And if you type
the file extension, you can change the file extension. Pressing “Enter”
after entering a new file name will complete the process of changing a
file or folder name. You cannot use the following characters in a file
name or folder: “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
4.2.8 New Document
You can create a new document with this option. There are several
ways to access this function. You can utilize the menu by pressing
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and you can use the down arrow (“Space-4”)
until you reach “New Document”. Another way to use this function is by
pressing “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” after calling up the menu. The hot key for
this option in the “File manager” is “Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)”. When the
new document function is activated, the Braille Sense OnHand will
display “File type: text (txt)”. You can create two types of documents,
which are “text file” and “Braille file”. When the Braille Sense OnHand
displays “File type: text (txt)”, you can use the down arrow (“Space-4”) to
select the “Braille (brl)” file format. When you press “Enter” on either
“text (txt)” or “Braille (brl)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will display “New
document name: New Document0.txt” or “New Document0.brl”. “New
Document0.xxx” is the default file name based upon the file type you
have chosen. The number after the new document will increase by one
whenever you create a new document. You can also type in the
document name you prefer. Then, the new document you named will
be created. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *” characters cannot be used when creating a
file name.
4.2.9 New Folder
You can create a new sub-folder under the current folder by using this
option. You need to call up the “menu” in the “File manager” by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and select “New Folder” from the menu
list by using the down arrow (“Space-4”). Press “Enter” on “New
65
Folder” to activate this function. The Braille Sense OnHand will ask,
“New folder name:”, and wait for your response. Enter your preferable
new folder name in ASCII, and press “Enter”. Finally, your new folder
has been created. You can still use the letter “f (dots 1-2-4)” after
calling up the menu to invoke the new folder option. “Enter-f (dots 1-2-
4)” is the hotkey that you use to access this feature quickly without going
through the menu. When creating a new folder name, you cannot use
the following characters: “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
4.2.10 File Conversion
The “File conversion” on the Braille Sense OnHand is similar to the
“Save As” item in the word processor. This feature converts files to
different file formats. The Braille Sense OnHand file conversion feature
will support the following file formats: “Sense Word (hbl)”, “Text (txt)”,
and “Braille (brl)”.
The Braille Sense OnHand can convert one or more files at the same
time to the file format you prefer. Select files using the file selection
method (method described in section 4.1.2). After selecting the files
you want to convert, call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)”. Move down to the “File Conversion”, and press “Enter”. The
Braille Sense OnHand will prompt you to choose the preferred file format.
Use the up and down arrows (“Space-1” or “Space-4”) to select the
desired file format. When you press “Enter” on the file format you want,
the Braille Sense OnHand will start converting files to the file format you
have chosen. The Braille Sense OnHand will keep the original file
names for the files you have converted, except for the file name
extension. The Braille Sense OnHand will change your file extension to
the extension that you have selected. If there is a file with the same file
name and format already, “date” and “time” will be added to the file
name. You can always use the letter “t (dots 2-3-4-5)” after calling up
the menu to invoke the file conversion feature. Also, “Enter-t (dots 2-3-
4-5)” is the hot key that activates this feature without calling up the menu.
66
4.2.11 Select All
This feature selects all the files and folders in the current path. You can
use this feature through the menu, or by using a shortcut key. Press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”. Press the down
arrow (“Space-4”) to go to “Select All”. Press “Enter” to execute the
“Select All” function. You can use the letter “a (dot 1)” after calling up
the menu to use this feature. “Enter-a (dot 1)” is the hot key to select
all of the files and folders in the current path. When “Select All” is
activated, the Braille Sense OnHand will say, “x objects selected”. The
Braille Sense OnHand will return to the file list in the current path after
this brief announcement. You will see “*” in front of each file name you
have selected. You can always cancel your selections by pressing
“Space” after moving to the file you want to cancel. This feature is a
convenient way of copying, cutting, and deleting multiple files.
4.2.12 Search for File
“Search For File” is to find out files of the current or other disk. You can
press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the “menu” and move to “Search
For File”, and press “Enter” or “b”. Or, you can press “Space-f (dot 1-2-
4)” without calling the menu. Then, you can see dialog box for file
search.
The dialog box for file search consists of “edit window for file name to
search”, “combo box to select a disk”, “check box to searching sub-
folder”, “search button”, “Cancel button” and “list to be searched file” and
you can use “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to move to
each control.
When you perform file search, you will hear “File for find:” This edit
window is “edit window for file name to search”. You need to input
whole or part of the file name and press “Enter”. Then, it will search all
files which contains the word which you inputted in the current disk. After
the file search, it is located in “list to be searched file” automatically.
67
You can press up and down arrow keys (“Space-1” and “Space-4”) to
move to each file in “list to be searched file”. If you press “Enter” on a
file, it moves to the path where a file is stored and dialog box for file
search will be closed. You can open the file by pressing “Enter” on the
file name once again.
If you want to search a file in another disk, not in current disk, you need
to input file name and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to “combo box
to target disk”. Then, you can press up and down arrow keys (“Space-1”
and “Space-4”) to move to a disk. If you press “Enter” on a disk or
“Search button”, it will start to search a file in a disk. In “combo box to
target disk”, you can see the disk list which is linked with Braille Sense
OnHand now. If there are many files in a disk, it can take some time to
search a file and you can see a message of “searching”.
If you want to search in a root of a disk excluding sub-folders, then press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “check box to searching sub-folder”,
press “Space” to cancel the selection in the check box and press “Enter”.
The default set-up is to include sub-folders when you search in a disk.
4.2.13 Sort Files By
This option is used to specify the order of how files and folders will be
displayed within the file list. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to
bring up the menu. Then, press “Space-4” repeatedly until you reach
“Sort Files By”, and then press “Enter”. Also, you can access this
feature by pressing “Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” in the file list, or by pressing
“g (dots 1-2-4-5)” in the menu. Then, you can specify in what order the
files and folders in the file list will be sorted. Files and folders can be
sorted according to the following: “Name”, “Size”, “Extension”, and
“Date and Time”. You can move between these items by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1”. If you press “Enter” after selecting the sorting
criterion, files and folders will be displayed in the specified order. If you
select “Name” or “Extension”, the list will be sorted in ascending order,
and if you select “Size” or “Date and Time”, the list will be sorted in
descending order. By default, files and folders in the file list will be
68
sorted by “Name”. Once you have chosen how you want your file and
folder lists sorted, the option will be kept even after the “File manager” is
closed, so that files and folders can be sorted in the same order when
the “File manager” is opened again later.
4.2.14 Set File Info
This item is used to set what kind of information will be displayed in the
file list. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”. Then, press “Space-4”
repeatedly until you reach “Set File Info”, and then press “Enter”. You
can also access this feature by pressing “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” in the file
list or press “l (dots 1-2-3)” when you are in the menu. Then, you can
select the information to be displayed in a list containing “Name”, “Name,
Size”, and “Name, Size, Date and Time”. You can move between these
items by pressing “Space-4 or “Space-1”. If you press “Enter” after
selecting the information to be displayed, the file list will be updated, and
show all the information you specified. By default, only names are
displayed in the “file list”. If you have selected “Name, Size”, the name
and size of files will be displayed. But, for folders, size will not be
displayed. If you have set the “Set File Info” option, it will be kept even
after closing the “File manager”, and the same information will be
displayed when the “File manager” is started again.
4.2.15 Display Only Files of Type
This is used to specify what type of files will be displayed in the file list.
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the menu. Then, press
“Space-4” repeatedly until you reach “Display Only Files Of Type”, and
press “Enter”. You can also access this feature by pressing “Enter-w
(dots 2-4-5-6)” in the file list, or press “w” in the menu. Then, you can
select one of the following items: “All Files”, “Sense Word Files”, “MS
Word Files”, “Text Files”, “Braille Files”, “HTML Files”, “URL Files”,
“Media Files”, and “Wave Files”. You can move between these items
by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”. If you press “Enter” after selecting
the file type you want, only the files of the specified type will be
displayed in the file list. Folders will be displayed for whatever type you
69
have specified. By default, all files are displayed in the file list. This
option setting is not kept after closing the “File manager”, so all the files
will be displayed after starting the “File manager” again.
4.2.16 Zip
With this item you can compress files and folders into a zip file.
Compressing a file makes the total file size smaller, which can make it
easier to email, or allow you to save space on a storage device or disk.
To activate the “Zip” function, use the following steps:
1. Select the files or folders you want to compress in the “file list” by
using “Space” or “Enter-b (dots 1-2)”.
2. Open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press
“Enter” on “Zip”. Or, while you are in the menu, press “z (dots 1-3-5-
6)”. You can also activate this function without calling up the menu
by pressing “Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
3. Then, “Zip filename: (default filename.zip)” will appear. “Default
filename” is the file name that will be used for the compressed file if
you try to compress only one file or folder. If you try to compress
several files or folders, the default name is the folder name that
contains the files and folders.
4. If you press “Enter” (or press “Enter” on “Confirm” by pressing “tab
(“Space-4-5”)”), the zip file will be created in the current path. If you
want to change the name of the zip file, you can modify the default by
using the cursor keys or type in a new name. If you want to cancel,
press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. Or, move to
“Cancel” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and then press “Enter” on
“Cancel”.
4.2.17 Unzip
The “Unzip” function will allow you to unzip (or decompress) a zip file,
regardless of whether it was made in Braille Sense OnHand or a PC.
To activate the “Unzip” function, use the following steps:
70
1. After selecting a zip file, open the menu with “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2”, and press “Enter” on “Unzip”. Or, press “u (dots 1-3-6)” in
the menu. You can also activate this function without opening up the
menu by pressing “Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” after selecting a zip file.
2. Then, “Unzip to folder name: (default folder name)” will appear. The
default folder name is the compressed file name. For example, if
you unzip a file called “test.zip”, you will see “unzip folder name: test”.
3. Then, press “Enter”, or move to “Confirm” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-
5”)”, and then press “Enter” on “Confirm”. Then, the Braille Sense
OnHand will unzip the files to the default folder. If you want to
change the default folder name, you can modify the default folder
name by using the cursor keys and editing the folder name. Or, you
can type in a new name. If you want to cancel, press “Space-e (dots
1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. You can also move to the “Cancel”
button by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Cancel”.
4.2.18 Information
The Braille Sense OnHand can provide information about files and
folders. The information feature in the “File manager” provides you with
information about the file type, file size, the date and time of the file or
folder’s creation, and file attribute. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to call up the “menu”. Press the down arrow (“Space-4”) until you reach
“Information”. Press “Enter” to activate the “Information” feature. Use
the letter “I (dots 2-4)” to call up the “Information” feature after opening
up the “menu”. “Enter-i (dots 2-4)” is the hot key for this option. You
can use this hot key without going through the menu. The Braille
Sense OnHand will display the information about a file or folder in the
following order: file type, file size, creation date and time, and attribute.
You can review this information by pressing the “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
You can also press “Space-i (dots 2-4)”, while you are in the “program”
menu in the Braille Sense OnHand, to hear how much space is available
on the flashdisk.
1. File type: This will give you the file type information, such as “brl file”,
71
“doc file”, and “txt file”. When a folder is selected, it will give you the
information indicating that this is a folder containing x number of files
and folders.
2. File size: This will show you the size of the selected file or folder.
When multiple files or folders are selected, this will give you the total
size of the selected files and folders.
3. Date and time: This will show you the time and date when the folder
and file was created or modified.
4. Attribute: This will show you whether the file is write protected or not.
You can change this attribute by using the up and down arrows
(“Space-1” or “Space-4”) or “space. When multiple files or folder are
selected, you won't be able to see this attribute.
5. Confirm: In order to change the attribute, press “Enter” when
“Confirm” is displayed.
6. Cancel: In order to cancel the change, press “Enter” while “Cancel”
is displayed.
4.3 Using the Address Window
This window provides you with the ability to type in the file name you
want to open. Also, this window provides you with the opportunity for
you to type in the path name you want to go to. This window contains
the history list you can use for opening a file or for moving to a directory.
The history list contains file names and directory paths you have used
recently.
4.3.1 Editing
When you are in a file or folder list, you can press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to
get into the address window. The Braille Sense OnHand will show you
the current path including the current disk name, such as
“flashdisk/download/”. When you edit the path, you need to use the
cursor routing keys to move the cursor to the place where you can type
in the text. The cursor stays at the end of the path name when you first
go into the address window.
72
The address window is only valid when you are in a file or folder list.
When you are in the disk list, the address window is not available.
4.3.2 Type in Path / File Name
When you relocate the cursor by pressing the cursor routing key to the
place that you want to edit, the Braille Sense OnHand will insert the text
from the location where the cursor is. If you know the exact path and
file name, you can type in the path and file name to open the file with the
appropriate application. For example, if you type in
“flashdisk/download” in the address window and press “Enter”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will show you the list of the files in the download
folder. If you type “flashdisk/My Documents/sample.txt” in the address
window, and press “Enter”, the Braille Sense OnHand will first load the
word processor, and then open the file “sample.txt”. After the file opens,
you can read or edit the file, “sample.txt”.
4.3.3 Opening the History List
The history list contains paths, folders, and files that you have opened
previously. You can access this history list within the address window
by pressing the down arrow (“Space-4”). Use the up and down arrows
(“Space-1” or “Space-4”) to review the history list. You can also use the
scroll buttons to move around on this list. Simply open or visit the file
and path by pressing “Enter” on the item, which is displayed in Braille.
The files that are supported by the Braille Sense OnHand will open with
the appropriate applications (see section 4.2.3). During the navigation
of the history list, you can still type in new path names or file names that
you want to access.
4.4 Hot Keys in the “File Manager”
Hot Keys for the File Manager
1. Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
2. Open with: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
3. Zip: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
73
4. Unzip: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
5. Send: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
6. Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
7. Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
8. Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
9. Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
10. Rename: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
11. New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
12. New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
13. File conversion: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
14. Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
15. Sort files by: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
16. Set file info: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
17. Display only files of type: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
18. Search for file: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
19. Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
74
5. Word Processor
When you launch the word processor on the Braille Sense OnHand, the
Braille Sense OnHand will place you in a new document that is ready for
you to write in. The menu can be opened by pressing “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2”. Don’t worry if you can’t remember the exact shortcut
keys for each of the menu items, since you can activate various
functions of the word processor by activating the word processor menu.
The menu in the word processor consists of file, edit, go to, read, and
layout. In order to use these menus, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” in the word processor, select a menu item, and press “Enter” or
press “Backspace” and the corresponding character that represents the
menu item name. For example, in order to open the edit menu, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and move to the next
menu by pressing up and down arrows (“Space-1” and “Space-4”) to find
the “Edit” menu, and then press “Enter”. Or, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2” and press “e (dots 1-5)”, which represents the “Edit” menu.
The “Edit” menu contains a lower level menu. The “right arrow” is
displayed at the end of the menu name, and it is spoken as “pull down”
after the menu name. If a menu contains a dialog box, “..”. will be
displayed after the name of the menu, and it will be spoken as “common
dialog”.
Before going in to more detail about the word processor, it is also
important to note that while you are anywhere in a document, you can
find out your location by pressing “Space-1-5-6”. Also, if you are editing
a document, and turn the Braille Sense OnHand off while you are editing
a document, the Braille Sense OnHand will say the status when you turn
the Braille Sense OnHand back on. In the next few sections the
features of the word processor will be explained in more detail. We will
also explain the functions of each of the menu items available in the
word processor.
75
5.1 File Menu
The “File” menu contains the menus that will allow you to create new
documents, open documents that were saved to a disk, save any
documents that were edited, and print in Braille. It also contains
various environment setting menus. In order to select the file menu,
press the “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and press “f (dots 1-2-4)”. Or, press
“Enter” on “File”.
5.1.1 New
The new command creates a new document that can be edited. By
default, the name of the new document is “noname.brl”. The extension,
“.brl” is the extension given to documents that are created in Braille on
the Braille Sense OnHand. It is the same file name that is named
automatically when the word processor opens. In order to create a new
document, select “New” on the “File” menu. Or, press “Enter-n (dots 1-
3-4-5)”. If “New” is executed while editing another document, “Sense
Document (s)” is displayed first. If you press “Space-4” repeatedly,
“Braille Document (b)” and “Text Document (t)” will appear. Select the
document type that you want, and then press “Enter”.
“New” means that users can create a new document after closing the
document that is currently being edited. Closing the document that is
currently being edited means that the document is erased from the
temporary memory. If a new document is executed without saving the
document that is currently being edited, the Braille Sense OnHand asks
whether it should save the current document, so that changes to the
document will not be lost. When “Save: Yes” is displayed, users can
select “Yes” in order to save the current document or select “No” in order
not to save the changes. If you select “Cancel” by pressing “Space”
once more, the word processor will cancel the new document, and return
to the current document.
76
Note that you can change the “Default document type”, in the “Global
options”. By changing the “Default document type”, you can choose to
have your default document type as text, sense, or Braille.
5.1.2 Open
The open command opens a document that has already been saved on
to a disk. Select “Open” on the “File” menu, or press “Enter-o (dots 1-3-
5)”. You can access the “File” menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4”), or by pressing “F2”. Then, a dialog box pops up, so that you can
open a file. The “Open dialog box” is a tool that helps you find
documents that you want to edit and read. It consists of the “file list”
(which shows the list of files or folders), “File name” (to type in a file
name directly), “Type” (which changes the file format when opening a
document), a “Confirm” button (for confirming the selection), and a
“Cancel” button (for canceling the selection). In order to move between
these controls, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. If
the “Open dialog box” is executed, “File name:” is displayed first. If
“File name:” is displayed, then type in a file name that you want to open,
and press “Enter”. The file name should be typed in ASCII Braille.
The Braille Sense OnHand will look for that file in the “/flashdisk/My
Documents” folder. If there are files that you used recently, you can
scroll through them by pressing “Space-4”. The file names that were
opened recently are displayed one by one by pressing “Space-4”. If the
file that you want to open is selected press “Enter” to open it. In order
to move to the previous file name in the list, press “Space-1”. In order
to open a file with a different file format, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to
move to the file format selection, and then press the up arrow (“Space-
1”) or down arrow (“Space-4”) to select a desired file format. You can
find and open a desired file from the file list without typing in the file
name directly in the “File name:” box. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” several
times to move to the “file list”, and then select a desired file. You can
also move to the “file list” by pressing “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” when you
are at the “File name:” dialog box. The files in the “file list” have the file
format that was selected in “file type”.
77
You can select a file that you want by using the up and down scroll
buttons, and you can open the file by pressing “Enter”. If you select a
folder and press “Enter”, you will see the list of files in that folder. If you
want to move to the upper folder or to other folders, you can go to
wherever you want by using scrolling keys, just like in the “File manager”
in chapter 4.
If you want to access a file that is on a compact flash card, or USB
memory stick, you can access the file in the “Open” dialog box by first
moving to the “file list” by pressing “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” or “Space-
F3”. Then, press “Backspace” until you hear the USB stick memory or
the compact flash card. Then, press “Enter” to open the memory.
The Braille Sense OnHand will choose the Braille mode depending upon
the file type. For example, if you press “Enter” to select a file that has
the extensions hbl or brl, or if you type in a file name with those
extensions and press “Enter”, the Braille Sense OnHand will open the
selected file in Grade 2 Braille. You will not be able to change the
Braille mode in these documents. If you press “Enter” to select a file
that has the extensions of txt or doc, it will open the file in what is
currently set in “View/Input grade” of “Global option”. After the file
opens, you can switch the Braille mode, as was explained in section
3.4.
In the word processor of the Braille Sense OnHand, it is possible to open
and work simultaneously with up to 10 files at one time. If you already
have one document open, and you try to open another document, the
Braille Sense OnHand will ask you if you want to save changes to the
document that is already open. Then, you can save the file (see
section 5.1.3 for a detailed explanation). Once you have completed
saving the document, an open dialog box will appear. However, you
will still have the two files open. It only seems that you closed one
without saving it. With the new document open, if you want to go to the
previous document, you can press “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. If you want
to go back to the other document again, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
78
5.1.3 Save
The save command will save a document to a disk drive. If you want to
use this option, you can press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the
“File” menu and execute the “Save” command by pressing “Enter” on it,
or you can press “s (dots 2-3-4)”. Otherwise, you can press “Enter-s
(dots 2-3-4)” while editing a document.
If you created a new document by activating the word processor or by
pressing enter on “New” in the menu; if you execute “Save”, the “Save
as dialog box” will open. You can refer to section 5.1.4 that explains
how to use the “Save as dialog box”.
If you execute “Save” after you edit a document that was opened using
the “Open” function, the Braille Sense OnHand will save the document
with the same file name without using a dialog box. After saving a
document, it will return to document edit status.
When you have several documents open, you can save the current open
document, by pressing “Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)”. This will close the
document, save it, and return to the previous document.
5.1.4 Save As
The “Save As” option is used to save a document as a different file
name, on another disk drive, or as a different file type. If you want to
execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and then press
“Enter” when the “File” menu is displayed. Move to “Save As” by
pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Another way is to press
“Space-s (dots 2-3-4)”, which executes the “Save As” command in the
word processor.
If you execute “Save As”, the “Save as dialog box” is displayed. This
dialog box is almost the same as the “Open” dialog box. It consists of
“file list”, “File name”, “Type” (representing the file format), a “Confirm”
button, and a “Cancel” button. If the dialog box is opened, “File name:”
79
is displayed. You can move from one tab to the other tab by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
If you execute “Save As” when you are editing a document that you
opened, the displayed file name, file format, and the folder are the same
as those of the file that you opened.
However, if you created a new document by executing the word
processor or by executing “New”, and you execute “Save” or “Save As”,
the displayed default file name is “noname.brl” and the file path is
“flashdisk/My Documents/”.
If you want to edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display,
press the cursor routing key where you want to edit the file name, and
then modify it. Or, if you want to make a new file name, type in the new
file name without pressing any of the cursor routing keys. You cannot
use the following characters in a file or folder name. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”
If you want to change the file format, move to “Type”. In “Type”, move
to the file format that you want by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
If you want to save a file with a file name that is in the file list, move to
the “file list” by pressing “shift-tab”. When “file name” is displayed,
select your desired file by navigating the file list with the same method
that you used to navigate the “File manager” that was explained in
chapter 4.
5.1.5 Close Current Document
The “Close Current Document” command allows you to close the current
document that you are working on without closing the word processor.
You can access the “Close Current Document” command by pressing
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”. Then, press “Enter” on the “File” menu.
Use the up and down arrows (“Space-1” and “Space-4”) until you find
“Close Current Document”, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can press
“q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)” in the “File” menu. You can also access this
80
function by pressing “Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)” while you are editing a
document. Please note that this function will not work if you only have
one document open. You must have at least two or more documents
open in order to execute the “Close Current Document” command.
5.1.6 Print
The “Print” command is used to print the current document in ink or
emboss it in Braille. If you want to execute this command, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press “Enter” on the “File” menu.
Then, move to “Print” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or
just press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. While editing a document, the hot key for
printing is “Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. There are two lower level menus
for the “Print” menu. One is for printing with an ink printer, and the
other is for embossing in Braille. Remember that you can move
between the menu items by using “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
1. Embossing in Braille
Open the document that you want to be embossed. Press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to activate the menu. Locate “print” in the “File”
menu and select “Embosser”, or press “b (dots 1-2)”. If you select
“Embosser (b)” above, the “Embosser dialog box” is opened. Here you
can type in the page number where you want the embossing to start,
and type in the end page number, where you want the embossing to
stop. The following items are in the dialog box.
1) Print method
This is the beginning page number to be embossed. The default page
number is set to 1. You can change the value of the page number, by
typing in the value that is desired. You can move to the next selection
item, which is the “End page number” by pressing “Space-4”.
2) End page number
This is the ending page number that is to be embossed. The default
value is set to 100000. It means that the document will be embossed to
the end of the document, unless the document exceeds 100000 pages.
81
In order to change the value, input the number of the ending page. You
can move to the next selection item (which is the “Number of copies”) by
pressing “Space-4”.
3) Number of copies
This option designates the number of copies to be embossed. The
default value is set to 1. You can change this number by typing in the
number that is desired. If you press “Space-4” or “Space-1”, you will be
moved to “Print method” or “End page number”, respectively. If you
want to move to “Confirm”, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
4) Set Braille format
In this option, you can set whether or not the Braille document layout
settings specified in Braille Sense OnHand will be used when embossing.
If you set this to “Yes”, the document will be embossed using the Braille
document layout setting in Braille Sense OnHand. If you set it to “No”,
the document will be embossed in the format specified in the original
document.
5) Confirm / Cancel
In order to emboss as designated above, move to “Confirm” by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and then press “Enter”. Or, if you are canceling
embossing, move to “Cancel” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and then
press “Enter”.
If “Enter” is pressed on “Confirm”, “Print: Yes” is displayed on the Braille
display and it is also spoken. If “Enter” is pressed on “Yes”, embossing
will start. If you do not want to emboss, press “Space” to select “No”,
and then press “Enter”. If “Save as file” is selected by pressing “Space”,
then the current document is saved as a “brl” file.
If there are any problems with the Braille printer, the Braille Sense
OnHand shows an error message and returns to the open document.
2. Print Text
82
This option is used when you want to print a document on an ink printer.
To do so, open the document to be printed and press “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on the “File” menu. Move to
“Printer” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly. Then, press “Enter” when
you are on “Printer”, or just press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. The dialog box for
“Printer” is almost the same as “Embosser”. After you input the value as
in embosser dialog box, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and then “Print: Yes”
is displayed. If “Enter” is pressed, printing will start. But, if you press
“Space” to move to “No”, and press “Enter”, printing will be canceled,
and the Braille Sense OnHand will return you to the open document.
Note that the Braille Sense OnHand will work with all HP printers (level 3
PCL or higher), and with HP-compatible printers.
5.1.7 Settings
If you want to change the environment, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and press “Enter” on the “File” menu in order to enter into the “File”
menu. Move to “Settings (e)” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and
then press “Enter” on “Settings”, or just press “e (dots 1-5)”. While
editing a document, pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)” will open the “Settings”
menu.
When this menu is opened, a dialog box is displayed, which contains the
followings: the “settings” list, “Default folder” button, “Confirm” button
and a “Cancel” button. You can move between controls by pressing “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. And you can move between
setting items in list by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
The following are the setting items that can be changed:
1. View format character (Yes/No): If this option is set to “Yes”, all of
the format characters are displayed. If you want to change this
option, use “Space” to toggle. Formatted characters will be marked
with the “carriage return ($p)”, “auto return ($l)” and the “mark sign
($pl)”.
83
2. Reading unit (Line/Paragraph): It sets the moving unit when “Space-
1” or “Space-4” is pressed while you are reading a document. If this
option is set to “Line”, “Space-1” moves line by line. If this option is
set to “Paragraph”, “Space-1” moves paragraph by paragraph. In
order to toggle between “Line” and “Paragraph”, press “Space”.
3. Read only (Yes/No): If this option is set to “Yes”, the document
cannot be modified. This setting is used in order to protect the
document from any unintentional modifications. If you want to
change it to “No”, press “Space”.
Note that when you choose to select “Compressed” on the option for
reading with the Braille display, you set “Read only” to “Yes”. When
you are reading a document pressing a “cursor routing key”, will show
a word or character corresponding to the operation of the “cursor
routing key”. This will be displayed at a very left of the 18-cell Braille
display.
4. Reading mode (Original/Compressed): This option sets the reading
mode. Reading mode “Original”, will show the document in its original
format.
If the Reading mode is set to “Compressed”, The Braille Sense
OnHand will continue displaying contents even if there exists a
carriage return ($p). In order to toggle between “Original” and
“Compressed”, press “Space”.
5. Auto scroll speed (1~20): This option sets the duration of displaying
one line while you are scrolling in a document. Twenty is the fastest
scrolling speed. Pressing “Space” makes the number increase, and
“Backspace” makes the number decrease. Refer to section 4.4.5 for
more information about the auto scroll option.
6. Automatic save interval (Don’t save automatically, 10~60): This
option sets the automatic save time interval of the file that is currently
being edited. The setting time can be increased or decreased by 10
minutes if you press “Space” or “Backspace”, respectively.
7. Apply settings to all documents (Yes/No): This option selects the
settings only if they are valid for all documents. If “Yes” is selected,
the settings will be kept for all future documents, and if “No” is
selected, the settings will only affect the document that is currently
being edited. In order to toggle between “Yes” and “No”, press
84
“Space”.
If you want to change the default saving folder, you move to “Default
folder” button by press “tab (Space-4-5)” and press “Enter”. And then
you will see the “file list”. In file list, you move to folder or disk that you
want by using the moving keys and press “Enter” after press “Space”.
If you completed the settings, you move to “Confirm” button by press
“tab (“Space- 4-5”)” and press “Enter”. If so, you can change the settings
and return to the current editing document. If you do not want to save
the setting, you press “Enter” on “Cancel” button. If so, it will cancel the
setting and return to the current editing document.
5.1.8 Exit
This command will close the word processor. In order to execute this
command, select “Exit” in the file menu, or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6)”. If the document has been changed (or edited) and “Exit” is
selected without saving the document, a dialog box will ask you if you
want to save the current document. You can select “(Yes)” with the
spacebar and press “Enter” to exit the word processor.
5.2 Edit Menu
In the Braille Sense OnHand, you can edit all files regardless of what the
view mode is set to. In the “Edit” menu, you will find the following
items: “Start Selection”, “Copy”, “Cut”, “Paste”, “Delete”, “Delete Blank
Lines”, “Add To clipboard”, “Clear Clipboard”, “Select All”, “Insert From
File”, “Insert Date”, “Toggle Insert/Overwrite Mode”, and “Check
Spelling”. If you want to open the menu, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Edit”. Or, you can press “e (dots 1-
5)” in the menu. Now, let’s explore the edit menu.
5.2.1 Start Selection
85
The “Start Selection” command allows you to select a certain portion of
text that you would like to edit. When you use the “Start Selection”
command, the cursor will appear as blinking “dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8”.
The “Start Selection” command allows you to make changes to only the
text that is selected, and the changes will not affect text that has not
been selected. The “Start Selection” command is especially useful for
copying, cutting, and pasting. You can select text in a document by
placing your cursor on the location where you want to start selecting text.
If you want to use this function, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to
open the “Edit” menu, and then press “Enter” on “Start Selection”, or you
can press “b (“dots1-2”)” in the “Edit” menu to get to this option. While
editing a document, pressing “Enter-b (dots 1-2)” will activate this
command. The end point of the selected text is where you want to
place the cursor after setting the starting point. For example, if you
have typed the word, “mother” in a document, and you want to select the
word “mother”, you should place the cursor on the letter “m”, and then
place the cursor directly after the letter “r”. Then, you will have selected
the entire word.
5.2.2 Copy
After selecting text in a document, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to open the menu, and move to “Edit” by pressing “Space-4”. Press
“Enter” to open the “Edit” menu. Press “Space-4” to move to “Copy”
and then press “Enter”, or press “c (dots 1-4)” in the “Edit” menu. While
editing a document, pressing “Enter-c (dots 1-4)” will activate this
command.
When you copy the selected text, it will be copied to the clipboard. The
clipboard is the virtual space that is used for storing copied data
temporarily. However, if you decide to copy new text that you have
selected, the data in the clipboard that you copied before will be erased,
and the selected text that you have just copied will replace the
previously selected text that was on the clipboard.
86
5.2.3 Cut
To cut a selection of text, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and
press “Enter” on “Edit” to enter into the “Edit” menu. Move to “Cut” by
pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and then press “Enter” on “Cut”, or press
“x (dots 1-3-4-6)” in the “Edit” menu (which is the short cut) to cut your
selected text. While editing a document, pressing “Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-
6)” will activate the “Cut” command.
The difference between “Cut” and “Copy” is that if you execute the “Cut”
command, the text that has been selected will be moved to the clipboard
and the selection in the document will be cut. However, the “Copy”
command will copy the selection to the clipboard, and the text that has
been selected will not be erased from the document.
5.2.4 Paste
To paste selected text to the clipboard, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Edit” to enter into the “Edit” menu.
Move to “Paste” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly and then press
“Enter” on “Paste”, or press “v (dots 1-2-3-6)” in the “Edit” menu (which is
the short cut) to paste the selected text from the clipboard. While
editing a document, press “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to paste the text from
the clipboard.
5.2.5 Delete
To delete text that has been selected, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Edit” to enter into the “Edit” menu.
Move to “Delete” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and then press
“Enter” on “Delete”, or press “d (dots 1-4-5)” (as a short cut) in the “Edit”
menu to delete the selected text. When you are editing a document,
you can press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” to delete text that you have
selected.
87
5.2.6 Delete Blank Lines
In order to delete blank lines, you must select the area of the document
where you want the blank lines to be deleted from. Once this has been
done, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press “Enter” on “Edit”
to enter into the “Edit” menu. Then, use the up and down arrows
(“Space-1” or “Space-4”), and press “Enter” on “Delete Blank Lines”, or
press “l (dots 1-2-3)” as a short cut, while in the “Edit” menu. If you
want to delete an empty line while you are editing a document, press
“Backspace-e (dots 1-5)”, which is the hot key for “Delete Blank Lines”.
5.2.7 Add to Clipboard
When you have selected the text you want to select in your document,
you should press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter”
on “Edit” to enter into the “Edit” menu. Move to “Add To Clipboard” by
pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”.
While editing a document, pressing “Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” will activate
this command.
“Add To Clipboard” is almost the same as the “Copy” command.
However, with the “Copy” command, the newly selected text will replace
the text that was copied before. The “Add To Clipboard” command
however, will not erase the previously data from the clipboard when you
use this command to copy the selected text. It will keep the previously
selected text, and the new text that you have selected will also be added
to the clipboard.
5.2.8 Clear Clipboard
To clear the clipboard, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press
“Enter” on “Edit” to select the “Edit” menu. Move to “Clear Clipboard”
by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can
press “e (dots 1-5)” in the “Edit” menu as a short cut. Once you have
executed the “Clear Clipboard” command, everything on the clipboard
88
will be erased. When you are editing a document, you can press
“Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” to activate this command.
5.2.9 Select All
The “Select All” command will select all text within a document. To
activate this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then
press “Enter” on “Edit” to enter into the “Edit” menu. You can move to
“Select All” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and then press “Enter” on
“Select All”, or press “a (dot 1)” in the “Edit” menu (which is the short cut).
While editing a document, press “Enter-a (dot 1)” to activate this function.
5.2.10 Insert from File
This command will insert another file in the current document that is
being edited. If you want to run this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2”, and press “Enter” on the “Edit” menu. Move to “Insert
From File” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly. Then, press “Enter” on
“Insert From File”, or just press “I (dots 2-4)” in the “Edit” menu. While
editing a document, pressing “Enter-i (dots 2-4)” will activate this
function.
When you use this option, an insert dialog box will appear just like the
open dialogue box. Select a file that you want to insert in to the current
document, and press “Enter” on the file. Then, the selected file will be
inserted at the beginning of the paragraph with your cursor.
When you execute “Insert From File”, the text inserted from the file will
be converted to the file format of the current document. Although the
saved file that you pasted was in a different formatted document, the
same file format will be kept as the current document. For example, if
you insert “sample.txt” in “sample.hbl” and save it, the saved file will be
“sample.hbl”.
Note that if you are going to insert a Braille file in a text file, the Braille
document will be translated back into a text document. You can read it
89
in Braille, but on rare occasions you might see differences in the
translated text.
5.2.11 Insert Date
To insert the date into your document, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Edit” to enter into the “Edit” menu.
Move to “Insert Date” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly. Then, press
“Enter” on “Insert Date”, or press “w (dots 2-4-5-6)” (which is the short
cut) in the “Edit” menu. Then, you can insert the current date and time
where the cursor is located in your document. If you want to insert part
of the current date and time, you can modify what you want to change
after completing the “Insert Date” command. When you are editing a
document, you should press “Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)” to activate this
command.
5.2.12 Changing Between Insert and Overwrite Mode
There are two ways of editing documents in the Braille Sense OnHand.
The first is to insert your text, which will push back the words behind the
cursor. This is called the “Insert mode” because you are simply inserting
text. When you are in “Insert mode”, the cursor will show up “dots 7-8”.
The second is to overwrite text at the cursor location. This is called the
“Overwrite mode”. In “Overwrite mode”, the cursor will display as blinking
“dots 7-8”.
If you start the word processor (or open a document), the “Insert mode”
is the default. This will write text, while pushing back other words that
are already in the document. However, you can overwrite text while
erasing the old text by switching to “Overwrite mode”. You can switch
to the “Overwrite mode” by pressing “Space-i (dots 2-4)”. In the
“Overwrite mode”, you can change the old text into new text at the
cursor location. If you want to go back to “Insert mode”, you should
press “Space-i (dots 2-4)” again. You can also access this function via
the menu. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and go to “Edit” using
the up and down arrows (“Space-1” and “Space-4”). Next, press
90
“Enter” on “Edit” to enter in to the “Edit” menu. Then, use the scroll
buttons to scroll to find “Toggle Insert/Overwrite Mode”, or you can just
press “m (dots 1-3-4)” while you are in the “Edit” menu.
5.2.13 Check Spelling
This option is used to check spelling while you are editing a document
In order to bring up check spelling option, do the following;
1. Call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”.
2. Move to the “edit” menu by pressing “Space-4”.
3. Press “Enter” on the “edit” menu.
4. Press “Space-4” until “check spelling” is displayed. Or, press “k (dots
1-3)” in order to move to “check spelling” directly.
5. Press “Enter” on the “check spelling”. Or, you can call up the “check
spelling” menu by pressing “Enter-k (dots 1-3)” while you are editing
a document.
If “check spelling” is executed, a dialog box with the following items will
be displayed:
“Range” combo box
“Custom dictionary” dialog (c)
“Options” dialog (o)
“Begin” button (b)
“Cancel” button
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
The following is a detailed explanation for each item:
The “range” combo box is used to designate the range that is to be spell
checked.
1. Whole document: check throughout the entire current document.
2. Chapter: check the current chapter where the cursor is located.
3. Sentence: check the current sentence where the cursor is located.
91
4. From cursor to bottom: check from the cursor position to the end of
the document.
5. Current word: check just the word where the cursor is located.
6. You can move from one item to the next by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.
When you press “Enter” on the “custom dictionary” dialog, the following
items will be displayed:
1. List: it shows the words that are registered in the custom dictionary.
(Example: Braille 1/20). If there are no words registered, “no items”
will be displayed.
2. Add word (backspace-a): if “Enter” is pressed on this button, “add
word:” will be displayed. If you want to add a word, press “Enter” after
you enter the new word. Then, the new word is added and the Braille
Sense OnHand exits to the “add word” button.
3. Modify word (backspace-m): select the word to be modified on the
“list” and then press “Enter”. The “modify word:” message is
displayed. Input the correct word that will replace the selected word
and then press “Enter” in order to modify the selected word. The
“modify word” button will be displayed again after the Braille Sense
OnHand modifies the selected word.
4. Delete word (Space-d): select the word to be deleted on your “list”
and press “Enter” in order to delete the selected word.
5. Close: this command closes the dialog box.
6. You can move from one item to the next item by pressing “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
When you press “Enter” on the “option” dialog, the following items will be
displayed:
1. Always suggest recommended word: if this option is set to “on”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will suggest a word if the word that is
encountered is not in the dictionary. The default is set to “on”. If the
option is set to “off”, the Braille Sense OnHand will not recommend a
word. In order to toggle between “on” and “off”, press “space”.
92
2. Use main dictionary only: if this option is set “on”, the spell checker
will not look up any words in the “custom dictionary”. It will only use
the main dictionary. The default value is set to “off”, and you can
toggle between “on” and “off” by pressing “space”.
3. Skip whole upper-case word: if this option is set to “on”, words with
only upper-case letters will not be checked. The default is set to “on”,
and you can change it by pressing “space”.
4. Skip a word including address: if this option is set to “on”, the words
that contain an address will not be checked. The default is set to “on”,
and you can change it by pressing “space”.
5. Skip a word including number: if this option is set to “on”, the words
that include the numbers will not be checked. The default value is set
to “off”, and you can change it by pressing “space”.
6. Confirm: if you press “Enter” on “confirm”, the changes that you made
above will be saved, and the Braille Sense OnHand will exit from the
“option” dialog.
7. Cancel: if you press “Enter” on “Cancel”, the changes that you have
made above will be canceled and the Braille Sense OnHand exit from
“option” dialog.
In order to move between the items 1) through 5), press “Space-1” or
“Space-4”. But, in order to move to “Confirm” or “Cancel”, press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
If you press “Enter” on the “begin” button after you set all of the settings,
the Braille Sense OnHand will start to check spelling. If you press “Enter”
on the “Cancel” button, the “spell check” will be canceled.
Once “spell check” is executed, the following dialog box will be
displayed:
1. Window to show the text: it shows the sentence with the word to be
checked currently. The cursor will be located at the word that is to be
checked currently.
2. Change word edit box: it shows the word to be checked currently.
You can input the correct word in edit box directly.
93
3. Recommendation word list: if the word to be checked is not in the
dictionary, the Braille Sense will recommend words. You can move
from one recommended word to the next by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.
4. Skip once (s): if you press “Enter” on this button when a word is
encountered that is not in the dictionary, the word will not be modified.
You can also press the “down scroll button” in order to skip the word.
5. Skip all (i): if you press “Enter” on this button, the word that is the
same word as the currently focused word will not be modified and
skipped throughout the spell check range.
6. Add to custom dictionary (a): if you press “Enter” on this button, the
word that is currently focused is added to your “custom dictionary”.
7. Modify once (c): focus on the modified word and select the desired
word on the “recommendation word list”, and then press “Enter”.
Then, the currently focused word that is on your document will be
replaced by the recommended word.
8. Modify all (m): focus on the modified word and select the desired
word on the “recommendation word list”, and then press “Enter”. The
same words with the same spelling will be replaced by the new word
throughout the document.
9. Cancel: if you press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button, the “spell check”
will be ended.
You can move from one item to the next by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
When the spell check has completed, the Braille Sense OnHand will say
“search: 00 mismatch: 00 replace: 00”.
Also simply, you can check spelling of the current word by press
backspace-k (dots 1-3) when you enter or meet the misspelled word. If
you press backspace-k (dots 1-3), you will hear list of recommended
word. You move to word that you want by using the “Space-1” or
“Space-4”. And press “Enter”. So misspelled word will change to the
correct word.
5.3 Go to Menu
94
If you want to open the “Go To” menu in the word processor, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by pressing
“Space-4”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go To”. Or, you can press “g (dots
1-2-4-5)” in the menu. In the “Go To” menu, you will find the following
submenus: “Find”, “Find Again”, “Replace”, “Go To Location”, “Go to
Previous Page”, “Go To Next Page”, “Set Mark”, “Go to Mark”, “Go To
Previous Document”, and “Go To Next Document”.
5.3.1 Find
The find function allows you to search for text in a document. Once the
text is found you will be taken to that position in your document. To
execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move
to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter” on “Go To”. Then,
select “Find”. You will be able to navigate the “Go To” menu with
“Space-1” or “Space-4”. Otherwise, you can press “f (dots 1-2-4)” in the
“Go To” menu, which is the shortcut. While editing a document,
pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)” will activate the “Find” command. If
“Find” is executed, the dialog box is displayed. This dialog box consists
of “Text to find”, “Search direction”, “Match case”, a “Confirm” button,
and a “Cancel” button. You can move from one field to the next field by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
1. Text to find
The first field in “Find” is “Text to find”. In this window, you can type
in the text that you want to find. If you want to find the text
immediately, press “Enter”. However, if you want to set other fields
in the dialog box, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
2. Search direction
The next field is “Search direction”. The default direction is
“Forward”. If you would like to change the search direction, you
should press “Space”. Pressing “Space” will toggle between
“Forward” and “Backward”. After you type in the text to be found,
and set the searching direction, press “Enter” if you want to find the
text immediately.
3. Match case
95
The next field is “Match case”. This field display only when you
execute the “Find” command in text file. This field does not display in
Braille file. The default value is “No”. If you want to change the value,
press “Space”. Pressing “Space” will toggle between “No” and “Yes”.
4. Confirm
After you set all of the fields and want to execute “Find”, press “Enter”
on “Confirm”. You can also start finding text by pressing “Enter” on
“Text to find” or “Search direction”.
5. Cancel
In order to cancel the “Find” function, press “Enter” on “Cancel”. Or,
you can cancel the “Find” command by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-
5-6)”.
If you have executed the “Find” command as explained above and it
finds the text that you typed in, the sentence with the text is displayed on
the Braille display. If there was no text that matched what you typed in,
the cursor does not move and the Braille Sense OnHand announce the
“not found”. by the voice. This function saves the text that was typed in
last, as well as the direction, so you can use it again to search for the
next occurrence of text.
When using the find command, the current cursor position is very
important. If the cursor is located at the beginning of the document, it is
better for you to select “Forward” direction. If the cursor is located at
the end of the document, it is better to select “Backward” as the direction
used for searching.
5.3.2 Find Again
When you want to run the “Find Again” command; you can press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”. Then move to “Go To” by pressing
“Space-4”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Find Again” by
pressing “Space-4” to move to “Find Again” and press “Enter”, or press
“h (dots 1-2-5)” in the “Go To” menu. When you are editing a document,
you should press “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)” to activate this command. When
“Find Again” is executed, “Find Again” will look for the text that was used
96
in the previous “Find”. “Find again” will search in the same direction
that was used with the last “Find”. If you have not yet used the “Find”
command in the current document, and you execute “Find Again”, it will
not work. “Find again” is used to find the text that you have previously
found in the current document.
5.3.3 Replace
To execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and
move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go
To”. Move to “Replace” by pressing “Space-4” to move to “Replace (r)”,
and press “Enter”, or press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in the “Go To” menu (which
is the short cut). While editing a document, pressing “Enter-r (dots 1-2-
3-5)” will activate this function.
“Replace” also has a dialog box that consists of the following fields:
“Text to find”, “Replace with”, “Search direction”, “Match case”, “Replace”,
“Confirm” and “Cancel”. You can move between the fields by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
The following is a description of each function.
1. Text to find
You can type in the text that you want to be replaced in this field.
2. Replace with
You can type in new text that will replace the text that is found. After
you type in “Text to find” and “Replace with”, the Braille Sense
OnHand will find the text and replace it in the direction that you have
specified. If you want to change the direction, press “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” to move to the next field.
3. Search direction
The “Search direction” has the same function as the “Search
direction” explained in section 5.3.1. After you set the searching
direction, press “Enter” to start the replacement of text, or press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” to set the “Match case” or “Replace”.
4. Match case
97
This field display only when you execute the “Replace” command in
text file. This field does not display in Braille file. The default value is
“No”. If you want to change the value, press “Space”. Pressing
“Space” will toggle between “No” and “Yes”.
5. Replace
You may want to replace only one piece of text. Or, you may want
to replace all the texts that coincides with the text that you typed in
the “Text to find” field. You can set it in the “Replace” field. There
are two choices: “Once” and “All”. You can toggle between the two
choices by pressing “Space”.
6. Confirm and Cancel
Pressing “Enter” on “Confirm” will start finding and replacing text. If
there is no text that coincides with the text that was typed in, “Not
found”. is displayed, and the function is canceled. Pressing “Enter” on
“Cancel” will cancel the “Replace” function.
5.3.4 Go to Location
The “Go to Location” command moves rapidly to a specific location.
You can move to a specific page, paragraph, or line. To execute this
command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by
pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go To
Location” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. While editing
a document, press “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” to activate this function. If “Go
to Location” is executed, the word processor says, “Move to page
number:” If you type in a number here, the Braille Sense OnHand will
take you to the page number that corresponds with the number you have
just typed in. You can also type the letter “f (dots 1-2-4)” before the
number. This will tell the Braille Sense OnHand that you are looking for
a page number, and not a paragraph, or, line number. Type in the
number of the page you want to move to without the plus sign or minus
sign, and then press “Enter”. The word processor will jump from start of
the document to the specific page at once. If you want to move forward
from your current location, put the plus sign in front of the number and
letter. For example, if you want to move forward five pages, you would
type “+f5”. If you want to move backward from your current location,
98
put the minus sign in front of the number and letter. If you want to
move to the previous page, type “-f”, and if you want to move to the next
page, type “+f”. If the page number you type in is not valid, the Braille
Sense OnHand will say, “Move range error”.
You can also use this function to move to a specific paragraph. First,
select “Go To Location” in the “Go To” menu, or just press “Enter-l (dots
1-2-3)”. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will say, “Move to page
number:” Before you type in the number of the paragraph that you
want to go to, type “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, and then type the number of the
paragraph that you want to go to. By typing in the letter “p (dots 1-2-3-
4)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will know that you are looking for a
paragraph, and not a page or line. If you want to move forward from
your current location, put the plus sign in front of the number and letter.
If you want to move backward from your current location, put the minus
sign in front of the number and letter. For example, if you want to move
backward two paragraphs, you would type, “-p2”. If you want to move
to the previous paragraph, type “-p”, and if you want to move to the next
paragraph, type “+p”. If the paragraph number you type in is not valid,
the Braille Sense OnHand will say, “Move range error”.
You can also use this function to move to a specific line. First, select
“Go To Location” in the “Go To” menu, or just press “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)”.
Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will say, “Move to page number:”
Before you type in the number of the line that you want to go to, type “l
(dots 1-2-3)”, and then type the number of the line that you want to go to.
By typing in the letter “l (dots 1-2-3)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will
know that you are looking for a line, and not a page or paragraph. If
you want to move forward from your current location, put the plus sign in
front of the number and letter. If you want to move backward from your
current location, put the minus sign in front of the number and letter.
For example, if you want to move backward two lines, you would type, “-
l2”. If you want to move to the previous line, type “-l”, and if you want to
move to the next line, type “+l”. If the line number you type in is not
valid, the Braille Sense OnHand will say, “Move range error”.
99
You can also go to a specific line number on a specific page. The
Braille Sense OnHand enables you to type in this information at the
same time. To do this, press “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)”, or you can select
“Go To Location” in the “Go To” menu. Then, when the Braille Sense
OnHand says, “Move to page number:” you can type in the page number
followed by the line number. For example, to move to the 3rd line on the
20th page, you would type “20 3”, or you could type “f20 3”. When you
use the command of the “Go To Location” function, you cannot use the
“+” or “-” sign. You can only go directly to the page and line number.
5.3.5 Go to Previous Page
The “Go To Previous Page” command allows you to move to the page
that is located before the page you are currently on. To execute this
command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by
pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go To
Previous Page” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or press
“Space-1-2-6” or “F1-F2” while you are in the document. Once you
have activated the “Go To Previous Page” function, the Braille Sense
OnHand will go directly to the previous page.
5.3.6 Go to Next Page
The “Go To Next Page” command allows you to move to the page that is
located after the page you are currently on. To execute this command,
press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by pressing
“Space-4”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go To Next
Page” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can
press “Space-3-4-5” or “F3-F4” while you are in the document. Once
you have activated the “Go To Next Page” function, the Braille Sense
OnHand will go directly to the next page.
5.3.7 Set Mark
The “Set mark” command marks a position in the document that you
want to use later. To execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-
100
4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press
“Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Set mark” by pressing “Space-4”, and
then press “Enter”, or press “m (dots 1-3-4)” in the “Go To” menu, which
is the short cut. While editing a document, press “Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)”
to activate this command.
Move the cursor to the location that you want to mark, and press “Enter-
m (dots 1-3-4”). Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Mark name:”.
To name the mark, use the letters a through z. For example, if you put
down the letter “a (dot 1)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will move you to
that point in the document immediately. If you are in the document, the
Braille Sense OnHand will not show the mark sign. If you selected
“View format character” in “Settings”, which was explained in section
5.1.7, you will see the mark sign in the document. You can go to
marked text by using “Space-3” or “Space-6”, and the bookmark sign will
appear, which is “$pl (mark name)”. If you move the cursor to the mark
location in a document, you can see dots 7-8 all through the mark sign.
This means that the Braille Sense OnHand will deal with the marked text
as a chunk, but not with every character one by one.
5.3.8 Go to Mark
The “Go To Mark” command finds a mark that has already been marked.
When you want to execute this command, you can press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)”, or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”. Then,
press “Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go To Mark” by pressing “Space-4”,
and then press “Enter”, or press “j (dots 2-4-5)” in the “Go To” menu,
which is the short cut. You can jump to anywhere in a document to
marked text with by pressing “Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)”.
If you press “Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will say
“Move to mark:”. If you type in the character of the mark name that you
want to locate, the Braille Sense OnHand will move the cursor to the
marked text with dots 7-8 embossed in the first cell.
101
5.3.9 Go to Previous Document
If you have multiple documents open, you can go directly to the
document that you had opened before the document that you are
currently editing. To execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press
“Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go To Previous Document” by pressing
“Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can press “shift-tab (space -
1-2)” while you are editing a document to go to the previous document.
5.3.10 Go to Next Document
If you have multiple documents open, you can go directly to the next
document that is open. To execute this command, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”. Then,
press “Enter” on “Go To”. Move to “Go To Next Document” by pressing
“Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can press “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” while you are editing a document to go to the next document.
5.4 Read Menu
The “Read” menu reads the document in voice and in Braille when the
user has opted to use read in voice and Braille. In order to call up the
“read menu”, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “r
(dots 1-2-3-5)”. The submenus of the “Read” menu are “Read Selected
Text”, “Read Beginning Of Selected Text”, “Read From Beginning To
Cursor”, “Read From Cursor To End”, “Auto Scroll”, “Read Current Line”,
“Read Current Word”, “Read Current Character”, and “Read Status”.
5.4.1 Read Selected Text
The “Read Selected Text” command allows you to have the Braille
Sense OnHand read text that you have in a selection. To execute this
command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to the “Read”
menu by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or press “r (dots 1-
2-3-5)” to call up the “Read” menu. Press “Enter” on “Read Selected
102
Text” in the “Read” menu. While editing a document, you can press
“Backspace-b (dots 1-2)” to activate the “Read Selected Text” function.
Although you activate this function, the cursor location will not move to
the selected text. The cursor will stay where you have activated “Read
Selected Text”.
5.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text
The “Read Beginning Of Selected Text” command will allow you to hear
the first line of the selected text, without moving the cursor location. To
execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move
to the “Read” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”.
Move to “Read Beginning Of Selected Text” by pressing “Space-4”, and
then press “Enter”, or you can press “u (dots 1-3-6)” on the read menu,
which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press “Enter-
u (dots 1-3-6)” to activate this function. When you execute “Read
Beginning Of Selected Text”, the cursor will stay in the same position it
was at when you executed “Read Beginning Of Selected Text”.
5.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor
Using this function, the Braille Sense OnHand will audibly speak a
document from the beginning to the position where the cursor is located.
To execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and
move to the “Read” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”.
Move to “Read From Beginning To Cursor” by pressing “Space-4”, and
then press “Enter” or you can press “t (dots 2-3-4-5)” on the read menu,
which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press
“Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” to activate this function.
If you want to quit this function before you reach the cursor location, you
can press “Backspace-Enter”. Your cursor will stay where it was when
you started this function. That is, the cursor will not move to the
position to where you stopped the function.
103
5.4.4 Read from Cursor to End
This command will read a document from where the cursor is located to
the end of the document. While the Braille Sense OnHand is reading
the text, the cursor will stay in the same location that you were, before
you started this command. The cursor will not be moved until the
reading has been completed. Once the text has been read, the cursor
will move to the end of the document. To execute this command, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and move to the “Read” menu by pressing
“Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. You can move to “Read From Cursor
To End” by pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter”, or you can press “g
(dots 1-2-4-5)” on the “Read” menu, which is the short cut. While
editing a document, you can press “Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” to activate
this function.
If you stop this command before the end of a document, you can press
“Backspace-Enter”, which will move the cursor to where you stopped the
command.
5.4.5 Auto Scroll
The “Auto Scroll” command scrolls automatically. The speed of the
“Auto Scroll” is set in the “Settings” menu, which is located in the “File”
menu, which was explained in section 5.1.7. The auto scroll mode
does not read the document using the voice. It is only displayed on the
Braille display. It reads the document line by line automatically. To
execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move
to the “Read” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”.
Move to “Auto Scroll” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or
you can press “a (dot 1)” on the read menu, which is the short cut. You
can turn the auto scroll feature on and off by pressing the up and down
scroll buttons simultaneously. For faster scrolling, press the right
“Space-6”. For slower scrolling, press “Space-3”. If you want to read
a line again that you have already scrolled past, you can read it again by
pressing the up scroll button or “Space-1” until you can get to what you
want to read. Similarly, if you want to skip some lines that you do not
104
wish to read, you can skip them by pressing the down scroll button or
“Space-4”. You can also access this function without opening the menu
by pressing both scroll buttons at the same time when in your document.
5.4.6 Read Current Line
This function will tell you information about your current line. To execute
this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and move to the “Read”
menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Move to “Read
Current Line” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or you can
press “l (dots 1-2-3)” in the read menu, which is the short cut. While
editing a document, you can press “Space-c (dots 1-4)” to activate this
function. In order to return to the document that you are editing, press
any key.
5.4.7 Read Current Word
This function will tell you information about your current word. To
execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and move to the
“Read” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Move to “Read
Current Word” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or you can
press “w (dots 2-4-5-6)” in the read menu, which is the short cut. While
editing a document, you can press “Space-2-5” to activate this function.
In order to return to the document that you are editing, press any key.
5.4.8 Read Current Character
This function will tell you information about your current character. To
execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and move to the
“Read” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Move to “Read
Current Character” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”, or
you can press “c (dots 1-4)” in the read menu, which is the short cut.
While editing a document, you can press “Space-3-6” to activate this
function. In order to return to the document that you are editing, press
any key.
105
5.4.9 Read Status
This function will tell you information about your current file. If you
activate this function, the Braille Sense OnHand will tell you the “file
name”, “edit mode (insert or overwrite)”, and “file protection(write or read
only)”. To execute this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”,
and move to the “Read” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press
“Enter”. Move to “Read Status” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press
“Enter”, or you can press “s (dots 2-3-4)” in the read menu, which is the
short cut. While editing a document, you can press “Space-3-4” to
activate this function. In order to return to the document that you are
editing, press any key.
5.5 Layout
The “Layout” command sets the layout for printing on an ink printer or
embossing on a Braille printer. The “Layout” menu has the following
submenus: “Braille Document Layout”, “Print Document Layout”,
“Braille Paragraph Layout”, and “Print Paragraph Layout”. The changes
that are made with the “Layout” command are not displayed on the
Braille display. In order to check the layout, call up the “menu” by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and check the layout values
one by one. The changed values will be displayed within the menu.
5.5.1 Braille Document Layout
While you are editing a document, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to call up the “menu”, and select “Layout” or press “l (dots 1-2-3)”, (which
is the short cut), and then select “Braille Document Layout”. Or, you
can press “Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. “Braille Document Layout” is
used to set the width and height of the paper for embossing as well as
the following options. Whenever you change a layout setting while you
are editing a document, the setting will be valid on the rest of the
document.
106
You can navigate the menu items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and you
can move to “Confirm” or “Cancel” by pressing “tab” (“Space-4-5” or
“F3”). You can skip an item by pressing “Space-4” if you don’t want to
change the default setting.
The following are the items that can be changed:
1. Set characters per line
This sets the number of characters (Braille) per line to emboss in
Braille. The default value is set to 18. Type in the number of
characters per line, if you decide you want to change the value.
Then, you can move to the next setting by pressing “Space-4”.
2. Set lines per page
This sets the number of lines per page to be embossed. It includes
the line that the page number is printed in. For example, if it is set to
26, the content of the document will be embossed with 25 lines and
the page number is printed as the 26th line. If you want to change
the value, type in the number of lines that you want to emboss.
Then, you can move to the next setting by pressing “Space-4”.
3. Print type
This sets whether the document will be embossed on a single sided
or a double sided (both sides). The default value is set to double
side embossing. If you want to emboss using single sided
embossing, press “Space” until “Print type: Single sided” is displayed
on the Braille display. Then, the setting will be changed to single
side embossing. If you want to go back to double side printing again,
press “Space” again, and “Print type: Double sided” will be displayed.
After setting your preference, move to the next setting by pressing
“Space-4”.
4. Page numbering type
This sets the numbering type for embossing a document. The
default type is set to “Double sided”. It means that the page number
will be embossed on every page. The setting values are “Double
sided”, “Odd”, “Even”, and “None”. These settings are changed
when you press “Space”. Pressing “Backspace” will allow you to
move in reverse order. When you have selected your preference,
107
you need to press “Space-4” in order to move to the next setting.
5. Set page numbering
This sets the position of the page number when embossing. The
selections are “Upper right” and “Lower right”. The default setting is
set to “Lower right”. Press “Space” in order to change the setting.
Pressing “Backspace” will allow you to move in reverse order. After
selecting your preference, you should press “Space-4” in order to
move to the next setting.
6. Header
This is used to edit the header that will be embossed on the head of
every page. Move to “Header” and type in the text to be embossed
as the header. In order to move to the next setting, press “Space-4”.
7. Footer
This is used to edit the footer that will be embossed on the bottom of
every page. Move to “Footer” and type in the text to be embossed
as the footer. After you set every field, move to “Confirm” or
“Cancel”, and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. If you want to change a
setting, or check your settings again, press “Space-1” to move to the
previous fields.
8. Confirm / Cancel
In order to apply a setting, press “Enter” when “Confirm” is displayed.
If you do not want to change the setting, you will need to press “Enter”
when “Cancel” is displayed.
5.5.2 Print Document Layout
This option will allow you to set the layout of the document for printing on
an ink printer. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the
“menu” while you are editing a document, and select “Layout” or press “l
(dots 1-2-3)” (which is the shortcut), and then select “Print Document
Layout”. Or, press “Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”, which is the hot key for
“print document layout”. The settings in this menu are applied to all the
paragraphs in the selected document. You can navigate the menu
items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and you can move to “Confirm” or
“Cancel” by pressing “tab” (“Space-4-5” or “F3”). You can skip an item
by pressing “Space-4” if you do not want to change the default setting.
108
The following is a detailed explanation of each setting:
1. Set top margin
This sets the top margin for ink printing. The top margin is the
distance from the top of the paper to the first line of the printed
paragraph. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). If
you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number,
which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it.
2. Set bottom margin
This sets the bottom margin for ink printing. The bottom margin is
the distance from the bottom of the paper to the last line of a printed
paragraph. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). If
you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number,
which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it.
3. Set left margin
This sets the left margin for ink printing. The left margin is the
distance from the left edge of the paper to the first text that is printed.
The default value is set to 20 mm (about 0.78 inches). If you are
going to change the default setting, you can type in a number, which
will make the margin as big as you would like to have it.
4. Set right margin
This sets the right margin for ink printing. The right margin is the
distance from the right end of the printed text to the right edge of the
paper. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). If you
are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number,
which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it.
5. Set page numbering
This sets the position where the page numbers will be printed. The
page number positions are “Upper left”, “Upper middle”, “Upper right”,
“Lower left”, “Lower middle”, and “Lower right”. To change the
setting, press “Space”. Pressing “Backspace” will allow you to move
in reverse order. After selecting your preference, you should press
“Space-4” in order to move to the next setting.
6. Header
This is used to edit the header that will be printed at the top of each
109
page. Move to “Header”, and type in the text that you want to be
printed.
7. Footer
This is used to edit the footer that will be printed at the bottom of each
page. Move to “Footer”, and type in the text that you want to be
printed.
8. Distance between lines
This sets the distance between the lines that will be printed. The
default value is set to 150%. The distance can be anywhere from
100% to 300%. If you type in a value that exceeds this range, the
Braille Sense OnHand will say “Out of range. Value too large”, and
wait for you to type in another value.
9. Confirm / cancel
In order to apply a setting, press “Enter” when “Confirm” is displayed.
If you do not want to apply a setting, you will need to press “Enter”
when “Cancel” is displayed. If you press “Enter” on cancel, you will
be taken out of the menu. You must press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to get to the Confirm and Cancel buttons.
5.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout
In order to call up the “Braille Paragraph Layout”, press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” while you are editing a document. Then, press “Enter”
on “Layout”, or press “l (dots 1-2-3)” while in the “Layout” menu (which is
the short cut), and then select “Braille Paragraph Layout”. Or, you can
press “Backspace-1-2-4-6”. The changed layout will be applied only to
the selected paragraph. These settings are not applied to other
paragraphs.
You can navigate between the menu items by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”. Move to “Confirm” or “Cancel” by pressing “tab” (“Space-4-
5” or “F3”). You can skip an item by pressing “Space-4” if you do not
want to change the default setting.
In this setting, you can set the following items:
1. Indent first line
110
This indents the first line of the paragraph as designated by the
number of characters. The default value is set to 0. In order to
change this setting, type in the number of characters to be indented
on the “Indent first line” setting item. Press the down scroll button or
“Space-4” in order to move to the next setting item.
2. Indent all lines except the first line
This indents all the lines of the paragraph, except the first line of the
paragraph as designated by the number of columns. If you want to
indent all of the text, except for the first line, by typing in a number.
You can make the indent as big as you want it by changing the
number of columns, which will indent all lines, except for the first line.
Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” in order to “Confirm” and “Cancel”. If you
want to change the setting of a previous item, move to it by pressing
“Space-1”, and change it. The default is set to “0.)
3. Confirm / cancel
In order to apply changes, you need to press “Enter” when “Confirm”
is displayed. If you want to exit from a setting without changing it,
you should press “Enter” when “Cancel” is displayed. You must
press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to get to the
Confirm and Cancel buttons.
5.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout
You can set the layout of the current paragraph for printing on an ink
printer. In order to set “print paragraph layout”, press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” while you are editing a document, and select “Layout”, or
press “l (dots 1-2-3)” (which is the short cut), and select “Print Paragraph
Layout”. Or, press “Backspace-2-3-4-6”, which is the hot key for “Print
Paragraph Layout”. This setting applies only to the paragraph that you
are on when the setting is changed. This setting change does not
apply to other paragraphs. You can navigate the menu items by
pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and you can move to “Confirm” or
“Cancel” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5” or “F3”)”. You can skip an item
by pressing “Space-4” if you do not want to change the default setting.
111
The following is a detailed explanation of the settings for “Print
Paragraph Layout:”
1. Set left margin
This sets the left margin for ink printing. The default value is set to
0mm. In order to change the setting, you will need to type in the
value. Move to the next setting by pressing the down scroll button or
press “Space-4”.
2. Set right margin
This sets the right margin for ink printing. The default value is set to
0mm. In order to change the setting, you will need to type in the
value. Move to the next setting by pressing the down scroll button or
press “Space-4”.
3. Indent first line
This sets the indentation of the first line. The first line will be
indented by the value that you select, and the other lines will not be
indented. This setting is valid for the paragraphs that follow, unless
the setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. In order to
change the setting, you should type in the number of characters.
Press the down scroll button or press “Space-4” in order to move to
the next setting.
4. Indent all lines except the first line
All the lines in the paragraph, except the first line, are indented if this
is set. This setting will be valid for the following paragraphs, unless
the setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. In order to
change the setting, you should type in the number of characters.
5. Alignment
This sets the alignment type. The default type is set to “Left justified”.
The other options are “Centered” and “Right justified”. Press
“Space” in order to change the setting.
6. Set style
When printing a document through an ink printer, the style of each
paragraph can be set to a desired style. Style includes “font type”,
“font size”, and “text shape for text”. You can select “Text”, “Title”,
“Sub title”, “Abstract 1”, and “Abstract 2” by pressing “Space” or
“Backspace”. The default fonts for each style are listed below.
112
Text: Times New Roman, Font size 11
Abstract1: Times New Roman, Font size 11, Boldface
Abstract2: Times New Roman, Font size 14, Boldface
Sub title: Courier New, Font size 16, Italic, Boldface, Center-
aligned
Title: Times New Roman, Font size 20, Boldface, Center-
aligned
7. Confirm / cancel
In order to apply a setting, press “Enter” on “Confirm”. In order to
cancel a setting, and move to “edit mode”, press “Enter” on “Cancel”.
You must press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to get
to the confirm and cancel buttons.
5.6 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting
While reading a document, you can use the following commands to read
Braille or hear speech. You can move character by character, word by
word, or paragraph by paragraph.
The previous character: Space-3
The next character: Space-6
The previous word: Space-2
The next word: Space-5
The beginning of line: Space-1-3
The end of line: Space-4-6
The previous line: Space-1
The next line: Space-4
The previous sentence: Space-2-3-5
The next sentence: Space-2-5-6
The next paragraph: “Space-5-6” or “Enter-down scroll button”
The previous paragraph: “Space-2-3” or “Backspace-up scroll
button”
The top of document: Control-home (“Space-1-2-3” or “F1-F2-up
scroll button”)
The bottom of document: Control-end (“Space-4-5-6” or “F3-F4-
down scroll button”)
113
In addition, if you use the following commands, you can read the part of
a document where the cursor is. For example, if you activate the read
the current paragraph function, you will hear the entire paragraph where
the cursor is located.
Read the current paragraph: “Space-2-3-5-6”
Read the current sentence: Space-1-4-5-6
Read the current line: “Space-1-4”
Read the current word: “Space-2-5”
Read the current character: “Space-3-6”
If you want to delete a part where the cursor is, you can use the
following keys. For example, if you activate the delete the current
paragraph function, you can delete the entire paragraph where the
cursor is located.
Delete the current paragraph: “Backspace-2-3-5-6”
Delete the current line: “Backspace-1-4”
Delete the current word: “Backspace-2-5”
Delete the current character: “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”
5.7 Cursor Location
While reading a document, you can check the cursor location. To do
this, press “Space-1-5-6”. You will then hear, “Page: xx, Line: xx,
column: xx, xx%, Paragraph: xx/yy, Line: xx/yy”.
5.8 Hot keys in the word processor:
1. File menu
New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Close current document: Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
114
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Settings: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
2. Edit menu
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Delete blank lines: Backspace-e (dots 1-5)
Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Clear clipboard: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Select All: Enter-a (dot 1)
Insert from file: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Insert date: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Toggle insert/overwrite mode: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Check spelling: Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Check spelling of the current word: Backspace-k (dots 1-3)
3. Go to menu
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Replace: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Go to location: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to previous page: Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2
Go to next page: Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4
Set mark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Go to mark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to previous document: Space-1-2 or Space-F3
Go to next document: Space-4-5 or F3
4. Read menu
Read selected text: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Read beginning of selected text: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
115
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Space-3-4
5. Layout menu
Braille document layout: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Print document layout: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Braille paragraph layout: Backspace-1-2-4-6
Print paragraph layout: Backspace-2-3-4-6
6. Miscellaneous hot keys
Move to previous character: Space-3
Move to next character: Space-6
Move to previous word: Space-2
Move to next word: Space-5
Move to the beginning of the line: Home (Space-1-3)
Move to the end of the line: End (Space-4-6)
Move to previous line: Space-1or up scroll button
Move to next line: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to previous sentence: Space-2-3-5
Move to next sentence: Space-2-5-6
Move to previous paragraph: Space-2-3
Move to next paragraph: Space-5-6
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)
Read current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6
Read current sentence: Space-1-4-5-6
Read current line: Space-1-4
Read current word: Space-2-5
Read current character: Space-3-6
Delete current paragraph: Backspace-2-3-5-6
Delete current line: Backspace-1-4
Delete current word: Backspace-2-5
Delete current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Confirm current cursor position: Space-1-5-6
Set view format character: Space-1-4-6
116
Set reading unit: Space-2-4-6
Set read only: Space-3-4-6
Set reading mode: Space-1-2-4-6
117
6. Address Manager
6.1 What is the “Address Manager”?
The “Address manager” is a program that you can use to keep track of
your contact information and schedule information, such as names,
company addresses, home addresses, as well as other information.
“Address manager” has two main dialog boxes: “Add Address” and
“Search Address”. In the “Add Address”, dialog you can enter contact
information, such as names, company addresses, home addresses and
so on. The information that you have entered can be saved for later
use. In the “Search Address”, dialog you can look for information that is
stored in the “Address manager”. You can edit or delete information
that you find. You can also select addresses to be printed using an ink
or Braille printer.
You can also connect to a web site by pressing “Enter” on a homepage
address field if the field contains an address for a web site. In the
“program” menu, you can start “Address manager” by typing “a (dot 1)”,
or by selecting “Address manager”. Press “Space-4” or “Space-1”
repeatedly in the “program” menu until you arrive at the “Address
manager”, and then press “Enter” to open it. Before going into the details
of how to use the “Address manager”, let's discuss the structure of
address data.
The address data that is stored in “Address manager” consists of a set
of records. A “record” is a collection of contact information about one
person or company. Each record contains 23 fields. These 23 fields
are: “Last name”, “First name”, “Company name”, “Title”, “Mobile
phone”, “Home phone”, “Home fax”, “Company phone”, “Company fax”,
“Home street address”, “Home city”, “Home state”, “Home zip code”,
“Home country”, “Company street address”, “Company city”, “Company
state”, “Company zip code”, “Company country”. “Home e-mail”,
“Company e-mail”, “Home page”, and “Memo”. Thus, one record
contains all the information you can keep about a person or company.
118
6.2 Starting the Address Manager
When you press “Enter” on “Address manager” in the “program” menu,
the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Search Address”, and display the
prompt, “Last name:”. In other words, when you start the “Address
manager”, the “Search Address” dialog box will be opened.
In “Address manager”, you can use the menus to conveniently browse
and execute all of the available commands. When you cannot
remember the exact hot key for the command that you want to execute,
you can press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu.
6.3 Using “Add Address”
This dialog box allows you to enter new addresses in the Address
manager. In order to use the “Add Address” function, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the “Address manager” menu, and then
press the “Space-1”, “Space-4” or the up and down scroll button to move
to “Add Address”. Then, press “Enter”. Or, press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”
(which is the hot key) in “Address manager”. While you are entering an
address, you can use the “Search Address” function (refer to section
6.4), “Set Address Fields” (refer to section 6.3.2), “Set Backup Option
(refer to section 6.5.3)”, “Backup Address List (refer to section 6.5.1)”
“Restore Address List (refer to section 6.5.2)” and “exit” commands,
using the menu or with other shortcut keys.
6.3.1 Adding an Address
“Add address” is a dialog box that contains a list of 22 input fields, the
“Memo” field, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. In the input
fields, you can enter the information corresponding to the 22 fields of a
record. “Confirm” is used to save the information entered, and “Cancel”
is used to discard the entry. You can move among the input fields,
“Memo”, “Confirm”, and “Cancel” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. Among the 22 input fields, you can move from
119
one field to the next by pressing the “Space-1”, “Space-4” or the up and
down scroll button. Here you should type in the appropriate information
for each field, and press the down arrow (“Space-4”) to move to the next
field. You do not have to fill in all of the fields. If you want to skip a
field, press the down arrow (“Space-4”), and the field will be left blank.
You will then be prompted for the next field.
When you have entered information in the desired fields, you can save
the information by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)” repeatedly to move to the “Confirm” button. Then, press “Enter”.
Or, you can press “Enter” in any field.
If you don’t want to save the information that you have entered, press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” repeatedly to move to the
“Cancel” button, and then press “Enter”.
After you cancel the entry, you will be prompted for another record,
beginning with the “Last name” field.
You can the use the cursor routing keys to move from one field to the
next.
In any input field, if you press the first cursor routing key all the way to
the left, the first input field (“Last name:”) will be displayed and you can
type in a name there. If you want to enter a mobile phone number
without entering other information, press the 5th cursor routing key, and
then enter the phone number. In order to jump to the “Company street
address” field, which is the 15th field, you should press the 15th cursor
routing key.
You can enter telephone numbers using Computer Braille (without a
number sign) or regular Uncontracted Braille (with or without a number
sign). To type in a dash (-) while typing in a telephone number (e.g.
000-000-0000), you should press “Space” or “dots 3-6”.
If you want to put an extension number after any phone number, enter
the phone number as described above, and then type a comma (,),
120
followed by the extension number, as in “000-000-0000,100”. In this
case, you should press “dot 6” to enter the comma in Computer Braille
or “dot 2” in Uncontracted Braille.
When you enter a home page address or an e-mail address, you should
enter the information using computer Braille. For the @ (at sign), you
should press “Space-u (dots 1-3-6)” and then “dot 4”. A period or dot (.)
in a home page address (or an e-mail address) should be entered as
“dots 4-6”. A colon (:) can be typed in using “dots 1-5-6” and a slash (/)
can be typed in using “dots 3-4”.
By pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, you can get to the “Memo” field. You
can type in multiple lines of text in the “Memo” field. When you want to
start a new line of text, you should press “Enter”.
When you are done entering information for a record, you can press “tab
(Space-1-2)” until you reach the “Confirm” button. Then, press “Enter”
on “Confirm”.
6.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields
“Set Address Fields” enables you to select one of the 22 fields to be
shown when you enter contact information. There are 22 fields in a
record, but you may not want to enter information in every one of the 22
fields. You can use “Set Address Fields” to select only the fields that
you need.
To use this function, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the
menu, and then select “Set Address Field”, or press “o (dots 1-3-5)”
(which is the short cut), and then press “Enter”. Or, you can press
“Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” in the “Add Address” dialog box.
On the right side of each field name, “used” or “unused” is displayed.
The default value is set to “used”. In order to toggle the value, press
“Space”.
121
After setting all the fields you want to change, move to the “Confirm”
button or the “Cancel” button by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“Space-1-2”)”, and then press “Enter” to save or cancel the changes.
Another way you can cancel the changes is by pressing “Space-e (dots
1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
6.3.3 Using “Search Address” in “Add address”
In “Add Address”, use the “Search Address” function to jump to another
record. To use the “Search Address” function, press “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”. Next move to “Search Address”, and
then press “Enter”, or press “s (dots 2-3-4)”. You can also press “Enter-
s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “Add Address” dialog box.
If you have entered any information and execute “Search Address”, you
will be asked “Save changes? Yes/No/Cancel”. Once you answer this,
the “Search Address” dialog box will be displayed.
6.4 Searching For an Address
6.4.1 Using “search address”
The “Search Address” dialog box enables you to search for any
information stored in “Address manager”. If you execute “Address
manager” in the “program” menu, “Search Address” is executed
automatically. If you want to use “Search Address” in “Add Address”,
you can either select it from the menu, and press “Enter”, or press
“Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” (which is the hot key), as explained in section 6.3.3.
If you press “Enter” in the “Search Address” dialog box, without typing
any text, when “Last name:” is displayed, you can browse through all of
the records that are stored in “Address manager”. A “record” is a
collection of information about one person. If more than one record is
found, you can move to the next record by pressing “Space-4”. If you
want to move to the previous record, you need to press “Space-1”.
122
For moving each field and record in the search result list, you can use
the following keys.
Following are the move keys in the search result list
Move to a previous field in a record: Space-2
Move to the next field in a record: Space-5
Move to the first field in a record: Space-1-3
Move to the last field in a record: Space-4-6
Move to the previous record: Space-1
Move to the next record: Space-4
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
You can also search records using not only name field but also the other
fields. If you want to find records with a company name, press “Space-4”
repeatedly until “company name:” is heard. Then, type the company
name, and press “Enter”. The first record that has the company name
will be displayed.
When you enter text to be searched for, you do not have to type the
entire content of a field. For example, if you want to find a record about
“Edward”, type in “ed” in the “search name” field. Then, all the records
whose name field contains “ed” will be found.
6.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields
This option enables you to select the fields that you want to search.
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the menu, and select
“Set Address Search Fields”. Then, press “Enter”. Or, you can press
“Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” (which is the hot key) in the “Set Address Search
Fields” dialog box.
If you want to search only the name, mobile phone number, and
company telephone number fields, move to those fields that you do not
123
want to search by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”, and then press
“Space” to change the value of that field to “unused”. By pressing
“Space”, you can toggle the value of a field between “used” and
“unused”. This works just like the “set address fields” function that was
explained in section 6.3.2.
6.4.3 Using “Add Address” In “Search Address”
You can use the “Add Address” command in the “Search Address” dialog
box. To do this, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the
menu, and then select “Add Address”. Then, press “Enter”. You can
also press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”, which is the hot key for this option.
6.5 Backing up and restoring the address list
6.5.1 Backup Address List
If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in the
address manager will be lost. So, it is very important that you make a
backup file every time you make a change to the address list. To go to
“Backup Address List”, open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2”. Then, use the up and down arrows (“Space-1” or “Space-4”),
and find “Backup Address List”. Then, press “Enter”. You can also
press “u (dots 1-3-6)” while you are in the menu to get to “Backup
Address List”. Or, you can press “Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” to activate this
function without calling up the menu.
If you already have a backup file, you will see the message “Backup file
already exists. Continue to backup? Yes”. If you have made any
changes to your address list, press “Enter” to create a new backup file.
If you want to keep the previous backup file, press “Space-4”, locate “No”,
and press “Enter” on it. When you make a backup file in your address
list, you will always have a new backup file with the extension DAT, and
you will have another file with the extension BAK (which originated from
the previous “address.dat” file).
124
6.5.2 Restore Address List
If you want to restore the address list after a cold reset, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and use the up and down
scroll buttons to find “Restore Address List”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Restore Address List”. Or, you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you
are in the menu to find “Restore Address List”. You can also press
“Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” to activate this function, without calling up the
menu.
If you activate the “Restore Address List” function, and you already have
an address list, you will see the message, “Address file already exists.
Which do you prefer? Append”. If you press “Enter”, the backup
address list will be appended to the current address list. If you press
“Space-4” once and press “Enter” on “Overwrite”, you will install the new
backup file, erasing the old backup file. For example, let us assume
that you have three records in your address list and you have ten
addresses in your backup file. If you select “Append”, you will have 13
records in your address list. In this case, three addresses could
possibly be redundant. If you select “Overwrite”, you will have 10
addresses backed up, and the three original addresses will be deleted.
If you don’t want either “Append” or “Overwrite”, press “Space-4”, locate
“Cancel”, and press “Enter” on it.
6.5.3 Set Backup Options
To backup your address list, you can do it manually using the “Backup
Address List” function. You can also backup your address list
automatically by using the “Set Backup Options”. To activate the “Set
Backup Options” function, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open
up the menu. Then press “Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly to locate
“Set Backup Options”. Then press “Enter” on it. Or, you can press “e
(dots 1-5)” in the menu to go to “Set Backup Options”. You can also
activate the function without opening up the menu by pressing “Enter-e
(dots 1-5)”.
125
If you activate the function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box
has three controls: “Backup mode” radio button, a “Confirm” button, and
a “Cancel” button. You can switch between controls by pressing “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. To switch between radio
buttons, you can press “Space-1”, “Backspace”, “Space-4”, or “Space”.
The “Backup mode” has three radio buttons: “Always backup changes
when exiting”, “Manual backup”, and “Prompt backup changes when
exiting”.
1. If you select the “Always backup changes when exiting”, a new
backup file will be automatically created if you modify the address list
or add other information when you exit the address manager.
2. If you select the “Manual backup”, it will not create a new backup file
even though there may be changes in the address list. In this case,
you can only make a new backup file by using the “backup address
list” menu.
3. If you select the “Prompt backup changes when exiting”, you will see
the message “Backup changes? Yes” when you exit the address
manager, if you have modified the address list or added other
information. If you press “Enter” on “Yes”, it will automatically create
a new backup file and exit the address manager. If you press
“Space-4” once and press “Enter” on “No”, it will exit without making a
new backup file.
You can change the backup mode if you press “Enter” after focusing on
one of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press “Enter” on “Confirm”
by moving to it by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. The default backup
mode is set to “Prompt backup changes when exiting.
6.6 Commands in the Found Records
6.6.1 Find again
If you want to search for another name, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. The prompt, “Last name:” will be displayed.
126
Now, you can type in the new text that you want to look for.
Just as in a new search, you can start the search by pressing “Enter”.
Even if you have canceled a search, you can go back to the “Search
Address” dialog box by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
6.6.2 Opening a home page
If a record has a homepage address or an email address, you can open
the homepage or send an email. Move to “Home page”, “Home e-mail”
or “Company e-mail” by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. Then, press
“Enter” on “Home page”, “Home e-mail” or “Company e-mail”.
If you press “Enter” on a “Home page”, the Braille Sense OnHand will
automatically connect to the Web browser program. If you press
“Enter” on an “Home e-mail” or “Company e-mail”, the Braille Sense
OnHand will bring up the “E-mail” program, so that you can send an
email to the email address that you have selected.
Before you use this command, please make sure that you are connected
to the internet.
6.6.3 Editing Addresses
In order to edit a field that is in a record, find the desired address by
using the “Search Address” function, and then move to the field you want
to change by using the “Space-2” or the “Space-5” repeatedly until you
arrive at the field that you want to change. Then, press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and select “Modify Address”. Then,
press “Enter”, or you can press “Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)”, which is the hot
key. You can now enter new information for that field. After you have
finished entering the information, press “Enter”. The Braille Sense
OnHand will save the changes that have been made, and you will be
returned to the first field of the record.
To save the changes that have been made, and exit from modify mode,
127
move to “Confirm” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”, and then press “Enter”. In order to exit from modify mode without
saving the changes that have been made, move to “Cancel” by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” and press “Enter”. You
can also exit from the “Modify Address” by pressing “Space-e (dots 1-5)”
or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, which are the hot keys.
6.6.4 Deleting Addresses
To delete the record you are currently reading, call up the “menu” by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and select “Delete Address”. Then,
press “Enter” or press “d (dots 1-4-5)” (which is the short cut) in the
“menu”. Or, you can press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” (which is the hot key)
while the record is displayed. You can also delete more than one
record at a time as follows:
1. Select the records to be deleted and use the “Delete” command.
To select the record that you want to delete, press “Space” when the
record is displayed. Selected records can be deleted by pressing
the “delete” key (“Space-d (dots 1-4-5”). If you press “Space” again
on a selected record before you delete it, the selection will be
canceled. The records you have selected will show the, “*” symbol
to the left of the “last name:”, which is the first field of a record. The
Braille Sense OnHand will say “selected”. If you cancel a selection
by pressing “Space” on a selected record, the “*” will disappear, and
the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Canceled selection”.
2. Select all and delete
If you want to delete all the records in “Address manager”, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu” and select
“Select All”. Then, press “Enter”. Next, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu” again, and then select “Delete
Address”. Then, press “Enter”. Or, you can press “Enter-a (dot 1)”
(which is the hot key) and press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” while you are
using the “Search Address” function. If you select all records by
“Select All”, “*” will be displayed to the left of “Last name:” If you
press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”, then all of the selections will be canceled
128
and “*” will disappear.
6.6.5 Printing addresses
This option allows you to print the selected records to a Braille printer or
an ink printer. First, search the records to be printed with the “Search
Address” command, and then select the records that you want to print.
To select a record, press “Space” on the record to be printed. If you
want to select all records in “Address manager”, press “Enter-a (dot 1)”,
or select “Select All” from the “menu”, and press “Enter”. At the
beginning of a selected record, “*” will be displayed on the Braille display.
After selecting the records that you want to print, press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring up the “menu”, and then select “Print Address”.
Then, press “Enter”, or press “Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, which is the hot
key. The Braille Sense OnHand will now prompt you to select a printer.
The default selection is “Printer”. If you press “Space” once, the
selection will be changed to “Embosser”. And, if you press “Space”
again, “Cancel” will be selected. Each time when you press “Space”,
the Braille Sense OnHand will cycle through “Printer”, “Embosser”, and
“Cancel”. You can select one of them by pressing “Enter” when the
option you want to choose is displayed.
6.6.6 Saving Addresses to a File
You can save selected records to a file. Regarding how to select
records, you can find a detailed explanation in section 6.6.4 and 6.6.5.
To save selected records in a document file format, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, select “Save addresses As
File”, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can press “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”
(which is the hot key) after selecting the desired records. If you execute
the “Save addresses As File” command, the “file save” dialog box will be
displayed and you will be asked to enter the file name and select a file
format. After you type in the file name, and select one of the available
file formats, you should press “Enter” on “Confirm”, which will save the
129
selected record(s) to a file. This dialog box is the same as the “Save
As” dialog box in the Word processor, except that, here, when you are
saving addresses to a file, the default file name is not displayed unlike
the dialog box in the Word processor. You should refer to section 5.1.4
to learn about the dialog box “Save As” in the Word processor.
6.7 Importing and Exporting CSV
“CSV” is the acronym for Comma Separated Value. The CSV file is used
for the digital storage of data structured in a table of lists form, where
each associated item (member) in a group is in association with others
also separated by the commas of its set. It will Import from CSV file from
contacts of MS outlook or contacts of some cell phones.
In “Address Manager” of Braille Sense OnHand,
1. “Import from CSV” allows you to import the data of CSV file in
“Address Manager”.
2. “Export to CSV” allows you to export the data of "address manager"
as CSV file.
6.7.1 Import from CSV
You can import the data of CSV file in “Address Manger”, using this
function. You can execute this function, regardless of “Add address” or
“Search address”.
6.7.1.1 Executing the menu of the “Import from CSV”
In order to execute “Import from CSV”, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter” on the “Address Manager”. Or Press “a (dot 1) in
program list.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Press “Space-4” move to “Import from CSV” and press “Enter”. Or
press “r (dots 1-2-3-5).
130
Without calling up menu, you can move to this menu by pressing
“Backspace-i (dots 2-4)”.
6.7.1.2 The Structures of the “Import from CSV” menu
1. “File name” ECB
2. “Confirm” Button
3. “Cancel” Button
4. “File search” list
You can move between the controls by pressing “Tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“Shift-Tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
6.7.1.3Importing the CSV file
In order to import the CSV file, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter” on “Address Manager”. Or press “a (dot 1) in
program list.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Import from CSV” and
press “Enter”. Or press “R (dots 1-2-3-5). Without calling the menu,
you can move to it by pressing “Backspace-i (dots 2-4)”.
4) It shows “File name”.
5) Typing file name that you want to import. For example, if you want
to search the “address.CSV”, type “address” or “address.CSV” in
the “File name”.
6) After file name is typed, press “Enter”. Or press “Tab (Space-4-5)”
move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
7) Importing the CSV file is complete.
8) Press “Enter” on the CSV file that you import.
9) Importing CSV file is completed.
If you don’t know file name of CSV file,
1) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on the “File name”.
2) Move to “File search” list.
131
3) It shows lists of “Flashdisk”.
· If CSV file is inside of a Flashdisk: Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”,
move to CSV file and press “Enter” on the CSV file.
· If CSV file is inside of an external memory: Press “Backspace”,
move to disk list. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to CSV file
and press “Enter on the CSV file.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on “Confirm”.
Move to “Cancel” and press “Enter”. Or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6).
6.7.1.4 Adding the CSV file in data of “Address Manager”
Once you import the CSV file, “Last name: unused 1/xx” will be
displayed.
Structure is like below.
1. 23 filed list of Search address/ Add address
1) unused
2) Field name list of CSV file
2. “Allow fields in first record”
3. “Confirm”
4. “Cancel”
By pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”, you can move
to “23 list of Search address/Add address”, “Allow fields in first record”
SCHB, “Confirm” button, “Cancel” Button.
By pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, you can move to “Unused” and
“Field name list of CSV file”.
In order to add the CSV file in data of “Address Manager”, follow these
steps:
1) In list of “Last name: unused 1/xx”, press “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
Move to field of CSV file that you want to import in the “Last name”
field.
132
For example, there are 5 fields like “Name”, “Company name”,
“title”, “Company address” and “Company zip code” in CSV file. It
shows “Last name: unused 1/6”. If you want to import the value of
“Name” field in CSV file, press “Space-4” and move to “Name”.
Then it shows “Last name: Name 2/6” on th Braille display. If there
is no field value from the CSV file that you need to import, you just
leave “unused”.
If you set “unused” in “First name” and “Company name”, you will
hear “Must select one or more of first name and company name”.
You will select value from the CSV file of “First name” or
“Company name”.
2) Follow steps the above by pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to
different field such as “Group”, “Company”, and “Title” etc.
3) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Allow fields in first record”. You
can change setting, by pressing “Space”. When you import the
fields of first record in CSV file, you select it.
· When you select in “Allow fields in first record”: If there is field
value of the first record in CSV file, select it.
· When you unselect in “Allow fields in first record”: If the field
value of the first record is unnecessary, such as field name,
unselect it.
4) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm”.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Confirm”.
6) It shows “Address file already exists. Which do you prefer?” The
default value is “Overwrite”. The setting values are “Overwrite” and
“Add”. To change the setting value, press “Space.
· Overwrite: If you want to overwrite when exist record has same
data, select it.
· Add: If you want to add the data, select it.
7) It will return “Search Address”.
8) Press “Enter”. It shows data imported of CSV file with existing data
of “Address manager”.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Tab (Space-4-5) on “Confirm”.
Move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”. Or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
133
6.7.2 Export to CSV
You can export data of “Address Manger” as CSV file, using this function.
You can execute this function, regardless of “Add address” or “Search
address”.
6.7.2.1 Executing the menu of the “Export to CSV”
In order to execute the menu of the “Export to CSV”, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter” on the “Address manager”. Or press “a” (dot 1).
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Press “Space-1” or “Space 4” and move to “Export to CSV”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or press “x (dots 1-3-4-6)”.
Without calling menu, you can directly execute this function by pressing
“Backspace-x (Dots 1-3-4-6)”.
6.7.2.2 Structure and Move of “Export to CSV” menu
1. “File name” ECB
2. “Confirm” Button
3. “Cancel” Button
4. “File storage” list
You can move between the controls by pressing “Tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“Shift-Tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
6.7.2.3 How to save as CSV file
In order to save as CSV file, follow these steps:
1) Execute “Address manager”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Export to CSV”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or press “X (dots 1-3-4-6)”.
5) It shows “File name”.
134
6) Type the file name.
7) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm”.
8) Press “Enter”.
It will save in the “Flashdisk”.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on “Confirm”.
Move to “Cancel” and press “Enter”. Or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-4-6)”.
6.7.2.4 How to change storage path
In order to change storage path, follow these steps:
1) Execute “Address manager”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Export to CSV”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or press “x (dots 1-3-4-5)”.
5) It shows “File name”.
6) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “File storage” list. It shows list of
work folder in “Flashdisk”.
· When you want to save folder in “Flashdisk”: Press “Enter” on
folder that you want to save in “Flashdisk”.
· When you want to save folder in external memory: Press
“Backspace”, move to disk list. Press “Enter” on the folder that you
want to save in external memory.
7) Press “Tab”, move to “Confirm”.
8) Press “Enter” on the “Confirm”. It will be saved in the changed
path.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on “Confirm”.
Move to “Cancel” and press “Enter”. Or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-4-6)”.
6.8 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook
The “Address manager” can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook on
your personal computer to help you keep track of your information. For a
more detailed explanation of how to connect the Braille Sense OnHand
to your computer, and for more information on how to use ActiveSync,
135
please refer to chapter 18. Please take the following steps in order to
synchronize the Braille Sense OnHand with Microsoft Outlook:
1. Download and install “ActiveSync” on to your personal computer.
2. Connect the Braille Sense OnHand to your personal computer, using
a USB cable.
3. If the “Partnership” dialog box opens on your PC after you connect
the Braille Sense OnHand to your PC, select “Yes”, and press the
“Next” button on your PC.
4. Then, you will be asked for a device name. Type in “Braille Sense
OnHand” (or whatever you would like to call the Braille Sense
OnHand)
5. Press the “Next” button. Then, the program list dialog box will be
displayed on your PC. Click on the “check box” that is located next to
“Contacts”. Note that the other check boxes should not be checked.
Press the “Next” button.
6. Then, the synchronization between Microsoft Outlook and the Braille
Sense OnHand are complete. You can then check the contacts in
Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense OnHand.
6.9 Hot Keys in the Address Manager
1. Move keys for moving from field to field in add address or in the
“menu”
Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow (Space-1) or up
scroll button
Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow (Space-4) or down
scroll button
Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)
Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)
2. Move Keys For Moving From Record To Record in the search result
list
Move to a previous field in a record: Space-2
Move to the next field in a record: Space-5
Move to the first field in a record: Home (Space-1-3)
Move to the last field in a record: End (Space-4-6)
136
Move to the previous record: Space-1
Move to the next record: Space-4
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
3. Shortcut keys in the “menu”
Add address: i (dots 2-4)
Search address: s (dots 2-3-4)
Modify address: m (dots 1-3-4)
Select all: a (dot 1)
Delete address: d (dots 1-4-5)
Print address: p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Save as a file: t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Set address add/search fields: o (dots 1-3-5)
Set backup options: e (dots 1-5)
Backup address list: u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore address list: r (dots 1-2-3-5)
4. Hot Keys For The Commands
Add address: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Search address: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Modify address: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete address: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Print address: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Save as a file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Set address add/search fields: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Set backup options: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Backup address list: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore address list: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
5. Miscellaneous hot keys
Tab: Space-4-5
Shift-tab: Space-1-2
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
137
7. Schedule Manager
7.1 Overview
The “Schedule manager” is a program that is used to manage important
information about appointments, anniversaries, and events. The
Schedule manager can also inform you of appointments at a specified
time. You can start the “Schedule manager” from the “program” menu,
by pressing the up or down arrows (“Space-1” or “Space-4”) to move to
“Schedule manager”. Then, press “Enter”. Or, you can press “s (dots
2-3-4)” in the “program” menu, which is the short cut. The “Schedule
manager” has two main dialog boxes: “Add Schedule” and “Search
Schedule”. In “Add Schedule”, you can enter information about a new
appointment. Using “Search Schedule”, you can look for information
about a specific appointment stored in the “Schedule manager”, and you
can edit or delete the schedule information that is stored.
7.2 Starting “Schedule Manager”
If you press “Enter” on “Schedule manager”, or press “s (dots 2-3-4)”
(which is the short cut) in the “program” menu, the “Search Schedule”
dialog box will appear, so that you can search stored information. The
first thing you will hear is “Find date:” followed by the current date. If
you want to add new schedule information, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2” to bring up the menu. Then, select “Add Schedule”, and then
press “Enter”. Or, you can quickly open it by pressing “Enter-i (dots 2-
4)” in the “Search Schedule” dialog box. As in other programs on the
Braille Sense OnHand, you can use menus and shortcut keys in the
“Schedule manager”. Section 7.13 lists all the hot keys and shortcut
keys available in the “Schedule manager”.
7.3 Set time and date
When you use “Add Schedule”, “Search Schedule”, or “Wake up alarm”
(which are located in the “Utilities” menu), you are asked to set the date
and time. The Braille Sense OnHand provides you with a consistent
138
interface to enter time and date information in these dialog boxes. So
before we start talking about using the “Schedule manager” in this
section, we should explain how to enter the date and time. When you
are asked to enter a date and time, you can either type in the date and
time, or select it using shortcut keys, which are outlined at the end of this
section. When you type numbers in date/time, you can use either
Computer Braille (without a number sign) or regular Uncontrated Braille
(with or without a number sign). When entering time, use “hh mm”
format, two digits for the hour, and two digits for the minute. For
example, use “10 05” to enter 5 minutes past 10. You can use a space
or colon (:) to separate the hour field and minute field. You can enter a
date in “mm dd yyyy” format, which uses two digits for the month, two
digits for the day, and four digits for the year, as in “09 01 2004” to enter
September 01, 2004. Again, you can use a space or slash (/) to
separate the month, day, and year. To set the date and time with
shortcut keys, you can use the following commands.
1. Date setting keys
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
2. Time setting keys
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
139
7.4 Adding a Schedule
To add a new appointment, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring
up the menu. Select “Add Schedule”, and press “Enter”, or press
“Enter-i (dots 2-4)” in the “Search Schedule” dialog box. The “Add
Schedule” dialog box has a set of input fields, a “Confirm” button, and a
“Cancel” button. The input fields are “Start date”, “Start time”, “End
date”, “End time”, “Subject”, “Location”, “Memo”, “Alarm time”, and “Set
recurrence schedule”. Among the input fields, you can move from one
field to the next by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”. For the “Subject” and “Memo” fields, you can type in text, and for
the “start date”, “End date”, “start time”, “End time” fields, you can either
type in a date/time, or select it using shortcut keys, as explained in
section 7.3. If you press “Enter” on the “Confirm” button, the schedule
information will be saved. If you press “Enter” on “Cancel” button, the
entry will not be saved.
7.4.1 Start date
When you start “Add Schedule”, the “Start date” edit box is displayed
first. If you want to use this date, just press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move
to the next field. If you want to enter a new date, you want to type
month/day/year in this order. You can see “7.3 Set time and date” for
more details about how to enter a date. After you have entered the
date, you should then press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
If you press “Enter” by accident right after filling in this field, you will get
the message, “no subject”, and then the focus moves to the “Subject”
field.
7.4.2 Start time
“Start time” is the second field in the “Add Schedule” dialog box. Here
you can set the time when your appointment starts. By default, this
field shows the current time, which can be changed in the “Set time and
date” in the “Utilities” program. If you set the time format as “12 hour” in
this option, the time will be displayed in “am/pm” format. Otherwise, the
140
time will be displayed in 24 hour format. If you want to change the time,
you should enter the time as explained in “7.3 Set time and date”. If
you have set the time format to “12 hour”, you will want to press “Space-
x (dot 1-3-4-6)” to change between am and pm. After you have entered
the time, press the “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the next field. If you
press “Enter” by accident right after entering this field, you will get the
message, “no subject”, and then the focus will move to the “Subject” field.
Note: “Start date” varies following 2 cases.
1. If you try to add schedule that has not been performed the search
mode in schedule manager, the default of “Start date” is set to the
date based on current system.
2. If you try to add schedule that has been performed the search
mode in schedule manager, the default of “Start date” is set to the
date which has been searched by specific date.
Note: Above 2 cases only apply if you search by “date” in schedule
manager. If you search by “subject”, the default of “Start date” is set to
the date based on current system.
7.4.3 End date
The “End date” is the third field in the “Add Schedule” dialog box, and
here you can set the date when the appointment ends. By default, the
same date as the date you set in the “Start date” field is displayed. If
you want to use this date, you can press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
the next field. If you want to enter a new date, you should type
month/day/year in this order. You can refer to “7.3 Set time and date”
for more details about how to enter a date. After you have changed the
date, you can press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the next field. If you
press “Enter” by accident right after entering the date, you will get the
message, “no subject”, and the focus will move to the “Subject” field.
7.4.4 End time
141
“End time” is the fourth field in the “Add Schedule” dialog box. Here
you can set the time when the appointment ends. By default, the same
time as the time you set in the “Start time” field is displayed. If you
want to change the time, type the time as you would in the “Start time”.
You should refer to “7.3 Set time and date” for more details about how to
enter the time. After setting the time, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move
to the next field. If you press “Enter” by accident right after entering the
time, you will get the message, “no subject”, and then the focus moves
to the “Subject” field.
7.4.5 Subject
“Subject” is the fifth field where you can type in the subject of an
appointment. If you do not enter anything in this field, you will not be
able to save the record. If you press “Enter” after typing in the subject,
the record will be saved, leaving the “Location” and “Memo” field empty,
and the “Alarm time” field set to its default value (“Time of appointment”).
If you want to move to the next field, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, instead of
“Enter”.
7.4.6 Location
In the “Location” field, you can type appointed location. If you press
“Enter” after typing in the location, the record will be saved, leaving the
“Memo” field empty, and the “Alarm time” field set to its default value
(“Time of appointment”). If you want to move to the next field, press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)”, instead of “Enter”.
7.4.7 Memo
In the “Memo” field, you can enter detailed information about an
appointment. Here, you can type in more than one line. You can use
most of the editing commands that are used in the “Word processor”.
Press “Enter” to enter information on a new line. You can leave this field
142
blank if you want to. After you finish writing the information, you can
press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
7.4.8 Alarm Time
The “Alarm time” function allows you to set the time when you will be
notified about an appointment. The alarm is set relative to the
appointment time. For example, you may want the alarm to sound 30
minutes before your appointment, so that you are not late. The default
value for this field is set to “Time of appointment”. This means that the
alarm will sound at the same time as you have set for your appointment.
You can set the time in the same way as when you set the appointment
time. The time can be set anywhere from one minute to forty-seven
hours.
To set the time with shortcut keys, you can use the following commands.
1. Time setting keys
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
If you attempt to set the time to 0, the Braille Sense OnHand will display
the message, “Time of appointment”. If you do not want to set an alarm,
press “Space-1” when “Alarm time” is set to “Time of appointment”. Then,
“Alarm off” will be displayed, and the alarm for this appointment will be
turned off. After setting the “Alarm time”, save this appointment by
pressing “Enter”, or by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the
“Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you have set the “Alarm time”, it
will go off at the specified time even if the Braille Sense OnHand is
turned off. If you want to stop the alarm, press “Backspace-Enter”.
7.4.9 Set a recurring Schedule
143
You can set this option when the schedule you are creating currently
recurs periodically. If you clear this check box, the schedule will be set to
occurring once. You can check or uncheck this option by pressing
“Space”. That is, if you press “Space” when this box is checked, it will
be unchecked, and if you press “Space” when this box is unchecked, it
will be checked. If you have unchecked this, just press “Enter”, or
press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly to move to the “Confirm” button and
press “Enter”, to save the schedule. If you want to set recurrence
schedule, you should press “Space” and then press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
or “Enter” to move to the combo box where you can set the recurrence
pattern. In this combo box, you can select one of “Daily”, “Weekly”,
“Monthly” and “Yearly”. We will discuss these options in more detail in
the next section.
7.4.9.1 Daily
If you select “Daily”, and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, the focus will move to
“Recurring interval of day” edit box. Here, you can enter the number of
days after which the appointment recurs. You can type a number
between 1 and 999. If you enter 1, the appointment recurs every day,
and if you enter 2, it recurs every other day. One thing you have to be
careful when you use this is that the difference between the starting and
end date should be shorter than the recurring interval value. For
example, suppose that the appointment starts at 09:00, Feb. 1, 2006,
and ends at 12:00, Feb. 2, 2006. If you set the recurring interval to 1,
you will get an error message “The appointment duration should be
shorter than the recurring interval”. This is because it is logically
impossible that the appointment duration is 27 hours, and the
appointment recurs 24 hours. This rule is applied in the same way when
you set weekly, monthly, or yearly recurring appoints. If you press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” after setting the recurring interval, the “Set recurrence
end date” check box appears. By default, it’s unchecked, which indicates
that there is no apparent end date when the recurrence will stop. If you
check this box by pressing “Space”, and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, the
focus will move to the edit combo box that asks for the end date. Enter
the date when the recurrence will stop. You can directly type the date, or
144
you can set the date as described in “7.3 Setting date/time”. Once you
set the date, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button.
7.4.9.2 Weekly
After you set the “Recurrence” to weekly, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to
move to the “Recurring interval of week” edit box. Here you can set after
how many weeks the appointment will recur. You can type a number
between 1 and 999. If you set it to 1, the appointment will recur every
week, and if you set it to 2, it will recur every other week. The restriction
on the recurring interval as in “Daily” is applied to “Weekly”. If the
recurring interval is one week, the appointment duration should be
shorter than one week. Otherwise, you will get an error message, “The
appointment duration should be shorter than the recurring interval”. If
you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” after entering the recurring interval, the
focus will move to a list box where you can select the day of the week on
which the appointment recurs. You can move between the items in the
list box, by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. To select or unselect the
current item, press “Space”. You can make more than one selection. If
you don’t select any day, it will be set to the today’s day of the week.
Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” after selecting the days of the week when the
appointment recurs. Then the focus will move to “Set recurrence end
date” check box. You can set the recurrence end date as described in
7.4.9.1.
7.4.9.3 Monthly
If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” after setting the “Recurrence to monthly”,
the focus will move to the “Recurring type” combo box. Here, you can
set the recurring type as “Date” or “Day of the week”. To move
between the two options, you can use “Space-1” or “Space-4”. “Date” is
used when you want to set an appointment recurring on the same day of
a month, for example, on the 17th of every month, or every other month.
On the other hand, “Day of the week” is used when you want to set an
appointment recurring on the same week and the day of the week of a
month, for example, on Wednesday of the second week of every month.
145
After selecting the “Recurring type”, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
the “Recurring interval”. In this field, you set after how many months the
appointment will recur. You can type a number between 1 and 999. If
you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” after setting “Recurring interval”, different
fields will be shown depending on what you have selected in “Recurring
type”. If you set the “Recurring type” to “Date”, an edit box will be
shown, where you can type the day of the month when the appointment
recurs. By default the date set in the “Start date” is shown. You can type
a number between 1 and 31. If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” after
setting this, the focus will move to “Set recurrence end date” and you
can set the date in the same way as described in 6.4.9.1. If you have set
the “Recurring type” to “Day of the week”, you will be asked the
“Recurring week” first. You can set this to “First week”, “Second week”,
“Third week”, “Fourth week” or “Last week”. This is for setting the week
of a month when the appointment recurs. Here if you press “tab (“Space-
4-5”)”, the focus will move to a combo box where you can select the day
of the week when the appointment recurs. Since you can select only one
of the 7 days, the one shown currently is the selected day. If you press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” here, the focus will move to the “Set recurrence end
date” check box, and you can set it in the same way as described in
7.4.9.1
7.4.9.4 Yearly
If you set the “Recurrence” to “Yearly”, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move
to the “Recurring type” combo box. You can select either “Date” or “Day
of the week”, and you can move between them by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”. If you set the “Recurring type” to “Date”, you can set the
month and the day of the month when the appointment recurs. If you set
it to “Day of the week”, you can set the month, the week, and the day of
the week when the appointment recurs every year. If you press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” after setting “Recurring type”, the focus will move to the
“Month for recurrence” combo box. You can select one of the 12 months
by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
here, the focus will move to different fields, depending on what you have
set the “Recurring type” to. If you have set the “Recurring type” to “Date”,
146
the focus moves to “Day for recurrence” edit box. You can type a
number between 1 and 31 here. If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” here,
the focus will move to “Set recurrence end date” check box, using the
same way as described in 6.4.9.1. If you have set the “Recurring type” to
“Day of the week”, you have to set “recurring week” and “Day of week for
recurrence”. You can set the values of these combo boxes in the same
way as described in 7.4.9.3.
7.4.10 Confirm
If you press “Enter” on the “Confirm” button, the appointment will be
saved, and the “Add Schedule” dialog box will be closed.
7.4.11 Cancel
If you press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button, the appointment information
you entered will be discarded, and you will be asked to enter information
about another appointment. You can also cancel the entry by pressing
“Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
7.5 Search Schedule
“Search schedule” is used for searching Appointments that you have
entered before. When you start “Schedule manager”, the “Search
Schedule” dialog box will be opened. You can also open this dialog box
when you are in the “Add Schedule” dialog box, by pressing “Enter-s
(dots 2-3-4)”. Or you can open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)”, and press “Enter” on “Search Schedule”.
There are two methods to search for the schedule; “searching with
subject” and “searching with date”. With the “searching with subject”, you
can find schedule with the keywords in the subject field. With the
“searching with date”, you can find schedules with the specified date. In
order to toggle the searching mode, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2
to call up the “menu” and move to “Toggle Search Mode” and press
“Enter”. Or you can execute it by pressing “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)” without
147
calling up the menu. Every time you press “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will say “Search mode: Date” or “Search mode:
Subject”, and the searching mode will be toggled.
The latest searching mode will be saved when you will exit the Schedule
manager. So if you execute the Schedule manager and search any
schedule, the latest searching mode will be displayed.
7.5.1 Searching with date
It searches the schedule with the date. If it is executed, the Braille Sense
OnHand will say “Find date: (current date)”.
If you just press “Enter” here, the appointments occurring today will be
searched for. If you want to search for another date, you can type the
date in the format “mm/dd/yyyy”, or use the “move by date” hotkeys as
described in “7.3 Set time and date”. If you press “Enter” after entering
the date, the appointments occurring on the day will be shown. If there is
no appointment on that day, “There is no schedule registered”. will be
announced. Otherwise, the first appointment on that day will be
announced in the form of “date, time, and subject”. If the appointment
lasts for more than one day, “continuous schedule” will be announced. If
the appointment recurs, “recurring schedule” will be announced. If you
registered more than one appointment for that day, you can move
between the appointments on that day by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-
4”. If you want to move to the first appointment on a day, you can press
“Space-1-3”, and if you want to move to the last appointment on the day,
press “Space-4-6”. To move to the appointments on another day, press
“Space-2” or “Space-5”. Then, the previous/next appointment occurring
within four months will be displayed. If you want to move to the first
appointment registered in the schedule manager, press “Space-1-2-3”,
and if you want to move to the last appointment registered in the
schedule manager, press “Space-4-5-6”. If you want to know more about
a registered appointment, press “Enter” on the desired appointment item.
Then, if you press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, you can hear the start date,
start time, end date, end time, subject, and memo.
148
7.5.2 Searching with subject
If it is executed, the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Search subject:”
Type in the keywords which you are searching. After you type in the
keywords and press “Enter”, then all schedules with the keywords will be
displayed. If you press “Enter” without typing in any word in “Search
subject:” edit box, the Braille Sense OnHand will display all schedules in
your Braille Sense OnHand.
In order to move to the next or previous schedule, press “Space-4” or
“Space-1”, respectively. Pressing “Space-1-3” will move to the first item
of the schedule list, and pressing “Space-4-6” will move to the last item
of the schedule list.
For the recurring appointment and multiple day appointment, the Braille
Sense OnHand will show the schedules of the first day only, if you
search the schedule with subject. For example, if you registered any
appointment on January 1, 2007 and made it recur the first day of every
month, the Braille Sense OnHand will show this schedule on January 1,
2007 only when you search it with “searching with subject”.
If you want to read the schedule in detail, you can press “Enter” at the
schedule that you want to read in detail. After you read the schedule in
detail and return to the schedule list, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. And if
you want to search with the other keywords, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to
move to “Search subject” edit box.
7.6 Modify Schedule
You can modify an appointment that you have scheduled. First, move to
the appointment you want to modify in the find result list. Press “Enter-m
(dots 1-3-4)”. Or open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” and press “Enter” on “Modify Schedule”, or press the shortcut key
“m (dots 1-3-4)” in the menu. Or you can press its hot key, “Enter-m
(dots 1-3-4)” in the find result list. If the appointment is a recurring
schedule, a prompt, displaying “Recurrence appointment. Open type?”
149
will appear. This is asking whether you want to modify the recurring
schedule or the schedule for a specific day. If you select “This
occurrence”, you will make changes for the appointment of the day, but
the recurring appointments on other days will not be changed. If you
select “The series”, you will make changes for all the recurring
appointments of the schedule. If you select “Cancel”, “Modify Schedule”
dialog box will not be opened and go back to the previous status. You
can select these values by pressing “Space” or “Backspace”. Press
“Enter” to open the “Modify Schedule” dialog box. This dialog box
contains the same controls as in the “Add Schedule” dialog box. The
only difference is that each field has the value entered previously. You
can make changes in these fields in the same way as described in 7.4. If
you change a recurring schedule, all the instances of the schedule will
be changed according to the new values. Once you finish modifying the
schedule, the information shown in the find result list will be updated
accordingly.
7.7 Deleting a Schedule
If you want to delete a schedule, move to the schedule in the find result
list. Then, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and
press “Enter” on “Delete Schedule”. Or you can press its hot key,
“Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” in the find result list. If the selected schedule is a
recurring schedule, “Recurring appointment. Delete type?” will be
displayed. This is asking whether you want to delete the recurring
schedule, or just the appointment for that day. If you select “This
occurrence”, only the appointment on that day will be deleted. If you
select “The series”, the recurring schedule itself will be deleted. You
cannot select and delete multiple schedules at once. You can delete only
the appointment currently focused.
7.8 Printing a Schedule
After finding an appointment using the “Search Schedule” command (as
explained in section 6.5), you can print an appointment that you have
found using the “Print Schedule” command. In the search results list,
150
press “Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, or call up the “menu” by pressing
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, or select
“Print Schedule”. Then, press “Enter”. The Braille Sense OnHand will
ask you to specify the beginning date of the appointments to be printed.
By default, the current date is displayed. You can specify a date that
you want to search for. Refer to section 6.3 for information on how to
enter dates. Now, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to set the end date of the
appointments that you want to be printed. Again, you can enter the
dates, as explained in section 7.3. If you press “Enter” or “tab (“Space-
4-5”)”, you will be asked to select the type of printer you will use.
“Printer” is the default setting. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move
between “Embosser” and “Printer”. If you have selected the appropriate
printer type, you can press “Enter” to start printing. Before you press
“Enter” here, please make sure the Braille Sense OnHand is connected
to the printer correctly. After the printing is finished, the Braille Sense
OnHand will display the search results list.
7.9 Saving Appointments as a File
You can save appointments stored in “Schedule manager” as a
document file. In the search results list, press “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”,
or call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and
then select “Save Schedule As File”, and press “Enter”, or press “t (dots
2-3-4-5)” in the menu. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will ask you to
specify the beginning and end date of the appointments to be saved just
like it did in “Print Schedule”. After setting the beginning and end dates,
press “Enter” or “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and the “file save” dialog box will be
displayed to prompt you to enter the name and the format of the file to
be saved. This dialog box is the same as the “Save As” dialog box in
the “Word processor”. Please refer to section 5.1.4 for more
information about the “Save As” dialog box.
7.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments
7.10.1 Backup Schedule
151
If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in the
schedule manager will be lost. So, it is very important to make a
backup file every time you change your schedule. To backup your
schedule, go to “Backup Schedule”, open the menu by pressing “Space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”. Then, use the up and down arrows (“Space-1”
or “Space-4”), and find “Backup Schedule”. Then, press “Enter”. You
can also press “u (dots 1-3-6)” while you are in the menu to get to
“Backup Schedule”. Or, you can press “Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” to activate
this function without calling up the menu.
If you already have a backup file, you will see the message “Backup file
already exists. Backup anyway? Yes”. If you have made any changes
to your schedule, press “Enter” here to create a new backup file. If you
want to keep the previous backup file, press “Space-4”, locate “No”, and
press “Enter” on it. If you make a backup file again in the schedule
manager, you will have a new backup file with the extension DAT, and
you will have another file with the extension BAK (which originated from
the previous “planner.dat”.)
7.10.2 Restore Schedule
If you want to restore your schedule after a cold reset, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and use the up and down
scroll buttons to find “Restore Schedule”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Restore Schedule”. Or, you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you are
in the menu to find “Restore Schedule”. You can also press “Enter-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” to activate this function, without calling up the menu.
If you activate the “Restore Schedule” function, and you already have an
existing schedule, you will see the message “Schedule file already exists.
Which do you prefer? Append” If you press “Enter” here, you will have a
new schedule with the backup file appended. If you press “Space-4”
once and press “Enter” on “Overwrite”, you will have a schedule restored
from the backup file. For example, let us assume that you have a
schedule for days 1 - 3 in your schedule and you have a schedule for
days 1 - 5 in your backup file. If you select “Append”, you will have a
152
schedule with 8 days. In this case, three days of the schedule could
possibly be redundant. If you select “Overwrite”, you will have days 1 –
5 from your schedule back-up, and days 1 – 3 of the original schedule
will be deleted. If you don't want to “Append” or “Overwrite”, press
“Space-4” once more, locate “Cancel”, and press “Enter” on it.
7.10.3 Set Backup Options
To backup your schedule, you can backup your schedule manually by
activating the “Backup Schedule” function. You can also backup the
schedule automatically by activating the “Set Backup Options” function.
To activate the “Set Backup Options” function, press “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” to open up the menu. Next press “Space-4” or “Space-1”
repeatedly to locate “Set Backup Options”. Then, press “Enter” on “Set
Backup Options”. Or, while you are in the menu, you can press “e (dots
1-5)” to jump directly to “Set Backup Options”. You can also activate
the “Set Backup Options” function without opening up the menu by
pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
If you activate this function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box
has three controls, “Backup mode” radio button, a “Confirm” button, and
a “Cancel” button. You can switch between controls by pressing “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. To move between the radio
buttons, you can press “Space-1”, “Backspace”, “Space-4”, or “Space”.
The “Backup mode” has three radio buttons: “Always backup changes
when exiting”, “Manual backup”, and “Prompt backup changes when
exiting”.
1. If you select the “Always backup changes when exiting”, a new
backup file will be created automatically if you have modified your
schedule or added other information before exiting the schedule
manager.
2. If you select the “Manual backup”, a new backup file will not be
created, even though there have been changes made to your
schedule. If you select this option, you can only make a new backup
153
file by using the “Backup Schedule” menu.
3. If you select “Prompt backup changes when exiting”, you will see the
message “Backup changes? Yes” if you have modified your schedule
or added other information before exiting the schedule manager. If
you press “Enter” on “Yes”, a new backup file will be created, and you
will exit the schedule manager. If you press “Space-4” once, and
press “Enter” on “No”, you will exit the schedule manager, and a new
backup file will not be created.
You can change the backup mode if you press “Enter” after focusing on
one of the three radio buttons. Or, press “tab (“Space-4-5”), and press
“Enter” on “Confirm”. The default backup mode is set to “Prompt
backup changes when exiting”.
7.11 Set Alarm Options
You can open the “Set Alarm Options” dialog box by pressing “Enter-o
(dots 1-3-5)”, or by pressing “Enter” on “Set Alarm Options” in the menu
by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” in the “Schedule manager”.
This dialog box has a list of alarm option fields, a “Confirm” button, and a
“Cancel” button. Alarm option fields include “Alarm duration”, “Alarm
repeat interval” and “Repeat”. You can move between these fields by
pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can access the “Confirm” and
“Cancel” buttons by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”.
7.11.1 Alarm Duration
With this option, you can change the duration of the alarm sound. You
can set this option to a value that is between 5 and 600 seconds. The
default value is set to 30 seconds. You should enter the number in
Computer Braille or Uncontracted Braille, without a number sign. Press
“Enter” to save the changes, and exit from the dialog box. If you want
to set the “Alarm repeat interval” in the next field, you should press
“Space-4” to move to it.
154
7.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time
When the alarm goes off, if you do not stop it by pressing “Backspace-
Enter”, the Braille Sense OnHand will keep giving you a notice about the
appointment after a specified time interval. The “Alarm repeat interval”
option allows you to change this interval. You can set the value
anywhere from 1 to 60 minutes, and the default value is set to 5 minutes.
When you want to change the value, type in a number between 1 and 60
in Computer Braille, or Uncontracted Braille. You can type these
numbers without a number sign. After entering the number, press
“Enter” to save the changes, and exit from the dialog box. Or, if you
press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will move to the
“Repeat” edit box.
7.11.3 Repetition Times
The alarm will make a sound as the amount of time that you changed
the alarm duration and it then stops. After a specified time interval, you
will hear again the alarm sound.
“Repeat” is a field, which allows you to decide how many times the alarm
will sound. You can set the value from 1 time to 10 times, and the
default value is set to 3 times. To change the value, you type in a
number between 1 and 10. After entering the number, you press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)”, and press “Enter” on the “Confirm” button.
Or, if you press “Enter” on the “Repeat” edit box, the changed options
will be saved, and the dialog box will be closed.
An alarm will repeat according to the number of times that you set for
this option and will then stop automatically. The Braille display on the
Braille Sense OnHand will also display the “date” and “subject” for the
alarm.
7.11.4 Confirm
155
By pressing “Enter” on the “Confirm” button, you will save the changed
settings, and close the “Set Alarm Options” dialog box.
7.11.5 Cancel
If you press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button, or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”
or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, the previous option settings will be restored
and “Set Alarm Options” dialog box will be closed.
7.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook
The “Schedule manager” can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook on
your personal computer to help you keep track of your appointments.
For a more detailed explanation of how to connect the Braille Sense
OnHand to your computer, and for more information on how to use
ActiveSync, refer to chapter 17. You should take the following steps in
order to synchronize the Braille Sense OnHand with Microsoft Outlook:
1. Download and install “ActiveSync” on to your personal computer.
2. Connect the Braille Sense OnHand to your personal computer, using
a USB cable.
3. If the “Partnership” dialog box opens on your PC after you connect
the Braille Sense OnHand to your PC, select “Yes”, and press the
“Next” button on your PC.
4. Then, you will be asked for a device name. Type in
“BrailleSensePlus” (or whatever you would like to call the Braille
Sense OnHand).
5. Press the “Next” button. Then, the program list dialog box will be
displayed on your PC. Click on the “check box” that is located next to
“calendar”. Note that the other check boxes should not be checked.
Press the “Next” button.
6. Then, the synchronization between Microsoft Outlook and the Braille
Sense OnHand is complete. Please check the contacts in Microsoft
Outlook and the Braille Sense OnHand.
156
7.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager
1. Add Schedule
Move between fields
Move to the next field: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
2. Hot keys for the Commands
Search schedule: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Set alarm options: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup options: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
3. Search schedule
Hot keys for the commands
Add schedule: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Set alarm options: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup options: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Toggle search mode: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
4. Move keys in the search result list
1) Move from a appointment to another in the schedule list:
Move to the previous a in the same day: up arrow (Space-1)
Move to the next appointment in the same day: down arrow (Space-
4)
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Space-1-3
Move to the last appointment in the same day: Space-4-6
2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered:
Move to the previous schedule: Space-2
Move to the next schedule: Space-5
157
Move to the first schedule: Space-2-3 or Space-1-2-3
Move to the last schedule: Space-5-6 or Space-4-5-6
3) Hot keys for the commands:
Add schedule: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Modify schedule: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete schedule: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Set alarm options: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup options: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Save schedule as file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print schedule: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
5. Cancel / Exit
1) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
It cancels the current job or setting like the “esc” key on a personal
computer.
2) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Exit from the schedule manager. It can be used as cancel key for
any function.
158
8. E-mail
The e-mail program is used to communicate with others using the
Internet. In order to use the e-mail program, you must have own your e-
mail account, which has been provided to you by your Internet service
provider.
The e-mail account should support POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) and
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). You should check with your
Internet service provider to make sure that your account supports POP3
and SMTP.
Before using the e-mail program, you will need to setup the Braille
Sense OnHand to use the Internet, which is in the “Utilities” menu (see
chapter 15).
In order to set the “Internet”, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter” on the “Utilities” program.
2) Move to “Internet setup” by pressing “space-4” and press “Enter”.
Or press “I (dots 2-4)” when you enter on the “Utilities”.
3) In “Setup internet”, you will find “Bluetooth DUN” and “Wireless
LAN”.
4) You can move between the items by pressing “Space-4” or
“Space-1”.
5) Press “Enter” on the item that you want to connect.
6) Connect to Internet through setting proceed.
When checking the “inbox” in the email program, the menus are different
from the menus that are used when you are writing an email. You should
read this chapter carefully before using the e-mail program on the Braille
Sense OnHand.
159
8.1 Executing E-mail and E-mail service management
To use the e-mail program, you need to register your e-mail account.
The following is a detailed explanation of executing, registering,
checking, modifying, and deleting e-mail account.
8.1.1 Executing e-mail
In order to execute e-mail, follow these steps:
1. Move to the “E-mail” in program menu, pressing “Space-1” and
“Space-4”.
2. Press “Enter” on the “E-mail” or press “E (dots 1-5)”.
When you launch the e-mail program for the first time, the Braille Sense
OnHand will say “You must create at least 1 mail account from the
accounts manager in the Tools menu”. Then, the “inbox” will be opened.
The “inbox” is the main window of the E-mail program. When you run
the e-mail program for the first time, this “inbox” is empty and the Braille
Sense OnHand displays “no items 0/0”.
Press “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”. It shows mailbox lists of e-mail.
Mailbox lists
1. Inbox: It is stored received mail.
2. Sent: It is stored sent mail, after sending mail successfully.
3. Outbox: It is stored outbox, when user saves mail in “Outbox” or
fails to send mail.
By pressing “Space-1” and “Space-4”, you can move among mailbox
lists.
If there are any e-mail messages that the Braille Sense OnHand has
already received, “Opening inbox”. will be announced in voice; “xx%
processed” will be displayed on the Braille display. Once progress has
reached100%, the “inbox” will be opened and it will show the received e-
160
mail in the list. Move to “Sent” or “Outbox”, and press “Enter”. If there are
any e-mail messages in “Sent” or “Outbox”, it shows e-mil lists like the
“inbox”.
8.1.2 Management e-mail service information
In “Accounts manager”, you can manage e-mail service information.
To execute e-mail service, follow these steps:
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in “Inbox” mail list.
2) Pressing “Space-4”, move to “Tools”. Press “Enter” on “Tools”. Or
press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”.
3) It shows “Accounts manager”.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It shows “Account name: no items 0/0”. Without calling up menu,
you can also move to this menu by pressing “Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)”.
The “Accounts manager” contains the following 6 items.
1. Service list
2. Information
3. Add
4. Modify
5. Delete
6. Close
You can move among these items by pressing “tab (Space-4-5)” or
“shift-tab (Space-1-2)”. You can execute each item by pressing “enter”
on the desired item that is displayed.
If you want to exit from the “Accounts manager”, move to the “Close”
button, and then press “enter”. Or, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-
z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. The following is a detailed explanation of each item.
161
8.1.2.1 Registering e-mail service
To receive e-mail, you have to register e-mail service in advance. In
order to register e-mail service, follow these steps:
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) Move to “Tools”, pressing “Space-4”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Tools” or press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”. Press “Enter”.
5) It shows “Account name: no items 0/0”. Without calling up the
menu, you can move to this menu by pressing “Enter-M (dots 1-3-
4)”.
6) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Add”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Add” or press “A (dot 1)”.
8) Then, the dialog box will be opened and “Account name:” will be
appeared. Type in the “Account name” edit box with the Braille
keys. (Ex: Braille Sense OnHand)
9) Press “Space-4”, move to “Display name”. Type in the “Display
name” edit box with Braille keys. This name will be shown as
sender’s name to a receiver.
10) Press “Space-4”, move to “Logon username”. Type in the “Logon
username” computer edit box using computer Braille. (Ex: Sense
or sense@braillesense.com)
11) Press “Space-4”, move to “Password”. Type in the “password”
computer edit box using computer Braille.
12) Press “Space-4”, move to “E-mail address”. Type in the “E-mail
address” computer edit box using computer Braille. (Ex:
sense@braillesense.com)
13) Press “Space-4”, move to “Incoming pop3 server”. Type in the
“Incoming pop3 server” computer edit box using computer Braille.
(Ex: mail.braillesense.com). Check with your Internet service
provider or network administrator to find out what you should use
as the Incoming pop3 server name.
14) Press “Space-4”, move to “Outgoing SMTP server”. Type in the
“Outgoing SMTP server” computer edit box using computer Braille.
Check with your Internet service provider or network administrator
162
to find out what you should use as the Outgoing SMTP server
name.
15) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm” button.
16) Press “Enter” on the “Confirm” button.
17) Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will exit to “Account name list”
and show the registered account name (Ex: Account name: Braille
Sense OnHand 1/1).
18) When you finish registering the services, press “Space-z (dots 1-
3-5-6)” to exit to the “inbox”.
In order to move from a setting item (Ex: ID, password) to the previous
setting item, press “Space-1”. And, in order to move to the “Confirm”
button or the “Cancel” button, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-Tab
(Space-1-2)”.
If you made a typo in an item such as account name, ID, or password,
you can correct the type as follows;
1) In order to delete the letter where the cursor is located, press
“Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
2) In order to delete the preceding letter of the cursor’s position,
press “Backspace”.
3) In order to delete the current line, press “BackSpace-c (dots 1-4)”.
Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will ask “Delete line: Yes”. If
you press “enter”, the selected line will be deleted. If you do not
want to delete the current line, press “Space” to change from “Yes”
to “No” and press “enter”.
When you need to type using computer Braille in your ID, password,
and address, please use the following computer Braille:
1. Dot (“”.“): dots 4-6
2. At sign (“@”): Press “Space-u” and release it, then press dot 4.
3. Under bar (“_”): dots 4-5-6
4. Dash (“-”): dots 3-6
163
8.1.2.1.1 Signature and Advanced
While registering your account, you can register signature and set
advanced options in “Advanced” menu.
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the menu.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Tools” or press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager” on the Braille display.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Accounts manager”.
6) It shows “Account name”. Without calling up menu, by pressing
“Enter-M (dots 1-3-4)” you can move to this menu.
7) Press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Add”.
8) Press “Enter” on the “Add” or press “A (dot 1)”.
9) Press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Advanced”.
10) Press “Enter” on the “Advanced”.
11) It shows “Use secure POP3 (POP-SSL)”. The default value of
this check box is unselect. If the Incoming pop3 server uses the
“SSL”, select the check box by pressing “Space”.
12) Press “Space-4” to move to “POP3 port number: 110” by default.
Here you can type in another POP3 port number in the computer
edit box.
13) Press “Space-4” to move to “SMTP encryption type”. The setting
values are “None”, “SSL” and “TLS”. If the Outgoing SMTP
server uses the “SSL” or “TLS”, change the value by pressing
“Space”.
14) Press “Space-4” to move to “SMTP port number: 25”. This is
also a computer edit box. Here you can type in another SMTP port
number.
15) Press “Space-4” to move to “SMTP username”. Here, you can
add another SMTP username if your Internet service provider
requires you to use a different SMTP username. You should use
ASCII to type this in.
16) Press “Space-4” to move to “SMTP password”. You can type in
your password that corresponds to the above ID. It should be
typed in using ASCII.
164
17) Press “Space-4” to move to “Use as default send-from account”.
If you want to use the new username and password that were set
in steps 7 and 8, select the check box by pressing “Space”.
18) Press “Sapce-4” to move to “Keep mail copies in server”. When
you download e-mail from your e-mail server, you can set the
Braille Sense OnHand to keep e-mail messages on the server or
not. Press “Space” to change “Yes” to “No”, and press “enter” if
you do not want a copy of the email to remain on the e-mail server.
19) Press “Space-4” to move to “Save mail copies in sent mailbox”.
When you send e-mail, you can set the Braille Sense OnHand to
keep e-mail message in sent mailbox or not. Press “Space” to
change “Yes” to “No”, and press “Enter”.
20) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Use signature”. The default
value is “No”. If you want to attach your signature in mail, press
“Space” to change “No” to “Yes”.
21) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Signature”.
22) Press “Enter” on the “Signature”.
23) It will be appeared “Signature:” multi edit box. You can type your
signature in here that you want to use.
24) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm”.
25) Press “Enter” on the “Confirm”.
26) This will save the signature, and you will be returned to the
“Signature” button. You can cancel by pressing “enter” on “Cancel”
by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” after typing-in a signature.
27) Press “tab (“Space-4-5”), and press “enter” on “Confirm”.
If you execute like the above, you can use signature when you send an
email. And also you can use different server when you send or receive
emails.
8.1.2.2 Checking registered service list
The following is the method to check the registered service information:
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) Press “Space-4” move to “Tools”.
165
3) Press “Enter” on the “Tools” or press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1” to move to the desired service in the
service list.
7) If the desired service is displayed, press “Enter”. Or press “Tab
(Space-4-5)” to move to the “Information”, and then press “enter”.
8) The “Information” dialog box will be opened, and “Account name:
(Registered account name)” will be displayed (Ex: account name:
Braille Sense OnHand).
9) Press “Space-4” or “tab (“Space-4-5”)” and check the registered
information of each item. Pressing “enter” on the “Close” will return
you to the service list.
You can check all registered information of e-mail service.
Use the move keys below to move among the items in the dialog box:
Move to the previous item: Space-1
Move to the next item: Space-4
Move to the first item: Space-1-3 or Space-1-2-3
Move to the last item: Space-4-6 or Space-4-5-6
Move to the previous control: Space-1-2
Move to the next control: Space-4-5
If the information displayed exceeds 32 Braille cells, the remaining parts
can be checked by pressing the “down scroll button”.
8.1.2.3 Modifying registered service list
The following is the method to modify the registered service information:
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) Press “Space-4” move to “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Tools” or press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
166
5) Press “Enter” on the “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1” to move to the desired service in the
service list.
7) When the desired service is displayed, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to
move to the “Modify”, and then press “Enter”. Or just press “m
(dots 1-3-4)”.
8) It shows “Account name”. In this case, it is a “modification”, so the
Braille Sense OnHand will show you the current information. For
example, “Account name: Braille Sense OnHand”.
9) The “Modify” dialog box will be opened, and “Account name:
(Registered account name)” will be displayed (Ex: Account name:
Braille Sense OnHand). You can type in here that you want to
modify.
10) Press “Space-4”, move to “Display name”. You can type in here
that you want to modify.
11) Press “Space-4”, move to “Logon username”. You can type in
here that you want to modify.
12) Press “Space-4”, move to “Password”. Using computer Braille,
you can type in here that you want to modify.
13) Press “Space-4”, move to “E-mail address”. Using computer
Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify.
14) Press “Space-4”, move to “Incoming pop3 server”. Using
computer Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify.
15) Press “Space-4”, move to “Outgoing SMTP server”. Using
computer Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify.
16) Press “Tab (Space4-5)”, move to “Advanced” and press “Enter”.
Also you can modify like the above.
17) Press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
18) When the modification is complete, it will return to the “service
list”.
You can move among the items (account name, logon username,
password, etc.) by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can move to
the “Confirm” button or the “Cancel” button by pressing “tab (Space-4-5)”
or “shift-tab (Space-1-2)”.
167
On each of the items, it will be displayed the values that were typed in.
If you type in new information, the new information will replace the old
information. If you want to modify part of an item, press the “cursor
routing key” at the desired position and type in the new information.
If you made a typo in an item (account name, logon username,
password, etc.), you can modify it using the following process:
1. You can delete the current letter by pressing “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
2. Press “Backspace” in order to delete the previous letter.
3. In order to delete the current line, press “BackSpace-1-4”. Then,
“Delete line: yes” will be displayed. Press “enter” in order to delete
the line. Otherwise, press “Space” to change from “Yes” to “No”,
and then press “enter”.
8.1.2.4 Deleting registered service list
The following is the method to delete the registered service information:
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) Press “Space-4” move to “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Tools” or press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1” to move to the desired service in the
service list.
7) When the desired service is displayed, press “Space-d (dots 1-4-
5)” or “D (dots 1-4-5)”. Or, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the
“Delete”, and then press “Enter”.
8) Then, “Are you sure you want to delete the (Registered account
name) service? Yes” will be displayed.
9) Press “enter” in order to delete it.
10) The Braille Sense OnHand will delete it, show “Successfully
deleted”, and return to the “service list”.
If you want to cancel the deletion, press “Space” when “Are you sure you
want to delete the (Registered account name) account? Yes” is
168
displayed in order to change “Yes” to “No”, and then press “enter”. Or,
just press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
8.2 Receiving and Sending E-mail
8.2.1 Receiving E-mail
The Braille Sense OnHand is capable of receiving plain text email and
html email messages.
You can receive e-mail messages by doing the following.
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to “Message”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Message” and press “Enter”. Or press “M
(dots 1-3-4)”.
4) It will display “Reply”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Check for new mail”.
6) Press “Enter” on the “Check for new mail”. Or press “N (dots 1-3-
4-5)”.
7) Then, you will find “Account name” list. You can move to this
dialog box directly by pressing “Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)”. This dialog
box consists of “service list”, a “Confirm”, and a “Cancel”.
8) When “Account name: (registered account name x/x)” is displayed,
press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to the desired service.
9) Press “enter” when the desired service is displayed, or press “Tab
(Space-4-5)” to move to the “Confirm”, and press “enter”.
10) Then the Braille Sense OnHand will display “There are xx
messages to receive. Now receiving…” “xx/yy mail received;”
“Successfully received x out of y message” will be displayed.
When the e-mail messages are downloaded from the server, the
e-mail list is displayed in the “inbox” (Ex: Subject: (subject of the e-
mail received) xx/xx).
If the e-mail size is more than the Braille Sense OnHand can manage, it
announces “This message is too large to download. Skipping.”. and then
169
the Braille Sense OnHand will begin downloading the next e-mail
message.
If you want to cancel the download, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to
the “Cancel”, and press “enter”, or you can press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
8.2.2 Reading the Received E-mail Messages
If you downloaded e-mail from your server, the e-mail messages will be
listed in the “inbox”. Each e-mail in the “inbox” has the following items.
1. Subject
2. Date
3. From (Sender)
4. CC
5. Message
6. Attach (this will be displayed only for an e-mail that has an attac
hed file)
You can move from one item to the next or previous item by pressing
“Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-tab (Space-1-2)”, respectively.
8.2.2.1 Subject Control
“Subject” shows the title of the e-mail; “Subject: (subject of the e-mail)
xx/yy”. Next to the subject of the email, you will find “xx/yy”, which shows
the number (xx) of the current e-mail out of the total number (yy) of
received e-mail messages. For example, “11/21” means that the e-mail
is the 11th e-mail out of a total of 21 e-mail messages.
If there is an attached file to the e-mail, “a Subject: (subject of the e-mail)
xx/yy” will be displayed. The symbol “a (dot 1)” means that the e-mail
has an attached file. It is displayed as “a (dot 1)” on the Braille display,
and it is announced as “1 attachment”, which indicates the number of the
attached files in voice.
The Braille Sense OnHand also indicates which e-mail messages have
been read, and which e-mail messages have not been read. E-mail
170
messages that have not been read yet have the “-” sign placed in front of
the subject. For example, let’s suppose there is an email with an
attachment that has not been read. It would appear as “-a Subject:
(subject of the e-mail) xx/yy”.
You can move from one e-mail message to the next e-mail message
when this subject is displayed. You can move by using the following
keys:
Move to the next e-mail: Space-4
Move to the previous e-mail: Space-1
Move to the first e-mail in the Inbox: Space-1-2-3 or Space-1-3
Move to the last e-mail in the Inbox: Space-4-5-6 or Space-4-6
8.2.2.2 Date Control
“Date” shows the date and time when the e-mail was received; “Date:
(date), (time) xx/yy”. The date is displayed in the following order: day,
month, date, and year. The time is displayed in the following order:
hour, minute, and second with the 24 hour system. And, “xx/yy” shows
the current number of the email out of the total number of e-mail
messages received. You can also move from one e-mail message to the
next e-mail message when the date is displayed. You can move by
using the following keys;
Move to the next e-mail: Space-4
Move to the previous e-mail: Space-1
Move to the first e-mail in the Inbox: Space-1-2-3 or Space-1-3
Move to the last e-mail in the Inbox: Space-4-5-6 or Space-4-6
The Braille Sense OnHand also indicates which e-mail messages have
been read, and which e-mail messages have not been read. E-mail
messages that have not yet been read will have the “-” sign placed in
front of the date. For example, let’s suppose there is an email that has
been unread. It would appear as “- Date: (date), (time) xx/yy”.
171
8.2.2.3 Sender Control
“From” shows the sender information; “From: (sender’s e-mail address)
xx/yy”. The Braille Sense OnHand also indicates which e-mail messages
have been read, and which e-mail messages have not been read. E-mail
messages that have not been read yet will have the “-” sign placed in
front of the sender. For example, let’s suppose there is an email that has
been unread. It would appear as “- From: (sender’s e-mail address)
xx/yy”
You can save the e-mail id of the sender using the following sequence:
1) Press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)” when “From: (sender’s e-mail address)
xx/yy” is displayed.
2) Then, the “add address” dialog box will be opened, and “Name:
(sender’s user name or e-mail address)” will be displayed.
3) Type in the sender’s name with your Braille keyboard, or press
“tab (Space-4-5)” to move to “Confirm”, and press “enter”.
When you type in the name, you can type it in directly without pressing
the cursor key to designate the input position on the Braille cell, if you
want to retype the name. But, if you designate a specified position by
pressing a corresponding cursor key, you can modify the displayed
name. If the address that was typed in is saved, and the dialog box is
closed, the Braille Sense OnHand will show you the “From” item again.
By saving the e-mail ID using the above method, the name and its e-mail
id will be saved in the Braille Sense OnHand. The saved e-mail ID can
be used to send your message.
If you want to cancel saving the e-mail ID, press “tab (Space-4-5)” to
move to the “Cancel” button, and press “enter”, or just press “Space-e
(dots 1-5)”.
8.2.2.4 CC Control
172
“CC” shows the carbon copy recipient. This control will be shown if the
email has a "CC".
You can save the e-mail id of the carbon copy recipient using the
following sequence:
1) Press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)” when “CC: (carbon copy recipient’s e-
mail address) xx/yy” is displayed.
2) Then, the “add address” dialog box will be opened, and “Name:
(sender’s user name or e-mail address)” will be displayed.
3) Type in the carbon copy recipient’s name with your keyboard, or
press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to “Confirm” and press “enter.”
When you type in the name, you can type it in “Name” edit box directly. If
the address that was typed in is saved, and the dialog box is closed, the
Braille Sense OnHand will show you the “CC” item again.
8.2.2.5 Message Control
“Message” shows the message body of the selected e-mail. You can
move to a message by pressing “tab (Space-4-5)”. Or, you can read a
message by pressing “enter” when “Subject”, “Date”, or “From” is
displayed. In case of pressing “enter” on “Subject”, “Date”, “From”
controls, you will automatically hear the whole message body, if you
want to stop this reading at this time, just press “Backspace-enter”.
If you want to move the “Subject” while reading the message, press
“Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
When you read the message, all of the control keys are the same as in
the word processor.
8.2.2.6 Attachment Control
You can find and download the attached file at “Attach”. It shows only for
the e-mail that has an attached file. “Attach” is displayed in the form of
“Attach: (attached file name) xx/yy”. The “yy” is the total number of the
attached files in the e-mail and “xx” is the “xxth” attached file.
173
The following is the procedure to download attachments;
1) Move to the desired file name in “Attach” by pressing “Space-4” or
“Space-1”.
2) Press “Space” on the file name that you want to download. Then
“*” will be displayed in front of the file name.
3) Press “enter” to download that file. Then “Attachments will be
saved to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to change this
location? No” will be displayed. Press “enter” in here.
By doing so, the selected file will be saved in the “download” folder in
“flashdisk”.
If you have more than one attachment that you want to download, press
“Enter-a (dot 1) to select all of the attached files”. If you want to
download only the attached file that is displayed on the Braille display,
just press “enter” without pressing “Space”.
If you want to change the download path,
1) When you download an attached file, press “enter” while
“Attachments will be saved to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to
change this location? Yes” is displayed.
2) Press “Enter”.
3) Then, “no items” will be displayed when the “/flashdisk/download”
folder is empty. But, if the folder has a lower level folder, “(folder
name) 1/yy” will be displayed. When “Save attachment path” is
executed, the Braille Sense OnHand will only show the folder. So,
if there is no folder in the “download” folder, it will show “no items”.
Move to the desired folder by pressing the move keys below:
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to the previous item: Space-1
Move to the next item: Space-4
4) When you encounter the desired folder, press “Space” to select it,
and then press “enter”. If a folder is selected, “*” will be displayed
in front of the selected folder.
174
In this case, if you select a folder, and press “enter”, the attached file will
be downloaded into the selected folder and return to the “inbox”.
8.2.2.6 Reading HTML type of e-mail
If you received the html type of e-mail, follow these below steps:
1) You can open it with the Web browser regardless of anywhere of
received e-mail by pressing “Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)”.
2) Or after calling menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, move to
“Message” and then press “enter”. You can see menu items of
“Message”. Arrow down to the “Open message in web browser”
and press “enter” then the Web browser program is launched and
you can see html message on the web browser.
If you have links on the html type of e-mail, you can visit linked site by
pressing “enter” on it only when your Braille Sense OnHand is already
connected to internet.
8.2.3 Writing e-mail
After executing “E-mail” program, the following is the procedure to write
e-mail.
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) It shows “File” menu.
3) Press “Enter” on the “File” menu.
4) It shows “Write new message”.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Write new message”.
6) Then “To:” will be displayed on the Braille display. Pressing “Enter-
w (dots 2-4-5-6)” will take you directly to this stage.
7) Press “shift-tab (Space-1-2)” to move to “Account” combo box.
Move to account that you want by using “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
Press “tab (spac-4-5)” to move to “To:”.
175
8) Type in the e-mail address of the recipient when “To:” is displayed.
Please type in the e-mail address using computer Braille (Ex:
sense@braillesense.com).
9) Next, press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to “CC:”.
10) Type in the e-mail address of the other recipient using computer
Braille. If you do not need to carbon copy a recipient, you can skip
to the next step.
11) Press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to “BCC:”.
12) Type in the e-mail address of another recipient using computer
Braille. This e-mail address will not be seen by the recipient or the
carbon copy recipient. If there is no “hidden recipient”, you can
skip to next step.
13) Press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to “Subject:”.
14) Type in the subject of the e-mail message at “Subject:” You can
input the subject in ASCII, Grade 1, or Grade 2. You can change
the mode by pressing “Space-g (dots 1-2-4-5)”.
15) When you finish typing in the subject, press “tab (Space-4-5)” to
move to “Message body:”
16) You can write an e-mail message. The input method and the
editing method are the same as the input and editing method used
in the word processor. You can also write the message in ASCII,
Grade 1, or Grade 2.
17) When you finish writing the e-mail message, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” to call up the “E-mail” menu. Then the “File” menu will
be displayed again.
18) Press “enter”.
19) Press “Space-4” to move to “Send”.
20) Press “enter” when “Send” is displayed. You can send mail
pressing “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)”, without calling up the menu.
21) Then, “Sending…” will be displayed, and the e-mail will be sent
to the recipients. When the Braille Sense OnHand finishes sending
e-mail, “Successfully sent new message”. will be displayed. If it
fails to send the e-mail, the Braille Sense OnHand will display
“Unable to sent message”. If this occurs, the e-mail will be saved
in the “Outbox”.
176
If the Braille Sense OnHand completed or failed to send the e-mail, it will
return to the “Inbox”.
While you execute the above steps, if you want to cancel, press “Space-
e (dots 1-5) or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. Then it will return to the “Inbox”.
8.2.3.1 Attaching file
While writing an e-mail, you can attach file.
The following is the procedure to attach a file.
1) While writing an e-mail, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the
menu. Then, it shows “File” menu.
2) Press “Enter” on the “File” menu.
3) It shows “Attach File”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Attach File”. It will be opened “File list”. You
can attach file by pressing “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”, without calling up
the menu.
5) The default folder for the “file list” is the “upload” folder, which is a
sub folder of “flashdisk”. If there are no files in the “upload” folder
of the Braille Sense OnHand due to any reason, “no items” will be
displayed. In this case, ”,move to the desired folder with the move
keys that are explained below.
The move keys in the file list are as follows;
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to previous item: Space-1
Move to next item: Space-4
Move to the beginning of the list: Space-1-2-3
Move to the end of the list: Space-4-5-6
6) Move to the desired file, and press “enter”. If you want to attach
more than one file, move to the desired file, and press “Space”
repeatedly. Then “*” will be displayed in front of the file names.
Press “enter” if you want to attach the selected files.
177
7) If the selected files are attached, the Braille Sense OnHand will
announce “xx attached”, and then move to the stage before calling
the menu. “xx” is the number of the attached files.
If there are any files attached to an e-mail, the “Attach” item will be
displayed after the “Message body” item like the following: “Attach:
(attached file name) xx/yy (file size)”. “yy” is the total number of attached
files, and “xx” means the “xxth” file out of “yy” files. You can move and
check the attached files by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. If there is
an undesired file in the attached file list, you can delete it from the list by
pressing “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
If you press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”,, “Delete (file name) file? Yes” will be
displayed. If you press “enter”, this file will be deleted from the attached
file list. If you press “Space” to switch from “Yes” to “No”, and then press
“enter”, your selection will be cancelled, and the file will remain on the
attached file list.
8.2.3.2 Sending E-Mail to Multiple Recipients
You can type in more than one recipient, carbon copy recipient, or
hidden recipient. If you type in more than one e-mail address in those
items, the same e-mail will be sent to all of them at the same time.
When you input more than one recipient, you should insert a ‘;’ or ‘,’
between the e-mail addresses using the following Braille dots.
Semi-colon (;): Dots 5-6
Comma (,): Dot 6
For example, sense@braillesense.com; hims@braillesense.com.
8.2.3.3 Searching the Address List
You can type in the recipient in “To”, “CC”, and “BCC” from the address
list without typing in the e-mail address directly.
178
The following are the steps to search for e-mail addresses:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail” menu
at “To”, “CC”, or “BCC”. Then, “File” will be displayed.
2) Press “Enter” on the “File” menu.
3) Press “Space-4” to move to “Lookup Address”.
4) Press “Enter” on “Lookup Address”. Then “Search for address” will
be displayed. Pressing “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” will take you to this
step directly.
5) Type in the last name of the desired recipient at “Search for
address”, and then press “enter”. Or, press “tab (Space-4-5)” to
move to “Confirm”, and then press “enter”.
6) Then, “xx addresses are found” will be displayed, and the first item
of the found addresses is also displayed. Here, “xx” is the number
of the found addresses that have the same name in the address
list (Ex: HIMS hims@brailleSense.com 1/xx).
7) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to the desired address, and
press “enter” when the desired address is displayed. You can
select more than one address by pressing “Space”. When you
choose the addresses you want, press “enter”.
8) Then, the selected addresses are inserted in “To”, “CC” or “BCC”.
If you press “enter” without typing in the desired name, all of the
addresses in your address list will be displayed. If there is no matching
address that you want to find, then “No match”. will be announced and
“Search for address” will be displayed again.
8.2.3.4 Saving E-Mail to the Outbox
There are two kinds of e-mail messages in the “Outbox”.
1. The e-mail that the user saved in “Outbox”.
2. The e-mail that was not sent due to a network error or another reason.
The Menu structure and movement in “Save Mail In Outbox” is like
below.
179
1. “File name” ECB
2. “Confirm” Button
3. “Cancel” Button
4. “Storage folder” List
You can move between the menu controls by using “Shift-Tab (Space-1-
2)” or “Tab (Space-4-5)”.
The following describes how to save email in outbox:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” after you write the e-mail
message. Then, the “File” menu will displayed.
2) Press “enter”.
3) Press “Space-4” to move to “Save Mail In Outbox”.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) Then, the dialog box for save will be opened.
6) “File name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt” will be displayed. You
can jump to this stage by pressing “Space-s (dots 2-3-4)”.
7) Press “Enter” on “File name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt”, or
press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “Confirm” button.
8) Then, the message will be saved as “(subject of writing e-mail).txt”.
9) If you want to name the e-mail message, type in a file name. The
detailed procedure is the same as “Save As” in the Word
processor. You can also change the path for saving it.
10) After the Braille Sense OnHand saves the e-mail message, it will
return to the status it was at before calling the menu.
By following the explanation above, the e-mail message will be saved as
“(subject of writing e-mail).txt” in the “flashdisk/email/storagebox”.
If you do not input the subject in the writing e-mail, it will be displayed as
“noname” on the “File name”.
180
If you want to save the file in another folder, and not in
“flashdisk/email/storagebox”, you will not find the e-mail message when
you execute “Send Mail From Outbox”.
While typing in a “message”, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” if you want to
cancel writing the e-mail.
1) The Braille Sense OnHand will display “Current writing mail.
Save? Yes”.
2) If you want to return to the “inbox” without saving the email, press
“Space” to change “Yes” to “No”, and then press “Enter”.
If you press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” instead of “Space-e (dots 1-5)”
while writing an e-mail message, the Braille Sense OnHand will return to
the “inbox” without asking whether it will save the message or not.
8.2.3.5 Saving E-Mail as New Name in the “Outbox”
If you save e-mail in “Outbox”, you can save it under a different file name.
This “Save Draft In Outbox” function will save the email as new name,
and place it in the outbox.
The Menu structure and movement in “Save Mail In Outbox” is like
below.
1. “File name” ECB
2. “Confirm” Button
3. “Cancel” Button
4. “Storage folder” List
You can move between the menu controls by using “Shift-Tab (Space-1-
2)” or “Tab (Space-4-5)”.
The following describes how to save e-mail as new name in the
“Outbox”:
1) Press “Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
181
2) It shows “File” menu.
3) Press “Enter” on the “File menu”.
4) Press “Space-4” move to “Save Draft In Outbox”.
5) Press “Enter”. Or Without calling the menu, “Space-s (dots 2-3-4)”.
6) The dialog box for save will be opened.
7) It will be displayed “File name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt”.
8) If you want to change file name, type in a file name.
9) Press “Enter”. Or press “Tab (Space-4-5) move to “Confirm” and
press “Enter”.
If you want to cancel, press “Tab” on the “Confirm, move to “Cancel”. Or
press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) regardless of location.
If you want to change the path for saving it, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on
the “Cancel” to move to “Storage folder”. The default folder is in the
“flashdisk/email/storagebox”.
1. If you want to select a folder in “Flashdisk”: By pressing “Space”,
select folder that you want to save. And press “Enter”.
2. If you want to select a folder in external memory: Press “Backspace”,
move to “Disk” list. Move to mailbox that you want to save and press
“Space” for selecting folder.
If you want to save the file in another folder, and not in
“flashdisk/email/storagebox”, you will not find the e-mail message when
you execute “Send Mail From Outbox”.
If you execute the “Save Draft In Outbox” without typing message in
“Message body”, it will hear ‘Message body is empty’. And it will return to
“Message body” control.
While typing in “message body”, if you press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” to
cancel writing an e-mail, the Braille Sense OnHand will display
“Currently writing mail. Save? Yes”. Pressing “Enter”, it will save the e-
mail. And it will exit the “E-mail” program.
If you change “No” to “Yes” by pressing “Space” and press “Enter”, it will
exit the “E-mail” program without saving the e-mail.
182
8.2.3.6 Sending E-Mail in “Outbox”
You can send a saved e-mail in “outbox” when you saved mail
“Outbox” or you didn’t send mail due to a network error or another
reason.
The following describes how to send e-mail In “Outbox”.
1) Execute “E-mail” program.
2) It shows mail list in “Inbox”.
3) Press “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”, move to “Mailbox”.
4) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Outbox”.
5) Press “Enter”.
6) It shows mail list in “Outbox”.
7) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to the mail that you want to
send.
· When you want to send all the emails in the list: Press “Enter-a
(dot 1).
· When you want to send an email by selection an item by item in
the list: Press “Space”.
· When you want to send an email by selection continuously in the
list: Press “Enter-b (dots 1-2). It shows “Start selection”. Move to
the mail that you want to send.
For example, when you send 5 mail in 10 mail lists, press “Enter-b
(dots 1-2)” from the first list of mail. And press “Space-4”, move to
the 5th mail.
8) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
9) Press “Enter” on the “File” menu.
10) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Send” menu.
11) Press “Enter” on the “Send” menu.
12) It will execute sending mail.
Without calling the menu, press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” on the mail that
you want to send of mail lists of the “Outbox”.
183
After sending the mail of the “Outbox”, there is no the mail in “Outbox”.
The mail will move to “Sent item”. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will
return to “inbox”.
8.2.3.7 Setting Default E-mail account
You can set default e-mail account when you registered more than one
e-mail account in Braille Sense OnHand.
The following describes how to set default e-mail account.
1) Execute “E-mail” program.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the menu in mailboxes
except “Outbox”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to “Tools”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Tools menu” or press “T (dots 2-3-4-5)”.
5) It shows the “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Enter” on the “Accounts manager”.
7) It shows “Account name” lists.
8) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to the e-mail account that you
want to set the default account.
9) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Add”.
10) Press “Enter” on the “Add” or press “A (dot 1)”.
11) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Advanced”.
12) Press “Enter” on the “Advanced”.
13) It shows the “Use secure POP3 (POP-SSL)”.
14) Press “Space-4”, move to “Use as default send-from account”.
15) By pressing “Space”, you can change “SCHB” to “UCHB”.
16) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
17) It will return to the “Advanced”.
18) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
19) It will move to account name list With “Successfully modified
service” message.
It shows “default” on the Braille display next to the default account.
184
8.3 Major features of E-mail
8.3.1 Deleting E-mail
You can delete e-mail. You can delete an e-mail message that you have
selected, or, more than one e-mail by selecting each of them individually.
8.3.1.1 Deleting an e-mail
You can delete an e-mail in the mailbox by following the steps below;
1) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to the “Subject” of the e-
mail that you want to delete.
2) Press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
3) Then it shows “Delete (subject of the selected e-mail) mail? Yes”.
4) Press “Enter” if you want to delete the e-mail.
If you want to cancel it, press “Space” to change “Yes” to “No” on the
“Delete (subject to the selected e-mail) mail?”. And Press “Enter”.
By pressing “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, you can
cancel deleting e-mail.
8.3.1.2 Deleting Multiple E-mail Messages
If you want to delete more than one e-mail, delete the e-mail messages
using the following steps:
1) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to the e-mail “Subject” that
you want to delete. You can select it in “Date control”, too.
2) Press “Space” on the e-mail that you want to delete.
3) It shows “*” in front of the selected e-mail subject on Braille display.
4) Move to the other e-mail that you want to delete by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1”. Then, press “Space”.
5) Once you finish selecting all of the e-mail you want to delete,
press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
185
6) It shows “Delete xx mail? Yes”. “Xx” is the total number of deleting
e-mail.
7) Press “Enter”.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Space” to change to “No” on
the “Delete xx mail? Yes”. Press “Enter”.
Or you can cancel it by pressing “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)”.
8.3.1.3 Deleting E-Mail by Making a Selection
If you want to delete multiple e-mail by designating a selection, you can
delete them as follows:
1) Press “Enter-a (dot 1)” on the “Subject” or “Date” control.
2) Then, all of the e-mail will be selected.
3) It shows “*” in front of all of the e-mail on the Braille display.
4) Press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
5) It shows the “Delete xx mail? Yes”. “Xx” is the total number of
deleting e-mail.
6) Press “Enter”.
7) All of the selected e-mail will be deleted.
If you want to delete the successive e-mail, you can delete them using
the following steps:
1) Press “Enter-b (dots 1-2)” on the first e-mail where you want to
start the selection.
2) Press “Space-4” to move to the last e-mail that you want to delete.
3) Press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
4) It will “Delete xx mail? Yes”. “Xx” is the total number of deleting e-
mail.
5) Press “Enter”.
186
You can Press “Enter-b (dots 1-2)” which will make the selection. In front
of the e-mail subjects selected, “*” will be attached.
If you have pressed “Enter-a (dot 1)” or “Enter-b (dots 1-2)”, but you
want to cancel it, press “Space” to change “No” on the “Delete xx mail?
Yes”. And press “Enter”.
Or you can cancel it by pressing “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)”.
8.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail
When you reply to an email that was received, you can edit or add a
message to the original message or add another recipient. For example,
you can reply to an e-mail message that you previously received in your
“inbox”. Let’s demonstrate with an example. Suppose you received an
email that has the following information:
Sender’s e-mail address: hims@brailleSense.com
Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS
You could reply to this e-mail by completing the following steps:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu when you
are in “Subject”, “Date”, or “Message” of the “Inbox”.
2) It shows the “File”.
3) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Message”.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It shows “Reply”.
6) Press “Enter” on the “Reply”.
7) It shows “Message body”.
8) You can find the original message body of the received email; “–--
Original Message –--” followed by the received email message.
You can get to this stage by pressing “Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)”.
9) Press “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)” to move to “Subject”, “BCC””, “CC”,
and “To”.
187
10) At “Subject”, it shows “Subject: Re: Welcome to HIMS”. And, at
“To”, it shows “To: hims@braillesense.com“.
11) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to “Message body”.
12) Type in the “Message body” that you want to add or edit.
13) Press “Enter-s (Dots 2-3-4) to send the e-mail.
When you reply the e-mail, after you press “Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)”, you
can add recipient or attach file as well as write an e-mail.
If you want to add another e-mail recipient, press the “cursor routing key”
that is located at the position where you want to add the recipient, and
type in the new e-mail address. Use computer Braille when typing in this
information.
You can also save the e-mail that you are writing as a reply. It will be
saved in the “Outbox”.
You can reply to an email by using “Reply To All”, as well as “Reply”.
Pressing “Reply” will send an e-mail to only the original sender.
Pressing “Reply To All” will send an email back to the original sender as
well as all other recipients in the original email. However, “Reply To All”
will not send an email to you, even though you were a recipient of the
original email.
To activate the “Reply To All” function,
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
2) It shows the “File”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Message”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Message”.
5) It shows the “Reply”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to “Reply To All”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Reply To All”. You can activate the “Reply To
All” function without calling up the menu by pressing “Backspace-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)”.
188
8) It shows “To: (all email addresses of the original sender and the
original recipients)”
9) Then, you can use the same steps to send a message as you
would when using the “Reply” function.
8.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message
“Forwarding” means that you will send an e-mail that you received to
another person. You can also add or edit the message and subject.
You can also attach a file to this e-mail.
Let’s explain how to use “Forward” with an example.
Let’s suppose there is an e-mail message that you received as follows:
Sender’s e-mail address: hims@braillesense.com
Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS
You can forward this e-mail to the others using the following method:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu in the
“Subject”, “Date”, or “Message”.
2) It shows the “File”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Message”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Message”.
5) It shows the “Reply”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to “Forward”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Forward”.
8) It shows “To:” You can move to this stage by pressing “Enter-f
(dots 1-2-4)”. Input the e-mail address of the new recipient using
computer Braille.
9) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “CC”, “BCC”, and “Subject”.
10) At “Subject”, It shows “Subject: Fw: Welcome to HIMS”.
11) Press “Tab (“Space-4-5”)”, move to “Message body”.
12) You can find the original e-mail message with the following
message; “----- Forwarded Message -----”.
13) Type in the “Message body” that you want to add or edit.
189
14) Press “Enter-s (Dots 2-3-4) to send the e-mail.
When you forward an e-mail, the method is the same as write an e-mail.
So, you can type in additional recipients and attach files to the email that
you are forwarding.
You can also save the e-mail that you are writing in the “Outbox”.
8.3.4 Saving a Received E-mail as Document
You may need to save an e-mail as a document when you are reading
an e-mail in the “Inbox”. You can do this by completing the following
steps:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
2) It shows the “File”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “File”.
4) Press “Space-4”, move to “Save As Text”.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Save As Text”.
6) It will open the “save as dialog box”.
7) And it shows “File name: (subject of e-mail under reading).txt”.
Without calling up the menu, you can move to this stage directly
by pressing “Space-s (dots 2-3-4)”.
8) Press “Enter” on the “File name: (subject of e-mail under
reading).txt”. Or press “tab (Space-4-5)”, move to the “Confirm”,
and press “Enter”. You can rename the file. The method is the
same as “Save as” in Word processor.
9) You will return to where you call the menu automatically if the e-
mail is saved.
The text file will be saved in “flashdisk/My Documents” with the file name
“(subject of e-mail under reading).txt”. You cannot change the file
format. You can read the saved text file in the word processor.
190
In order to cancel “Save As Text”, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on the
“Confirm”, move to “Cancel”. And press “Enter”. Or, just press “Space-e
(dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
8.3.5 Printing E-Mail Messages
You may want to print an email that you received or sent in using either
an embosser or an ink printer.
In order to print with an ink printer, do the following:
1) Connect the Braille Sense OnHand to an ink printer with the
printer cable that was provided by the manufacturer of the printer.
The printing port must be the same port that was set in the “Print
port” in the “Global options”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) It shows “File”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “File”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Print E-mail”.
6) Press “Enter” on the “Print E-mil”.
7) It shows the “Print type”. Without calling up the menu, press
“Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” to move to this stage directly.
8) Press “Space” or “Space-4”, you change setting value of the “Print
type”. Setting value is “Printer” and “Embosser”.
9) After selecting the “Print type”, press “Enter”. Or press “Tab
(Space-4-5), move to the “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
10) Then, the selected e-mail will be printed.
If you want to cancel printing, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” on the “Cancel”
and press “Enter”. Or you can press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)”.
191
8.4 Additional features of E-mail
8.4.1 Find
The “Find” command is used to find text in the current mailbox. Once
you enter text to find, the “Find” function will look for text that matches in
“Subject”, “Date”, and/or “From”. This function only works in “Subject”,
“Date”, or “From” control.
The “Find” dialog box consists of a “Find”:
1. “Find”: Edit box for text to search
2. “Search” radio button
3. “Direction” radio button
4. “Confirm” button
5. “Cancel” button.
In the “Find” dialog box, you can move between the five controls by
pressing “Tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “Shift-Tab (“Space-1-2”)”. The shortcut
key is “f (dots 1-2-4)”. You can move to this function without calling up
the menu by pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”.
To activate the “Find” function, use the following steps:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
2) It shows the “File”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Edit”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Edit”.
5) It shows the “Select All”.
6) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1”, move to “Find”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Find”. Or press “f (dots 1-2-4)”.
8) It shows the “Find:” edit box where the user can type the text that
they want to find.
9) After typing in the text, press “Tab (“Space-4-5”)”, move to the
“Search”. Here you can select between “All”, “Subject”, “Date”, or
“From”. “All” control means search all controls: “Subject”, “Date”,
and “From”. You can select an item by pressing “Space-4” or
192
“Space-1”. By selecting a specific control, you can search the
control for the text that you want to find.
10) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to the “Direction” which has two
choices, “Forward” or “Backward”. Pressing “Space-4” or “Space-
1” lets you select the searching direction as “Forward” or
“Backward”.
11) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to the “Confirm”.
12) Press “Enter” on the “Confirm”.
If you want to cancel, press “Tab (“Space-4-5”)” on the “Confirm”, move
to the “Cancel”. And press “Enter”. Or, you can press “Space-z (dots 1-3-
5-6)” or “Space-e (dots 1-5)” anywhere in this dialog box to cancel.
8.4.2 Find Again
The “Find Again” command finds the next text according to what you
found using “Find” dialog box, and it will go to the previous text if you set
the direction to “Backward” when you used the “Find” function before.
The “Find Again” function only works in the “Subject”, “Date”, or “From”
control.
To activate the “Find Again” function, use the following steps:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or “F2” to call up the menu.
2) It shows the “File”
3) Press “Sapce-4”, move to the “Edit”
4) Press “Enter” on the “Edit”.
5) It shows the “Select All”.
6) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Find Again”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Find Again”. Or press “g (dots 1-2-4-5)”.
To activate this function without calling up the menu, press “Backspace-f
(dots 1-2-4)”.
193
8.4.3 Move to Next Unread Message
The “Move To Next Unread Message” option allows you to move to the
next message that doesn’t read. If you use this function on the last
unread message in a list, you will move to the first unread message in
the list.
To activate this function while you are in the “Subject”, “Date”, or “From”
control,
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu.
2) It shows the “Find”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Edit”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Edit”.
5) It shows the “Select all”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Move to Next Unread Message”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Move to Next Unread Message”. Or press “u
(dots 1-3-6).
To use this function without calling up the menu, press “Enter-u (dots 1-
3-6)”.
8.4.4 Copy or Move to mailbox
There are two methods how to copy or move an e-mail to folder.
1. You can copy and move e-mails directly in “Mailbox” lists except
“Outbox”.
In order to copy and move an e-mail to folder, follow there steps:
1) Execute “E-mail” program.
2) Press “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”, move to the “Mailbox” lists.
3) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to the “Mailbox” including the
e-mail that you want to copy and move.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It shows e-mail lists.
194
6) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to the e-mail that you want to
copy or move. Press “Space”, “Enter-b (dots 1-2) or “Enter-a (dot
1)”, select the e-mail that you want to copy or move. Or you can
select the e-mail using the “Select All” or “Start Selection” of the
“Edit” menu.
7) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
8) It shows the “File”.
9) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Edit”.
10) Press “Enter” on the “Edit”.
11) It shows the “Select All”.
12) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Copy” or “Move”.
13) Press “Enter”. Or without calling up the menu, by pressing
“Enter-c (dots 1-4)” or “Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6), you can execute
functions directly.
14) Press “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”, move to the “Mailbox” lists.
15) Press “Enter” on the “Mailbox” that you want to paste the e-mail.
16) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
17) It shows the “File”.
18) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Edit”.
19) Press “Enter” on the “Edit”.
20) It shows the “Select All”.
21) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Paste” and press “Enter”. Or
without calling up the menu, press “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).
22) It will be copied or moved the e-mail to mailbox.
2. You can copy and move e-mails using the “Copy to mailbox” or “Move
to mailbox” in the “Edit” menu.
The structure and move of “Copy to mailbox” and “Move to mailbox”
menu is like below.
1. “Folder” list.
2. “Create mailbox” Button
3. “Delete mailbox” Button
4. “Rename mailbox” Button
5. “Confirm” Button
195
6. “Cancel” Button
You can move between the controls by pressing “Tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“Shift-Tab (“Space-1-2”)”. And you can move among items in the
“Folder” list by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
If you want to cancel while you are in these dialog boxes, press “Space-
e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
In order to copy and move an e-mail to another folder, follow there steps:
1) You can select the e-mail by pressing “Space”, “Enter-b (Dots 1-2)
or “Enter-a (dot 1). Or you can select the e-mail using the “Select
All” or “Start Selection” of the “Edit” menu.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call up the menu.
3) It shows the “File”.
4) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Edit”.
5) Press “Enter” on the “Edit”.
6) It shows the “Select All”.
7) Press “Sapce-4”, move to the “Copy to mailbox” or “Move to
mailbox”.
8) Press “Enter” on the “Copy to mailbox” or “Move to mailbox”.
9) It shows “Folder list”. Or without calling up the menu, press
“Backspace-c (dots 1-4)” or “Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6).
10) Press “Space-4”, move to the folder that you want to copy or
move.
11) Press “Enter”.
12) It will be copied or cut the e-mail in the folder.
13) It will return to the “Mailbox” before calling the menu.
8.4.4.1 Adding Create mailbox
You can add create mailbox in the e-mail folder of the “File manager”.
In order to execute this function, follow these steps:
1) Execute “E-mail” program.
196
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mail lists of
“Inbox”.
3) It shows “File”.
4) Press “Space-4”, move to “Edit” and Press “Enter”. Or Press “e
(dots 1-5).
5) It shows “Select All”.
6) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Copy to mailbox” or “Move
to mailbox”.
7) Press “Enter”. Or press “Backspace-c (dots 1-4)” or “Backspace-x
(dots 1-3-4-6), without calling the menu.
8) It shows “Folder” lists.
9) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to the “Create folder”.
10) Press “Enter” on the “Create mailbox”.
11) It shows “Folder name:” Type the folder name.
12) Press “Enter” or press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Confirm” and
press “Enter”.
13) It shows the create mailbox in “Folder” list. Also the folder is in
“Mailbox” and in e-mail folder of “File manager”.
8.4.4.2 Deleting Folder
You can’t delete “Inbox”, “Sent”, “Outbox”. But you can delete the added
folders.
In order to delete the folder, follow these steps:
1) Execute “E-mail” program.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mail lists of
“Inbox”.
3) It shows “File”.
4) Press “Space-4”, move to “Edit” and Press “Enter”. Or Press “e
(dots 1-5).
5) It shows “Select All”.
6) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Copy to mailbox” or “Move
to mailbox”.
7) Press “Enter”. Or press “Backspace-c (dots 1-4)” or “Backspace-x
(dots 1-3-4-6), without calling the menu.
197
8) It shows “Folder” lists.
9) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to the folder that you want to
delete.
10) Press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Delete mailbox”.
11) Press “Enter”.
12) It shows “Delete (folder name) folder? Yes”.
13) Press “Enter”.
By pressing “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on the folder that you want to delete,
you can delete the folder.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Tab (Space-4-5) on the
“Confirm”, move to “Cancel”. And press “Enter”.
If you attempt to delete the “inbox”, “Sent” or “storagebox”, you will hear
the warning sound to notify you of the error.
8.4.4.3 Changing Folder Name
You can’t change folder name of the “Inbox” and the “Storagebox”.
In order to change the folder name, follow these steps:
1) Execute “E-mail” program.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mail lists of
“Inbox”.
3) It shows “File”.
4) Press “Space-4”, move to “Edit” and Press “Enter”. Or Press “e
(dots 1-5).
5) It shows “Select All”.
6) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Copy to mailbox” or “Move
to mailbox”.
7) Press “Enter”. Or press “Backspace-c (dots 1-4)” or “Backspace-x
(dots 1-3-4-6), without calling the menu.
8) It shows “Folder” lists.
9) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to the folder that you want to
change.
198
10) Press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Rename mailbox”.
11) Press “Enter”.
12) It shows “Folder name:”
13) Type the folder name that you want to change.
14) Press “Enter. Or press “Tab (Space-4-5) move to “Confirm” and
press “Enter”.
If you attempt to rename the “inbox” or “storagebox”, you will hear the
warning sound to notify you of the error.
8.5 Use the Tools Menu
You can set path and option of the “E-mail”.
The “Tools” menu has the following four sub menus:
1. Accounts manager
2. Set path
3. Set options
4. Set spam
Each sub menu except the “Accounts manager” will be explained in
detail in this section.
8.5.1 Set Path
“Set Path” sets the default download path where file attachments and
email are stored. You can set the download path using the following
method:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail” menu
in the “Inbox”.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Set Path”.
6) Press “Enter” on “Set Path”.
199
7) It shows “Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download”. You can
move to this stage by pressing “Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, without
calling the menu.
“Set Path” contains the following three items:
1. Save attachments path
2. Send attachments path
3. Disk to save mail in
You can move among these items by pressing “Space-4” and “Space-1”.
Each item consists of “Path”, “Modify”, and “Close”. At “Path”, the
default path will be displayed. You can move among this information by
pressing “tab (Space-4-5)” or “shift-tab (Space-1-2)”.
“Set Path” will be closed if you press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)”. Or, you can close it by pressing enter on the “Close”
button.
8.5.1.1 Set the Save Attachments Path
The default path for downloaded attached files is “/flashdisk/download”.
You can set the download path using the following method:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail” menu
in the “Inbox”.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Set Path”.
6) Press “Enter” on “Set Path”.
7) It shows “Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download”. You can
move to this stage by pressing “Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”, without
calling the menu.
8) Press “Enter” on “Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download”, or
press “m (dots 1-3-4)”. Or, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to
the “Modify” button, and then press “Enter”.
200
9) It shows “download folder xx/yy”.
Move to the desired folder by pressing move keys below:
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to the previous item: Space-1
Move to the next item: Space-4
10) When you encounter the desired folder, press “Space” to select
it, and then press “Enter”. If a folder is selected, “*” will be
displayed in front of the selected folder.
If you press “Enter” to set the path, the Braille Sense OnHand shows the
changed path. If you changed the path to the “My Documents” folder that
is one of the lower level folders located in “flashdisk”, “Save attachments
path: /flashdisk/My Documents” would be displayed.
8.5.1.2 Set the Send Attachments Path
“Send attachments path” is the path where the attached files are saved.
The default path is “/flashdisk/upload”. You can change this path to a
different path using the following method:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail” menu
in the “Inbox”.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Set Path”.
6) Press “Enter” on “Set Path”.
7) It shows “Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download”.
8) Press “Space-4”, move to “Send attachments path:
/flashdisk/upload”.
9) Press “Enter” or “m (dots 1-3-4)” on “Send attachments path:
/flashdisk/upload”. Or, press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to the
“Modify” button and then press “Enter”.
10) It shows “upload folder xx/yy”
201
Move to the desired folder by pressing the following keys:
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Move to previous item: Space-1
Move to next item: Space-4
11) Press “Space” to select the desired folder, and press “Enter”.
12) It shows “*” in front of the selected folder.
If you finish setting the path by pressing “Enter”, the Braille Sense
OnHand will show the changed path. If you changed the path from the
“upload” folder to the “music” folder in the “flashdisk”,, it displays “Send
attachments path: /flashdisk/music”.
8.5.1.3 Set the Disk to save E-mail
The e-mail messages that are downloaded from your network are saved
in the “Email” folder, which is a lower level folder of “flashdisk”.. If the
size of an email you are receiving is so large that it cannot be
downloaded and stored in the “flashdisk”,, you can change to a different
disk using the following method:
1) Connect the external storage disc to the Braille Sense OnHand.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail” menu
in the “Inbox”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It shows “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to “Set Path”.
7) Press “Enter” on “Set Path”.
8) It shows “Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download”.
9) Press “Space-4”, move to “Disk to save mail in: /flashdisk”.
10) Press “Enter” or “m (dots 1-3-4)” on “Disk to save mail in:
/flashdisk”. Or, press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to the “Modify”
button, and press “Enter”.
11) It shows “flashdisk”.
202
12) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1”, move to the disk list. If you have
connected a USB memory stick or SD card, it shows “USB” (stick
memory) or “sd” (secure digital card).
13) Press “Enter” on the desired disk name.
It will show the disk name if the disc setting is completed when you
press “enter”.. If you changed it to “sd card”, it will show “Disk to save
mail in: /sd”. If it is changed, the “Email” folder will be created
automatically in the selected disc, and the e-mail messages will be
downloaded in this disk.
8.5.2 Set Options
In “Set Options”, you can set the “Inbox” with default folder when the “E-
mail program is started and save mail copies in “Sent” folder.
8.5.2.1 Using the “Inbox” with Default Folder
If you set the “Inbox” with default folder, it will move to list of
“Inbox” whenever the “E-mail” program is started.
In order to use the “Inbox” with default folder, follow these stets:
1) Execute “E-mail”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail”
menu in the “Inbox”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It shows “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to “Set Options”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Set Options”. Or without calling the menu,
press “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5).
8) It shows “ Use inbox as default mailbox when starting: Yes”. If
you don’t use inbox as default mailbox, press “Space”.
9) Press “Enter”.
203
If you want to cancel this function, press “Space-e (dots 1-5) or “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6).
8.5.2.2 Saving Mail Copies in Sent Folder.
When you success sending e-mail, you can save mail copies in “Sent
Item” folder or not.
In order to save mail copies in sent folder, follow these steps:
1) Execute “E-mail”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “E-mail”
menu in the “Inbox”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It shows “Accounts manager”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to “Set Options”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Set Options”. Or without calling the menu,
press “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5).
8) It shows “Use the inbox with default folder when the program is
started? Yes”.
9) Press “Tab (Space 4-5)”.
10) It shows “Saving mail copies in sent folder? Yes”. If you don’t
save mail copies in sent folder, press “Space”.
11) Press “Enter”.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Space-e (dots 1-5) or “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6).
8.5.3 Spam Settings
When the Braille Sense OnHand downloads e-mail from the e-mail
server, there may be a lot of spam message. In this case, you can avoid
downloading these spam messages by registering specified words in the
subject or the specified e-mail address.
204
The spam messages that are set at “Spam Settings” will not be
downloaded into the Braille Sense OnHand, and will remain on the e-
mail server.
Use the following steps to set up spam e-mail:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while
you are in the “inbox”.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Spam Settings”.
6) Press “Enter”.
7) It shows “Type: Subject 1/3”. Without calling the menu, you can
also execute to this stage directly by pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
Now, you are in the “Spam Settings” menu.
“Spam Settings” contains the following 6 items:
1. Type
2. List
3. Add
4. Modify
5. Delete
6. Close
You can move among the items by pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-
Tab (Space-1-2)”..
In order to exit from “Spam Settings”,, move to the “Close” button and
press “enter”, or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
“Type” consists of 3 sub items: “Subject”, “E-mail address string”, and
“Host”. You can move among these sub items by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.. The “list” will be displayed in a different form according to the
sub item of the “Type”..
205
If you have selected “Subject”,, the list will be displayed as “Subject:
(Registered word) 1/xx”. If you selected “E-mail address string”,, it will be
displayed as “E-mail address string: (Registered e-mail address string)
1/xx”.. It will be displayed as “no items 0/0” if there is no registered word
or e-mail address string.
Now we will explain how to register, modify, and delete the spam
settings.
8.5.3.1 Add As Spam E-Mail
First, we will explain how to set the e-mail program to sort out spam by
setting any specified words in the e-mail subject.
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while
you are in the “inbox”..
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”..
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Spam Settings”.
6) Press “Enter”..
7) It shows “Type: Subject 1/3”. Without calling the menu, you can
also execute to this stage directly by pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
8) Press “a (dot 1)” when “Type: Subject 1/3” is displayed. Or,
press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “Add” button, and then
press “enter”..
9) Then, the “add dialog box” will be opened and “Subject add:” will
be displayed.
10) Type in the words, and press “Enter”.. Or, press “Tab (“Space-4-
5”)” to move to the “Confirm”, and then press “enter” after you type
in the words.
11) Then, “Successfully added spam data”. will be announced and
you will be returned to the “list”.. Then, “Subject: (registered word)
1/1” will be displayed.
206
If there is more than one registered word, you can check it by pressing
“Space-1” or “Space-4”.
By adding the word as explained above, if there are any e-mail
messages that include the words you entered in the subject of the
message, the Braille Sense OnHand will download those e-mails from
the e-mail server, but will delete them automatically. So those e-mails
will not be in the inbox.
You can also avoid receiving e-mail messages from a specific sender or
host by registering it.
The following are the steps to register a sender’s e-mail address:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while
you are in the “inbox”..
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”..
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Spam Settings”.
6) Press “Enter”..
7) It shows “Type: Subject 1/3”. Without calling the menu, you can
also execute to this stage directly by pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
8) Press “Space-4” when “Type: Subject 1/3” is displayed. Then,
“Type: E-mail address string 2/3” will be displayed.
9) Press “a (dot 1)” or press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “Add”
button, and press “enter”..
10) Then, the “Add dialog box” will be opened, and “E-mail address
string: (e-mail address)” will be displayed. The “(e-mail address)”
is the sender’s e-mail address that was focused.
11) Press “Enter” on “E-mail address sting: (e-mail address)”.. Or,
press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “Confirm”, and then press
“Enter”..
12) Then, “Successfully added spam data” will be announced and
“E-mail address string: (Registered e-mail address) 1/1” will be
displayed.
207
If you set it once, the e-mails from the e-mail addresses will be
downloaded from the e-mail server, but the Braille Sense OnHand will
delete those e-mails automatically. So those e-mails will not be found in
the inbox.
You can add an additional e-mail address by modifying the e-mail
address that you have typed in. If you type in a new e-mail address at
“E-mail address string: (e-mail address)”,, the displayed e-mail address
will be erased, and the new e-mail address will be displayed. But, if you
press the “cursor routing key” at the position where you want to modify
the displayed address, that address will be modified as you type in the
modifications.
When “E-mail address string: (registered e-mail address) 1/1” is
displayed, you can add it by pressing “a (dot 1)” or pressing “Tab
(Space-4-5)” to move to the “Add, and press “Enter”. You can check the
registered e-mail addresses by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
If you want to register a specific host as a spam sender, do the following:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while
you are in the “inbox”..
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”..
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Spam Settings”.
6) Press “Enter”..
7) It shows “Type: Subject 1/3”. Without calling the menu, you can
also execute to this stage directly by pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
8) Press “Space-4” when “Type: Subject 1/3” is displayed in order
to move to “Type: Host 3/3”..
9) Press “a (dot 1)” on “Type: Host 3/3”,, or press “Tab (Space-4-
5)” to move to the “Add” button, and then press “Enter”..
10) Then, the “Add dialog box” will be opened, and “Host add: (host
address)” will be displayed. Here, “host address” is the host
address that was focused on when you executed this command.
208
11) Press “Enter” on “Host add: (host address)”.. Or, press “tab
(Space-4-5) to move to the “Confirm” button, and then press
“enter”..
12) Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Successfully added
spam data” and it will show “Host: (registered host address) 1/1”..
If you add the host address as above, the e-mails from the registered
host will be downloaded from the e-mail server, but the Braille Sense
OnHand will delete them automatically. So those e-mails will not be
found in the inbox.
At step 5 above, you can add the additional host address by modifying
the host address that you have typed in. If you type in a new host
address at “Host add: (host address)”, the displayed host address will be
erased, and the new host address will be displayed. But, if you press the
“cursor routing key” at the position where you want to modify the
displayed address, that address will be modified where you modify it.
When “Host: (registered host address) 1/1” is displayed, you can add it
by pressing “a (dot 1)” or pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the
“Add” button, and then press “Enter”. You can check the registered host
addresses by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
When you register a subject, e-mail address, or host as spam e-mail,
you may make a mistake while typing in a subject, e-mail address, or
host. In this case, you need to modify the subject while typing them in.
Please refer to the following correction methods:
1. In order to delete the current letter, press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”
2. In order to delete the previous letter, press “Backspace”.
3. In order to delete the current line, press “BackSpace-1-4”. Then,
“Delete line: yes” will be displayed. Press “enter” to delete the line.
Or, if you do not want to delete the line, press “Space” to toggle “Yes”
to “No”, and then press “enter”.
209
If you want to cancel setting spam at the “Add dialog box”, press “Tab
(Space-4-5)” to move to the “Cancel” button, and press “Enter”. Or, just
press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
8.5.3.2 Modifying Spam Registration
In order to modify a “Subject” that has been registered, do the following:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while
you are in the “inbox”.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Spam Settings”.
6) Press “Enter”.
7) It shows “Type: Subject 1/3”. Without calling the menu, you can
also execute to this stage directly by pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
8) Move to “list” by pressing “tab (Space-4-5)”. Then, “Subject:
(Registered word) 1/xx” will be displayed.
9) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1” to move to the word to be modified.
10) Press “m (dots 1-3-4)” on the word to be modified. Or, press
“tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “Modify” button, and press “enter”.
11) Then, the modify dialog box will be opened, and “Subject modify:
(selected word)” will be displayed.
12) If you type in a new word directly, the displayed word will be
erased, and the new word will be displayed. If you want to modify
a part of the displayed word, press the “cursor routing key” at the
position where you want to modify the word, and type in the letters
that you want to modify.
13) Press “enter” after you type in the new word. Or, press “tab
(Space-4-5)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and then press
“enter”.
14) Then “Successfully modified spam data”. will be announced, and
you will be returned to the “list”. If there is more than one word in
the list, you can look them up by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
210
If you want to modify the e-mail addresses or host addresses that have
been registered, execute step 1 above. Press “Space-4” to move to
“Type: E-mail address string 2/3” and “Type: Host 3/3”. You can modify
them with the same method as explained above.
If you want to cancel registration, press “Tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the
“Cancel” button, and press “enter”. Or, you can press “Space-e (dots 1-
5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
8.5.3.3 Deleting Spam
You can delete an item that has been registered in the spam list.
Let’s start our explanation from “Subject”.
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu while
you are in the “inbox”.
2) Press “Space-4”, move to the “Tools”.
3) Press “Enter”.
4) It shows “Accounts manager”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Spam Settings”.
6) Press “Enter”.
7) It shows “Type: Subject 1/3”. Without calling the menu, you can
also execute to this stage directly by pressing “Enter-e (dots 1-5)”.
8) Press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “list”. Then, “Subject:
(Registered word) 1/xx” will be displayed.
9) Press “Space-4” or “Space-1” to delete the registered word.
10) Press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” to delete the selected word. Or,
press “tab (Space-4-5)” to move to the “Delete” button, and press
“enter”.
11) Then, “Successfully deleted” will be announced and “list” will
show again. You can check the remaining words by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1”.
You may delete an “E-mail address string” or “Host” in the spam list, too.
Press “Space-4” to move to “Type: E-mail address string 2/3” or “Type:
Host 3/3”, and execute. The method is the same as explained above.
211
8.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail
8.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox
Call “Accounts manager”: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Check for new mail: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Write New Message: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Reply: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Reply all: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Forward: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Call up “set path”: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Call up “set option”: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Call up “set spam”: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to unread message: Enter-u (dots 1-3-4)
Move to mailbox: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy to mailbox: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Add a sender to the address list: Enter-i (dots 2-4) (This is valid only at
the “from” item of the “inbox”).
Delete received e-mail: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is valid only at the
“Subject” and “date” item in the “inbox”).
Save the received e-mail as text file: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print the received e-mail: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
8.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and
Save in the Mail Outbox
Search address list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Attach file: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Send e-mail: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save in mail outbox: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
212
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
8.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mail Messages or Writing an E-mail
Message
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Copy to the clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut to the clipboard: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) (It is not valid when you are
reading e-mail in the “inbox”).
Paste from the clipboard: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) (It is not valid when you
are reading e-mail in the “inbox”).
Delete: Space-d (dots 1-2) (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in
the “inbox”).
Cancel block: Space-e (dots 1-5)
213
9. Media Player
The Media Player on the Braille Sense OnHand is a program which you
can use to play audio files. The Media Player will play the following
formats, ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, mp4, mpa, mpg, ogg, pls,, wav,
wax, wma, flac, midi and wmv. Note that you will not be able to see the
video with “avi” and “wmv” files.
You can control the playing of audio files using either the Braille
keyboard commands or audio keys that are on the front panel of the
Braille Sense OnHand. The Media Player can play back recorded voices
as well as music files.
9.1 Using the Audio Buttons
There are a series of buttons on the front panel of the Braille Sense
OnHand. These buttons can be used to control the Media Player. You
will find five buttons on the Braille Sense OnHand. Starting from the left,
and going to the right, the buttons are called: “previous”, “record”, “stop”,
“play/pause”, and “next”. These buttons are used for playing and
recording music or voice quickly and easily.
If the “play/pause” button is pressed while you are using a program other
than the Media Player, the Braille Sense OnHand will play the files in the
play list. If there are no files in the play list, the Braille Sense OnHand
says, “There are no items to display”. The other buttons, “previous”,
“stop”, and “next” are available after you start playing audio by pressing
the “play/pause” button.
Even if the Media Player starts when you press the “play/pause” button
while you are using another program, the Braille Sense OnHand will not
stop the program that is currently running.
9.1.1 Play/Pause Button
The “play/pause” button has a long, rectangle shape. To locate the
“play/pause” button, find the button that is furthest to the right on the
214
front panel. Then, move one button to the left. This is the
“play/pause” button. With the “play/pause” button, you can easily play
audio files registered in the play list. If there are no files that have been
registered in the play list, the Braille Sense OnHand will display the
message, “There are no items to display”. You have to add a file to the
play list before it can be played. There is a detailed explanation on how
to add files to the play list in section 9.2.2. If there is more than one file
in the play list when you press the “play/pause” button, the Braille Sense
OnHand will start playing all the files in the list one after another. If you
press the “play/pause” button again while a file is being played, the
playback will be paused. If you want to resume playing, press the
button again. If you press the “play/pause” button while you are in the
“record” dialog box, the sound that was recorded most recently will be
played back to you.
9.1.2 Next button and previous button
These buttons have a triangular shape. The “previous” button is the
first button from the left on the front panel, and it points to the left. The
“next” button is the button that is farthest to the right on the front panel,
and it points to the right. If you press the “next” button, the next file in
the play list will be played, and pressing the “previous” button will play
the previous file. If you press one of these buttons while an audio file is
being played, the Braille Sense OnHand will stop playing the current file,
and jump to the previous or next file (depending on which button you
press) in the play list, and start playing it. If you press the “next” button
(while the last file in the list is being played), or the “previous” button
(while the first file in the list is being played), it will have no effect, as the
Braille Sense OnHand will not stop playing the current file.
9.1.3 Record Button
The “record” button has a circular shape, and is used to record sound
using the built-in or an external microphone. The “record” button is
located directly to the right of the “previous” button. To use this button
to record sound, you should be either in the “Media Player”, or in the
215
“program” menu. If you press the “record” button once, the Braille
Sense OnHand will open the “record” dialog box. If you press the
“record” button again, the Braille Sense OnHand will resume recording.
When you press the “record” button while you are recording, the Braille
Sense OnHand will pause your recording. You can resume the
recording by pressing the “record” button again. The recorded sound
will be stored in a file, and placed in the “flashdisk/media/record” folder.
See section 9.3.3 for more information about recorded files.
9.1.4 Stop Button
The “stop” button has a square shape, and is used to stop playing. If
you press the “stop” button while an audio file is being played, the Braille
Sense OnHand will stop playing. The next time the Braille Sense
OnHand starts playing, it will start from the first file in the play list. If
you press this button while recording, the Braille Sense OnHand will stop
recording. If you press the “stop” button in “record” dialog box while the
Braille Sense OnHand is not recording, the dialog box will close.
9.1.5 Using the Audio buttons in file open dialog box
You can open “Open File” dialog box by long pressing “stop” button in
the “Media player” dialog box. And if you long press the “stop” button
again, this dialog box will close. And then return to the “Media player”
dialog box.
“play/pause” button is same function as “Enter” in “Open File” dialog box.
Also “stop” button, “record” button, “previous” button and “next” button is
same function as “Backspace”, “Space”, “Space-1” and “Space-4” in
“Open File” dialog box.
Namely, you can move to up and down by pressing “previous” and “next”
button in file list. And you can select and unselect by pressing “record”
button. If you press “stop” button, you can move to upper folder. And if
you press “play/pause” button, you can play the selected file in file list of
“Open File” dialog box.
In order to use this function, you must set the audio mode switch to
“media mode”.
216
9.2 Braille Keyboard and Extended Keys
You can use more of the features in the “Media player” with the Braille
keyboard than with the audio buttons. You can use the Braille
keyboard commands to control the player in the “Media player” dialog
box. To open the “Media player”, press “Enter” on “Media player”, or
press “m” in the “program menu”. The “Media player” is also opened
when you play audio files by pressing the “play/pause” button on the
front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand. This dialog box contains two
information tabs: “playback information” and “play list”. Press “Space-
4-5” or “Space-1-2” to move between these tabs. A detailed
explanation of these tabs follows in sections 9.2.1, 9.2.2, and 9.2.3.
9.2.1 Playback Information Tab
The “playback information” tab displays the track number, the file name,
and the current playback status such as (play, pause, or stop). If there
are no files in the play list, the Braille Sense OnHand will display “Title:
There are no items to display”. If you press “Space-4”, the Braille
Sense OnHand will display playback time information.
First, the elapsed or remaining time will be displayed. You can set
whether the elapsed time or remaining time will be displayed, using the
“playback settings” dialog box as explained in section 9.3.6.2. If you
have selected the “Remaining time” with this option, the - (minus sign),
will be displayed before the time. Next to the elapsed/remaining time,
the Braille Sense OnHand will display the total playback time of the
currently selected file.
If there are no files in the play list, “Time: There are no items to display”
will be displayed.
9.2.2 Play List Tab
The “play list” tab displays all the files in the play list. For each file in
the play list, it displays the track number, file name, the current place of
the file in the list, and the total number of files in the list. If there is no
217
file in the play list, the Braille Sense OnHand will display the message
“no items 0 of 0”.
For example, if you had the following track on the Braille Sense
OnHand: “Track 1 Chopin – Fantasie Impromptu 1/10”, then “Track
1” means this file is the first item in the play list. “Chopin – Fantasie
Impromptu” is the file name. “1/10” means the file is the first of ten files
in the play list. Whenever you register an audio file using the “File”
menu (as explained in section 9.3.1), the file is added to the play list.
9.2.3 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab and the Play List Tab
The hot keys that can be used in the “playback information” and the
“play list” tabs are as follows:
1) Hot keys in the Play Information Tab
Hot key Function
Space-4 Move to the next information
Space-1 Move to the previous
information
Space “Pause” when it is play state
and “play” when it is pause
state.
Enter Start playing
Backspace Stop playing
Dot 6 Play the next file
Dot 3 Play the previous file
Dots 4-6 Play the last file
Dots 1-3 Play the first file
Dots 5-6 Play the fifth file after the
current file
Dots 2-3 Play the fifth file before the
current file
Dot 4 Move to next position by time
index and play
218
Dot 1 Move to previous position by
time index and play
Dot 2 or Dot 5 Change time index
Dots 3-4-5 Speed up
Dots 1-2-6 Slow down
Space-up scroll button Volume up
Space-down scroll button Volume down
Space-1-3-4 Open menu
Space-1-2-5 Open help
Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Move to “play list” tab
Space-1-3-5-6 Exit “Media player”
219
2) Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Hot key Function
Space-4 Move to the next file
Space-1 Move to the previous file
Space-4-6 Move to the last file
Space-1-3 Move to the first file
Space Select/resume current file
(while playing, it is used as
play/pause)
Enter-1-2 Start selecting files
Enter Start playing the selected files
Backspace Stop playing
Space-1-4-5 Delete the selected files in the
play list
Dot 6 Play the next file
Dot 3 Play the previous file
Dots 4-6 Play the last file
Dots 1-3 Play the first file
Dots 5-6 Play the fifth file after the
current file
Dots 2-3 Play the fifth file before the
current file
Dot 4 Move to next position by time
index and play
Dot 1 Move to previous position by
time index and play
Dot 2 or Dot 5 Change time index
Dots 3-4-5 Speed up
Dots 1-2-6 Slow down
Space-up scroll button Volume up
Space-down scroll button Volume down
Space-1-3-4 Open menu
Space-1-2-5 Open help
Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Move to “playback information”
220
tab
Space-1-3-5-6 Exit “Media player”
9.3 Control the volume and speed
You can control the volume and speed in media player.
1. Volume up: Space-Up scroll button
2. Volume down: Space-Down scroll button
3. Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
4. Slow down: Dots 1-2-6
Note: These controls can be adjusted only Media volume and speed that
means it doesn't affect the master volume and speed.
9.4 How to Use the Media Player Menu
When you want to open the “Media player” menu, you can press “Space-
m (dots 1-3-4)”. You can also “F2” while in the “Media player” dialog
box. This menu contains five items: “File”, “Play”, “Record”, “Position”,
“Mark” and “Settings”. Using the “File” menu, you can add or delete
files in the play list. The “Play” menu lists all of the commands related
to playing files. The “Record” menu opens the “Record” dialog box in
which allows you to record sound and play it. The “Position” menu
contains commands related to bookmark and go to position. The
“Settings” menu allows you to set various Media Player options. A
detailed explanation for each menu can be found in the section 9.3.
9.4.1 File
When you want to use the “File” menu, you can press “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “Media player” menu, and then press “Enter”
on “File”, or press “f (dots 1-2-4)”. A submenu will appear, which
contains “Open File”, “Open Folder”, “Add File”, “Add Folder”, “Save
Playlist”, “Save As Playlist”, “Delete Item”, “Open URL” and “Exit”. You
can move between these items by pressing “spaece-4” or “Space-1”.
Press “Enter” on the item you want to execute. If you want to go back
to the menu that is one level up, you can press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
221
Then press, “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. which will close the menu, and
take you back to the “Media player” dialog box.
9.4.1.1 Open File
You can use the “Open File” menu item to add files to the play list and
start playing. If you press “Enter” on “Open File”, a dialog box will open,
just like the “file list” in the “File manager”. You can navigate through
the file list just like you do in the “file list” in the “File manager”. The
audio files that can be played in the “Media player” are files that have the
extensions, aac, asf, asx, audible files(aa, aax), m3u, m4a, mp2, mp3,
mp4, ogg, pls, wav, wax, wma, and wmv. If you select all the files you
want to play, and press “Enter”, the Braille Sense OnHand will register
the files in the play list, and start playing the first file. You can select
more than one file in the “Open File” dialog box by pressing “Space” on
the file you want to play, and then move to another file to be played, and
press “Space”. Once you finish selecting all the files you want, press
“Enter”. When you open the “Open File” dialog box, files in the default
folder will be displayed. The default folder is set to “/flashdisk/media”.
You can also open the “Open File” dialog box by pressing “Enter-o (dots
1-3-5)” in the “Media player” dialog box.
9.4.1.2 Open Folder
This “Open Folder” menu item is used to select all of the audio files in
the selected folders to the play list and play them one after another. If
you press “Enter” on “Open Folder” in “File” menu, or press “Enter-f (dots
1-2-4)” in the “Media player” dialog box, the “Open Folder” dialog box will
be opened. The “Open Folder” dialog box is almost the same as the
“Open File” dialog box. The difference is that only folder names, and
not file names will be displayed in the “Open Folder” dialog box. When
you open the “Open Folder” dialog box, the default folder name will be
displayed. The default folder is set to “Media”. Press “Enter” to
display all of the folders in “Media”, and press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to
move between the folder names. If you want to move into the folder
that you are currently pointed at (and list all the files in it) press “Enter”
222
on the folder name. Press “Backspace” if you want to go up to the
parent folder. If you want to select a folder, press “Space” on the folder
name. You can select more than one folder. Once you have selected
all of the folders you want, press “Enter”. Then, the Braille Sense
OnHand will add all of the audio files, with the extensions, “wav”, “mp3”,
and “wma”, from the selected folders to the play list and start playing the
first file.
9.4.1.3 Add File
The “Add File” menu item is used to add audio files to the play list. If
you press “Enter” on “Add File” in the “File” menu, or press “Backspace-
o (dots 1-3-5)” in the “Media player” dialog box, the same dialog box that
is used for “Open File” will be displayed. If you select all of the files that
you want, and press “Enter” (as in the “Open File” dialog box), then the
Braille Sense OnHand will add the selected files to the play list.
However, the Braille Sense OnHand will not start playing these files. If
you want to start playing the files in the play list, press the “play/pause”
button on the front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand. Or, you can
press “Enter” on “play” in the “play” menu. A detailed explanation of the
“play” menu can be found in section 9.3.2.
9.4.1.4 Add Folder
The “Add Folder” menu item is used to add all of the audio files in a
selected folder to the play list. If you press “Enter” on “Add Folder” in
the “File” menu (or press “Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)” in the “Media player”
dialog box), the same dialog box that is used for “Open Folder” will be
displayed. If you select all of the folders, and press “Enter”, the Braille
Sense OnHand will add all of the audio files in the selected folders to the
play list. However, it will not start playing any files. You can start
playing the files in the play list by pressing the “play/pause” button on the
front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand, or press “Enter” on “play” in the
“play” menu. A detailed explanation of the “play” menu can be found in
section 9.3.2.
223
9.4.1.5 Save play list
The “Save Playlist” menu item is used to save the play list to a disk drive.
If you want to use this function, you can press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to open the “File” menu and execute the “Save Playlist” command
by pressing “Enter” on it, or you can press “s (dots 2-3-4)”. Otherwise,
you can press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)” in the “Media player” dialog box.
If you activate the “Media player” program and first execute “Save
Playlist”, the “Save As Playlist” dialog box will open. You can refer to
section 9.3.1.6 that explains how to use the “Save As Playlist” dialog box.
If you execute “Save Playlist” after you save the play list for once, the
Braille Sense OnHand will save the play list with the same file name
without using a dialog box. After saving a play list, it will return to
“Media player” dialog box.
9.4.1.6 Save as play list
The “Save As Playlist” menu item is used to save the play list as a
different file or on another disk drive. If you want to use this function,
you can press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the “File” menu
and execute the “Save As Playlist” command by pressing “Enter” on it,
or you can press “l (dots 1-2-3)”. Otherwise, you can press “Space-s
(dots 2-3-4)” in the “Media player” dialog box.
If you execute “Save As Playlist”, “Save As Playlist” dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box consists of “file list”, “File name”, a “Confirm”
button, and a “Cancel” button. If the dialog box is opened, “File name:”
is displayed. You can move from one tab to the other tab by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
The file format of saved play list is always the “m3u”. By default, file is
saved in “/flashdisk/media”.
If you want to make a new file name, type in the new file name. You
cannot use the following characters in a file mane. “|, \, <, >, ?, :, *”.
224
If you want to change the saving location, move to the “file list” by
pressing “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. And you move to location that you
want to save by using the navigation keys in “File manager” program.
9.4.1.7 Delete Item
If you want to delete a file from the play list, first, locate the file you want
to delete in the “play list” tab by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”
repeatedly. Then, bring up the “Media player” menu by pressing
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and press “Enter” on “File”. Now, move to
“Delete Item” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and then press “Enter”.
Or, you can press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on the file to be deleted in the
“play list” tab. You can select more than one file in the “play list” tab by
pressing “Space” on each file to be deleted. “*” will be displayed before
each selected item. If you press “Space” on a selected item, the
selection will be canceled and the “*” will disappear. Now, let’s explain
how to delete multiple files in a block from the play list. Press “Enter-b
(dots 1-2)” on the first file to be deleted. “Enter-b (dots 1-2)” is the start
of the block. Next, if you press “Space-4” or “Space-1”, the displayed
files will be selected. After selecting the files you want to delete, press
“Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” in order to delete them.
9.4.1.8 Open URL
The “Open URL” menu item is used to play the audio stream in web
page. If you press “Enter” on “Open URL” in the “File” menu, or press
“Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” in the “Media player” dialog box. The dialog box
will be displayed. In this dialog box, type the web address of audio
stream and press “Enter”, the audio stream will be automatically played.
9.4.1.9 Exit
You can exit from the “Media player” by selecting “Exit” in the “File”
menu, or by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” in the “Media player”
dialog box. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will stop playing (if it is
playing a file), and exit from “Media player” to the “program menu”.
225
9.4.2 Play
The “Play” submenu has all of the commands that can be used to control
playback. To use this menu, first, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to call up the “Media player” menu. Next, press “Space-4”. The Braille
Sense OnHand will then display “Play (p)”. Then, press “Enter”, and
the “Play” submenu will be displayed. You can move to any menu item
in this menu by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly. To go back
to the top level in the “Media player” menu, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
Press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” if you want to close the menu and go
back to the “Media player” dialog box. All of the commands that can be
used in this menu will be explained in this section.
9.4.2.1 Play
If you press “Enter” on “Play”, the Braille Sense OnHand will start playing
the files in the play list. Also, if you press “Enter” in the “Media player”
dialog box, the Braille Sense OnHand will start playing.
9.4.2.2 Previous Track
“Previous Track” is used to play the previous file, while a file is being
played. You can also do this by pressing “dot 3” in the “Media player”
dialog box.
9.4.2.3 Next Track
This item is used to play the next file in the play list, while a file is being
played. You can also press “dot 6” in the “Media player” dialog box to
do this.
9.4.2.4 Back 5th Tracks
This is used to play the fifth file before the file that is currently being
played. You can also press “dots 2-3” in the “Media player” dialog box
to do this.
226
9.4.2.5 Forward 5th Tracks
This is used to play the fifth file after the file that is currently being played.
You can also do this by pressing “dots 5-6” in the “Media player” dialog
box.
9.4.2.6 First Track
This is used to play the first file in the play list. You can also do this by
pressing “dots 1-3” in the “Media player” dialog box.
9.4.2.7 Last Track
This is used to play the last file in the play list. You can also do this by
pressing “dots 4-6” in the “Media player” dialog box.
9.4.2.8 Volume Up and Volume Down
These options are used to adjust the audio playback volume. Here, the
volume level ranges from 0 to 10. You can also adjust the volume level
by pressing “Space-up scroll button (up)” or “Space-down scroll button
(down)” in the “Media player” dialog box. The actual volume level
depends on the value of “voice volume” that is set in the “Global options”
as explained in section 3.14. For example, if “voice volume” is set to 5,
and the volume level in the “Media player” is set to its maximum 10, the
actual volume is 5. If the volume level in the “Media player” is set to 5,
the actual volume level is 2.5.
9.4.2.9 Speed Up and Slow down
You can use these controls to adjust the audio playback speed. The
speed level ranges from -2 to 5. You can also adjust the speed level by
pressing “dot 3-4-5” or “dot 1-2-6” in the “Media player” dialog box. “Dot
3-4-5” can increase the audio playback speed, and “dot 1-2-6” can
decrease the audio playback speed.
227
9.4.2.10 Pause
This item is for pausing playback while you are playing a file. If you use
this command again, the Braille Sense OnHand will start playing again
from the position where it stopped playing. You can also do this by
pressing “Space” in the “Media player” dialog box.
9.4.2.11 Stop
This is used to stop playing the file that is currently being played. You
can also do this by pressing “Backspace” in the “Media player” dialog
box.
9.4.3 Record
This menu item is used to open the “Record” dialog box. To open the
“Record” dialog box, first, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to bring
up the “Media player” menu. Press “Space-4” twice to move to “record
(r)”, and then press “Enter”, or you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)”. Then,
the Braille Sense OnHand will display the “Record” dialog box. You
can also open this dialog box by pressing “Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in the
“Media player” dialog box. The “Record” dialog box contains an
“information” tab and five buttons. You can move between these by
pressing “Space-4-5” or “Space-1-2”. You can press the buttons in this
dialog box by pressing “Enter” on the button you want to use. You can
also press the buttons by typing the character displayed after the button
name.
9.4.3.1 Record/Playback Information Tab
This tab is displayed only when the Braille Sense OnHand is recording,
or when there is a file that has just been recorded. It means that the
dialog box does not show any information when the Braille Sense
OnHand is not recording, or if you exit from the dialog box. The
information displayed in this tab includes: a file name, the current status,
228
and two pieces of time information. The file name is the name of the
file containing the sound that is currently being recorded or played. The
current status can be one of the following: recording, playing, pause, or
stop. The time information that is displayed first is the elapsed time
while recording, and the elapsed or remaining time while playing,
(depending on the “Display time” setting that is in the “Playback
Settings” dialog box, which is explained in section 9.3.6.2). The time
information that is displayed last, when you are recording, is the
remaining time. The remaining time is limited by the remaining space
on your flashdisk. While playing, the total length of the file in time will
be displayed. You can move between time information and other
information by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
9.4.3.2 Record
This is used to start recording. You can also start recording by
pressing the “Record” button on the front panel of the Braille Sense
OnHand. While recording, the Braille Sense OnHand will display the
“recording information” tab. Whenever you start recording the Braille
Sense OnHand will create a file. The file will be named “record01.mp3”,
or “record02.mp3” etc. The recorded sound will be saved to that file.
These files are stored in a special folder. By default, these files are
saved in “/flashdisk/media/record”. You can change the saving folder
and recoding file type by using the “Record Settings” option, which is
explained in section 9.3.6.3. When recording, you can pause the
recording by pressing “space 4-5” to move to the “Pause” button, and
then press “Enter”. You can also pause by pressing the “record” button
on the front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand. If you want to resume
recording, press “Enter” on the “Continue” button, or press the “record”
button on the front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand again. To stop
recording, press “Space-4-5” repeatedly on “Record” to move to the
“Stop” button, and then press “Enter”.
9.4.3.3 Play
229
This button is used to play the file that has just been recorded. You can
also start playing the recorded sound by pressing the “play” button on
the front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand. If you have not yet
recorded a file after opening the “Record” dialog box, pressing “Enter” on
the “Play” button will not do anything. While playing, the “playback
information” tab will be displayed. If you want to pause or stop playing,
press “Enter” after moving to the “Pause” or “Stop” button by pressing
“Space-4-5” repeatedly.
9.4.3.4 Stop
This is used to stop recording or playing. If you press “Enter” on “Stop”
while recording, the Braille Sense OnHand will stop recording and show
the “recording information” tab. If you press “Enter” on the “Stop”
button while playing, the Braille Sense OnHand will stop playing and
show the “playback information” tab. You can also stop recording or
playing by pressing the “stop” button on the front panel of the Braille
Sense OnHand.
9.4.3.5 Pause
This item is used to pause the recording or playing a file while in the
Media Player. If you press “Enter” on “Pause”, or press the
“play/pause” button on the front panel of the Braille Sense OnHand,
recording or playing will be paused, and the “recording information” or
“playback information” tab will be displayed.
9.4.3.6 Continue
If you press “Enter” on “Continue” while the current status is “pause”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will resume recording or playing.
9.4.3.7 Cancel
If you press “Enter” on “Cancel”, the Braille Sense OnHand will stop
recording or playing, close the “Record” dialog box, and return to the
230
“Media player” dialog box. If you press “Enter” on “Cancel” while
recording, the recorded file will not be saved. If you want to save the
recorded sound to a file, and exit from this dialog box; press “Enter” on
“Stop”, and then move to the “Cancel” button, and press “Enter”. You
can also use “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” to cancel.
9.4.4 Position Menu
If you want to set a bookmark and delete a bookmark when you are
listening to music or an audio file, you can execute the “Position” menu.
This menu will also let you jump to the time you want to go to in an audio
file.
The “Position” menu has four submenus:
1. Mark Position
2. Delete Marked Position
3. Jump To Marked Position
4. Go To Time
5. Go To Percent
6. Set Start Point
7. Release Point
You can move between the menus by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
To execute this menu, press “Enter”.
9.4.4.1 Mark Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, a bookmark will be set. A bookmark will mark a specific location,
so that you can come back directly to the spot where you placed the
bookmark.
To execute this function,
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Position” by
pressing “Space-4”.
2. Press “Enter” on “Position”.
231
3. Move to “Mark Position” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”.
4. Or, press “Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)” when playing a file, or when a file is
paused.
9.4.4.2 Delete Marked Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, it will delete the bookmark that was created before.
To execute this function,
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Position” by
pressing “Space-4”.
2. Press “Enter” on “Position”.
3. Move to “Delete Marked Position” by pressing “Space-4”, and press
“Enter”.
4. Or, you can press “Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)” when playing a file, or when
a file is paused.
If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark, the
Braille Sense OnHand will display “There is no bookmark in selected file”.
9.4.4.3 Jump to Marked Position
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, it will find a bookmark that has already been created.
To execute this function,
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Position” by
pressing “Space-4”.
2. Press “Enter” on “Position”.
3. Move to “Jump to Marked Position” by pressing “Space-4”, and press
“Enter”.
4. Or, you can press “Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)” when playing a file, or when a
file is paused.
232
If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark, the
Braille Sense OnHand will display “There is no bookmark in selected file”.
9.4.4.4 Go to Time
If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is
paused, it will move to a time that you specify, and begin playing the file.
To execute this function,
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Position” by
pressing “Space-4”.
2. Press “Enter” on “Position”.
3. Move to “Go to Time” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”.
4. Or, you can press “Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)” when playing a file, or
when a file is paused.
5. The Braille Sense OnHand will display “Go to position: 0 minute”.
6. Type in time that you want to go, and press “Enter”. If you want to
jump to more than an hour, you can use “space” or “:” characters to
distinguish minute from hour. For example, if you wish to type 1 hour
and 20 minutes, type the “1”, “space” or “:”, “20” sequentially. Also
you can input 80 minutes by just typing “80”. If there is no “space” or
“:”, the input value is dealt with the minute.
If you type in a longer time than the total playback time, the Braille
Sense OnHand will display “Invalid time”, and play from the paused
location.
9.4.4.5 Go To Percent
While playing or in a pause status of file, you can move to the location
via a percent in a file.
1) While playing or in a pause status of file, press “Space-M (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
2) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” and move to “Position” menu.
3) Press “Enter”. Or press “a (dot 1)”
233
4) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” and move to “Go to percent” menu.
5) Press “Enter”. Or without calling up the menu, press “Backspace-p
(dots 1-2-3-4)” while playing or in a pause status of file.
6) Then it will find the edit box asking “Go to percent: XX”.
7) Enter the percent that you want to move to. Enter the number
range from 0 to 99.
8) Press “Enter”.
9) It will move to the point of the percent has been entered.
9.4.4.6 Set Start Point
Set start point allows you to play a specific part of an audio file as many
times as you wish. This can be useful when learning a new language or
you need to hear the same information in a file over and over again.
To execute set start point, follow these steps:
1) To set start point, press the “Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” at the point
where you want to start the section while playing.
2) Also, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Position”
by pressing “Space-4”. Press “Enter” on “Position”. Move to “Set
start point” by pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter".
3) You will hear “Set start point” and the file will keep playing.
4) To set end point, press “Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” at the point where
you want to end the section.
Also you can execute A B repeat mode by using “Record button”
while playing.
1) Press “Record button” at the point where you want to start the
section while playing.
2) To set end point, press “Record button” at the point where you
want to end the section.
But it executes record when you press “Record button” while pause and
stop.
After “Set end point” message, Section repetition allows you to play a
specific part of an audio file as many times as you wish. To set how
234
many times a specified region, go to "playback settings" under the
"settings" menu.
9.4.4.7 Release Point
To stop playing specified region, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. Also, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Position” by pressing
“Space-4”. Press “Enter” on “Position”. Move to “Release Point” by
pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter". After stop playing specified region,
the file will keep playing.
9.4.5 Mark
You can insert a mark while listening to music or an audio file. The
mark function is stored, when you exit the program or play another
content.
If you wish to use the mark function, after calling the menu by press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Mark” by press “Space-4”.
And then press “Enter” on “Mark”.
The “Mark” menu has following submenus.
9.4.5.1 Set Mark
If you set to mark while listening to audio file, after calling the menu and
press “Enter” on “Mark”. And then move to “Set Mark” and press “Enter”.
Also you can run this function by press “Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)”
without calling the menu. Mark can be inserted up to 1000. The number
of the mark will be automatically identified.
9.4.5.2 Move to Mark
You can move to next or previous mark by pressing “Backspace-dot 6”
or “Backspace-dot 3”. You can also move to a mark by using menu.
Call up the “menu” by press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to
“Mark”. And then press “Enter” on “Mark”. And move to the “Previous
Mark” or the “Next Mark” and press “Enter”.
You can also move to a mark by the mark number.
235
1. Call up the “menu” and press “Enter” on “Mark”. And then move to
“Move To Mark”.
2. Press “Enter” on “Move To Mark”. Or press “Backspace-j (dots 2-4-5)”
without calling the menu.
3. Input the mark number in the edit box of “Move to mark:” and press
“Enter”.
4. If you input non-existing mark number, the edit box of “Move to mark:”
will be displayed again after “input error”. message.
9.4.5.3 Delete Mark
You can delete a mark.
1. Call up the “menu” and press “Enter” on “Mark”. And then move to
“Delete mark”.
2. Press “Enter” on “Delete Mark”. Or press “Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)”
without calling the menu
3. Input the mark number which will be deleted in the edit box of “Enter
mark name to delete:” and press “Enter”.
4. If you input non-existing mark number, the edit box of “Enter mark
name to delete:” will be displayed again after “input error”. message.
9.4.5.4 Mark Manager
You can open mark manager dialog box to check mark information of
the current audio file by pressing “Backspace-k (dots 1-3)”. You can also
open dialog box by using the menu. Call up the “menu” by press “Space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and move to “Mark”. And then press “Enter” on
“Mark”. And move to “Mark Manager” and press “Enter”.
The dialog box consists of “mark list”, “Move button”, “Delete button”,
“Close button”. You can go to each control by pressing “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
There are all marks of the current file in the “mark list” with information of
“name of mark: setting time of mark”. You can go to the other
information in the list by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
236
You can delete a mark in the list by pressing “Enter” or “Space-d (dots 1-
4-5)” after going to “Delete button” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
Also, you can play the contents from the specific mark by pressing
“Enter” on the mark name or by pressing “Enter” after going to “Move
button” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. The mark dialog box is closed
after playing the contents.
If you want to close the mark manager dialog box, press “Enter” on
“Close” button or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
9.4.6 Settings
Through this menu, you can change settings about recording, playing,
and general Media player options. To use the “Settings” menu, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “Media player” menu.
Press “Space-4” three times to reach “Settings”, and then press “Enter”.
Or, you can press “s” in the “Media player” menu. Then, the “Settings”
submenu will appear, which contains three items: “Configuration”,
“Playback Settings”, and “Record Settings”.
9.4.6.1 Configuration Dialog Box
If you press “Enter” on the first item, “Configuration”, or press
“Backspace-c (dots 1-4)” in the “Media player” dialog box, the
“Configuration” dialog box will be displayed, which contains the
following: the “Display title” option, the “Store position of file if longer
than:”, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move
between controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”. And you can move between options by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.
The “Display title” option allows you to set whether or not you can hear
the track title when you move to previous/next track or transfer to next
track automatically. If this is set to “On”, you can hear the track title. The
default value is set to “Off”, namely you can’t hear the track title when
237
move to previous/next track. You can change the on or off by pressing
“Space”.
The “Store position of file if longer than:” option allows you to set the last
position of audio file which have playing time more than you designated.
The default is set to “Off” and it means the last position will not be saved.
You can set the value to 5, 10, 30, 60 minutes. If you set the value to 30
minutes, when you move to another audio file or you exit the Media
program, you can save the last position of currently playing audio file if
the audio has playing time over 30 minutes. Sometimes when you don’t
want to save the position of music but want to save the position of audio
books, this option is very useful. Once the last position is saved, from
that time, you can play the audio from the last position.
To save the changed settings and exit, press “Enter” after you change
an option, or move to the “Confirm” button by pressing “Space-4-5”
repeatedly. If you want to cancel the changes you made, and exit this
dialog box, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”, or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. You
can also press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button to close the dialog box
without changing any options. The options set in this dialog box only
have an effect in “Media player”. If “hold” is set to “Off”, you can call up
the “program” menu by pressing “F1”, and you can use another program.
9.4.6.2 Playback Settings Dialog Box
If you press “Enter” on “Playback Settings”, or press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)” on
the “Settings” menu, the “Playback Settings” dialog box will be displayed.
In this dialog box, pressing “Space-4-5” or “Space-1-2” will circulate
among setting options, “Confirm” and “Cancel”. The setting options are
the “Display time” option, the “Repeat” option, the “Playlist” option, the
“Shuffle”, “Times to repeat the specified track”, the “Set speed” option
and “Time index” option. Press “Space-4” or “Space-1” to move from
one option to the next or previous option. You can also open this dialog
box by pressing “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “Media player” dialog box.
238
The “Display time” option allows you to set which type of time messages
will be displayed in the “playback information” tab. You can set it to
either “Elapsed time” or “Remaining time”. You can change its value by
pressing “Space” on “time”.
The “Repeat” option allows you to set whether all files in the play list will
be played repeatedly. If it this option is set to “On”, all files in the play
list will be played repeatedly, and if it is set to “Off”, the Braille Sense
OnHand will stop playing after playing the last file in the play list. Again,
you can change the value of this option by pressing “Space” on “Repeat”.
The next option is “Playlist” option. When you want to play audio files
from File Manager, you can select multiple files by pressing “Space” and
then play files by pressing “Enter”. At this time, if the play list has had a
list of audio files, you will be asked if you want to overwrite the play list
or you want to append the selected files into the play list. The default
value is “Overwrite” and it means the play list will be filled with the
selected files. And if you press “Space” then the value will be set to
“Append” and the play list will be appended with the selected files.
The “Shuffle” option allows you to set the audio playback order. The
default value is set to “Off” and you can play audio files in the playlist in
order but if you set “Shuffle” to “On”, The playlist is reorganized in
random. If you have just one audio file in the playlist and you switch the
option to “On”, you will encounter message saying “Shuffle mode not
available”.
“Times to repeat the specified track” allow you to set the number of
times you wish to repeat, when you execute section repetition. “Times to
repeat the specified track” can be selected the value from 1 to 10 or
unlimited. The default setting is 3. Press “Space” to increase the number
of times to repeat the specified track and “Backspace” to decrease.
The “Set speed” option allows you to set the audio playback speed.
The speed level ranges from -2 to 5. The default setting is the 0.
239
If you change the value, press “Space” or “Backspace”. The higher the
number, audio playback speed is fast.
The “Time index” option allows you to set time to jump. The default value
is set to 1 minute. The values are “5 seconds”, “10 seconds”, “30
seconds”, “1 minute”, “3 minutes”, “5 minutes”, “10 minutes”, “15
minutes”, “20 minutes”, “30 minutes” and “1 hour”.You can change the
value by the “Space” or “Backspace”.
Also you can change the value of time index by pressing “dot 2” or “dot
5” without calling this option. And if you press “dots 2-5”, you can hear
the current time index.
After changing time index, if you press “dot 1” or “dot 4”, you can jump to
previous or next position by time index. For example, time index is set
to 1 minute. And if you press “dot 1”, you can jump to previous position
by 1 minute. And if you press “dot 4”, you can jump to next position by 1
minute and then listen to audio file.
To save the changed settings and exit from this dialog box, press “Enter”
after you change all the options you want to change, or move to the
“Confirm” button by pressing “Space-4-5” or “Space-1-2” repeatedly, and
then press “Enter”. If you want to cancel the changes, and exit from
this dialog box, press enter on the “Cancel” button, or press “Space-e
(dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
9.4.6.3 Record Settings Dialog Box
If you press enter on “Record Settings” in the “Settings” menu, or press
“Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)” in the “Media player” dialog box, the Braille
Sense OnHand will display the “Record Settings” dialog box, which
contains “Recording type”, “Sample rate” option, “Line in mode” option,
“Set folder”, “Confirm” button and a “Cancel” button. You can move
between controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”. And you can move between options by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.
240
The “Recoding type” allows you to set the default file type of recording
file. Its default value is set to “mp3”. You can select between “wav” and
“mp3” the value by pressing “Space”.
The “Sample rate” option is used to control the quality of recorded sound.
Higher value in “Sample rate” means a better quality of recorded sound,
as well as a larger file size of recorded files. In other words, if you want
to record high quality sound, the total time the Braille Sense OnHand
can record will be shortened. On the other hand, if you set the lower
values of these option, the Braille Sense OnHand can record sound
longer, although the sound quality may not be as good as when these
options are set to higher values. You can change this value by pressing
“Space”.
The “Line in mode” option allows you to record by using line-in cable.
The default value is “Off”. If you want to record with line-in cable, change
to “On” by pressing “Space”. When you record the file using the Line-in
cable, you must set to “On” the “Line in mode”.
The “Set folder” allows you to set the default folder where the recorded
files will be saved. Its default value is set to “/flashdisk/media/record”.
To specify a different folder, press “Enter” on “Set folder”, and the same
dialog box as the “Open Folder” dialog box will be displayed. Select a
folder in the same way as in the “Open Folder” dialog box. (Refer to
section 9.3.1.2 for more information about how to select a folder.)
If you save the changed settings, and exit from this dialog box, press
“Enter” after changing all of the options you want to change, or move to
the “Confirm” button, and press “Enter”. If you want to cancel the
changes you made, press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button, or press
“Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
9.4.6.4 Effect Settings Dialog Box
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”or “F2” in media player program, move to
“Settings” menu and press “Enter”. By pressing “Space-4”, move to
241
“Effect settings”. Press “Enter” on “Effect settings” or press “E”. Or press
“Enter-e (dots 1-5) in “Play list tab” or “Playback information tab”.
“Effect settings” dialog box will be displayed, which contains the
following options: “Bassboost”, “Surround”, “3D Effect”, “Reverb” and
“Echo” and buttons:“Confirm” and “Cancel”.. You can move among
controls by pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”. And
you can move among options by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
The “Bassboost” option is used to emphasize bass sound. You can enter
from 0 to 20 in the edit box. The higher value you enter, the stronger
bass sound you will hear.
The “Surround” option is used to hear ambient sound more efficiently.
You can enter from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher value you enter,
the stronger surround sound you will hear.
The “3D Effect” option is used to hear surround effect more efficiently.
You can enter from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher value you enter,
the stronger 3D sound you will hear.
The “Reverb” option is used to hear reverberation sound more efficiently.
You can enter from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher value you enter,
the stronger reverb sound you will hear.
The “Echo” option is used to hear echo sound more efficiently. You can
enter from 0 to 100 in the edit box. The higher value you enter, the
stronger echo sound you will hear.
To save the changed settings and exit from this dialog box, press “Enter”
after changing options, or move to the “Confirm” button by pressing
“Tab(Space-4-5)” or “Shift-Tab(Space-1-2)” repeatedly, and then press
“Enter”. If you want to cancel the changes, and exit from this dialog box,
press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button, or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
242
9.5 Additional features
9.5.1 Moving features using the cursor keys
While playing an audio file, pressing cursor key in ‘Playback information
tab’ will move to the specific region and play. An audio file is divided
into 18 sections.
If you press number 1 cursor key, it will play from the beginning of the
file. And if you press number 18 cursor key, it will play from the end of
the file.
9.6 Hot Keys in the Media Player
1) Hot Keys for the Commands for the File Menu
File open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Folder open: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Add file: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
Add folder: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Save play list: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Save as play list: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Delete item: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
2) Hot Keys for Commands While in the Playback menu
Play: Enter, Play button
Previous track: Dot 3, Previous button
Next track: Dot 6, Next button
Back 5th tracks: Dots 2-3
Forward 5th tracks: Dots 5-6
First track: Dots 1-3
Last track: Dots 4-6
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Slow down: Dots 1-2-6
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
243
Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5
Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4
Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1
Delete play list during stop: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
3) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Record Dialog Box
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), Record button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
4) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Position Menu
Mark position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete marked position: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Jump to marked position: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to time: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Go to percent: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Set start point: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Stop playing specified region: Space-e (dots 1-5)
5) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Mark
Set mark: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)
Move to mark: Backspace-j (dots 2-4-5)
Move to previous mark: Backspace-dot 3
Move to next mark: Backspace-dot 6
Delete mark: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)
Mark manager: Backspace-k (dots 1-3)
6) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Setting Menu
Configuration dialog box: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Playback setting dialog box: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Record setting dialog box: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
Effect settings dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
7) Hot keys for toggling options.
Toggle “display time” between “elapsed time” and “remaining time”: t
(dots 2-3-4-5)
Toggle “repeat” between “yes” and “no”: r (dots 1-2-3-5)
244
10. FM radio
In order to use “FM radio” program in the Braille Sense OnHand, please
connect the headphone to the headphone jack of the Braille Sense
OnHand. The headphone connected to the Braille Sense OnHand will
work as a FM radio antenna.
In the program menu, please press scroll buttons to move to the “FM
radio” and press “Enter”, or just press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in order to
execute FM radio program. Once the FM radio program is executed,
your Braille Sense OnHand will announce the FM radio frequency. If you
had executed the FM radio program, the Braille Sense OnHand will tune
to the frequency that you listened to and announce the frequency.
For your reference, the frequency range of the Braille Sense OnHand is
from 87.5MHz to 108MHz.
10.1 Listening to FM radio via internal speakers
When you execute FM radio program after connecting the headphone to
the headphone jack, sound from the FM radio will output through the
headphone. If you want to listen to the FM radio through not only the
headphone but also internal speakers, please set as follows;
1. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call the FM radio menu and press
“Enter” at “File” menu and then press “Enter” at “Settings”.
2. Or without calling menu, press “Enter-e (dots 1-5)” in order to call the
dialog box.
3. Then the dialog box will be opened and “Internal speaker: No” is
announced in voice.
4. Press “Space” once to switch from “No” to “Yes” and press “Enter”.
Then you can hear the FM radio sound from both headphone and
internal speakers.
This setting is valid only in the FM radio program. If you exit from FM
radio program and hear the sound through speakers, you have to unplug
the headphone.
245
10.1.1 Control the volume
1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call the FM radio menu and press
“Enter” at “File” menu and then press “Enter” at “Settings.”
2) Or without calling menu, press “Enter-e (dots 1-5)” in order to call the
dialog box.
3) Then the dialog box will be opened and “Internal speaker: No” is
announced in voice.
4) Press “Space-4” and the Braille Sense OnHand will announce
“Volume”.
You can adjust the FM radio volume.
FM radio volume can be adjusted without calling dialog box.
1. Volume up: Space-Up scroll button
2. Volume down: Space-Down scroll button
10.2 Frequency control
During listening to the FM radio, if you want to tune to the other
frequency, please press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the
“menu”. Move to “Frequency” and press “Enter”. And then move to
“Previous Frequency”, “Next Frequency”, “Auto Scan Backward”, or
“Auto Scan Forward” and press “Enter”.
Without calling the menu, if you press “dot 2”, your Braille Sense
OnHand will search the previous frequency. If you press “dot 5”, your
Braille Sense OnHand will search the next frequency. If you press “dot
6”, the frequency will increase by 0.1MHz. If you press “dot 3”, the
frequency will decrease by 0.1MHz.
You can input the frequency directly by pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”.
If you press “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”, then the dialog box will be opened.
You can input the frequency in numbers and press “Enter” to move to
that frequency.
246
Besides using the Braille keys on the top panel, you can use audio
buttons on the front panel. In order to use the audio buttons on the front
panel, the audio mode switch should be moved to “FM” that is the left
side of the switch. After setting the audio mode switch, pressing
“previous” button will search the previous frequency and pressing “next”
button will search the next frequency.
10.3 Add of the channel and move among channels
During listening to the FM radio, you can register the frequency which
you are listening to. Please do as follows;
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu” and press
“Enter” at “Presets”
2. And then press “Enter” at “Add Preset” or press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)”
without calling menu.
3. Then register preset dialog box will be opened and “Frequency:
(current frequency)” will be announced.
4. Press “Space-4-5”.
5. Then “Label:” is announced. Please input the name of the channel to
be registered.
6. Press “Space-4-5” to move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
If you want to register the frequency other than the frequency which you
are listening to, input the frequency when “Frequency: (The current
frequency” is displayed in the dialog box.)
After you register all the desired channels, you can move to the previous
channel by pressing “dot 1”, and move to the next channel by pressing
“dot 4”.
In order to delete any channel, move to the channel to be deleted and
press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”. If “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” is pressed, the
selected channel will be deleted without any warning message.
247
You can add and delete channels in the presets manager dialog box.
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call menu, press “Enter” at
“Presets”, move to the “Preset Manager” and press “Enter”. Or you can
press “Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)” without calling menu to open the preset
manager dialog box.
Preset manager dialog box consist of “added channel list”, “Add” button,
“Delete” button, “Modify” button and “Exit” button. You can move from
one control to the next control by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-
tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
If you press “Add” button, the “Add dialog box” that was explained above
is opened. You can add the channels as explained above. And if you
want to change the label of the added channel, move to the desired
channel item in the added channel list by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-
4”, and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Modify” button and
press “Enter”. Then the “Modify dialog box” will be opened. The structure
of the “Modify dialog box” is almost the same as that of “Add dialog box”.
The difference between these two dialog boxes is that the channel label
and frequency are displayed on the “Modify dialog box”.
If you want to delete any channel from the added channels, select the
desired channel in the channel list and move to “Delete” button by
pressing “tab (Space-1-2)” and press “Enter”.
In order to exit from the preset manager dialog box, press “Enter” at the
“Exit” button, or just press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
Adding the channel and move among the added channels are available
using audio buttons on the front panel, too. In order to use the audio
buttons, audio mode switch should be set to “FM radio”.
If you press “record” button more than 2 seconds, “Add preset dialog
box” will be opened. In order to move to the previous channel to be
added, press “previous” button for more than 2 seconds. Pressing “next”
button for more than 2 seconds will move to the next channel to be
added.
248
Pressing “stop” button for more than 2 seconds will delete the selected
channel.
10.4 Recording FM radio sound
If you want to record the FM radio, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to call
menu, move to “Record (r)” and press “Enter”. Or just press “Enter-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” without calling menu. Then the record dialog box will be
opened and the Braille Sense OnHand starts recording.
The record dialog box consists of as follows.
1. “Record status” status bar
2. “Pause/Continue” button
3. “Stop” button
4. “Cancel” button
You can move among these controls by pressing “tab (Space-4-5 or F3)”
or “shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)”.
While recording the FM radio, if you press enter on “Pause” button or
press “a (dot 1)”, recording will pause, and the name of button is
changed to “Continue”. If you press “Continue” button or press “g (dots
1-2-4-5), recording will be continued. “Record status” will show the
frequency of the FM radio under recording. If you press “Enter” on “Stop”
button or press “s (dots 2-3-4)”, recording FM radio will stop.
Recorded files will be saved in the “flashdisk/media/FM radio” folder.
The file name will be “added channel label (frequency)-xx.mp3”. “xx” will
start from 01 and increased by one when recording the FM radio sound.
If unregistered channel is recorded, “FM radio” will be used as a file
name instead of “added channel label”. If you stop recording, the record
dialog box will be exited automatically. If you press “Enter” at “Cancel”
button or press “c (dots 1-4)”, the recorded file will not be saved and exit
the dialog box.
During recording, you cannot change the channel and frequency.
249
During listening to the FM radio, you can record without calling the
record dialog box by pressing the “record” button on the front panel.
Before you use the “record” button out of the audio buttons on the front
panel, please set the audio mode switch to the FM radio mode. If you
press the “record” button, the record dialog box will be opened and
recording will start.
If you press “stop” button on the front panel during recording, recording
will stop and the recorded audio file will be saved. If you press the
“pause” button during recording, the “pause” button will be changed to
the “continue” button. Please press the “continue” button to continue
recording. Pressing “previous” button or “next” button will move among
controls in the record dialog box.
10.4.1 Changing record folder
If you want to change the folder for saving recorded files, please do as
follows;
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call menu and press “Enter”
at “File”.
2. Press “Enter” at “Record Settings”. Or press “Backspace-s (dots 2-3-
4)” without calling menu.
3. Then the record dialog box will be opened and “Recoding type: Mp3”
is announced.
4. Press Space-4-5 to move to “Record folder”.
5. Then “Record folder: /flashdisk/media/FM radio/” is displayed. Press
“Enter”.
6. Then the list in the FM radio folder will be displayed. Press
“Backspace” to move to upper level folder, and press “Space-1” or
“Space-4” to move to desired folder.
7. Press “Space” at the desired folder and press “Enter”.
8. Then “Record folder: (Changed folder)” is announced.
9. Press “Space-4-5” to move to “Confirm” button and press “Enter”.
250
In the Record Settings dialog box, you can set recording type, sample
rate, quality. In order to change the recording type, you press the
“Space”. And then you can select between “wav” and “mp3”. In order to
change the sample rate and quality, press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to
move to the desired item to be changed when “sampling rate: 16000Hz”
is displayed. At the desired item, press “Space” and change the value.
After you change all items as you desire, press “Space-4-5” to move to
“Confirm” button and press “Enter”.
If the values of sample rate, quality are getting higher, the recorded
audio quality will be better. But it requires more large storage space in
the flash memory. So please select proper values for your recording
purposes.
10.5 Additional features
1. Sensitivity adjustment
When you activate the FM radio program, if the Braille Sense OnHand
cannot tune to the broadcasting frequency, please adjust the sensitivity.
In order to adjust the sensitivity, call “Settings dialog box” as explained in
the Section 10.1. And press “Space-4” to move to “Sensitivity” and press
“Space” or “Backspace” to adjust the sensitivity. Higher value will make
the Braille Sense OnHand FM radio be more sensitive. If the sensitivity
is increased, you can tune to more frequencies.
2. Mute
During listening to the FM radio, if you want to make it silent for a while,
press “Space”. This is mute function. Pressing “Space” once again will
cancel mute mode. Or you can use mute function by pressing “stop”
button on the front panel and cancel mute mode by pressing “play”
button on the front panel. If mute mode is activated, FM radio sound will
not be heard but TTS (text to speech) sound will be heard.
10.6 Hot Keys in the FM radio
Call up the settings dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
251
Call up the “menu”: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Internal speakers on/off: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Move to next frequency: dot 6
Move to previous frequency: dot 3
Auto previous frequency: dot 2 or short press previous button
Auto next frequency: dot 5 or short press next button
Go to frequency: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to previous preset: dot 1 or long press previous button
Move to next preset: dot 4 or long press next button
Registry preset: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) or long press record button
Delete the preset: long press stop button
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
Mute on: short press stop button or Space
Mute off: short press play button or Space
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
252
11. Web Browser
You can use the Web browser on the Braille Sense OnHand to read
pages on the Internet, as well as reading html books that you have
saved to disk. In addition, you can download and read books from
places such as Web Braille, and BookShare. Note that you will need to
have setup an account in order to access many of the books on these
sites.
When you want to launch the Web browser, move to “Web browser” in
the “program” menu and press “Enter”. Or, you can press “b (dots 1-2)”
in the “program” menu. You can also launch the Web browser by
pressing “Space-w (dots 2-4-5-6)” while you are in the “program” menu.
When you press these keys, the Braille Sense OnHand, will open up a
computer edit box. You can then type in the URL that you want to go to.
After you type in you’re the web page address, press “Enter”, to open
the web page. Then, the Web browser will open, and take you to the
specific URL that you typed in. The Braille Sense OnHand will connect
to the web page that is registered as the “home page” in the Web
browser. Please note that the Web browser supports SSL 1.0 to 3.0.
A more detailed explanation of the Web browser can be found within this
chapter.
11.1 File
The “File” menu can be executed by selecting “File” after pressing
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, which calls up the Web browser menu.
“File” will appear on the Braille display. When you press “Enter” on
“File”, you can enter into the “File” menu. To move from one submenu
to another submenu, press the up arrow (“Space-1”) or the down arrow
(“Space-4”). The following is a detailed explanation of the Web browser
“File” menu.
253
11.1.1 Open URL
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the Web browser menu.
Then, move to “File”, and press “Enter”. The first item that is displayed
on the Braille display is “Open URL”. Press “Enter” to get into the
“Open URL” edit window, or press “Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” while the Web
browser is open. When “Open URL” is executed, the edit window for
an address will be displayed. On the Braille display, you will see the
address of the current page. You can enter a new web page address
that you want to connect to. You need to enter the new address in
Computer Braille such as “www.google.com”. Then, press “Enter”.
You can check the addresses that have been entered previously by
pressing the down arrow (“Space-4”). Move to the address that you
want to open using the up arrow (“Space-1”) or the down arrow (“Space-
4”), and press “Enter” when the desired URL is displayed on the Braille
display. You can go to a specific web page either by typing in a new
address, or by selecting one of the previously entered addresses.
If the Braille Sense OnHand cannot connect to the desired web page,
and it only shows progress on the Braille display, press “Backspace-
enter” to stop connecting, and call up “Open URL” again. You can type
in the address and try to connect again. You can stop the Web browser
from connecting by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Sometimes, this
can happen due to network or Internet problems.
11.1.2 Open
In order to enter into “Open”, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call
up the “menu”, and press “Enter” on “File”. Go to “Open” by pressing
“Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Or, you can press “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)”
when the Web browser is active. Then the “Open dialog box” will show
up.
“Open dialog box” consists of “file list”, “File name”, “Type”, “Confirm”
button and “Cancel” button. You can move among those controls by
254
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. When the “Open
dialog box” is opened, “File name” will be focused. Type in a file name,
and press “Enter”, or press “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to move to the file
list. Select the desired file name, and press “Enter”.
The default folder is “/flashdisk/download”, and it can be changed by the
same method as explained in the “File manager”.
There are three types of files in “Type”; “*.*”, “htm”, “html”. Default is “*.*”
and it means that all types of files will be shown in the file list.
At the “Type”, press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to select the file type.
In order to check the current path, press “Space-3-4”. You can use this
command in the following dialog boxes: “Save As”, “Add To Favorites”,
and the “Favorites List”.
11.1.3 Save As
In order to execute “Save As”, call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press “Enter” on “File”. Move to “Save As” by
pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter”, or press “Space-s (dots 2-3-4)”
while the Web browser is activated. When you press “Enter” on “Save
As”, the “Save As” dialog box will appear. Here you can type in a new
file name, and press “Enter” to save the file as a new file. “Save As” will
give you the opportunity to save html files with different file names.
This is similar to “Save As” in the word processor.
In this dialog box, there are “File name” edit combo box, “Type” combo
box, “Confirm” button, “Cancel” button and “file list”. You can move
among these items by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-
1-2”)”.
The first item to be displayed when “Save As” is executed is “File name”
edit combo box. You can type in the file name to be saved in this edit
box.
If you want to edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display,
press the cursor routing key that corresponds with the text that you want
to edit. Please remember that “:” cannot be used in file names. You
have to delete “:” if there is one in your file name.
255
If you want to select the file name from the existing file name, press
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to move to “file list”. The default folder is
“/flashdisk/download”. In order to move to upper level, press
“Backspace” and if you want to enter the selected folder or select a file,
press “Enter” on the folder or file that you want to select. And press
“Space-4” or “Space-1” in order to move next or previous folder or file.
There is a “Type” option combo box that is the next item of “File name”
edit combo box. You can move from “File name” to “Type” by pressing
“Space-4-5”. The available file types are htm, html, brl, brf and txt file
format. Use “Space-4” or “Space-1” to select the file type that you want.
Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to “Confirm” and press “Enter” to save
as the file name and type as selected. Or, press “tab” again to move to
“Cancel” and press “Enter” to cancel “Save As”.
If you do not want to save with a new file name, press “escape (“Space-
e”)” or “exit (“Space-z”)”.
11.1.4 Page Information
“Page information” shows how many frames, tables, controls and forms
are in the current page.
In order to enter into “Page Information”, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to call up the “menu”, and press “Enter” on “File”. Move to “Page
Information” by pressing “Space-4” a few times, and then press “Enter”.
Or, you can press the letter “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”.
“Page Information” can be shown in one line. However, if there are too
many characters to be displayed, you will need to press the scroll button
to read the additional lines.
256
11.1.5 Exit
This command terminates the Web Browser, and returns the Braille
Sense OnHand to the program list. You can exit from the Web Browser
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, or by selecting “Exit” from the Web
Browser file menu.
11.2 Read
The “Read” menu can read the page generally. In order to call up the
“Read” menu, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and press “Enter” on “Read”
or press “r”.
The “Read” menu has three submenus:
1. Read From Beginning To Cursor
2. Read From Cursor To End
3. Auto Scroll
You can move between the menus by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
To execute the menu, press “Enter”.
11.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor
This function will read the current page from the beginning to the cursor
location.
To execute this function, press “Enter” on “Read From Beginning To
Cursor” in the “Read” menu. Or, you can press “Backspace-g (1-2-4-5)”
when you open a web page.
If you want to quit this function before the cursor location, press
“Backspace-enter”. If you execute this function, the Braille display
change to correspond with the voice output.
257
11.2.2 Read from Cursor to End
This function will read the current page from the cursor to the end of the
current page.
To execute it, press “Enter” on “Read From Cursor To End” in the “Read”
menu. Or you can press “Enter-g (1-2-4-5)” when you open a web
page.
If you want to quit this function before the end of the current page, press
“Backspace-enter”. If you execute this function, the Braille display
change to correspond with the voice output.
11.2.3 Auto Scroll
This function will scroll the current page from the cursor to the end of the
current page.
To execute the “Auto Scroll” function, press “Enter” on “Auto Scroll” in
the “Read” menu. Or, you can press the up and down scroll buttons
simultaneously when you open a web page.
If you quit this function before the end of current page, you can press
“Backspace-enter”.
If you execute this function, the Braille display change to correspond
with the voice output.
For a faster scroll during scrolling, press “Space-6”. For a slower scroll
during scrolling, press the “Space-3”.
11.3 Edit
“Edit” menu is used to copy any part of the web page or add it to the
clipboard.
258
In order to call up the “Edit” menu, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and
press “Enter” on “Edit” or press “e (dots 1-5)”.
11.3.1 Start selection
This command cannot be used on the controls in the web page, but can
be used on the text or on the edit box. This means that it cannot be used
on the links when setting the block, but it can be used to make selection
to make a block on the text or on the edit box of the bulletin board.
In order to use this command, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”,
move to “Edit” menu by pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter” at the
starting point of selection. And press “Enter” on the “Start Selection”.
Then move to the end of selection that you want to select.
You can also set the starting point of the block by pressing “Enter-b
(dots 1-2)” without calling up the menu.
11.3.2 Copy
The selected part of the web page can be copied to the edit box in the
web page, word documents or the edit box of the other programs.
To copy the selected part of the web page, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”,
move to the “Edit” menu by pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter”. And
move to “Copy” by pressing “Space-4” and press “Enter” on “Copy”. Or
you can copy the selected part by pressing “Enter-c (dots 1-4)” without
calling up the menu.
11.3.3 Add to clipboard
You can copy various parts of the web page to the clipboard, and then
you can copy them to the edit box or the other program at once.
In order to add the selected parts of the web page by pressing “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)”, move to “Edit” menu by pressing “Space-4” and press
“Enter”. And press “Space-4” to move to the “Add To Clipboard” and
press “Enter”. Or you can add to the clipboard by pressing “Enter-p (dots
1-2-3-4)” without calling up the menu.
259
11.3.4 Copy URL
When you use the “Copy URL” function you can copy the address of the
web page that you are on.
In order to copy the address of web page, you press the “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2”, press “Enter” on “Edit” menu. And press “Space-4” to
move to the “Copy URL” and press “Enter”. Or you can copy to URL by
pressing “Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)” without calling up the menu.
The web address of the page will then be placed on the clipboard. You
can paste it to a document, or wherever you can paste text on the Braille
Sense OnHand.
11.3.5 Copy Link
The “Copy Link” function allows you to copy a link in the web page that
you are on. For example, if you tab (“Space 4-5”) to a link, and select the
“Copy Link” function, then the link will be copied to the clipboard.
In order to copy a link in the web page, you press the “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2”, press “Enter” on “Edit” menu. And press “Space-4” to move
to the “Copy Link” and press “Enter”. Or you can copy to link by pressing
“Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)” without calling up the menu.
The link will then be placed on the clipboard, so that you can paste it to a
document, or wherever you can paste text in the Braille Sense OnHand.
11.4 Go To
In order to enter into the “Go To” menu, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and go to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”.
The sub menus are explained in the following sections.
11.4.1 Go to Home Page
The first page that your Web browser loads when the Web browser
opens is called the “home page”. You can set your favorite site as your
home page. As soon as your “home page” is set, your Web browser
260
will show you the same “home page” every time you start the Web
Browser.
The default home page is www.braillesense.com. In order to move to
the home page while you are reading another web page, press “Space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and go to the “Go To” menu by pressing “Space-
4”, and press “Enter”. The first sub menu in the “Go To” menu is “Go
To Home Page”. You can activate “Go To Home Page” by pressing
“Enter”, or by pressing “Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5)” while your Web
browser is opened.
11.4.2 Go to Previous Page
The previous page is the page shown just before the current page. For
example, when the Web browser is activated, the first page that opens is
the home page that is set as the default home page on the Braille Sense
OnHand. You can search and load the web page of Yahoo, which is
www.google.com. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will connect to the
Yahoo web page. When “Go To Previous Page” is activated, the Braille
Sense OnHand will show you the last position in the previous page (the
home page) that was displayed before the current page.
In order to move to the previous page, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to call up the “menu”, and go to the “Go To” menu by pressing
“Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Go to “Go To Previous Page” by
pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. Or, you can press
“Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)” or “Backspace” with “Space-3”. This
command does not work on the first page in the Braille Sense OnHand
because there is no previous page when you first open the Web Browser.
11.4.3 Go to Next Page
When you have opened multiple web pages, you can go back and forth
from the current page to the previous page, or to the next page. For
example, when you first open the Web Browser, you connect to your
home page. Then, you connect to the web site of Google, and next,
261
you connect to the Lycos web site. In this case, the next page from the
Google web site is the Lycos web site.
In order to move to the next page, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to call up the “menu”, and then go to the “Go To” menu by pressing
“Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Go to the “Go To Next Page” by
pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”, or you can press “Backspace-n
(dots 1-3-4-5)” or “Backspace” with “Space-6”. This command does not
work on the last page because there is no page after the last page.
11.4.4 Go to Previous Heading
If you activate the “Go To Previous Heading” function, you can go to a
heading that is located before your current location. To execute the
“Go To Previous Heading” function, open the menu by pressing “Space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to the
“Go To” menu. Press “Enter” on “Go To”. Then, use “Space-1” or
“Space-4” to move to “Go To Previous Heading”, and press “Enter”. Or,
press “u (dots 1-3-6)” in the submenu. To activate this function without
opening up the menu, press “Backspace-b (dots 1-2)” while in a web
page.
11.4.5 Go to Next Heading
If you activate the “Go To Next Heading” function, you can go forward to
a heading from your current location. To execute the “Go To Next
Heading” function, open up the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2”, and press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to the “Go To” menu.
Press “Enter” on “Go To”. Then, use “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to
“Go To Next Heading”. Then, press “Enter” on “Go To Next Heading”.
Or, just press “d (dots 1-4-5)” in the submenu. You can also activate
this function without opening up the menu by pressing “Backspace-f
(dots 1-2-4)” while you are in a web page.
262
10.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text
This menu can be used to go to the next text or the previous text while
you are reading the web page.
In order to execute the “Go To Next Text” menu, do the following:
1. Call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”.
2. Move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”.
3. Press “Enter” on the “Go To” menu
4. Press “Space-4” until “Go To Next Text” will be displayed. Or, you can
press “a (dots 1)” in order to move to “Go To Next Text” directly.
5. Press “Enter” on “Go To Next Text”.
Or you can call up the “Go To Next Text” menu by pressing “Space-1-2-
4-5-6” while the web page is being read.
In order to execute “Go To Previous Text” menu, do the following:
1. Call up the “menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”.
2. Move to “Go To” by pressing “Space-4”.
3. Press “Enter” on the “Go To” menu
4. Press “Space-4” until “Go To Previous Text” is displayed. Or, you
can press “b (dot 1-2)” in order to move to “Go To Previous Text”
directly.
5. Press “Enter” on “Go To Previous Text”.
Or, you can call up the “Go To Previous Text” menu by pressing “Space-
2-4-6” while a web page is being read.
11.4.7 Refresh
If a web page opens incorrectly due to a network problem, or if you want
to refresh the current page, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and go
to the “Go To” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Go
to “Refresh” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”, or you can press
“Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” without calling up the menu.
263
11.4.8 History
The “History” is the list of the web page addresses (and their titles) that
have been visited either by clicking on a link or by typing in the address
directly. When “History” is executed, the Braille Sense OnHand will
display the titles of the web pages in the history list.
If you have visited a web page such as www.google.com previously, The
history list on the Braille Sense OnHand will show you the title of the
page as, “Google”.
In order to visit the Yahoo web site by using the history list, first, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and go to the “Go
To” menu by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Go to “History”
by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. You can always open the
history list by pressing “Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)” while the Web browser is
running. The Braille Sense OnHand will show the history list. Move to
the title of the web site that you want to select by pressing “Space-4” or
“Space-1”. If you want the “History” list to show the web address,
instead of the title, of the website, you can press “Space-i (dots 2-4)”. If
you press “Space-4”, the display will show the title again, instead of the
address. After you move to the desired web site, you should then press
“Enter” to connect to that web site.
In order to delete an undesired item from the history list, select that item
on the history list, and press the “del key (Space-d (dots 1-4-5))”.
And if you want to delete the all file in history list, press the “Enter-a (dot
1)” and press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
The maximum number of items in the history list is 300. If the list
exceeds 300 items, the oldest item will be deleted automatically from the
history list, and the new item will be added as the first item on the list.
264
11.4.9 Find
This feature is similar to the function of “Find” in the word processor.
The “Find dialog box” will allow you to find text on the current web page.
In order to execute the “Find” menu, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to call up the “menu”, and go to the “Go To” menu by pressing
“Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Go to “Find” by pressing “Space-4”,
and press “Enter”, or you can press “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)” while the Web
browser is loaded.
When “Find” is executed, the dialog box that contains the edit window for
entering text and the searching direction will appear. As in any other
dialog box, you can press the “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)” to move from one control to another. Enter the text to search for,
and select the search direction. Then, press “Enter”. The Braille
Sense OnHand will then find the text, and move the cursor position to
the text.
The default search direction is set to “Forward”. This means that the
Braille Sense OnHand will search for the specified text from the current
cursor position to the end of the page. If you want to change the
search direction, select “Backward”, and then press “Enter”. The
selected search direction will remain until the Web browser is closed,
unless you choose the other direction.
11.4.10 Find Again
The “Find Again” function searches the text again in the direction that
you have selected. In order to enter into “Find Again”, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and go to the “Go To” menu by pressing “Space-4”.
Then, press “Enter”. Move to “Find Again” by pressing “Space-4”. Then,
press “Enter”. Or, you can press “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”, which is the hot
key for “Find Again” while the Web browser is running.
265
“Find Again” finds the text that you have entered in “Find”. There is no
edit box in “Find Again”. If you want to find another key word, you
should use the “Find” function explained as in section 11.4.9.
11.3.11 Links list
This function will list all the links in the current page. If you want to
activate it, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and press “Enter” on
“Links list” in “Go To” menu. Or without calling up the menu, press
“Backspace-i (dots 2-4)”. Then you will see “Links list dialog box”. In
the dialog box, you can find the following controls: “links list”, “Focus
link” button, “Activate link” button, and “Cancel” button. You can move
control by control by pressing “Space-4-5” or “Space-1-2”. In the “links
list”, you can move by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
If you want to move to the selected page in “links list”, press “Enter” on
the link of focus in “links list”. Or move to “Activate link” button by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” and
press “Enter” there.
If you want to go to the link position selected in “links list”, move to
“Focus link” button by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and press “Enter”
there.
To close the dialog box, move to “Cancel” button, and press “Enter”
there. Or just press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” or press “Space-e (dots 1-
5)”.
11.5 Favorites
In order to enter into “Favorites”, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”,
and move to “Favorites” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. If
there are web sites that you frequently visit, it would be very
inconvenient to enter the long address every time. In such a case, you
can add these web site addresses in the “Favorites” list. Then, you can
visit the web sites that are stored in your “Favorites” list by simply
selecting the address in the “Favorites” list.
266
11.5.1 Set Current As Your Home Page
The “home page” is the web site that you connect to automatically when
the Web Browser is opened. The user can set any web site as the home
page.
In order to set the “home page”, you have to go to the web page that you
want to register as the home page. While the web page is displayed,
press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “favorites” by
pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Then “register as your home
page” will be displayed on the Braille display and press “Enter”. Then,
the current web site will be registered as your home page automatically,
and the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Saved as home page”, and it
displays the current web page. Or, you can press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)”
without calling up menu.
11.5.2 Add To Favorites
You can add the web page that you are reading now to the “Favorites”
list. In order to add the web page to the “Favorites” list, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and move to “Favorites” by pressing “Space-4”.
Then, press “Enter”. Then, move to “Add To Favorites” by pressing
“Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. You can activate “add favorites” by
pressing “Backspace-a (dot 1)” when the Web Browser is running.
“Add favorites” is a dialog box that contains the following: a list box that
shows the current favorites list (including the folders and files of your
favorites), an edit window for the web page address where you can enter,
type, confirm, and cancel. You can move from one item to the next by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
When you open “Add To Favorites”, the edit window will appear first. In
this edit window, you can type in the title of the current web page that
you are reading. The extension name (.URL) will be attached
automatically to the title name that you have written.
267
If you want to edit only a part of the current title name, press the cursor
routing key that is furthest to the left. Then, the current title name will be
displayed on the Braille display. You can press the cursor routing key
where you want to edit the text, and then modify it. Make sure that you
do not use “:” in the title name.
The favorites list will be saved in the “/flashdisk/favorite” folder. This
folder is the default folder, and you cannot make your desired folder
above this folder (a higher level folder).
If you want to add your “Favorites” list to the folder you made, rather
than the default folder, press “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”, and select the
desired folder by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”.
11.5.3 Favorites List
You can check the list of the web sites that are saved in “Add To
Favorites”. The user can copy, delete, or rename the title of the sites in
the favorites list.
In order to open the “Favorites” list, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and
move to “Favorites” by pressing “Space-4”. Then, press “Enter”. Move to
the “Favorites List” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Or, you
can press “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)” while the Web Browser is running. When
you press these keys, the Braille Sense OnHand, will display the
favorites list dialog box. This dialog box contains the following: the
favorites list, an edit window for the title, a “Type” combo box, a
“Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move from one item to
the next by pressing the “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
When the “Favorites list” is open, an edit window will appear first. The
edit window will display the message, “Name:”. You can enter one of the
titles that you have entered previously. You can open the web page by
pressing “Enter” after entering the title. If there are no titles that match
the one you entered, the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Invalid path”
and return to the edit window. If there is a title in the “Favorites list”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will connect to the web page.
268
If you do not remember the exact title, you can find it from the “Favorite”
list, using the method that is outlined below.
When the edit window appears, press “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” in order to
move to the “Favorites list”. Then the Braille Sense OnHand will display
the “Favorites list”. You can move between folders and files by pressing
“Space-1” or “Space-4”.
Press “Enter” on the title of the web site that you want to visit. On this list,
folders are enclosed by quotation marks. When you press “Enter” on the
folder, you can get into the folder.
You can also edit the titles in the “Favorites list”. When the title name is
displayed on your display, press the following hot keys and enter your
desired text.
In the favorite list, you can find only the files with the file format that was
selected in the “Type” combo box. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
“Type” combo box. In the type combo box, there are two kinds of file
formats; “*.*” and “url”. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” select one out of
these two file formats. If you select “*.*” then all types of files will be
shown.
11.6 Options
Using the “Options” menu, you can set the type of web pages and
change default download folder. Also you can clear cookie in the
“Options” menu.
In order to execute the “Options” menu,
1) Press “Enter” on “Web browser”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Move to “Options” pressing “Space-4”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or you can press “Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)” while
the Web browser is executing.
269
11.6.1 The Structure and Movement
When you execute the “Options” menu, the below components consist of
the structure.
1. “User agent” list
2. “Default download folder”
3. “Show visited links”
4. “Clear cookies”
5. “Confirm” button
6. “Cancel” button
By pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, you can move to option items: User
agent, Show visited links, Default download folder and Clear cookies.
And by pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”, you can
move among controls.
11.6.2 Set User Agent
1) Press “Enter” on “Web browser”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Move to “Options” pressing “Space-4”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or you can press “Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)” while
executing the “Web browser”.
5) It will display “User agent: Windows CE” on the Braille display.
6) Using the “Space”, you can select one in the “Windows XP”,
“Windows CE” and “Pocket PC”.
7) After you select the value that you want, press “Enter”.
It will open the type of web pages you chose.
11.6.3 Show visited links
“Show Visited links” is the option displaying the link once user visited
web site. The default setting is “On” and it toggles between “On” and
“Off” by pressing “Space”.
270
This option is set to “On” and “Off” as follows:
1) Execute “Web browser” by pressing “Enter” on “Web browser” or
simply pressing hot key “b” (dots-1-2) from the main menu.
2) Once the “Web browser” executes, press “Backspace-o (dots-1-3-
5)” and then it will say “option dialog box”.
3) Move to “Show visited links” by pressing “Space-4”.
4) “Show visited links: On” will be displayed.
If the setting is “On”, “Visited link” will be displayed.
11.6.4 Changing the Default Download Folder
You can change default download folder in “Web browser”.
To change the default download folder, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter” on “Web browser”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Move to “Options” pressing “Space-4”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or you can press “Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)” while
executing the “Web browser”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Default download folder”
6) It will display “Flashdisk” list.
● When you change the different folder in “Flashdisk”: Using the
“Space”, select the folder that you want.
● When you change the different folder of “External memory”:
Using the “Backspace”, move to disk. Move to folder that you
want to change and select it using “Space”.
7) Press “Enter”.
8) Press “Tab (Space-4-5), move to “Confirm” button.
9) Press “Enter”.
If you want to cancel the change, press “Enter” on “Cancel” button. Or
press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, regardless of location.
271
11.6.5 Clear cookies
Cookie contains information which can be read in web application
whenever user visits the web site. You can clear cookies in “Options”
menu in Braille Sense OnHand.
To clear cookie, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter” on “Web browser”.
2) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
3) Move to “Options”, pressing “Space-4”.
4) Press “Enter”. Or you can press “Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)” while
executing the “Web browser”.
5) Press “Space-4”, move to “Clear cookies”
6) Press “Enter” on “Clear cookies”.
7) It will announce “Successfully cleared cookies” and clear cookies.
Without calling menu, press “Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)”. It will clear cookies in
web page.
If you want to cancel to clear cookies, press “Enter” on “Cancel” button.
Or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, regardless of location.
11.7 Read Page
On the web page, there are links, controls, and other various elements,
as well as text. In order to read web pages properly, the Web browser
should classify each element, and notify the user with its information.
When reading a web page by moving with “Space-4” or “Space-1”, one
element will be displayed on one line. The links and controls will be
displayed with their respective symbols for the user to distinguish each
element.
There is a more detailed explanation of this feature within this section.
272
11.7.1 Moving Between Controls
A control is a link, an edit box, a radio button, or a combo box. These
same controls are found in Windows on a personal computer. Web
pages also use various kinds of controls for user input. Each control has
different purposes. Therefore, the user has to know exactly what type of
control is being used. For example, in an edit box, the user enters a text
string. In a combo box and list box, the user should select one of the
items listed in the combo box or list box. The Braille Sense OnHand
Web browser uses symbols to identify what type of control is being used.
In order to move from one control to another without reading the text in
between controls, the Braille Sense OnHand provides the following
“move to control” methods:
1. Move to the previous control: “Shift-tab (Space-1-2)”.
This command moves to the nearest previous control from the current
position. If there are no more previous controls, the warning sound
will be played.
2. Move to the next control: “Tab (Space-4-5)”
This command moves to the next control from the current position. If
there are no more controls, the warning sound will be played.
When you find controls in web pages, the Braille Sense OnHand will
show control symbols ahead of the contents of the control. The
followings are a list of control symbols.
Control name Symbol
Link LN
Visited link LNV
Anchor ANC
Edit box EB
Multi edit box MEB
List Box LB
Combo box CB
Radio button select SRB
Radio button URB
273
unselect
Check box check SCHB
Check box uncheck UCHB
Button BT
1. Link: If you press “Enter” on link, you will move to the page that the
link is referencing.
2. Visited link: It is the link that you visited last time.
3. Anchor: If you press “Enter” on anchor, you will move to the
referenced part of the web page.
4. Edit box: You can start entering the text at the cursor position. After
you finish entering the text, press “Space-4” to move to the next item.
If there is any text in the edit box, it will be spoken and displayed on
the Braille display.
5. Multi edit box: This is similar to the edit box. It is an edit box that
allows you to enter plural lines in one edit box. You can start a new
line by pressing “Enter”. After you finish entering the text, press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” in order to move to the next item.
List box, combo box: In order to change a selection in the combo box,
press “Backspace-Space-4” or “Backspace-Space-1”. You can move
to the next item by pressing “Space-4”. Also it will renew a page
automatically when you change combo box in combo box.
6. Radio button, check box: In order to select or cancel the selection,
press “Enter”.
7. Button: If you press “Enter” on a button, you will move to the
referenced page.
11.7.2 Moving to a Form
A “form” is a page that has all of the controls, except the “link” control.
The edit windows, buttons, and combo boxes are included in a “form”.
When you navigate some web pages, if there are many links, it would be
very cumbersome to navigate to a form because you would have to push
too many “tab” or “shift-tab” keys to get to a form. In this case, you can
use the “moving to the form” function.
274
1. Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6
You can move to the previous form by pressing this key. If there are
no previous forms, the Braille Sense OnHand will play the warning
sound.
2. Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6
You can move to the next form by pressing this key. If there are no
more forms. The Braille Sense OnHand will play the warning sound.
If there are no forms on a web page, the Braille Sense OnHand will
say, “no control”.
11.7.3 Table
At the beginning position of the table, the Braille Sense OnHand shows
the table number, and the number of rows and columns on the table.
For example, there are two big tables (we call these “upper level tables”)
on one web page. Each table has 3 sub tables (we call these “lower
level tables”) with 3 rows and 2 columns on each. In this case, when
the Braille Sense OnHand shows the first sub table on the second big
table, it displays “table 2-1 3 rows, 2 columns”. At the end of the sub
table, the Braille Sense OnHand will display “table 2-1”.
If the table consists of only 1 row and 1 column, or empty space that has
only border or background, such tables are not considered tables in the
Braille Sense OnHand.
The Braille Sense OnHand provides a way to move table by table, and
cell by cell, in order for the user to comprehend the structure of the table.
In order to move cell by cell, the cell position and contents of the cell will
be displayed. However, the position information will only be announced
in voice.
For example, if you have move to a cell that is positioned on the second
row and third column, and the content of the cell is “news”, the Braille
Sense OnHand will announce, “row 2 cell 3 news”. In this case, “row 2
275
cell 3” will be announced in voice only, while “news” will be displayed in
Braille.
If a table is included in the cell, the Braille Sense OnHand will announce
“table cell”. If there is not a table in the cell, you will hear “empty cell”.
In the “table cell”, if you want to move to any cell within the lower level
table, press “Space-4” to move to the starting line of the lower level table.
Moving by cell is only valid in the table. If this command is executed
outside of the table, a warning sound will be played.
1. Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6
It moves to the starting position of the previous table. If there are no
previous tables, the warning sound will be played.
2. Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6
It moves to the starting position of the next table. If there are no more
tables, the warning sound will be played.
3. Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3
It moves to the previous cell. If the current cell is the first cell, it will
move to the starting line of the table. If this command is pressed on
the starting line of the table, the warning sound will be played.
4. Move to next cell: Space-5-6
It moves to the next cell. If the current cell is the last cell, it moves to
the end line of the table. If it is pressed on the end line of the table,
the warning sound will be played.
5. Move to upper cell: Space-3-5
It moves to the cell in the previous row within the same column. If
the current cell is on the first row, the warning sound will be played.
6. Move to lower cell: Space-2-6
It moves to the cell in the next line, within the same column. If the
current cell is on the last row, the warning sound will be played.
7. Current cell: Space-2-3-5-6
It announces and displays the content of the current cell again.
8. Move to the previous cell in the upper level table: Backspace-2-3
It moves to the previous cell from the current cell that contains the
276
current table. If the current table cell is the first cell of the highest level
table, it will show the starting line of the table. It does not work on the
highest level table.
9. Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6
It moves to the next cell from the current cell that contains the current
table. If the current table cell is the last cell in the highest level table, it
moves to the end line of the table. It does not work on the highest
level table.
10. Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5
It moves to the previous row, within the same column, to the table cell
that contains current table. If the cell that contains the current table is
located on the first row of the upper level table, the warning sound will
be played. It does not work on the highest level table.
11. Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6
It moves to the next row, within the same column, to the table cell that
contains the current table. If the table cell that contains current table
is at the last row of the upper level table, the warning sound will be
played. It does not work on the highest level table.
12. Check the position: Space-1-5-6
It announces the position of the current cell in the table. It shows the
position in both Braille and voice, such as “table 2-3 row 3, cell 4”.
11.7.4 Move to the Frame
1. Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6
It moves to the starting position of the previous frame. If there are no
previous frames, the warning sound will be played.
2. Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6
It moves to the starting position of the next frame. If there are no
more frames, the warning sound will be played.
11.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files
While you navigate any web page, if you come across a link for
streaming audio file, you can simply press “Enter” on it. Then the Media
player program will be launched or activated with lists of address inside
277
of the streaming file and the streaming audio file on the first address will
be played. The possible formats of streaming file are “m3u”, “pls”, “asf”,
“asx”.
For other formats besides above 4 formats, if you press “Enter” on it, the
Web browser program will play the streaming audio file directly. When
you play the streaming audio file in the Web browser, the “Add To
Favorites” dialog box will be appeared in order to quickly play the file
later through the File Manager or Web browser program. You can then
add the streaming address into “Favorite list” and the streaming file will
be saved with “ASF-” at the begging of file name. “ASF” denotes that the
link is a streaming audio file.
While you play a streaming audio file in the Web Browser, if you exit the
Web browser program or you lost the internet connection, the streaming
audio file will be stopped playing.
You can use following playback commands in Web browser while
playing any streaming audio file.
1. Play: “play” button on the front panel
2. Stop: “stop” button on the front panel
3. Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button
4. Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button
Playback of a streaming audio file does not stop if you switch to another
program, until you press the “stop” button on the front panel after you
come back to “Web browser”.
You can download real audio files but not play them in the Web Browser.
11.8 Hot keys in the Web Browser
File Menu
Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Page information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
278
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Read Menu
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button
Edit menu
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Copy URL: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)
Copy link: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to menu
Go to the home page: Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5)
Go to the previous page: Backspace-space-3 or backspace-p (dots 1-2-
3-4)
Go to the next page: Backspace-space-6 or backspace-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Go to previous heading: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Go to next heading: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Go to previous text: Space-2-4-6
Go to next text: Space-1-2-4-5-6
Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Open the history list: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Space-i (dots 2-
4)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Links list: Backspace-i (dots 2-4)
Favorites
Register as your home page: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Add to favorites: Backspace-a (dot 1)
Favorites list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
279
Options setting: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in the Web Browser
Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button
Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button
Play: Play button of the front panel
Stop: Stop button of the front panel
Reading Web Pages
Move between controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-space-4
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-space-1
Moving to the form
Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6
Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6
Table navigation hot keys
Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6
Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6
Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3
Move to the next cell: Space-5-6
Move to the upper cell: Space-3-5
Move to the lower cell: Space-2-6
Read current cell: Space-2-3-5-6
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-3
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6
Check the current position: Space-1-5-6
Move to frame
Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6
Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6
280
Read the current line: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
11.9 What the Web Browser Does Not Support
1. Images are not supported.
2. Any executable files on web sites cannot be executed. It is because
the operating system on the Braille Sense OnHand is different from
the operating system on a personal computer.
3. A web page using flash can be opened, but the flash content may not
be read.
4. Some web pages that use JavaScript cannot be opened.
281
12. DAISY Player
Using the Daisy player, on the Braille Sense OnHand, you can listen to
files and read books that use the DAISY format. DAISY is an acronym
for (DIGITAL ACCESSIBLE INFORMATION SYSTEM). One
advantage to DAISY books is that you can listen to the audio as well as
read the associated text with the audio. The Braille Sense OnHand
supports DAISY books that are version 3.0 or earlier. When you want
to run the player, press “Enter” on “Daisy player” in the “program” menu,
or press the shortcut key “d (dots 1-4-5)” in the Braille Sense OnHand
“program” menu. When you run the Daisy player, you will see all of the
disks available on the Braille Sense OnHand (regardless of whether
each disk has DAISY-formatted files or not). You can navigate through
the list with “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can open a disk containing
DAISY-formatted files by pressing “Enter” on the name of the disk.
After opening the disk, you will find all of the folders that are on the disk,
and any DAISY file titles that are on the disk that you have opened.
Once you find a DAISY file that you want to open, press “Space” to
select it. Then, press “Enter” to play the file.
If you have DAISY files in a folder on a disk, you can go in to the folder
by pressing “Enter” on the folder. Make sure that you do not press
“Space” on the folder. You will find all of the folders on the disk, and
you can navigate through the disk by using the same navigation keys
that are used in the file manager. Then, you can go to the folder that
has the DAISY files that you want to read or listen to. Press “Space” to
select the folder, and press “Enter” to play the DAISY file. If you only
have one DAISY file, it will automatically start playing after showing the
title. You can play the DAISY file by pressing “Enter” on the selected file
after navigating the file list with “Space-1” or “Space-4”. If you replay a
file that you have listened to before, you can start listening to the file at
the location where you stopped earlier. While playing Text Daisy with
voice off, “Read from cursor to end” won't work. To stop playing a file,
press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”, which will move you to the prompt box.
Once there, you can select “Yes” or “No” with “Space” or “Backspace”.
When you want to exit from the Daisy player, press “Space-z (dots 1-3-
282
5-6)”, which will move you to the prompt box. Once in the prompt box,
you can select “Yes” or “No” with “Space” or “Backspace”.
You can open the Daisy player menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or “F2” when you are in the Daisy player. In the menu, you will find
“File”, “Document”, “Mark”, and “Heading”. You can move between
these menu items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and press “Enter” when
you want to activate the selected menu item.
You can also play the DAISY contents using the audio buttons on the
front panel. In order to use the audio buttons to control the Daisy player,
the audio mode switch that was explained in the Section 2.10 (Switching
Audio mode) should be set to DAISY mode that is the center of the
audio mode switch. Once the audio mode is set to DAISY mode, you
can play the DAISY contents by pressing “play” button on the front panel.
Also you can pause the Daisy player by pressing “play” button on the
front panel when playing the DAISY contents. How to use the audio
buttons to control the Daisy player is explained in the following sections.
12.1 Components of the DAISY Player
While running the Daisy player, you will find four controls components:
“heading”, “information”, “Play”, and “Pause”. You can move between
the controls with “tab (“F3” or “Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-F3” or
“Space-1-2”)”. While playing a file in the Daisy player, you will find a
“heading”, which will show you a prefixed heading or affixed text if one
has been prepared. In “information”, you can find the current page,
level, phrase, elapsed time, and running time. You can move between
these items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can press “Enter” on
“Pause” or “Play”, which will let you pause or play the audio. If you are
anywhere in the four control components, you can play or pause by
pressing “Space”.
283
12.2 File
When in the “File” menu, you can open a new DAISY file, check file
information on the file that is currently open, and set voice parameters.
You can open the “File” menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”,
and then press “Enter” on “File”. Or, you can press “f (dots 1-2-4)”. In
the “File” menu, you will find items such as, “Open DAISY”, “Voice
Settings”, “Book-Info”, and “Exit”. You can move between these items
with “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can activate the selected item by
pressing “Enter”.
12.2.1 Open DAISY
You can open another DAISY file with using “Open DAISY”. To get to
“Open DAISY”, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the
“menu”, and then press “Enter” on “File”. Go to “Open DAISY” by
pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Or, you can use the hot key
“Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” without pressing “Space-m (dots1-3-4)”.
When you activate “Open DAISY”, you can see the disk list while
pausing or playing a file. Once here, you can open a file, as explained
above in section 12.
You can open “Open DAISY” dialog box by long pressing “stop” button
when play or pause the DAISY contents. And if you long press the “stop”
button again, this dialog box will close. And then return to the previous
position.
“Play” button is same function as “Enter” in “Open DAISY” dialog box.
Also “stop” button, “record” button, “previous” button and “next” button is
same function as “Backspace”, “Space”, “Space-1” and “Space-4” in
“Open DAISY” dialog box.
Namely, you can move to up and down by pressing “previous” and “next”
button in list of “Open DAISY” dialog box. And you can select and
unselect by pressing “record” button. If you press “stop” button, you can
move to upper folder. And if you press “play” button, you can play the
selected file in file list of “Open DAISY” dialog box.
284
In order to use this function, you must set the audio mode switch to
“DAISY mode”.
12.2.2 Voice Settings
In the “Voice Settings”, you can set the Daisy player voice parameters.
To execute voice settings, follow these steps:
1) Press “Space-m (dots1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
2) Move to “Voice Settings”, which is located under the “File” menu
and press “Enter”. Or press “s (dots 2-3-4)”.
3) Also you can directly activate the “Voice Settings” by pressing
“Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)”.
It will open the “Voice Settings” dialog box.
In the dialog box,
1. DAISY play type(It will show while playing text+audio DAISY)
2. Voice control
1) Set speed
2) Set volume
3) Set to control information of contents
3. Confirm
4. Cancel
You can move among the four controls with “Tab (Space-4-5)” or “Shift-
Tab (Space-1-2)”. In “voice control”, you can move among “Set speed”,
“Set volume” and “Set to control information of contents” with “Space-1”
or “Space-4”.
If you want to cancel this function, press “Space-e (dots 1-5) or “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)”.
12.2.2.1 DAISY play type
It will show while playing text+audio DAISY. You can use this function
when you play the text+audio DAISY. The default setting is “Audio”. It
285
will play with audio in text+audio Daisy. If you set the “Text”, it will play
with text in text+audio Daisy.
To change the setting value, press “Space-1” or “Space-4”.After
changing the setting value, press “Enter”. Or press “Tab (Space-4-5)”,
move to “Confirm” and press “Enter”.
Without calling the menu, you can directly call this function by pressing
“Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”.
12.2.2.2 Volume and Speed
You can increase the levels of speed and volume with “Space”, and
decrease them with “Backspace”. After setting the levels, press “Enter”
to confirm your choice.
Without using the “Voice Settings” menu, you can increase or decrease
the speed and volume.
1. Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5
2. Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6
3. Increase the volume: Space-Up scroll button
4. Decrease the volume: Space-Down scroll button
12.2.2.3 Set to control information of contents
You can use this function when you play the NIMAS Daisy. The default
setting value is “On”. To change the setting value, press “Space” or
“Backspace”.
If you set “On”, it shows symbol of controls and information while playing
NIMAS Daisy.
NIMAS Daisy control includes “image”, “description”, “caption”,
“prodnote” and “table”. “image” is displayed on the braille display as
“img”. “desc” is for “description” and “prodnote”. “cap” is for “caption”. “tdt
is for “table”.
286
12.2.3 Book-Info
Using “Book-Info”, you can check the information on the file that is
currently playing. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and press “Enter”
on “File”. Press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to “Book-Info” and press
“Enter” on “Book-Info”. Or you can activate “Book-Info” by pressing
“Enter-i (dots 2-4)”. Activating “Book-Info” will open the “Book-Info”
dialog box without stopping the playing of the file. In the dialog box,
you will find one state box that contains “running time and pages”,
another state box that contains the “mark information”, and “Close”.
You can move between the three controls with “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. In the first state box, you will find “Total time”,
“Read time”, “Remaining time”, “Total pages”, “Current page”, and
“Remaining pages”. In the other state box, you will find the “Total marks”
and “Mark page”. You can move between the items with “Space-1” or
“Space-4”. If you want to close the dialog box, press “Enter” on “Close”,
which will return you to the current file.
12.2.4 Exit
When you want to quit the Daisy player, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and press “Enter” on “File”. And press “Space-4” repeatedly to
move to “Exit” and press “Enter” on “Exit”. Or, you can press “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” without using the “Exit” menu. While exiting, you will
hear the message “Exit DAISY player. Are you sure?” Then, press
“Enter” on “Yes”, which is the default; or if you do not want to exit, you
can select “No” by pressing “Space”, and then press “Enter”.
12.3 Document
When in the “Document” menu, you can move by phrase or level while
playing. If you want to activate the “Document” menu, press “Space-m
(dots1-3-4)” or “F2” and then press “d (dots 1-4-5)”. In this menu, you
will find items such as, “Play/Pause”, “Previous Phrase”, “Next Phrase”,
“Previous Page”, “Next Page”, “Go To Page”, “Move down”, “Move up”,
“Set to prior level”, and “Set to next level”. You can move between
287
these items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”. To activate a menu item,
select the menu item, and then press “Enter”.
12.3.1 Play and Pause
You can access “Play/Pause” in the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Document”. Then, use
“Space-4” to move to “Play/Pause”, and press “Enter”. You can also
activate “Play/Pause” without calling up the menu by pressing “Space”.
While playing, you can move to the beginning of a document by pressing
“Space-1-2-3” or “Space-1-3”. You can move to the last phrase by
pressing “Space-4-5-6” or “Space-4-6”.
12.3.2 Move by Phrase
You can access this command in the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Document”. Then, use
“Space-4” to move to “Previous Phrase” or “Next Phrase”, and press
“Enter”. You can move to the next, previous, next fifth, or previous fifth
phrase without calling up the menu by pressing “dot 6”, “dot 3”, “dot 4”,
or “dot 1”, respectively.
Also you can move to the previous or next phrase without calling up the
menu by a short pressing “previous” button or “next” button in the front
panel. In order to move by phrase with “previous” or “next” button, you
must set the audio mode switch to “daisy mode”.
12.3.3 Move by Page
You can access this item in the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Document”. Then, use “Space-
4” to move to “Previous Page”, “Next Page”, or “Go To Page”, and press
“Enter”. You can move to the next or previous page without calling up
the menu by pressing “Space-3-4-5” or “Space-1-2-6” during play or
pause. You can jump to whatever page you want to go to by pressing
“Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)”. If you activate “Go To Page”, you will find an
edit box asking “Move to page number”. Here you can type in the page
288
number that you want to move to. Press “Enter”, and the Braille Sense
OnHand will move you to that page.
12.3.4 Move by Level
You can access this function in the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2”, and then press “Enter” on “Document”. Then, use “Space-
4” to move to “Move up” or “Move down”, and press “Enter”. Or, you
can move up and down without calling up the menu by pressing “dot 2”
or “dot 5”. You can set the level by pressing “dots 5-6” or “dots 2-3”.
Namely, if the level is set to 3, you can move through the level 1, 2 and 3
and if the level is set to 1, you can move through the level 1 only.
12.3.5 Move by Time Index
You can use this function as follows.
1. While playing audio DAISY file or in pause status.
2. While playing with audio in audio+text DAISY or in pause status.
The setting values are “5 seconds”, “10 seconds”, “30 seconds”,
“1minute”, “3 minutes”, “5 minutes”, “10 minutes”, “15 minutes”, “20
minutes”, “30 minutes” and “1 hour”.
To set previous time index, follow these steps:
1) Press “dots 1-2”. Every time you press the dots 1-2, Braille Sense
OnHand toggles between 30, 10, or 5 seconds; 1 hour and 30
minutes.
2) Choose the setting value you want.
To set next time index, follow these steps:
1) Press “dots 4-5”. Every time you press the dot s 1-2, Braille Sense
PLUA toggles between 5, 10, or 30 seconds: 1 minute, 3 minutes
and 5 minutes.
2) Choose the setting value you want.
The moving mode to move by a specified amount of time is as follows.
289
1. Move to previous time: Press “dots 2-3-6”. If you set “5 minutes”, it
will move to previous position by 5 minutes.
2. Move to next time: Press “dots 3-5-6”. If you set “5 minutes”, it will
move to next position by 5 minutes.
12.3.6 Move by Text Index
You can use this function as follows.
1. While playing text DAISY file or in pause status.
2. While playing with text in audio+text DAISY or in pause status.
The setting values are “Phonetic”, “Character”, “Word” and “Sentence”.
To set previous text index, follow these steps:
1) Press “dots 1-2”. Every time you press the dots 1-2, Braille Sense
OnHand toggles between “Sentence”, “Word”, “Character” or
“Phonetic”.
2) Choose the setting value you want.
To set next text index, follow these steps:
1) Press “dots 4-5”. Every time you press “dots 4-5”, Braille Sense
PLUA toggles between “Phonetic”, “Character”, “Word” and
“Sentence”.
2) Choose the setting value you want.
When you set the value, to move by the setting value, follow these
steps:
1. Move to previous text: Press “dots 2-3-6”. If you set “Sentence”, it
will move to previous position by sentence.
2. Move to next text: Press “dots 3-5-6”. If you set “Sentence”, it will
move to next position by sentence.
12.4 Mark
When you are in the “Mark” menu, you can put in a mark or jump to a
mark while you are playing a file. Mark can be inserted up to 1000.You
290
can open the “Mark” menu by pressing “Space-m (dots1-3-4)” or “F2”,
and then “m (dots 1-3-4)”. When you are in the “Mark” menu, you will
find the following sub-menus: “Previous Mark”, “Next Mark”, “Set Mark”,
“Move To Mark”, and “Delete Mark”. You can move between the sub-
menus with “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
12.4.1 Previous Mark
The “Previous Mark” function will allow you to move to a location where
you have placed a mark. If you have passed a mark while listening to a
DAISY Player file, you can move to that mark by using the “Previous
Mark” function. You can access the “Previous Mark” function by pressing
“Enter” on “Mark”, and then move to “Previous Mark” by pressing
“Space-4” and press “Enter”. Or just press “p (dots 1-2-3-4)” to execute
“Previous Mark”. Then, press “Enter” on “Previous Mark”. You can
also move to the previous mark by pressing “Space-3” during reading
DAISY contents.
12.4.2 Next Mark
The “Next Mark” function will allow you to move to a location where you
have placed a mark. If you have placed a mark in a DAISY Player file,
and you have not yet passed it, you can move to that mark by using the
“Next Mark” function. You can access the “Next Mark” function by
pressing “Enter” on “Mark”, and then move to “Next Mark” by pressing
“Space-4” and press “Enter”. Or just press “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” to execute
“Next Mark”. Then, press “Enter” on “Next Mark”. You can also move
to the previous mark by pressing “Space-6” during reading DAISY
contents.
12.4.3 Set Mark
You can set a mark anywhere you want while playing a file. You can
set a mark in the “Set Mark” menu. Otherwise, you can set a mark by
pressing “Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)”. You can also activate this function by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”. Then, press “Enter” on “Mark”.
291
Use “Space-4” to move to “Set Mark”, and then press “Enter”. Or press
“m (dots 1-3-4)” when you are in the “Mark” menu. The “Set Mark” dialog
box will then open, which will ask you to “Enter mark name:”. Enter the
number of the mark that you want to insert between 1~1,000.
12.4.4 Move to Mark
Without using the menu, you can move to the next or previous mark by
pressing “Space-6” or “Space-3” during play/pause. You can also
move to the mark you want by pressing “Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)”. You can
also access this feature in the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”
or by pressing “F2”. You can then, use “Space-4” to move to “Mark”,
and press “Enter”. Or, you can press “j (dots 2-4-5)” when you are in
the “Mark” menu. If you activate the “Move To Mark” function, you will
find the edit box asking “Mark name to move to:”. Here you can type in
the mark name that you want to go to. Make sure that you have
already set a mark. Otherwise, you will not be able to move to a mark.
12.4.5 Deleting a Mark
Without using the menu, you can activate the “Delete Mark” function by
pressing “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”. You can also activate this function by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”. Then use, “Space-4” to move
to “Mark”, and press “Enter”. Then, use “Space-4” to move to “Delete
Mark”, and press “Enter” on “Delete Mark”. If you activate the “Delete
Mark” function, an edit box will appear asking, “Enter mark name to
delete:”. Make certain that you want to delete the mark that you have
entered. If you type in a mark in this edit box, the mark name will be
deleted without pressing “Enter”.
12.5 Heading
When in the “Heading” menu, you can move in a document by your text
heading, or you can search a heading while the DAISY Player is playing.
You can open the “Heading” menu by pressing “Space-m (dots1-3-4)” or
“F2”, and then press “h (dots 1-3-5)”. Then, you can see the sub-menu:
292
“Previous Heading”, “Next Heading”, “Scan Heading”, “Read Heading”,
“First Heading”, “Last Heading”, “Find Heading”, and “Find Again”. You
can move between the sub-menu items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
12.5.1 Move by Heading
While playing a DAISY file, you can move heading by heading without
using the “Heading” menu. You can move to the next, previous, first,
and last heading by pressing “Space-5”, “Space-2”, “Space-2-3”, and
“Space-5-6”, respectively.
Also you can move to the previous or next heading without calling up the
menu using audio buttons on the front panel. Before you use this feature,
you have to set the audio mode button on the front panel to “daisy
mode”. In order to move to previous or next heading, press “previous”
or “next” button for about 2 seconds and release it. Then it will move to
the previous or next heading.
12.5.2 Move to Specific Heading
While playing a DAISY file, you can move specific heading without
calling the menu.
In order to move to specific heading, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)” while playing a DAISY file.
2) It shows “Current Heading: xx Total heading: yy. Enter the heading
number to move to:”.
3) Type heading number that you want to move.
4) Press “Enter”.
5) It will move to the selected heading and the DAISY file will start
playing.
12.5.3 Find Heading
You can find any heading you want while playing a DAISY file. Without
using the “Find Heading” menu, you can activate “Find Heading” by
293
pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”. When you have pressed this hot key,
you will see a dialog box that shows the message, “Heading to find:” You
will also see a “Search direction:”, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel”
button. You can move between the four items with “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
At the “Heading to find:” edit box, you can input the mark name that you
want to find. And select the searching direction to “Previous” or “Next” at
“Search direction” prompt by pressing “Space”.
12.5.4 Scan Heading and Read Heading
While playing a DAISY Player file, you can check your current heading
(or heading list) from your current location to the last heading. You can
scan them by activating the “Read Heading” or “Scan Heading” in the
“Heading” menu.
Without using the menu (pressing “Space-m (dots1-3-4)” or “F2” and
then “h (dots 1-2-5”)”), you can check the current heading (in the file that
is currently being played) by pressing “Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)”. If you
activate this function, you will see the current heading name and level.
By pressing “Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)”, you can scan the heading list from
the present to the end. If you activate the “Scan Heading” menu, you
will see the heading list from the present to the end. In the list, if you
find one that you want to listen to, press “Enter” or “Space” to play it.
Using this method, you are able to skip other headings and play what
you want. If you want to cancel the scan heading function, press
“Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. Then, you will be
returned to where you were before.
12.5.5 Find Phrase
You can find phrase that you want to move while playing a DAISY file or
in a pause status.
To execute this function, follow these steps:
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the menu.
294
2) It shows “File”.
3) Press “Space-4”, move to “Heading”.
4) Press “Enter” on the “Heading”. Or press “h (dots 1-2-5)”.
5) It shows “Previous heading”.
6) Press “Space-4”, move to “Find Phrase”.
7) Press “Enter” on the “Find Phrase”. Or press “s (dots 2-3-4)”.
Without calling the menu, you can directly execute it by pressing “Space-
s (dots 2-3-4)”.
While executing the “Find Phrase”, it will open “Find Phrase dialog box”.
The “Find Phrase dialog box” consists of as follows.
1. Phrase to find
2. Search direction
3. Confirm
4. Cancel
You can move among 4 controls by pressing “Tab (Space-4-5)” and
“Shift-Tab (Space-1-2)”.
To find Phrase, follow these steps:
1) You can type phrase that you want to find in “Phrase to find” edit
box. You don't need to type whole phrase.
If there is no phrase that you want to find, it will hear “No more
phrases found”.
2) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, move to “Search direction”. The default
setting is “Next”. The options that you can choose from for this
setting are, “Next” and “Previous”. To change setting value, press
“Space”.
· Next: It will find phrase from the next direction of current location.
· Previous: It will find phrase from the previous direction of current
location.
3) After setting the “Search direction”, press “Enter”. Or press “Tab
(Space-4-5)”, move to “Confirm. Press “Enter” on the “Confirm”.
4) It will play from the searched phrase.
295
If you want to cancel the “Find Phrase”, press “Enter” on the “Cancel”.
Or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
12.6 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player
Play
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Space-1-3 or Space-1-2-3
Move to the last phrase: Space-4-6 or Space-4-5-6
Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5
Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6
Increase the volume: Space-up scroll button
Decrease the volume: Space-down scroll button
Move by Phrase
Move to the next phrase: dot 6 or short press “next” button
Move to the previous phrase: dot 3 or short press “previous” button
Move to the next fifth phrase: dot 4
Move to the previous fifth phrase: dot 1
Move by page
Move to the next page: Space-3-4-5
Move to the previous page: Space-1-2-6
Go to the page: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Move by level
Move up: dot 2
Move down: dot 5
Set to prior level: dots 2-3
Set to next level: dots 5-6
Move by heading
Move to the next heading: Space-5 or long press “next” button
Move to the previous heading: Space-2 or long press “previous” button
Move to the last heading: Space-5-6
Move to the first heading: Space-2-3
296
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5
Move to Specific Heading: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)
Find Phrase: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Heading
Find heading: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Scan heading: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Read heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Set mark
Set mark at current position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Move to the next mark: Space-6
Move to the previous mark: Space-3
Delete mark: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to the title list: Space-1-2-5-6
Open DAISY file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Voice setting: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Change DAISY play type: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Check the book-info: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
297
13. Bluetooth Manager
The Braille Sense OnHand is Bluetooth capable. Bluetooth is the latest
in wireless technology that allows for a Personal Area Network (PAN).
Unlike a traditional Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), these
networks are limited to approximately 30 feet or less. Bluetooth
enables users to exchange various types of information. In order to use
Bluetooth with the Braille Sense OnHand, you must change the
Bluetooth option to “On” in the option menu. Please refer to the section
3.38 in this user manual.
Bluetooth on the Braille Sense OnHand allows you to transfer files from
the Braille Sense OnHand to a computer, use the Internet connection
your computer is using, or use the Braille Sense OnHand as a wireless
Braille display. To use the Braille Sense OnHand as a wireless Braille
display, you must be running the screen readers; Window-Eyes or
Supernova. Please note that Bluetooth is currently an evolving
standard, and you may experience different functionality, depending on
the operating system that you are using.
The Braille Sense OnHand uses the built-in Bluetooth manager program
to allow the user to use the Bluetooth functionality in the Braille Sense
OnHand. You can access the Bluetooth manager in several ways. To
access Bluetooth manager from the program menu, you can either press
“Space-1” or “Space-4” until you hear Bluetooth manager, or press the
“Space” until you get to Bluetooth manager. When you hear Bluetooth
manager, press “Enter” to activate it. Or, you can press “l (dots 1-2-3)”
to open the Bluetooth manager from the “Program” menu without having
to press “Enter” on it.
13.1 Bluetooth Device List
After the Bluetooth manager has been activated, it will begin scanning
for other Bluetooth devices that are in range, and for the services
available from the other Bluetooth devices. For example, if you have a
computer with Bluetooth enabled nearby, then the Braille Sense
298
OnHand will attempt to find it. It may take a while to find all of the
Bluetooth devices in range, so expect to wait about 30 to 40 seconds for
this process to complete. You will hear “Scanning for devices. Please
wait…” message and beep sound when this process begins. And when
the Bluetooth device is detected, the Braille Sense OnHand announces
“Found (Bluetooth device name)”. Until the end of scanning all devices,
any keys on the Braille Sense OnHand will not work, and you cannot
stop scanning the device. You have to wait until the completion of the
scanning devices.
If Bluetooth option in Option menu set to “Off”, or if the Braille Sense
OnHand does not recognize it, the Braille Sense OnHand will say the
message, “Bluetooth not activated”. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will
automatically exit the Bluetooth Manager.
Once the Braille Sense OnHand has found other Bluetooth devices that
are in range, they will be displayed as “device name(untrusted (or
trusted)) xx/yy” where xx is the number where the device appears in the
list, and yy is the total number of devices. And “trusted” means that the
service has been authenticated, and “untrusted” means that the service
has not been authenticated.
This part of the Bluetooth Manager is known as the Bluetooth Device
List, and thus, the menu for this section is called the Bluetooth Device
List menu. If there are no other Bluetooth devices in range, the Braille
Sense OnHand will say “no items 0/0”. You can press “Space-1” or
“Space-4” to move through the list. To select the device from the list,
press “Enter” on the device name.
If the Bluetooth device trusted, the device setting will be automatically
saved in the memory of the Braille Sense OnHand. If you want to
delete this setting, you press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on Bluetooth device
name in the Bluetooth Device List. The Braille Sense OnHand will say
“Device settings removed”. Removing this setting will apply only to the
current device.
299
Once the Braille Sense OnHand has finished searching for other
Bluetooth devices, you can access the menu by pressing “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or by pressing “F2”. The “Bluetooth Device List menu” has
the “Rescan For Devices”, “Device Name”, “Delete Pair Information”, and
“Exit”. You can navigate the menu items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
The first menu item is “Rescan For Device”. This item allows you to
rescan for other Bluetooth devices. To activate this item, press “Space-
m (dots 1-3-4)” for “F2” and then press “Enter” on “Rescan For Device”.
You can also access this option by pressing “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you
are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or you can activate it directly
without calling up the menu by pressing “Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)”.
You can access the next item in the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” and then “Space-1” or “Space-4” until you get to “Device
Name”, and press “Enter”. You can also press “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” while
you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu to activate “Device Name”.
This item allows you to give the Braille Sense OnHand a specific name.
The default name for the Bluetooth device name is “Braille Sense
OnHand”. You can activate this item by pressing “Enter” on it, or you
can access it without calling up the menu by pressing “Enter-n (dots 1-3-
4-5)”. After you activate this item, you will find a computer edit box that
contains your current device name. To modify the name, type the new
name and then press “Enter”. Once you have entered the new name,
you should close all programs and reset the Braille Sense OnHand by
pressing the reset button with your finger on the rear panel. To cancel
your changes, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or “F4”. You will then be
returned to the Bluetooth Device List.
The next menu item is “Delete Pair Information”. This item allows you
to remove the device setting. To activate this item, press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” for “F2” and then press “Enter” on “Delete Pair Information”.
You can also access this option by pressing “d (dots 1-4-5)” while you
are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or you can activate it directly
without calling up the menu by pressing “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
300
The next item in the Bluetooth Device List menu is the “Exit” item. This
item will exit the Bluetooth manager program. To activate this item,
press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and then press “Space-1” or
“Space-4” to navigate to “Exit”. Then, press “Enter” on “Exit”. You can
also access the item while in the menu by pressing “z (dots 1-3-5-6)”
while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu or at any time without
calling up the menu by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
13.2 Bluetooth Service List
Once you know which remote Bluetooth device you want to connect to,
press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to navigate to the device you want to
connect to in the Bluetooth Device List, and then press “Enter” on the
device name. You will then hear, “Scanning for service. Please wait…”
Please note that no keys will work during scanning the devices. The
Braille Sense OnHand will begin scanning services that are available
from the remote Bluetooth device. The Braille Sense OnHand support
the services: LAN, FTP, ActiveSync, Serial port, Headset, Bluetooth
DUN. In order to access all of these functions, you must make sure
that the remote Bluetooth device is in Discoverable mode, and that all
services are enabled. It is possible to have certain services enabled on
your remote Bluetooth device, while having other services that are
disabled. For example, you could have LAN and FTP enabled, while
having ActiveSync and Serial Port disabled. If this is the case, then the
Braille Sense OnHand will only display LAN and FTP.
Once the Braille Sense OnHand has found all of the available services, it
will display the services in a list in the following format: “service name
xx/yy” where xx is the number of the service that you are on, and yy is
the number of total available services. You can move through the
available services by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can press
“Backspace” to return to the Bluetooth Device List.
Once the Braille Sense OnHand has finished searching service, you can
access the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or by pressing “F2”.
The “Bluetooth Service List menu” has the “Device Name”, “Open FTP”,
301
“Disconnect” and “Exit”. You can navigate the menu items with “Space-
1” or “Space-4”.
How to use “Device Name” and “Exit” in the “Bluetooth Service List”
menu are the same as how to use them in the “Bluetooth Device List”
menu. Please refer to Section 13.1 (Bluetooth Device List).
The “Open FTP” menu item allows you to open a direct FTP connection
with a remote Bluetooth device without having to select the device and
then the service. However, you must have connected the service first
before the Braille Sense OnHand will allow you to transfer files. If you
have not connected the FTP service already, and you activate this
function, you will hear, “FTP service disconnected”. You can access
“Open FTP” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and then
“Space-1” or “Space-4” to navigate to “Open FTP”. Once you are at
“Open FTP”, press “Enter” to activate it, and the Braille Sense OnHand
will say, “Connecting service”. You can also activate it by pressing “t
(dots 2-3-4-5)” while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or by
pressing “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” without calling up the menu. This
chapter will cover connecting various Bluetooth services later in more
detail.
The “Disconnect” menu item will allow you to disconnect services that
are connected to other Bluetooth devices. You can access this item by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and then “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
Then, press “Enter” to activate it. You can also activate this item while
you are in the Bluetooth Service List menu by pressing “d (dots 1-4-5)”,
or you can activate it without calling up the menu by pressing “Enter-d
(dots 1-4-5)”.
In order to disconnect any service, press “Space-1” or “Space-4” at the
Bluetooth Service List to move to the service that you want to disconnect,
and execute the “Disconnect” command.
You can disconnect the currently focused service only. This means that
you can disconnect only one service at one time. You cannot disconnect
plural services at once.
302
If there are no services connected to other Bluetooth devices, and you
activate this function, you will hear, “There is no service connected”.
13.2.1 Connecting Service
To authenticate a service and connect to it, press “Enter” on the service.
Once you have pressed “Enter” on the service, you will hear “Connecting
service”. Then, you will hear “PIN code:” You must use ASCII
characters when you type in this edit box. On the Braille display, you
will see “PIN code:” This edit box will only appear when you have
pressed enter on a service that not say “Connected” after the service
name. You can exit the edit box or cancel any text you have typed in
by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. You will then be returned to the
Bluetooth Service List.
If you have typed in a pin code, and have pressed “Enter”, you will hear,
“Please wait for authentication”. If the remote device is setup correctly,
and has not been set up to allow this device to always connect, then the
remote device will ask for a pin code. If the remote Bluetooth device pin
code matches the pin code that was typed in the Braille Sense OnHand,
then the service will authenticate. If this occurs, you will hear,
“ Connection succeeded”. Then, while the service connects, you will
hear, “Please wait. Access permission”. If the remote Bluetooth device
does not give access permission, then you will hear, “Connection failed”,
and you will be returned to the Bluetooth Services List. If the remote
Bluetooth device gives you access permission, then the Braille Sense
OnHand will say “Connection succeeded”. If the connection succeeds,
then you will see “Connected” after the services that have successfully
connected. Some of the service may be connected without inputting pin
code depending on the Remote Bluetooth device settings.
After you have connected to a service, you can press “Enter-d (dots 1-4-
5)” to disconnect the service, and the Braille Sense OnHand will say
“Service disconnected”. You will then be returned to the Bluetooth
Service List. If you disconnect a service, “Connected” will disappear
from the Bluetooth Service List.
303
If you connect to the FTP service, you will see a list of files and folders
that are on the remote Bluetooth device. The rest of this chapter will
discuss each service in detail.
13.2.2 LAN Service
With the LAN service, you can connect to the Internet through your
computer. If you connect this service, you can use the Web browser
and email program, just like if you were connected to the Internet via
wireless LAN card. However, you must setup Internet Connection
Sharing (ICS) on your remote Bluetooth device. Without ICS properly
setup, you will not be able to connect to the Internet using the LAN
service. For information on how to setup ICS for your remote Bluetooth
device, please refer to the documentation that came with your Bluetooth
adapter. Setting up ICS requires knowledge of network architecture, so
it may be a good idea to contact a local network technician or your
network administrator for help to set up ICS.
13.2.3 FTP Service
This service will work similar to using FTP on the Internet. It will allow
you to transfer folders and files to and from the Braille Sense OnHand
between it and the remote Bluetooth device. When referring to the FTP
service, we will refer to the file/folder list in the remote Bluetooth device
as “remote folder list” and the file/folder list of the Braille Sense OnHand
as the “local folder list”.
After you have successfully connected to the FTP service, the Bluetooth
Manager will take you to the remote folder list. The remote folder list
that you are taken to is determined by the remote Bluetooth device.
Typically, this folder is called the Bluetooth Exchange Folder on the
remote Bluetooth device, but you should check your remote Bluetooth
device for information on this folder.
304
The remote folder list is very similar to the File Manager. With the FTP
service, you can perform the following functions:
1. Copy
2. Paste
3. Send To
4. Retrieve File
5. New Folder
6. Delete File/Folder
7. Open Local Folder. If you press “Enter” on this, you will be taken to
the local folder list. If you are in the local folder list, this menu will be
changed to “move remote folder”.
8. Select All
9. Information
In the next few sections, we will discuss the various FTP functions.
Please note that while sending data to and from the remote Bluetooth
device, the remote Bluetooth device may still need to give access
permission to the Braille Sense OnHand. Please consult the
documentation for the remote Bluetooth device for details.
13.2.3.1 Copy and Paste
These functions will allow you to copy and paste files between the local
folder and the remote folder.
You can use the following steps to move files from a local folder to the
remote folder:
1. After you connect to the FTP service, you will be in the remote folder
list. While in the remote folder list, you should press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the FTP menu. Then, you should press
“Space-1” or “Space-4” to navigate to “Open Local Folder”, and press
“Enter”. You can also press “o (dots 1-3-5)” while in the menu, or
you can press “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)” without having to call up the
“menu”. After activating this function, you will hear, “Open Local
Folder”. Then, you will be taken to the Disk list that appears in file
manager. You will be taken to “flashdisk” by default, but if you have
305
a USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to them by pressing
“Space-1” or “Space-4”.
2. Just like navigating in the File manager, you can access a disk by
pressing “Enter” on it. Use the exact same navigation keys as the
File manager to navigate the local folder. You can refer to chapter 4
of this manual to find the various file manager commands. Note that
you cannot select folders. You can only select files. If you try to
select a folder, the Braille Sense OnHand will say “Deactivated”.
3. Once you have selected files by pressing the “Space”, you can copy
them by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and then navigate to
“Copy” by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Or,
you can press “Enter-c (dots 1-4)” to activate the function without
calling up the menu.
4. After you have activated the copy function, you will hear, “Copying”
and then “Open Remote Folder”. You will then be moved to the
remote folder list.
5. In the remote folder list, you can navigate to the folder where you
want to paste the file. Once you are in the folder where you want to
paste the file, press “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)”. Or, you can press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and then use “Space-1” or “Space-4” to get to
the “Paste” function, and press “Enter”. While pasting, you will hear
a sound that indicates that the Braille Sense OnHand is working. If
the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter
each time an additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less
than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress
meter.
6. When the file has been pasted successfully, you will see the message,
“xxx file sent”, where xxx is the name of the file. If the file is not
pasted successfully, you will hear, “xxx file not sent”. After the file is
pasted successfully, you will also hear, “Successfully sent”, and you
will be returned to the remote folder list.
The following steps should be used to copy a file from the remote folder
list to the local folder list:
306
1. After the FTP service has connected, you can navigate through the
remote folder, just like in the file manager. If you need to reference
the navigation keys for the File manager, please refer to chapter 4 in
this manual.
2. Once you have selected the files that you want to copy by pressing
the “Space”, you can open the FTP menu by pressing “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)”, and then use “Space-1” or “Space-4” to navigate to “Copy”,
and press “Enter”. You can also activate this function without calling
up the menu by pressing “Enter-c (dots 1-4)”. Note that you cannot
copy folders to send to the local folder.
3. Next, it will open the “Local folder”. You will see the Disk list, just like
when you open the file manager. You will be taken to “flashdisk” by
default. However, if you have a SD card or USB memory stick
inserted, you can navigate to those disks by pressing “Space-1”or
“Space-4”. Please refer to chapter 3 in this manual regarding
navigation keys in the File manager.
4. After entering a disk, open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)”. Then, move to “Paste” with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and press
“Enter”. You can also activate this function without calling up the
menu by pressing “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)”. While pasting, you will
hear a sound that indicates that the Braille Sense OnHand is working.
If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter
each time an additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less
than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress
meter.
5. When the file has been pasted successfully, you will see the message,
“xxx file retrieved”, where xxx is the name of the file. If the file is not
pasted successfully, you will hear, “xxx file not retrieved”. After the file
is pasted successfully, you will also hear, “Retrieve completed”, and
you will be returned to the local folder list.
13.2.3.2 Send To
This function will allow you to send files from the local folder list to the
remote folder list. It is only available in the local folder list. This is very
similar to the copy and paste function. The difference is that you do not
307
have to paste the file to the remote folder. It is done as soon as you
activate the “Send To” function. When you activate this function, the
file can only be sent to the root of the remote folder list. To activate the
“Send To” function, perform the following steps:
1. After the FTP service is connected, you can press “Space-m (dots 1-
3-4)” or “F2” while you are in the remote folder list to open the menu.
Then, press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to “Open Local Folder”,
and press “Enter”. You can also activate this function without calling
up the menu by pressing “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)”.
2. After you have activated this function, you will see the disk list, just
like when you open the file manager. You will be taken to “flashdisk”
by default. However, if you have a SD memory card or USB
memory stick inserted, you can navigate to those disks by pressing
“Space-1” or “Space-4”. Please refer to chapter 4 in this manual
regarding navigation keys in the File manager.
3. Then, select a file by pressing “Space” on the file. You can only
select files and not folders.
4. After you have selected a file, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, and then
press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to “Send To”, and press “Enter”.
Or, you can press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” to activate the “Send To”
function without having to call up the “menu”.
5. Just like copying and pasting, you will hear a sound that indicates that
the Braille Sense OnHand is working. If the file is larger than 300
KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an additional
10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, then you
will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter. When the
transfer has completed, you will hear, “xxx file sent”, where xxx is the
name of the file. If the file does not transfer, you will hear, “xxx file
not sent”. Once all of the files have been transferred completely,
you will hear, “Successfully sent”, and you will be returned to the
remote folder list.
308
13.2.3.3 Retrieve File
The “Retrieve File” function will allow you to retrieve a file from the
remote folder list, and move it to the local folder. This function is
available while in the remote folder list. You can only save files to the
“flashdisk/download” folder with this function. Perform the following
steps to activate the “Retrieve File” function:
1. After you have connected the FTP service, you will be connected to
the remote folder list. You can navigate through the list using the
same commands as in the File manager. You can reference these
commands by referring to chapter 4 of this manual.
2. Select the file that you want to retrieve by pressing the “Space” on it.
Note that you cannot select folders.
3. After you have selected the file, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to open the menu, and then use “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to
“Retrieve File”, and press “Enter”. You can also activate this
function without calling up the menu by press “Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)”.
4. Just like copying and pasting, you will hear a sound that indicates that
the Braille Sense OnHand is working. If the file is larger than 300
KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an additional
10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, then you
will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter. When the
transfer has completed, you will hear, “xxx file retrieved”, where xxx is
the name of the file. If the file does not transfer, you will hear, “xxx
file not retrieved”. Once all of the files have been transferred
completely, you will hear, “Retrieve completed”, and you will be
returned to the remote folder list.
13.2.3.4 New Folder
The “New Folder” function will allow you to create a new folder in the
local folder list or the remote folder list. To create a new folder, perform
the following steps:
1. After the FTP service has connected, navigate to the local or remote
folder list and move to the folder where you want to make new folder.
309
You can move between the “remote folder list” and “local folder list”
by pressing “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)”. And how to move among the items
in the folder list is the same as how to move in the File manager.
2. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” to open the menu, and then use
“Space-1”or “Space-4” to navigate to “New Folder”, and press “Enter”.
Or, you can activate this function without calling up the menu by
pressing “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”.You will then see an edit box that says,
“New folder name:”. Type in the new folder name using ASCII
characters, and then press “Enter”. If the folder is created
successfully, you will hear, “Folder successfully created”. You will
then be automatically returned to the list that you were in, whether it
was the remote or local folder list.
3. To cancel any changes that you made, press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”,
and you will be returned to the previous list.
13.2.3.5 Delete File/Folder
This function will allow you to delete files or folders in the remote or local
folder list. Note that if a folder contains folders, you will not be able to
delete the folder. To activate this function, perform the following steps:
1. After you have connected to the FTP service, navigate to the local or
remote folder list, and select the file(s) or folder(s) that you want to
delete by pressing the “Space” on them. The navigation keys are
exactly the same as when using the file manager. To reference
these keys, please refer to chapter 3 of this manual. You can move to
between “remote folder list” and “local folder list” by pressing “Enter-o
(dots 1-3-5)”.
2. Once you have selected the file(s) or folder(s), press “Space-m (dots
1-3-4)”, and then use “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to “Delete
File/Folder”, and press “Enter”. You can also activate this function
without calling up the menu by pressing “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
3. If the file(s) or folder(s) is/are deleted successfully, you will hear,
“Successfully deleted”.
310
13.2.3.6 Information
This function will allow you to check information regarding files or folders
that are located in the remote or local folder list. You can activate this
function by performing the following steps:
1. After you have connected to the FTP service, navigate to the local or
remote folder list, and select the file or folder that you want to know
information about. The navigation keys are exactly the same as
when using the file manager. To reference these keys, please refer
to chapter 4 in this manual.
2. Then, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and
then use “Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to “Information”, and press
“Enter”. Or, you can activate this function without calling up the
menu by pressing “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”.
3. After you have activated the function, you will see the “Information
dialog box”, which consists of “Type”, “Size”, “Date”, “Attribute”,
“Confirm”, and “Cancel”. You can move between these controls by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. If you select
multiple files, the “Information” function will display the number of
selected files and size.
13.2.4 ActiveSync Service
This service works the same way as when you connect the Braille Sense
OnHand to a computer via a USB cable, and use ActiveSync. If the
connection succeeds when activating it by pressing “Enter” on
ActiveSync, you will hear the sound that ActiveSync makes when there
is a successful connection. Just as with all of the Bluetooth services,
the remote Bluetooth device may need to authorize the Braille Sense
OnHand. You will then be returned to the Bluetooth Service list. Just
like using ActiveSync via USB, you can copy and paste files from the
Braille Sense OnHand from the remote Bluetooth device to the Braille
Sense OnHand and visa versa.
311
If you want to disconnect the service, you can press “Enter-d (dots 1-4-
5)” while in the Bluetooth Manager, and the Braille Sense OnHand will
say, “Disconnect from service”, and you will be returned to the Bluetooth
Service list. You will no longer see the word “Connected” after
ActiveSync in the Bluetooth Service List.
You cannot use ActiveSync via USB and Bluetooth at the same time. If
the remote Bluetooth device is connected via USB and using ActiveSync,
you must disconnect the remote Bluetooth device in order to use the
ActiveSync service via Bluetooth.
13.2.5 Serial Port
If you connect this service, you should not connect the other services.
The Serial Port service will allow you to use your Braille Sense OnHand
as a wireless Braille display via Bluetooth. In order to use the Braille
Sense OnHand as a wireless Bluetooth display, please reference the
following sections. Note that you must be using Window-Eyes in order
to use the Braille Sense OnHand as a wireless Braille display. Note
that following explanation is how to use the serial port when the Window-
Eyes is installed as a screen reader program in PC. If you are using
Supernova as a screen reader, please contact HIMS by e-mail. The e-
mail id of HIMS is hims@himsintl.com.
13.2.5.1 Setting up the Braille Sense OnHand to Work as a Bluetooth
Braille Display
The following steps will walk you through setting up the Braille Sense
OnHand to work as a Bluetooth Braille display. These instructions
assume that you already have Bluetooth installed on your computer.
The following instructions assume that you are running Window-Eyes
5.5, or greater, and at least Windows XP, Service Pack 2. Before
starting, make sure that your Braille Sense OnHand is turned on.
Although it may not be necessary, you should close all applications that
are running on the Braille Sense OnHand, and be in the Program menu
for best performance. If you have more than one Braille Sense
312
OnHand, make sure that only the Braille Sense OnHand that you want to
configure is turned on.
13.2.5.2 Setting up the Computer
1. Navigate to the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray. You may do this
in Windows XP by pressing “windows key-b”, and then use the Right
or Left Arrow Keys until you reach the Bluetooth icon. Then, press the
“context menu key”. Note that if you don’t have the Bluetooth icon in
the System Tray, you may have to change the settings for the
Bluetooth icon to appear. Go to the Windows Control Panel,
Bluetooth Devices, Options, and then check the check box that says
“Show the Bluetooth Icon in the Notification Area”.
2. Press the “up or down arrow” keys until you get to “Open Bluetooth
settings”.
3. Press “Enter”.
4. Select the Device tab control. You may need to press Ctrl-Tab in
order to select this tab control.
5. Tab to the Add button.
6. Press “Enter”.
7. Press “Space” to check the checkbox for “My device is setup and
ready to be found”.
8. Press enter”.
9. The XP machine will find the Braille Sense OnHand, and it will be
called “Windows CE”. Remember that the Braille Sense OnHand
must be turned on in order to be found as mentioned above. If you
forgot to turn the Braille Sense OnHand on, leave it turned on, exit the
Bluetooth settings, and start at step number 1 above.
10. Press the “down arrow” key to focus Windows CE.
11. Tab to the Next button.
12. Press “Enter”.
13. Press “down arrow” to focus the radio button, “Let me choose my own
passkey”. Focus will automatically be put in the edit box, and you
may hear a tool tip that says, “We recommend using a passkey that is
8 to 16 digits long”. You should type your passkey here. For
example, you might type, “1111”.
313
14. Press “Enter”. Windows will then begin exchanging the passkeys,
and a new dialog will appear on the computer.
15. The Braille Sense OnHand will then ask for the passkey by saying,
“Computer Edit Box PIN code:” Using the same passkey that was
typed in to the computer, type in the same passkey on the Braille
Sense OnHand and press “Enter” on the Braille Sense OnHand.
16. The computer will say the message, “Found new hardware” and the
final dialog should appear on the computer. Remember that you can
press “ctrl-shift-w” to have the entire dialog read using Window-Eyes.
The dialog should display that the Bluetooth device was successfully
set up. It is very important to note the COM ports for the outgoing
COM port and the incoming COM port. For example, the outgoing
COM port may be COM 5, and the incoming COM port may be COM
6. Do not be surprised if your COM ports are not set to COM 5 and
COM 6. The COM ports used can vary from computer to computer.
17. Press “tab” to get to the Finish button, and then press “Enter” to
activate it.
18. You will then be taken back to the Bluetooth devices setting dialog.
Press Ctrl-Tab twice to focus the COM ports tab control.
19. Press “tab” to get to the list of COM ports, and then press the Down
Arrow to move through the list of COM ports to make sure that they
match the COM ports that were mentioned when you completed the
Bluetooth device wizard. You should hear your first COM port, then
the direction, and then the name. After you press “down” Arrow
again, you should hear the next COM port, the direction, and name.
For example, when you press the “down arrow” key the first time, you
might hear, “COM 5 Outgoing Windows CE Blue Tooth Serial”.
When you press the “down arrow” key a second time, you might hear,
“COM 6 Incoming WindowsCE”.
20. Tab to the OK button, and press Enter.
You have now setup the Braille Sense OnHand and the computer.
However, you must properly setup Window-Eyes in order to use the
Braille Sense OnHand as a Bluetooth Braille display.
13.2.5.3 Setting up Window-Eyes
314
1. Press “ctrl-backslash” to open the Window-Eyes Control Panel.
2. Press “alt-f” to open the File menu.
3. Press the “up arrow”, or “down arrow” to move to Select Braille
Display, and press “Enter”. Or, just press B to open the Select
Braille Display dialog without using the Arrow Keys.
4. Press the “down arrow” or the letter “b” until you hear Braille Sense
OnHand.
5. Press “tab” to get to the COM port list box
6. Select the COM port that was given as the outgoing COM port when
you setup the computer to interact with the Braille Sense OnHand via
Bluetooth.
7. Press “Enter”
Now that you have set up Window-Eyes, you need to finish the setup on
the Braille Sense OnHand.
13.2.5.3 Setting up the Braille Sense OnHand
1. Press “F1” to get to the Program menu.
2. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to get to the Utilities menu, or just press
the letter u”.
3. Press “Enter”.
4. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to get to Terminal for screen reader,
and press” enter”.
5. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to get to Bluetooth Serial Port, and
press “Enter”.
The Braille Sense OnHand should be connected as a Bluetooth Braille
display. To exit this mode from the Braille Sense OnHand, press
“Space-z”. Please note that “F1” on the Braille Sense OnHand will still
take you to the Program menu. This is to allow you to use the
applications on the Braille Sense OnHand at the same time, and be able
to switch back to using the Braille Sense OnHand as a Bluetooth Braille
display.
13.2.6 Bluetooth keyboard service
315
If you use this service, you can connect a Bluetooth keyboard.
In order to use this service, you must turn on the Bluetooth keyboard.
You can connect a Bluetooth keyboard by doing the following.
1. Move to Bluetooth keyboard and press “Enter” in device list.
2. And then “Keyboard” service will displayed.
3. Press “Enter” on “Keyboard” service.
4. And then you will be prompted to input PIN code if Bluetooth
keyboard require you to input PIN code. Otherwise, you don’t need to
input PIN code.
5. Input PIN code on the Braille Sense OnHand and press “Enter”. And
then you need to input PIN code on the Bluetooth Keyboard. (The
PIN code of Bluetooth keyboard may be referred to the Bluetooth
keyboard manual.)
13.2.7 Bluetooth Headset Service
While using Bluetooth headset, you can hear the sound of Braille Sense
OnHand through the Bluetooth headset. To use a Bluetooth headset,
you need to turn on the Bluetooth headset first. When execute the
Bluetooth program, Braille Sense OnHand will search your Bluetooth
headset . From the list of device, press “Enter” on the Bluetooth headset.
Then, it will search service of Bluetooth headset. If Bluetooth headset
supports “A2DP”, it will appear “headset” in service list. Press “Enter” on
“headset”. It will be proceeded authorization between the Bluetooth
headset and Braille Sense OnHand.
Once the authorization is completed, you can hear the sound of Braille
Sense OnHand through the Bluetooth headset.
Note: We highly recommend using Bluetooth 2.0 headset. If you use
below Bluetooth 2.0 headset, discontinuous playing might be occurred.
13.2.8 Bluetooth Printer service
You can print the documents connecting the printer to Braille Sense
OnHand through the “Bluetooth”. To use this function, you need to use
316
the printer that supports Bluetooth or has a capability connecting
Bluetooth receiver. To set, follow these steps below:
1) Press “Backspace-3-4-5-6” to turn on the Bluetooth.
2) Execute “Bluetooth” program.
3) Bluetooth device has been detected.
4) By pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Bluetooth printer
device”
5) Press “Enter”.
6) It will show “Service list”, after scanning service.
7) By pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Printer”.
8) Press “Enter”
9) Then the printer will have been connected to Braille Sense
OnHand.
13.2.9 Using Multiple Services Simultaneously
You can use the LAN, FTP, and ActiveSync Bluetooth services all at the
same time. However, if you plan to use any of these services at the
same time, you should connect the FTP service before connecting the
LAN and ActiveSync services. Otherwise, you may experience
problems. However, if you want to connect to the Serial
Port, you should not connect to any of the other Bluetooth services in the
Bluetooth Service list.
13.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager
Scanning Bluetooth device: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Connecting device: Enter on the device name
Connecting service: Enter on the service name
Disconnect service in Bluetooth service list: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
1) FTP service
Open local folder/move remote folder: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
317
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Send to: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Retrieve file: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Delete file/folder: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
318
14. MSN messenger
The MSN messenger program on the Braille Sense OnHand is very
similar in its operation to that which runs on a Personal computer. This is
because we have made every attempt to keep the structure and features
the same as those that are found in the MSN messenger program that
runs on a PC. Using MSN messenger, you can chat online with other
registered users of MSN messenger. Note that you will need to setup
your MSN messenger account with Microsoft before using this service.
To start MSN messenger, in the program menu, press “Space-4”
repeatedly until you get to “MSN messenger”, and press “Enter”. Or you
can just press its shortcut key, “n (dots 1-3-4-5)”.
14.1 Getting Started with MSN Messenger
When you first launch MSN messenger, the Braille Sense OnHand will
check for the network status, and if a network connection is available, a
log-in dialog box will be displayed.
1. When the log-in dialog box appears, you will be placed in the “E-mail
address” computer edit box. Here, you should type the email address
that you have registered for your MSN passport. Note that the e-mail
address should be typed using Computer Braille.
2. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Password” computer edit
box. Now, Type the password that you have setup for your MSN
messenger account. Again, you will want to use Computer Braille for
this.
3. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Remember me” check box.
By default, this check box is unchecked. You can check the check
box by pressing “Space”. Next time when you run the messenger
program, the email address will be displayed automatically for you.
4. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Save password” check box.
By default, this will be unchecked. You can check this option by
pressing “Space”. Then, next time you run the messenger program,
the password will be entered automatically, and it will be displayed in
the password edit box as “****”. To use this feature, you should also
319
check the “Remember me” check box. Otherwise, the password will
not be stored even if you have checked the “Save password” check
box.
5. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button. Pressing
“Enter” here will log you in to your Messenger account. Once you are
logged in, a contact list will appear. If you want to cancel logging in,
press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” once more at the “Confirm” button, to move
to the “Cancel” button. Then press “Enter”. Or you can also press
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. Then the messenger program will close.
If you have successfully logged in and checked “Remember me” and
“Save password” check boxes, you can log in by just pressing “Enter”
when you are at the “email” edit box the next time you want to log in.
When the Braille Sense OnHand is not connected to the Internet, if you
execute the MSN messenger and try to log in, the Braille Sense OnHand
will announce “Connection failed. Display network status”. and return to
the log-in dialog box.
14.2 Using a Contact List
If you have successfully logged in, a list box containing your contact list
will appear. In this list, the contact information for those who are online
and for those who are offline will be grouped together. You can move
through the entire list by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly.
When this list box appears, the number of people who are online will be
displayed first. Then, the list of people who are online will be shown in
the format, “(current status) nickname xx/yy” in Braille, and “nickname,
current status, xx/yy” in speech. Where “yy” is the number of people
who are online or offline, and “xx” is the order of the current item in the
online or offline group. In Braille, the current status, “online”, is
displayed as “nln”, and “offline” as “fln”. In speech, they are announced
as “online” and “offline”, respectively. When the status is “idle”, it is
displayed as “idl” in Braille, and “idle” in speech. If the status of a
person changes after you log in, you will hear different sound depending
on their status.
The hotkeys you can use in this list box is as follows.
320
1. Move to the previous item : Space-1 or up scroll button
2. Move to the next item : Space-4 or down scroll button
3. Move between online and offline groups : Space-5-6
You can have the received message stay on the Braille display until you
are done reading it. When in the Contacts list box you can press
“Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)”. When you are asked to “Confirm the received
message: No”, select “Yes” by press the “Space”. When a message is
received the message will stay on the Braille display until you close it
with “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
If you want to close the messenger program, press “Enter” on “Exit” in
the file menu. Or you can press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
14.2.1 Instant Messaging
When you want to have a conversation with a person in your list of
contacts, move to the list item corresponding to the person you want to
contact, and press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu.
Move to “Actions” and press “Enter”. Press “Enter” again on “Send
Instant Message”. Or instead of using the menu, you can press “Enter”
or “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” at the contact item. Then, the “Instant
message” dialog box will appear, where you can have a conversation
with your contact online. The “Instant message” dialog box will be
described in more detail in 14.3.
14.2.2 Adding, Deleting, or Viewing Contact Information
You can add a contact by doing the following.
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Move to
“Contacts” by pressing “Space-4”, and then press “Enter”. Press
“Enter” on “Add Contact”. You could also press “Enter-a (dot 1”)
instead of using the menu.
2. Then, the “Add Contact” dialog box will be displayed, and you will be
placed in the “E-mail address” edit box. Type the email address of
321
the person you want to add, in Computer Braille.
3. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and press
“Enter”. Then, the contact information will be stored and you will be
placed back in the contact list box. If you want to cancel adding the
contact information, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Cancel”
button, and press “Enter”.
The added contact will be displayed as offline until the person accepts
your request for adding him or her to your contact list. As soon as the
request is accepted, their status will be changed to online.
You can delete a contact that you have registered by doing the following.
1. Move to the contact you want to delete, by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4” repeatedly.
2. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press
“Space-4” to move to “Contacts”, and press “Enter”. Move to “Delete
Contact” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Or instead of
using the menu, just press “Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)”.
3. Then, the “Delete Contact” dialog box will be displayed, showing the
email address of the person to be deleted in the “E-mail address” edit
box. Make sure that the address is correct, and if not, make a
change to it.
4. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and press
“Enter”. Then, the item will be deleted and the contact list box will
appear again. If you want to cancel deleting, press “tab (“Space-4-
5”)” once more at the “Confirm” button, to move to the “Cancel” button.
Then press “Enter”.
You can delete a contact regardless of whether he/she is online or
offline.
You can view information of a contact by doing the following.
1. Move to the item whose information you want to know, by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1”.
322
2. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press
“Space-4” to move to “Contacts”, and press “Enter”. Move to “Contact
Information” by pressing “Space-4”, and press “Enter”. Or instead of
using the menu, just press “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)”.
3. Then, you will be placed the “Contact Information” dialog box. First,
“Nickname” is focused. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the
email address of the contact. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” again to
move to his/her status.
4. After you have read all the information about the contact, press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Close” button, and press “Enter”. Or
you can just press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. Then, the dialog box will be
closed and the contact list box will appear again.
14.2.3 Changing Your Nickname, Status and Viewing Your
Information
You can change your nickname as follows.
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press
“Space-4” repeatedly to move to “Tools”, and press “Enter”. Press
“Enter” on “Nickname”. Or instead of using the menu, just press
“Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”.
2. Then, the “Change Nickname” dialog box will appear, and the
“Nickname” edit box will be focused. Type the nickname you like.
You can use alphabets, numbers, and other symbols in the nickname.
3. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and press
“Enter”. Then your nickname will be changed and you will be placed
back in the contact list box.
To view your nickname or email address, you can use “my status” as
follows.
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press
“Enter” on “File”. Then, move to “My Status” by pressing “Space-4”,
and then press “Enter”. Or instead of using the menu, just press
“Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)”.
323
2. Then, the dialog box will appear, and your nickname will be displayed.
Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to your email address, and “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” again to move to “Status”, and so on.
3. When you have read through all of the information, you can press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Close” button, and then press
“Enter”. Or you can just press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. Then, the
information dialog box will be closed and you will be placed in the
contact list box.
You can change your status by doing the following.
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press
“Enter” on “File”. Move to “Set My Status” by pressing “Space-4”, and
press “Enter”. Or instead of using the menu, just press “Enter-t (dots
2-3-4-5)”.
2. Then, the “Set My Status” dialog box will appear, and the “Status”
combo box will have focus. Move to the status item that you want by
pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
3. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and press
“Enter”. Then your online status will be changed and you will be
placed in the contact list box.
14.2.4 Additional Features
1. Sign out
When you are logged in and you want to log in to another account,
you will need to log out first, and then log in to the other account.
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press
“Enter” on “File”. Press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to “Sign Out”
and press “Enter”. Then, you are logged out, and the Sign In dialog
box will appear again. In the “E-mail address” and “Password” edit
box, the email address and password used in the previous login will
be displayed by default. To log in to another account, you first need
to delete the log in information from the first account, and type the log
in information of the other account.
324
2. Save account
If you did not check the “Remember me” and “Save password” check
boxes in the Sign In dialog box, later, you may want to save the
account information once you are logged in. You can use the “Save
Account” option for this. It is exactly the same as checking the two
check boxes in the login dialog box. To use “Save Account”, you
should press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu.
Press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to “Tools”, and press “Enter”.
Press “Space-4” to move to “Save Account”, and press “Enter”.
Then, you will hear “Save account? Yes”. In here, you press “Enter”
and then you will be placed back in the contact list box.
3. View chat and last message
When you are having a conversation with more than one person
simultaneously, you can view a list of messages that you have
received previously. You can use the “Last Message” option, or
when using “View Chat” go back to the instant message dialog box
which you have used recently in the current instant message dialog
box.
To use “View Chat”, you should press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”
to open the menu and press “Enter” on “File” menu. Press “Space-
4” to move to “View Chat”, and press “Enter”. Or you press “Enter-r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” without call up menu.
To use “Last Message”, you should press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to open the menu. Press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to
“Actions”, and press “Enter”. Press “Space-4” to move to “Last
Message”, and press “Enter”. Or you press “Backspace-r (dots 1-2-
3-5)” without call up menu. When executing “Last Message” you can
see the “list of messages”. In this list, you can move through the
messages by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4” repeatedly. If you
press “Enter” on a message, then the focus will move to the
corresponding instant message dialog box.
4. Play keyboard sound
325
You can select whether your message input is converted into the
sound or not to use “Play Keyboard Sound” when you are writing your
message to a person in the instant message dialog box. In other
words, you can choose whether you will hear a person’s message
input while inputting your message or your message input
continuously when a person send you a message. You need to take
the following steps for this function.
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”.
2) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Tools” and press “Enter”.
3) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Play Keyboard Sound” and press
“Enter”. Or, you can press “Enter-k (dots 1-3)” to move to the
“Play Keyboard Sound” directly. Then, you can see “Play
keyboard sound: Yes” message.
4) If you press “Enter”, you can hear your input message even if a
person send you a message.
If you press “Space-4” first and then press “Enter”, you can hear a
person’s input message even if you are writing your message.
5. Message sound notification while in current window
You can select whether you use beep sound for the messages or not
to use “Message Sound Notification While In Current Window” when
you are communicating with a person in the instant message dialog
box. You need to take the following steps for this function.
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”.
2) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Tools” and press “Enter”.
3) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Message Sound Notification
While In Current Window” and press “Enter”. Or, you can press
“Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)” to move to the “Message Sound
Notification While In Current Window” directly. Then, you can see
“Play message sound notification while in current window: Yes”
message.
4) If you press “Enter”, you can hear beep sound when you
communicate with a person.
5) If you press “Space-4” first and then press “Enter”, you can’t hear
beep sound when you communicate with a person.
326
However, if you are not in instant message dialog box, but in contact
list, you will hear beep sound even if you selected no option of “notify
message sound in current window” because it is applied for current
messaging window only.
6. Message sound notification while messenger is in the background
You can select whether you use beep sound for receipt of the
messages or not to use “message sound notification while messenger
is in the background” when you are using another program like as
word processor. You need to take the following steps for this
function.
1) Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”.
2) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Tools” and press “Enter”.
3) Press “Space-4” to move to the “Message Sound Notification
While Messenger Is In The Background” and press “Enter”. Or,
you can press “Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)” to move to the
“Message Sound Notification While Messenger Is In The
Background” directly. Then, you can see “Play message sound
notification while messenger is in the background: Yes” message.
4) If you press “Enter”, you can hear beep sound when a person
send you a message.
If you press “Space-4” first and then press “Enter”, there is no beep
sound and you can’t find out new message before you check
messenger program.
14.3 Instant Message Dialog Box
If you press “Enter” on an item in the contact list box, the instant
message dialog box will appear. The instant message dialog box
consists of “history” window, “input” edit box, “Send” and “Close” buttons.
The “history” window lists all the messages that have been sent to and
from other contacts. In the “input” edit box, you can type your message
to be sent to another person. You can move between these controls by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. When you are
sending an instant message, the “input” edit box will be focused when
the dialog box appears. On the other hand, if the dialog box was
327
opened to read received messages, the “history” window will be focused.
In the “input” edit box, you can type one line, and by pressing “Enter”,
you can send the message. You can also move to the “Send” button,
and press “Enter” to send the message. Then the message will also be
added to the “history” window. In the “history” window, for each
message, the nickname of the person who wrote the message will be
displayed first, and then the content of the message will be displayed.
Each message is considered as a paragraph. When you are in the
instant message dialog box, if the other person sends a message, the
message will be displayed in Braille and announced in speech
immediately. If you receive a message while the focus is at the “input”
edit box, the focus will not be changed. If the focus is at the “history”
window, the content of the window will not be updated until you move to
another control and go back to the “history” window.
While you are in the instant message dialog box, you can move to the
contact list box by pressing “Space-1-2-6” (or F1-F2) or “Space-3-4-5”
(or F3-F4). If you press the key again, you will go back to the instant
message dialog box. More than one instant message dialog box can
be opened at the same time. For example, while you are in an instant
message dialog box, if you go to the contact list box by pressing “Space-
1-2-6”, and press “Enter” on another contact, another instant message
dialog box will be opened.
If you want to close the instant message dialog box, press “Enter” on the
“Close” button, or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. Then, the dialog box will
be closed, and you will be placed back in the contact list box.
14.3.1 Inviting Others to Start a Conversation
You can invite others to have a conversation together at the same time.
That is, you can have a conversation with more than one person in one
instant message dialog box. You can invite or add another participant
as follows. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu.
Move to “Actions” by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and press “Enter”.
Press “Enter” on “Invite A Contact”. Or instead of using the menu, you
328
can just press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”. Then, the list of people who are online
will be displayed. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” repeatedly to move to
the contact you want to invite. Press “Enter”. Then you will get a
message that says the person has been invited, and you will be placed
back in the current instant message dialog box. Now, you are able to
have a conversation with more than one person in one dialog box.
14.3.2 Saving and Printing Your Messages
You can save or print the messages that are shown in the “history”
window. If you want to save the messages, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Press “Enter” on “File”. Move to “Save
As” and press “Enter”. Or instead of using the menu, you can just press
“Space-s (dots 2-3-4)”. Then, the save dialog box will appear and the
“File name” edit box will be focused. This dialog box has the same
controls, and you can use it in the same way as the “Save As” dialog box
in “Word processor”.
If you want to print the messages, first, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or
“F2” to open the menu. Then, press “Enter” on “File”. Move to “Print”
by pressing “Space-4” repeatedly, and press “Enter”. Or instead of using
the menu, you can just press “Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)”. Then, the “Print”
dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box is the same as the “Print”
dialog box in the “Word processor”. The messages can be printed or
embossed in Braille.
14.3.3 Copying and Pasting Instant Messages
You can copy, paste, and delete the messages in the “history” window or
“input” edit box, as you can do in the “Word processor”. However,
since the “history” window is read only, you cannot paste, cut, and delete
the messages in the “history” window. To select a block of text, move
the cursor to the starting point, and press “Enter-b (dots 1-2)”. Then,
move to the end point of the text to be selected. Press “Enter-c (dots 1-
4)” to copy, “Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)” to cut. Then, move the cursor to
the place where you want to insert the copied text (the “input” edit box,
329
or an edit box of another program), and press “Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” to
paste the text. If you press “Enter-a (dot 1)”, you can select all the text
in the current control. You can perform these functions using the “Edit”
menu.
14.3.4 Searching Messages
You can search the messages in the “history” window for text. This is
very useful especially when you have exchanged a lot of messages.
The “Find” dialog box is used for this, and it works the same as the one
in the “Word processor”. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open
the menu. Press “Space-4” to move to “Edit”, and press “Enter”. Press
“Space-4” repeatedly to move to “Find”, and press “Enter”. Or instead
of using the menu, just press “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”. Then, the “Find”
dialog box will appear, and the “Text to find” edit box will be focused.
Type the string to look for and set the searching direction, and then
press “Enter”. Then, the focus will move to the message that contains
the text. If you want to find it again in the same direction, press “Enter-f
(dots 1-2-4)”. If the text is not found, you will get the message, “Not
found”, and the cursor will be located where you invoked the “Find”
dialog box.
14.4 Hot Keys in MSN Messenger
1. Log-in dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Check or uncheck a check box: Space
2. The contact list box
Move to the previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move between online and offline groups: Space-5-6
Open the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Logout: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
View chat: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
330
My status: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Close: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Add contact: Enter-a (dot 1)
Delete contact: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Contact information: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).
Send instant message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Last message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Play keyboard sound: Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Message sound notification while in current window: Backspace-s
(dots 2-3-4)
Message sound notification while messenger is in the background:
Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)
Nickname: Enter-p (dots 1-3-4)
Save account: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Confirm the received message: Enter-l (Dots 1-2-3)
3. Instant message dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact
list box: Space-1-2-6 or Space-3-4-5, F1-F2 or F3-F4
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Close: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Invitation: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
331
15. Database Manager
The Database manager is a program that can be used to create a
database in the form that you specify. You can use the Database
manager to add records and search for data in your records. A table
contains at least one record, and a record consists of at least one field.
You can specify attributes for each of the fields. In other words, a
record is made up of a group of one or more fields.
When the Database manager is started, it will check whether or not a
table has been registered or created already. If no table has been
registered yet, a “Table Manager” dialog box will appear to help you to
register a new table. If there is at least one table already registered, a
“Search Records” dialog box will appear and the “Search” edit box will
be focused, so that you can search for data records in the tables. If you
want to close the program while you are adding or searching a table,
press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”. Or you can use the menu. Press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu. Move to “Exit” by
pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4” (or Left or down scroll button)
repeatedly, and press “Enter”. Or you can type “z (dots 1-3-5-6)” in the
menu.
The major navigation keys that can be used in this program are as
follows.
1. Moving by controls
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
2. Moving in a list box
Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button
3. Changing the selection in a prompt box
Select the next value: Space-4, Space or down scroll button
Select the previous value: Space-1, Backspace or up scroll button
332
The menu in the database manager consists of the following items.
You can open this menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”.
1. Table manager: Here you can create, delete, and modify tables,
records, and their fields. When you run the database manager for
the first time, the “Table Manager” dialog box will appear.
2. Insert a new record : You can add records to the current table.
3. Search records : You can search records in the current table. You
can also search each field in the table.
4. List of records found : You can use this menu item to go through a list
of records found in the table by the previous search. Here, you can
delete or modify each record in the list. If you didn’t search for
anything before you use this function, the message, “no items”, will be
displayed.
5. Set backup options: You can select the method to back up the
database.
6. Backup database: You can backup all database files that are used in
the database manager.
7. Restore database: You can restore the database files that are backed
up already.
8. Exit: It is used to close the database manager.
Each of these menu items will be discussed in the following sections
below.
15.1 Table Manager
The “Table Manager” dialog box is where you can create, delete, or
modify a table. This dialog box contains the following controls.
1. Table name list: It displays the name of registered tables, and their
order in the list.
2. Add table button: Using this option, you can create a new table.
3. Modify table button: Using this option, you can change the name of a
table, or modify the structure of the table, by adding or deleting fields.
333
4. Delete table button: Using this option, you can delete the table that
you have selected in the table name list.
5. Set default table button: Using this option, you can set the table that
opens by default when you run the program.
6. Close button: After closing the “Table Manager” dialog box, it will take
you back to where you were before you started the “Table Manager”
dialog box. When there is no registered table, if you press “Enter” at
the “Close” button, the database manager program will be closed.
You can move between each of these controls by pressing “tab (“Space-
4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
15.1.1 Add Table
“Add table” is a dialog box where you can create a new table. This
dialog box contains “Table name” edit box, “registered fields” list, “Add
field” button, “Modify field” button, “Delete field” button, “Previous field”
button, “Next field” button, “Confirm” button and “Cancel” button. You
can move between these controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
Suppose you want to create a table called “addressbook” which contains
4 fields: name, telephone, address, and memo. You can create this
table as follows.
1. In the “Table Manager” dialog box, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move
to the “Add table” button, and press “Enter”. Or you can just press “a
(dot 1)” in the dialog box.
2. Then, the “Add Table” dialog box will appear, and the “Table name”
edit box will be focused.
3. Type “address book” and then press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
4. Then, the “registered fields” list will be focused. At first, “no items
0/0” will be displayed in the list. As you add fields to this table, they
will be added to this list box.
5. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Add field” button, and press
“Enter”. Or you can just press its shortcut key, “a (dot 1)”.
334
6. Then the “Add field” dialog box will be opened, and the “Field name”
edit box will be focused.
7. Type “name” here, and then press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
8. Then, the “Field type” combo box will be focused. Press “Space-4”
or “Space-1” to move to “edit box”, and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
9. The “Set primary key” check box will be focused. If you want to set
the current field as the primary key, press “Space” in order to check it.
10. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and
press “Enter”. Now, the “name” field has been added to the
“address book” table.
If you want to cancel adding the field, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” once
more to move to the “Cancel” button, and press “Enter”. If you have
added a new field, you will get a message saying that a new field has
been added. Then, the “registered fields” list will be shown again.
Now, “name” field appears in the list, with the form, “name (edit box, pri)
1/1”. Since only one primary key exists in a table, if you have set a field
as the primary key, the “Set primary key” check box will not be shown in
the “Add field” dialog box when you add another field. Add the
“telephone”, “address”, and “memo” fields by repeating the step 5
through 10 above. Note that you may want to set the “Field type” of
“telephone” field to “number”, “address” to “edit box”, and “memo” to
“multi edit box”. Once you have added all of the fields you want, press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button, and press “Enter”.
If you need to change a name of a field that is registered, move to a field
name that you want to change on a “registered fields” list. Then press
“m (dots 1-3-4)” or “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and enter on a “Modify field”. It
appears as “Field name: (selected filed name)”, here you type the Name
you want, and press “Enter”. Even though you can change a name of a
field, it is not possible to change the property of that field.
If you want to delete an already registered field, press “Space-1” or
“Space-4” repeatedly in the “registered fields” list to move to the name of
the field you want to delete. And then press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
repeatedly move to “Delete field” button and press enter or press “d
335
(dots 1-4-5)”, the shortcut key for the “Delete field” button. Or you can
also press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly to move to the “Delete field”
button and press “Enter”.
To change the order of a field, which is in your table, you can move to
the field that you want to change. This can be done when you are in
the “registered fields” list. Once you are on the field, press “p (dots 1-2-
3-4)” or “n (dots 1-3-4-5)”. Or you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” and enter on
a “Previous field” button or “Next field” button.
Then, the “Add Table” dialog box will be closed, and the “table name” list
box will be shown again. The newly created table will be added to this
list, and “address book 1/1” will be shown in the list. To close the
“Table Manager” dialog box, press “tab (“Space-4-5”) to move to the
“Close” button, and press “Enter”. Or you can just press “Space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)” to close the dialog box. Then, the “Search (table name)”
dialog box will be opened, and the “name” field, the first field of the
“address book” table, will be shown. Here, you can type the name you
want to search for.
15.1.2 Modify Table
“Modify table” is used to modify the name or structure of a registered
table. It contains the same controls as in the “Add Table” dialog box.
To modify a table, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or F2 to open the menu,
and press “Enter” on “Table Manager”. Or you can just press the hotkey
for “Table Manager”, “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”. The “table name” list will
be focused when the “Table Manager” dialog box is opened. Press
“Space-1” or “Space-4” to move to the table that you want to modify, and
press “m (dots 1-3-4)”, the shortcut key for the “Modify table” button. Or
you can press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly to move to the “Modify
table” button, and press “Enter”. Then, a dialog box where you can
modify the table will appear. This table is same as the “Add Table”
dialog box. The only difference is that the “Table name” edit box, and
“registered fields” list contain the information already stored in the table.
You can not change the name of table.
336
If you want to add additional fields, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
“Add field” and press “Enter”. And then type in the new field name and
press “Enter”. If you want to delete an already registered field, press
“Space-1” or “Space-4” repeatedly in the “registered fields” list to move
to the name of the field you want to delete. And then press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly move to “Delete field” button and press enter
or press “d (dots 1-4-5)”, the shortcut key for the “Delete field” button.
Or you can also press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly to move to the
“Delete field” button and press “Enter”.
To change the order of a field, which is in your table, you can move to
the field that you want to change. This can be done when you are in
the “registered fields” list. Once you are on the field, press “p (dots 1-2-
3-4)” or “n (dots 1-3-4-5)”. Or you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” and enter
on a “Previous field” button or “Next field” button.
If you need to change a name of a field that is registered, move to a field
name that you want to change on a “registered fields” list. Then press
“m (dots 1-3-4)” or “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and enter on a “Modify field”. It
appears as “Field name: (selected filed name)”, here you type the Name
you want, and press “Enter”.
Even though you can change a name of a field, it is not possible to
change the property of that field.
15.1.3 Delete table
This option is used when you want to delete a table. To delete a table,
Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and press
“Enter” on “Table Manager”. Or you can press “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”,
the hotkey for “Table Manager”. When the “Table Manager” dialog box is
opened, the “Table name” edit box will be focused. In this list box, you
can move to the name of the table you want to delete by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly, and press “d (dots 1-4-5)”, the
shortcut key for the “Delete table” button. Or you can press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly to move to the “Delete table” button, and press
“Enter”. Then, “Delete table? Yes” will be displayed. If you want to
337
delete, press “Enter”, and if you want to cancel, press “Space” to select
“No”, and press “Enter”.
15.1.4 Set Default Table
When you set a table as the default table, whenever the database
manager is started, the table will be activated and you will be placed in
the search dialog. You can search and add fields on this table. If you
have registered more than one table and there is a table you use more
frequently than the others, it may be convenient for you to set this table
as the default table. However, if no table has been set as the default
table, the table that was used the last time will be activated when the
database manager is started. To set a table as the default table, press
“Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and press “Enter” on
table manager. Or you can also press “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”, the
hotkey for “Table Manager”. Then, the “Table Manager” dialog box will
appear, and the “table name” list will be focused. In this list, press
“Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly to move to the name of the table you
want to set as the default table. Then press “s (dots 2-3-4)”, the
shortcut key for the “Set default table”, or press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”
repeatedly to move to the “Set default table” button and press “Enter”.
Or you can press “Enter” on the name of the table in the “table name” list.
Then, you will get a message saying that the table is set as the default
table, and the “Table Manager” dialog box will be closed.
15.2 Insert a New Record
You can use this option to add information to a table that you have
created. When the database manager is started, the “Search Records”
dialog box will be opened at first. To open the “Insert a New Record”
dialog box, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and
press “Enter” on “Insert a New Record”. Or instead of using the menu,
you can just press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”. You can think of a record as a
collection of information (fields) for an object (record). Let’s consider
the “address book” table you created in the previous section. Adding
records to this table can be performed as follows.
338
1. Press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and press
“Enter” on “Insert a New Record”. Or instead of using the menu, just
press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”.
2. Then the “name” field, the first field in the “address book” table, will be
shown. Here, you type the name you want to add, and press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)”.
3. Then, the “telephone” field will be focused. Here, type the phone
number. Since this field is of “number” type, you can type only a
limited set of characters such as numbers and hyphen. You can
enter a number without the leading number sign. If you press
“Space” instead of – (hyphen), the hyphen will be entered.
4. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “address” field. Type the
address.
5. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “memo” field. Since this
field is of “multi edit box” type, you can type multiple lines. To start a
new line, press “Enter”.
6. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the “Confirm” button. If you
press “Enter” here, the one record that you have just entered will be
added to the table. If you do not want to save the record you have
just typed in, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” once more to move to the
“Cancel” button, and press “Enter”. Or you can just press “Space-e
(dots 1-5)”.
If you have added a record, the “name” field will be focused again so
that you can add another record. If you press “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”
at a field, the focus will be moved to the previous field.
To go back to the “Search Records” dialog box, press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-
4)”. To open the “Table Manager” dialog box, press “Enter-t (dots 2-3-
4-5)”. If you open these dialog boxes while you are entering a record,
you will be asked if you want to save the record. Select “Yes” or “No”
by pressing “Space” or “Backspace”, and press “Enter”. If you select
“Yes”, the record will be saved, and if you select “No”, it will not be saved
and open the specified dialog box. If you select “Cancel”, the dialog
box will not be opened.
339
15.3 Search Records
After you have added your records, if you want to search for
information that is in your records, you can use the “Search Records”
dialog box. To open the “Search Records” dialog box, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” and press “Enter” on “Search Records”. Or instead
of using the menu, just press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)”. Then, the “Search
Records” dialog box will be opened, and the first field of the table will be
focused. Here, you can type the text that you want to search for. If
you want to search for records using content from more than one field,
press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to another field. Type the text to
search for, and press “Enter”. Then, the “List of Records Found” will be
opened and the search result will be shown in the “List of Records
Found”. Being able to search in more than one field can be useful if
you are searching for those who have the same first and last name.
In the “List of Records Found”, each record will be shown in the following
form. “(the name of the first field) : (other information in the record)
xx/yy”. “yy” is the total number of records found, and “xx” is the order of
the current record in the list. If no record has been found, you will get
the message “No records found”, and the current field will be shown
again, so that you can type another text to search for. You can move
through the “List of Records Found” as follows.
1. Move by records
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
2. Move between the fields in a record
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to the last field: Space-4-6
340
Move to the first field: Space-1-3
In the “List of Records Found”, if you want to search for different text,
you can press “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” again to open the “Search Records”
dialog box. Then, type the new text that you want to search for.
If you want to delete a record found, press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to
move to the record, and press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” in any of the fields
in the record. Then, you will be asked if you really want to delete the
record. Here, you can select “Yes” or “No” by pressing “Space” or
“Backspace”. If you press “Enter” after selecting “Yes”, the record will
be deleted, and if you select “No”, the deletion will be canceled. If you
want to search for records in another table, press “Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”
to open the “Table Manager” dialog box, and press “Enter” on the name
of the table that you want to activate.
If you want to change the content of a record, select the record by
pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4” repeatedly. And press “Enter-m (dots
1-3-4)” at any field in the record. Then, the same dialog box as the
“Insert a New Record” dialog box will be opened. To change the
content of some fields, move to the fields by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”,
type the new content of the fields, and press “Enter”. To save the
modified content of a record, press “Enter” after typing the contents of all
the fields that you want to change. Or you can move to the “Confirm”
button by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” repeatedly, and press “Enter”. If
you want to cancel modifying the record, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” once
more to move to the “Cancel” button and press “Enter”.
15.4 List of Records Found
The “List of Records Found” will appear when the “Search Records” was
performed successfully. While you are using the “Insert a New Record”
or “Search Records” dialog box, if you want to go to the “List of Records
Found”, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open the menu, and
press “Enter” on “List of Records Found”. Or instead of using the menu,
you can just press “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”.
341
15.5 Set Backup Options
To backup your database file, you can do it manually using the “Backup
Database” function. You can also backup your database file
automatically by using the “Set Backup Options”. To activate the “Set
Backup Option” function, press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to open
up the menu. Then press “Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly to move
“Set Backup Options”. Then press “Enter” on it. Or, you can press “e
(dots 1-5)” in the menu to go to “Set Backup Options”. You can also
activate the function without opening up the menu by pressing “Enter-e
(dots 1-5)”.
If you activate the function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box
has three controls: “Backup mode” radio button, a “Confirm” button, and
a “Cancel” button. You can switch between controls by pressing “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. To switch between radio
buttons, you can press “Space-1”, “Backspace”, “Space-4”, or “Space”.
The “Backup mode” has three radio buttons: “Manual backup”, “Always
backup changes when exiting”, and “prompt to backup changes when
exiting”.
1. If you select the “Manual backup”, it will not create a new backup file
even though there may be changes in the database. In this case,
you can only make a new backup file by using the “Backup Database”
menu.
2. If you select the “Always backup changes when exiting”, a new
backup file will be automatically created if you modify the database or
add other information when you exit the Database manager.
3. If you select the “Prompt to backup changes when exiting”, you will
see the message “Backup changes? Yes” when you exit the
database manager, if you have modified the database or added other
information. If you press “Enter” on “Yes”, it will automatically create
a new backup file and exit the database manager. If you press
“Space-4” once and press “Enter” on “No”, it will exit without making a
new backup file.
342
You can change the backup mode if you press “Enter” after focusing on
one of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press “Enter” on “Confirm”
by moving to it by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. The default backup
mode is set to “Prompt to backup changes when exiting”.
15.6 Backup Database
If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in the
Database manager will be lost. So, it is very important that you make a
backup file every time you make a change to the Database file. To go
to “Backup Database”, open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-
4)” or “F2”. Then, use the “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and find “Backup
Database”. Then, press “Enter”. You can also press “u (dots 1-3-6)”
while you are in the menu to get to “Backup Database”. Or, you can
press “Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)” to activate this function without calling up the
menu.
If you already have a backup file, you will hear the message “Backup
changes? Yes”. If you have made any changes to your database file,
press “Enter” to create a new backup file. If you want to keep the
previous backup file, press “Space”, locate “No”, and press “Enter” on it.
When you make a backup file in your database manager, you will always
have a new backup file with the extension SDF. The name of backup file
is “UserDatabase.sdf”
15.7 Restore Database
If you want to restore the database file after a cold reset, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and use the up and down
scroll buttons to find “Restore Database”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Restore Database”. Or, you can press “r (dots 1-2-3-5)” while you are
in the menu to find “Restore Database”. You can also press “Enter-o
(dots 1-3-5)” to activate this function, without calling up the menu.
343
If you activate the “Restore Database” function, and you already have an
database file, you will hear the message, “Database file already exists.
Restore anyway? Yes”. If you press “Enter”, the backup database file
will be restored to the current database file. If you want to cancel, you
press “Space” and press “Enter”.
15.8 Hot Keys for Database Manager
Add record: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Search records: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Table manager: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
List of records found: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup options: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Backup database: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore database: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
1. Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
2. Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button
3. Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space-4, Space, or down scroll button
Move to the previous answer: Space-1, Backspace, or up scroll button
4. Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to the last field: Space-4-6
344
Move to the first field: Space-1-3
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
345
16. Contents
16.1 Sense Bible Help
16.1.1 Composition of Bible
Sense Bible consists of 5 volumes in Braille Sense OnHand
King james version
New king james version
New international version
New living translation
New revised standard version
16.1.1.1 Executing of Bible
Sense Bible is located inside of Contents from the main menu.
When you execute the Sense Bible, 5 volumes of Bible will be displayed.
If you are not reading the bible, list of bible will be focused as always.
For each bible is indivisual, it can be loaded more than one at the same
time and can be switched using window's 'move to previous window' or
'Move to next window'.
16.1.2 Open book dialog box
16.1.2.1 Composition of dialog box
Open book dialog box consists of list box, edit box, moving to a
bookmark, confirm, and cancel.
The default is list box.
Following is explainning with regard to search the data, and use for each
window.
16.1.2.2 Bible lists edit box
Generally to search bible lists, abbreviation is an essential element.
But we provide the list for novice and especially unsure abbreviation.
66 books will be displayed on the list. If you are not sure abbreviation,
you can select from the list.
346
After selecting the book from the list, press TAB or Enter to move to next
edit box.
16.1.2.3 Edit box
User type the value that he/she wants to search for abbreviation, chapter
and verse.
'Book name, Chapter and Verse? GE1:1' will be displayed as a default.
If you are fully aware of the abbreviation, you can type the chapter and
verse following the abbreviation.
Between chapter and verse, it requires to enter '- (dots-3-6)'. For
instance, if you search for chapter 5 and verse 7 you need to type 'MT5-
7'.
To search promptly,
If you are not aware of the abbreviation, press 'Shift-Tab' to move to list
box and select from the list,
or press F3 or Sp+4+5 to move back to edit box and type the chapter
and verse following the abbreviation.
Press Enter to search then the data will be displayed.
16.1.2.4 Moving to a bookmark
If you have set a mark, you can move to the bookmark by using
navigation button.
16.1.3 Menu
While reading the bible, you can call a variety of features by using menu
key.
The menu of Sense bible consists of following items such as File, Edit,
Read, Move, Bookmark, Window, abd Help.
16.1.4 Navigating
While seeing bible status, following keys are used to navigate through
the list.
347
16.1.4.1 Bible lists dialog
By pressing 'Backspace-b (dots-1-2)' to open the dialog to move to the
list.
16.1.4.2 Navigation keys
Space-dot 1: Move to previous line
Space-dot 4: Move to next line
Space-dots-2-3: one line (or verse) Move to previous item by unit
Space-dots-5-6: one line (or chapter) Move to next item by unit
Space-r(dots-1-2-3-5) or Space-c(dots-1-4): Display the current contents
with voice
Space-dot 2: Move to previous word
Space-dot 5: Move to next word
Space-dots-2-5: Display current word with voice. Every time you press
the hot key, it will say word, character, and phonetic with voice.
Space-dot 3: Move to previous character
Space-dot 6: Move to next character
Space-dots-3-6 : Display the phonetic
16.1.4.3 Bookmark
The definition of bookmark is to remember and set the current location.
But one bookmark can be saved in a file.
If you try to set a bookmark that has already been set, it will ask you to
modify. So you can save as new bookmark or just keep the old one.
Following keys are used to set bookmark.
Ent-m (dots-1-3-4): Set a bookmark. If there is any set mark, it will ask
you to modify or not.
Ent-j (dots-2-4-5): Move to the bookmark
Space-d (dots-1-4-5): Delete the set bookmark
16.1.4.4 Temporary mark
You can set at the current location, delete the set mark,
In a file, you can set several temporary marks, and move to the location
back and forth by mark.
348
Navigating keys are as follows.
Backspace-m (dots-1-3-4): Set temporary mark
Backspace-dot 3: Move to previous mark
Backspace-dot 6: Move to next mark
Ent-d (dots1-4-5): Delete all the set mark
16.1.4.5 Navigating through documents
Space-dots-1-3: Move to previous document
Space-dots-4-6: Move to next document
16.1.5 Find & Search
16.1.5.1 Find a word
By pressing "Space-f (dots-1-2-4)" to oepn the search dialog box.
1. Edit box
Following 'Word to find?'you can type the word that you want to search.
2. Range
You can choose the range that the word you typed before.
- Range to search? Current book
- Range to search? The new testament
- Range to search? The old testament
- Range to search? Holy bible
* If you do not select the range, it will execute to search the current book.
3. Confirm
To execute the search, press Enter on 'Confirm'.
You can also execute to search in 'edit box' or 'range' by pressing Enter.
4. Cancel
To cancel the value that you typed or the setting that you selected.
16.1.5.2 If at least one word searched, pressing enter (find next) and
backspace (find previous) to execute the search.
16.1.6 Search
To search a verse from the bible that includes the word that you
searched.
349
Press hot key'Ent-s (dots-2-3-4)'to display search dialog box from the
main menu and while reading the file.
Search dialog box consists of 6 search dialog box.
1) Edit box
'Search word?'you can type the word that you want to search.
2) Select the search range
You can select which range you would like to select the word typed in
edit box.
You need to select one of them or type the book that you want to search.
(1) Enter the book name to search:
User can type the abbreviation to search the bible. Type the abbreviation
and press enter. Then press TAB to move to next control to select the
option.
There are 3 options. Using navigation key (up or down arrow) to select
through the search list and press TAB to move to next control.
(2) Search range: The new testament
(3) Search range: The old testament
(4) Search range: Holy bible
Note: You can select 3 search range options if you don't select to search
directly.
If you do not want to assign the search range, you can search the bible
using 'enter the book name to search'.
3) Output type
There are 3 types of dispaly output.
You can select the display type that you searched the word by pressing
up or down button to select the type.
Display by Braille: Display the result by Braille one after another. Move
to the word which you searched.
If the word searched by this option, you can use 2 key strokes.
Press enter to move to the next word and press backspace to move to
the previous word.
After searching, you can search related word by using enter and
backspace.
350
Display by file: Display the result by Braille and also it can be saved
under the 'work\sbible001.txt file'
Note: the number which comes after file name increases the number of
search times
Display by number: how many times the word searched
4) Search: Press Enter to execute the search based on setting condition.
5) Close: To exit search dialog box.
16.1.7 Setting the block (Ent-b (dots-1-2))
You can set a block while reading bible and copy the block that you set
by pressing Ent-c (dots-1-4).
Also you can capture by pressing Space-s (dots-2-3-4)
Once you capture the contents, it can be saved under 'sbible_cap.txt'
and you can add memo.
16.1.8 Read from cursor to end
In bible mode, pressing Fn-Ent to read from cursor to end with voice and
Braille automatically.
While reading from cursor to end, pressing Space-e (dots-1-5) to cancel
it.
16.1.9 Auto scroll
The “Auto Scroll” command scrolls automatically. The auto scroll mode
does not read the document using the voice. It is only displayed on the
Braille display. It reads the document line by line automatically. You
can turn the auto scroll feature on and off by pressing the up and down
scroll buttons simultaneously. For faster scrolling, press the right
“Space-6”. For slower scrolling, press “Space-3”. If you want to read
a line again that you have already scrolled past, you can read it again by
pressing the up scroll button or “Space-1” until you can get to what you
want to read. Similarly, if you want to skip some lines that you do not
wish to read, you can skip them by pressing the down scroll button or
351
“Space-4”. You can also access this function without opening the menu
by pressing both scroll buttons at the same time when in your document.
16.1.10 Check the current bible information
If you are unsure the current bible information, you can check the type of
bible, book, chapter, and verse by pressing Space-3-4.
* Appendix (Bookname of Bible, abbreviation)
Common abbreviations for books of the Bible1:
MLA Style
*Old Testament (OT)
Abbreviation:
Book:
Gen. : GE
Genesis
Exod.: EX
Exodus
Lev. : LE
Leviticus
Num. : NU
Numbers
Deut.: DE
Deuteronomy
Josh.: JS
Joshua
Judg.: JU
Judges
Ruth : RU
352
Ruth
1 Sam. : 1S
1 Samuel
2 Sam. : 2S
2 Samuel
1 Kings : 1K
1 Kings
2 Kings : 2K
2 Kings
1 Chron. :1C
1 Chronicles
2 Chron. :2C
2 Chronicles
Ezra : EZ
Ezra
Neh. : NE
Nehemiah
Esth. : ES
Esther
Job : JB
Job
Ps. : PS
Psalms
Prov. : PR
353
Proverbs
Eccles. : EC
Ecclesiastes
Song of Sol. (also Cant.) : SS
Song of Solomon (also Canticles)
Isa. : IS
Isaiah
Jer. : JE
Jeremiah
Lam. : LA
Lamentations
Ezek. : EK
Ezekiel
Dan. : DA
Daniel
Hos. : HO
Hosea
Joel : JL
Joel
Amos : AM
Amos
Obad. : OB
Obadiah
Jon. : JN
354
Jonah
Mic. : MI
Micah
Nah. : NH
Nahum
Hab. : HA
Habakkuk
Zeph. : ZE
Zephaniah
Hag. : HG
Haggai
Zech. : ZC
Zechariah
Mal. : ML
Malachi
*New Testament (NT)
Abbreviation:
Book:
Matt. : MT
Matthew
Mark : MR
Mark
Luke : LU
Luke
355
John : JH
John
Acts : AC
Acts
Rom. : RO
Romans
1 Cor. : 1R
1 Corinthians
2 Cor. : 2R
2 Corinthians
Gal. : GA
Galatians
Eph. : EP
Ephesians
Phil. : PH
Philippians
Col. : CO
Colossians
1 Thess. : 1T
1 Thessalonians
2 Thess. : 2T
2 Thessalonians
1 Tim. : 1I
1 Timothy
356
2 Tim. : 2I
2 Timothy
Tit. : TI
Titus
Philem. : PL
Philemon
Heb. : HE
Hebrews
Jas. : JA
James
1 Pet. : 1P
1 Peter
2 Pet. : 2P
2 Peter
1 John : 1J
1 John
2 John : 2J
2 John
3 John : 3J
3John
Jude : JD
Jude
Rev. (also Apoc.) : RE
Revelation (also Apocalypse)
357
17. Utilities
The “Utilities” menu provides several special functions for use with the
Braille Sense OnHand. The “Utilities” menu has the following items:
1. Calculator (where you can do simple math equations as well as
scientific calculations)
2. Display compass heading (where you can check current status of
compass)
3. Set time and date (where you can set the Braille Sense OnHand
internal clock)
4. Display time and date (where you can check the date and time)
5. Wake up call (where you can set the alarm)
6. Calendar (where you can check the calendar)
7. Pronunciation Dictionary (where you can set the pronunciation that
you want to hear),
8. Stopwatch (where you can set stopwatch)
9. Terminal for screen reader (which allows you to connect the Braille
Sense OnHand to your PC for use as a Braille display, external speaker,
as well as many other useful functions)
10. Setup internet (where you can adjust your internet settings)
11. Display network status (where you can Display network status)
12. Check power status (where you can check power status)
13. Backup/ Restore option settings (where you can backup/restore the
option settings for each program in the Braille Sense OnHand all at
once)
14. Format (where you can format the “flashdisk”, “SD card” and “USB
memory”.)
15. Upgrade Braille Sense Firmware(where you can upgrade firmware)
To access the menu items,
1) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” in the “program menu”.
2) Press “Enter” on the “Utilities” menu. Or, you can press “u (dots 1-
3-6)” in the “program menu” to open the utilities menu.
3) The “Utilities” menu has several submenus under each of the
menu items.
358
The following sections will discuss each of these menu options and their
functions in greater detail.
17.1 Calculator
Using the calculator on the Braille Sense OnHand you can do simple
math equations as well as complex scientific calculations. The results
and formulas will be displayed in Braille, and spoken by the Braille
Sense OnHand. While using the calculator, you can refer to the “help”
menu by pressing “Space-h (dots 1-2-5)”. The “help” menu is very
useful as you can quickly access hot key information for the various
programs on the Braille Sense OnHand.
When you want to use the calculator you can press “c (dots 1-4)” from
within the “Utilities” menu. When using the calculator on the Braille
Sense OnHand, you need to type using computer Braille when
calculating or inserting your formulas. You can initialize your
calculation line by pressing “Backspace-c (dots 1-4)”. If you insert
numbers or a function into a result, the result will disappear; and if you
put in operators, you can get to the next step. In addition, you can keep
your result in the calculator’s memory, and you can recall it when you
need the result. You can use the function and operators via the
calculator menu or you can use the hot keys depending on which
method works best for you.
All of these functions are explained in greater detail below.
17.1.1 General Functions
“General Functions” is a dialog box that contains the “General function
list”, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. In the dialog box, you
can navigate through the items with “tab (“Space-4-5”)” and “shift-tab
(“Space-1-2”)”. In the general function list, you can navigate the
operators using “Space-1” or “Space-4”. Or, in the list, you can press
the first letter of the operator that you want to go to. In the “Calculator”,
you can open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2”, and
359
press “Enter” on “General Functions”. Or, you can press “g (dots 1-2-4-
5)” in the menu to access “General Functions”. After starting the
calculation, 0 will be displayed in Computer Braille. On the calculation
line, you can access the “General Functions” by pressing “Enter-g (dots
1-2-4-5)”. If the dialog box pops up first, you will be placed on the
general function list. Once in the list, you can select what you want,
and press “Enter” on it to run the operator since the default is set to the
“Confirm” button in the dialog. In the dialog box, you can cancel the
operator selection by pressing “Enter” on “Cancel”, “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-
6)”, or “Space-e (dots 1-5)”. You can use hot keys of the operators for
convenient access.
The hot keys of the operators are as follows:
Plus: dots 3-4-6
Minus: dots 3-6
Divided by: dots 3-4
Multiply by: dots 1-6
Percent: dots 1-4-6
Power: Backspace-4-5
Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Decimal point: dots 4-6
Left parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6
Right parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6
PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Exponential: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
If you want to enter in negative numbers, you should type in minus (dots
3-6) and the number together in parentheses. For example, you should
type in minus 2 in the following manner: (-2).
For the percent operation, you can get the result when you put in the
numbers first and the percent sign (%) just after typing in the numbers.
Immediately after you have typed in the percent sign (%), the number
that you have typed in will be converted into a percent value. For
example, 90 + 20% equals 90 + 18. You will see the number 18 on
pressing the % sign since 18 is 20% of 90. So, you get 108 for your
answer.
360
17.1.2 Variable Calculators
The “Variable Calculators” will keep your resulting answers and
calculations in the memory. The “Variable Calculators” menu has four
submenu items: “Recall Items”, “Delete All Saved Items”, “Save Items”,
and “Statistics Function”. You can move between these items by
pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1” repeatedly, and then press “Enter” on
the desired feature. To access these menu items, press “Space-m
(dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” to call up the “menu”, and press “Enter” on “Variable
Calculators”. Or, you can press “v (dots 1-2-3-6)” when you are in the
menu.
17.1.2.1 Recall Items
“Recall Items” is a dialog box, that has the following items “list”, “Delete”,
“Display detail”, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can
navigate through each of these items by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. You can access “Recall Items” by pressing “r
(dots 1-2-3-5)” in the “Variable Calculators” menu. Otherwise, you can
access the dialog box by pressing “Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)” in the
calculation line. The “item list” displays “an item name: the result value”,
and you can move in the item name list by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”. You can insert the item’s result into your calculation if you
press “Enter” on the item name. You can also copy each item in the
“item list”. Press the “Space” key to select an item in the “item list”.
Then, press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)” to copy the selected items to the
clipboard. The “Display detail” shows the item name and its result with
the default set to “No”. If you want to review the detailed information,
press “Space” to switch to “Yes”. Then, it will display “item name: the
formula = its result value” in Braille. “Delete” is used to get rid of your
registered item. If you want to delete an item, first, you should select
the item that you want to be deleted, and then press “Enter” on “Delete”.
You can find the deleted item in “item list” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-
5”)”. Or, you can press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on what you want to
delete in the item name list. If you want to delete all of the items, you
361
can select all of them by pressing “Enter-a (dot 1)”, and press “Space-d
(dots 1-4-5)”. If you only want to delete some of them, you can select
the items by pressing “Space”, and press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)” on the
selected items.
17.1.2.2 Delete All Saved Items
When you use this function, you can delete all of the saved items that
are stored in the “Recall Items”. To activate it, you can call up the
“menu” by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or press “F2”. Then, use
the “Space-1” or “Space-4” to get to the “Variable Calculators” menu,
and press “Enter”. Next, use the up and down arrows to go to “Delete
All Saved Items”, and press “Enter”. You can also press “Enter-d (dots
1-4-5)” while you are in the calculation line.
17.1.2.3 Save Items
“Save Items” is a dialog box that has an edit window for typing in the
item name, a “Confirm” button and a “Cancel” button. You can move
between the control items by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“Space-1-2”)”. In the “Variable Calculators” menu, you can access
“Save Items” by pressing “s (dots 2-3-5)”. When you are in the
calculation line, you can press “Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)” to open the
save items dialog box. When you are on the calculation line if you type
in the item name, and formula, “a=2+sin(30)”, followed by pressing
“Enter”, the calculation will be saved automatically. In your calculating
result, you can access “Save Items” to type in an item name in the edit
box, and then you can save it by pressing “Enter” directly or by pressing
“Enter” on the “Confirm” button. If you type in function names like “sin”,
“cos”, or “pi” as an item name, you will see the message “Invalid item
name”, and if you type in names that have already been saved, you will
see a message that says, “Replace variable xx with current value? Yes”.
If you want to change the value, press “Enter” on “Yes”. And if you do
not want to change the value, press “Enter” on “No”. Press “Space” to
toggle between “Yes” and “No”.
362
17.1.2.4 Statistics Function
If you select this menu item, a dialog box opens, which consists of a list
box containing all the stored variables, a list box displaying the results of
several functions, and a “Close” button. You can move between these
elements by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
You can bring up this dialog box by pressing “Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-
5)” in the calculator line, or by pressing “t (dots 2-3-4-5)” in the “Variable
Calculators” menu. In the variable list, the variable names and their
current values are displayed. You can move between these variables
by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”. In order to select a variable to be
used in the calculation, press “Space” on it. This list is the same as the
one in the “Recall Items” dialog box. The only difference is that this
dialog box always displays variable names and values, regardless of the
value of “Detail display” option. After you select all of the variables to
be used in the calculation, you can press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
the “result” list. The “result” list displays the sum, average, variance,
and standard deviation of selected variables. You can move between
these items by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”. If you want to copy
some results in the list to the clipboard, first press “Space” on the items
to be copied, and then press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”. (However, “Copy To
Clipboard” in the menu cannot be used. Only this hotkey will work.)
Once they are copied to the clipboard, they can be pasted in the Word
processor or other programs. To close the dialog box, press “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)” or press “Enter” on the “Close” button. To get the
statistics about another set of variables after reading the result, press
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” to go back to the variable list. Then, press
“Space-e (dots 1-5)” to cancel all the selections. Now, select all the
variables to be calculated in the same way as you did before, and press
“tab (“Space-4-5”) to read the result.
17.1.3 Sine Functions
The “Sine Functions” menu will be activated when you press “Enter” on
“Sine Functions”, or press “s (dots 2-3-4)” in the menu. You can open
the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”. Or, you can activate the
363
“Sine Functions” menu by pressing “Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)” in your
calculation line. The “sine function” list consists of “Sine”, “Arc sine”,
and “Hyperbolic sine”. If you press “Enter” on one of the three functions
while moving with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, or if you press “Enter” on
“Confirm” on one of the functions while moving with tab (“Space-4-5”),
you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting one of the sine
functions. Or, you can insert one of the three sine functions by
pressing the first letter of each in the list.
17.1.4 Cosine Functions
You can activate the “Cosine Functions” by pressing “Enter” on “Cosine
Functions”, or if you press “c (dots 1-4)” in the menu. You can open the
menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line,
you can open the “Cosine Functions” by pressing “Enter-c (dots 1-4)”.
The “cosine function” list consists of “Cosine”, “Arc cosine”, and
“Hyperbolic cosine”. If you press “Enter” on one of the three functions
while moving with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, or if you press “Enter” on
“Confirm” while moving with tab (“Space-4-5”), you can insert it into your
calculation line after selecting one of the three cosine functions. Or,
you can insert one of the three cosine functions by pressing the first
letter of each in the list.
17.1.5 Tangent Functions
You can activate the “Tangent Functions” when you press “Enter” on
“Tangent Functions”, or if you press “t (dots 2-3-4-5)” in the menu. You
can also open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”. Or, in
your calculation line, you can open the “Tangent Functions” by pressing
“Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”. The “tangent functions” list consists of
“Tangent”, “Arc tangent”, and “Hyperbolic tangent”. If you press “Enter”
on one of the three functions while moving with “Space-1” or “Space-4”,
or if you press “Enter” on “Confirm” on one of the functions while moving
with tab (“Space-4-5”), you can insert it into your calculation line after
selecting one of the three tangent functions. Or you can insert one of
the three tangent functions by pressing the first letter of each in the list.
364
17.1.6 Logarithm Functions
The “Logarithm Functions” is a dialog box, which contains the following:
“function list”, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move
between the three items by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab
(“Space-1-2”)”. The function list consists of “Common logarithm” and
“Natural logarithm”, in which you can move by pressing “Space-1” or
“Space-4”.
You can activate the “Logarithm Functions” menu by pressing “Enter” on
“Logarithm Functions”, or if you press “l (dots 1-2-3)” in the menu. Of
course, you can open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”. Or,
in your calculation line, you can activate the “Logarithm Functions” by
pressing “Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)”.
When running the “Logarithm Functions”, If you press “Enter” on one of
the functions while moving with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, or if you press
“Enter” on “Confirm” on one of the functions while moving with “tab
(“Space-4-5”)””, you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting
one of the logarithm functions. Or, you can insert “Natural logarithm” by
pressing “e (dots 1-5)” in the list. You can insert “Common logarithm”
by pressing “n (dots 1-3-4-5)”.
17.1.7 Copy to Clipboard
The “Copy To Clipboard” function is used to copy your formula or result
into the clipboard for pasting your formula or result in a document of the
word processor. You can activate it by pressing “Enter” on the “Copy
To Clipboard”, or by pressing “i (dots 2-4)” in the menu. You can open
the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)” or “F2” while running the
calculator. Or, in the calculation line, you can press “Enter-i (dots 2-4)”
for the quick copy of your calculation into the clipboard directly. After
copying, you can paste it in your document of the word processor.
365
When you activate “Copy To Clipboard”, you will hear “Copy completed”,
and the Braille Sense OnHand will return to your calculation line.
17.1.8 Option Settings
“Option Settings” is a dialog box, which contains the following: “setting
list”, a “Confirm” button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move between
the three items by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”. The “setting list” consists of “Radian” and “Degree”, in which you
can move by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
If you select “Radian”, you can get the PI value while using the
trigonometric function. If you select “Degree” and activate PI, you will
get a wrong answer. You can activate the “Option Settings” if you
press “Enter” on it, or if you press “o (dots 1-3-5)” in the menu. Of
course, you can open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or,
in your calculation line, you can activate the “Option Settings” by
pressing “Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)”.
When running the “Option Settings”, if you press “Enter” on what you
want in the setting list while moving with “Space-1” or “Space-4”, or if
you press “Enter” on “Confirm” on what you want in the setting list, while
moving with “tab (“Space-4-5”)””, you will set the option.
17.1.9 Exit
This is used to exit the calculator. You can quit a calculation if you
press “Enter” on “Exit Calculator”, or if you press “z” in the menu. Of
course, you can open the menu by pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or,
in your calculation line, you can exit by pressing “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
17.1.10 Sample Math Calculations
The following are examples for each of the math functions that you can
perform when using the calculator on the Braille Sense OnHand.
366
General functions:
1. Addition Plus
For Plus press “dots 3-4-6”.
For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, you would enter: 10+20.
The result is displayed as 30.
2. Subtraction Minus
For Minus, press “dots 3-6”.
For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, and then subtract 5, you
would enter: 10+20-5. The result is displayed as 25.
3. Multiplication
For multiplication, press “dots 1-6”.
For example, to multiply 10 by 20, you would enter: 10*20.
The result is displayed as 200.
4. Division
For Division, press “dots 3-4”.
For example, to divide 20 by 10, you would enter: 20/10. The result
is displayed as 2.
5. Percent
For Percent, press “dots 1-4-6”.
If you want to calculate, what a 10 percent mark-up of 20 would be,
enter the following, 20+10% which gives you the result 22. You get
this answer because, 2 is 10percent of 20.
To calculate a 10 percent mark-down on 20, press: 20-10% which
gives the result 18.
You get this answer because, 2 is 10 percent of 20.
To calculate what percentage 20 is of 10, press: 20/10% which gives
you the result 200.
367
To calculate 10 percent of 20, press: 20*10% which gives the result 2.
That is, 10 percent is 0.1. 20*0.1 = 2.
6. Power
For Power, press “Backspace” with “dots 4-5”.
For example, to calculate 2 to the power of 10, you would press: 2^10.
The answer will be given as 1024.
7. Calculating Square Root
To perform the Square root function, you can press “Enter” with “dots
1-2-3-4-5”.
For example, to calculate the square root of 16, you press: Enter with
dots 1-2-3-4-5, 16 “)”. Then, press enter.
Your answer will be given as 4.
8. Exponential
For Exponential you can press “Enter” with “dots 1-5”.
For example, to calculate the Exponential of 2, you would press:
Enter with dots 1-5 then 2, followed by the “)” and “Enter”. That is, exp
(2) which gives the result 7.3890561.
9. Trigonometric Functions
Sine Functions:
For Sine, press “Enter” with “dots 2-3-4”, and then “s”. This is shown on
the Braille display as, sin(.
For Arc Sine, press “Enter” with “dots 2-3-4”, then “a”. This is displayed
as asin(.
For Hyperbolic sine, press “Enter” with “dots 2-3-4”, then “h”. This is
displayed as sinh(.
In order to calculate the sine of a 30 degree angle you would type the
following: Enter with dots 2-3-4, then “s”, 30 and then” )”. Press “Enter”
and your answer is displayed as 0.5.
368
Cosine Functions:
For Cosine, you would press “Enter” with “dots 1-4”, and then you would
press “c”. This is displayed as cos(.
For Arc cosine, press “Enter”, with “dots 1-4”, then, “a”. This is displayed
as acos(.
For Hyperbolic cosine, press “Enter” with “dots 1-4”, then, “h”. This is
displayed as cosh(.
For example, to calculate the cosine of the 30 degree angles, you press:
Enter with dots 1-3, C, 30 and then “)”. Then, press “Enter”. Your
answer will be given as 0.8660254.
Tangent Functions:
For Tangent, press “Enter” with “dots 2-3-4-5” and then “t”. This is
displayed as tan(.
For Arc tangent, press “Enter” with “dots 2-3-4-5” then “a”. This is
displayed as atan(.
For Hyperbolic tangent, press “Enter”, with “dots 2-3-4-5”, then, “h”. This
is displayed as tanh(.
For example, to calculate the tangent of the 30 degree angles, you
press: Enter with dots 2-3-4-5, T, 30 and then “)”. That is, tan(30) which
gives you the result of 0.57735027.
Logarithm Functions:
Common logarithm
For Common logarithm, press “Enter” with “dots 1-2-3”, and then “n”.
This is displayed as log(.
For example, to calculate the common logarithm of the 100, you press:
Enter with dots 1-2-3, N, 100 and then “)”. That is, log(100) which gives
the result 2.
Natural Logarithm
369
For Natural logarithm, press “Enter” with “dots 1-2-3”, and then, “e”. This
is displayed as ln(.
For example, to calculate the natural logarithm of the 100, you press:
Enter with dots 1-2-3, E, 100 and then “)”. That is, ln(100) which gives
the result 4.60517019.
17.2 Display Compass Heading
You can display compass in Braille Sense OnHand. You can execute
this function regardless of location.
In order to display compass, follow these steps:
1) Press “Enter-5-6”, regardless of location.
2) It will show current status of compass.
Also you can execute this function in the “Utilities” program.
1) Press “Enter” on the “Utilities” program or simply press “b (dots 1-
2)” from the main menu.
2) Move to “Display Compass Heading” by pressing “Down arrow
key”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Display Compass Heading” or simply press
“h (dots 1-2-5)”.
If you want to check current compass, press “Space”. You will hear
current compass.
To exit this function, press “Space-e (dots 1-5)”.
Note: It will take about 15 minutes to initialize the unit as following cases:
1. Far away from the original location with the unit being discharged.
2. Leave the unit being discharged for more than a month
17.2.1 Options of gyrocompass
There are 2 options in gyrocompass.
· Refreshing time
370
· Compass display type
· Refreshing time
You can set the interval of announcement. To set, follow these steps:
1) Execute the “Display Compass Heading”.
2) It will show current status of compass.
3) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)”.
4) It will show “Refreshing time” edit box.
By default, it is set to “0”. You can set from 0 to 120. Please enter the
value for seconds.
· Compass display type
You can set the type of the compass display. To set, follow these steps:
1) Execute the “Display Compass Heading”.
2) It will show current status of compass.
3) Press “Tab (Space-4-5)” and move to “Compass display type”.
By default, it is set to “cardinal and degrees”. The setting values are
“cardinal and degrees”, “cardinal only” and “degrees only”. By pressing
“Space”, you can change setting value.
17.3 Set time and date
If you want to set the Braille Sense OnHand internal clock, you can set it
by pressing “Enter” on “Set time and date” in the “Utilities” menu. In the
“Utilities” menu, you can locate the Set time and date by pressing “t
(dots 2-3-4-5)”, or you can find it by navigating the “Utilities” menu with
“Space-1” or “Space-4”.
The Set time and date is a dialog box, which consists of “Time zone”,
“Use daylight saving”, “Time format”, “Time”, “Date”, a “Confirm” button,
and a “Cancel” button. You can move between each of these items by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
371
If you activate “Set time and date” for the first time, you may see “Time
zone? Pacific Time (US & Canada) (GMT -08:00)” which is set as the
default. In “Time zone”, you can review the “Time zone” list by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1”, or by typing in the first letter of represented
cities. If you selected one of the time zones, you can move to the next
item by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)””, or you can move to the previous
item by pressing “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
The “Use daylight saving” will display according to “Time zone”.
Namely if daylight saving time is used in selected time zone, this item
will display. If not so, this item is not display. You can check and
uncheck this item by using “Space”.
The next item is “Time format”, where you can switch between 12 hour
and 24 hour time. You can toggle between which time to use with
“Space-1” or “Space-4”.
Once you select a time, you can move to the next “Time” by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)””. In “Time”, you can set your time. If you select 12
hour clock in the “Time format”, you can see A.M. or P.M. after the hour
and minute. In the 12 hour clock, you can set the time after selecting
A.M. or P.M. by pressing “Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)”. In the 24 hour clock
setting, you can type in a 24-hour-system number regardless of A.M. or
P.M. When you put numbers in the time, you need to put a “Space” or
“: (colon)” between the hour and the minute. To set your time, you can
move to the “Date” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. In the “Date”, you
should put in the month, date, and year in that order. You should use a
2-digit number for the month, a 2-digit number for the date, and a 4-digit
number for the year while typing in a “Space” or “/ (slash)” between them.
The next item is “Synchronize with time server”, where you can
synchronize time and date. This function is extremely useful when the
date and time of Braille Sense OnHand is faster or slower than current
time. First of all, to execute this function, you have to connect the
internet to your Braille Sense OnHand. Once the internet is connected,
press “Enter” on “Synchronize with time server” button. After the
synchronizing, it shows synchronized time in “Time” edit combo box.
372
Also when you press “Tab (Space-4-5)”, it shows synchronized date in
“Data” edit combo box.
After you have completed the necessary information, you can press
“Enter” on “Confirm” by moving with “tab (“Space-4-5”)”, and then you
will return to “Set time and date”. Or, you can press “Enter” when you
have completed entering all of the information because the default is set
to “Confirm”.
17.4 Display time and date
You can check the current date and time here. To activate this function,
press “Space-4” or “Space-1” in the “Utilities” menu, and then press
“Enter” on “Display time and date”. Or, you can activate this function
by pressing “d” in the menu. Anywhere in the Braille Sense OnHand,
you can press “Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” to check the time. If you press
“Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will say the time, and
the Braille Sense OnHand will display the current time in Braille. Then,
if you press tab (“Space-4-5”), the Braille Sense OnHand will say and
display today’s date.
17.5 Wake up alarm
If you have set up the “Wake up alarm” function, an alarm will sound on
the Braille Sense OnHand at the specified time every day. If you want
to open “Wake up alarm”, go to the “program” menu, move to “Utilities”,
and then press “Enter”. Then, use the “Space-1” or “Space-4” to find
“Wake up alarm”, and then press “Enter” on “Wake up alarm”. If this is
the first time you have opened “Wake up alarm”, and you have not yet
set the time or date in the Braille Sense OnHand, the Braille Sense
OnHand will then say, “Set time:” After you set the time, the Braille
Sense OnHand will display the “Wake up alarm” dialog box. The Braille
Sense OnHand will then say, “Set time:” The “Wake up alarm” dialog
box contains the following: “Set time”, “Bell”, “Term”, “Alarm duration”,
“Repeat interval”, “Wake up call times” a “Confirm” button, and a
“Cancel” button. You can move among these by pressing “tab (“Space-
373
4-5”)” and “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. If you want to check the wakeup
call settings, open this dialog box again. It will show you the current
wakeup call settings. When the alarm sounds, the Braille display on
the Braille Sense OnHand will also display the message “Wake up call.
Press Backspace-enter to stop the alarm”. If you want to stop the
alarm, press “Backspace-Enter”. After you press “Backspace-Enter”,
the Braille Sense OnHand will remain on, even though the power switch
is turned to “Off”. In order to turn the Braille Sense OnHand off, you
must turn the power switch to “On”, and then back to “Off” after you hit
“Backspace-Enter”. Then, the Braille Sense OnHand will be turned off,
and the alarm will not sound again until you set it again. If you do not
plan on being able to turn the unit off and on, you should turn on the
“Power saving mode” in the “Global options” (as explained in section
3.31) to avoid draining the battery.
17.5.1 Set Time
When you open the “Wake up alarm” dialog box, the Braille Sense
OnHand will display the “Set time” field. The value is set to the current
time or the time specified previously. Here you can directly type in the
time, or set the time using the shortcut keys, as explained in section 6.3.
After you set the time, you should press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
the next field. While you are anywhere in the Braille Sense OnHand,
you can check the time by pressing “Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)” to check the
time.
17.5.2 Alarm Sound
You can select an alarm sound for the wake up alarm. If you press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)” on “Set time”, you will hear the alarm sound that is
currently set. Press “Space-1” or “Space-4” to change the alarm sound,
and you will hear the different alarm sounds. Select one of the three
alarm sounds that are available. If you have selected the sound that
you want, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the next field.
374
17.5.3 Term
In this field, you can set which day of the week the alarm will go off.
There are four options: “Off”, “Once”, “Week days”, and “Every day”.
Move between these options by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. If
“Term” is set to “Off”, the alarm will not go off at the specified time at all.
If “Term” is set to “Once”, the alarm will go off only once. If “Term” is
set to “Week day”, the alarm will go off at the same time every weekday,
Monday through Friday. If “Term” is set to “Everyday”, the alarm will go
off at the specified time 7 days a week, even on weekends. When you
have selected the option you like, press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to
the next field.
17.4.4 Ringing Duration
This option sets the amount of time that the alarm will sound. The
options are 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. Move between these
options by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. If you set the ringing
duration to “1 minute”, the alarm will sound for one minute, and then the
alarm will be silent. To stop the alarm, press “Backspace-enter”.
17.5.5 Repeat Interval
This option sets the amount of time that will be between the times that
the alarm sounds. For example, after the alarm has stopped sounding,
it will ring again in 3 minutes, if you set the repeat interval to three
minutes. The available settings are 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes.
Move between these options by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
17.5.6 Wakeup Call Times
This option allows you to decide how many times the alarm will sound.
The available settings are anywhere from 1 to 10 times. For example, if
the alarm is not turned off by pressing “Backspace-enter”, it will repeat
according to the number of times that you set for this option. Move
between these options by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
375
17.5.7 Confirm/Cancel
If you press “Enter” on the “Confirm” button, the changed options will be
saved, and the dialog box will be closed. If you do not want to save the
changes you have made, press “Enter” on the “Cancel” button. The
Braille Sense OnHand will keep the previous “wakeup call” settings, and
close the dialog box.
17.6 Calendar
You can activate the calendar by pressing “Enter” on “Calendar” in the
“Utilities” menu, or by pressing “l (dots 1-2-3)”. The following options
will be available when you are using the calendar. “Solar calendar”,
“Lunar calendar”, and “Day of week”. In the calendar, you can check
the three kinds of information starting from the year 1841 to the year
2043. If you type in a date that is not in the range and press “Enter”,
you will get the message, “Invalid date”, and return to where you where
you were typing in the date.
17.6.1 Using the Calendar
The “Calendar” is composed of the “Solar calendar”, “Lunar calendar”,
and “Day of week”. In the “Lunar calendar”, a leap month will display
the month with “l (dots 1-2-3)”. The calendar works according to a date
unit. The default is the date that the Braille Sense OnHand was set to
the last time the date was set. You can check the date in two ways.
The following is an explanation of how to check the dates.
1. Moving items
You can switch between “Solar calendar”, “Lunar calendar”, and “Day
of week” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
2. Typing in date
In the calendar, you can type in a month, date, and year. For the
year, you should type in a 4-digit number, and for the month and date,
you should type in 2-digit numbers. It is possible to type these
376
numbers in using computer Braille and regular grade 1 Braille without
using the number sign. You can put “Space” or “/ (slash)” between the
month, date, and year. If you press “Enter” after typing in a date,
you can hear the date once, and go to the next item. For example, if
you put the date in the “Solar calendar”, you will be on the “Lunar
calendar”.
3. Hotkeys for switching dates
After putting in a date, you can check the “Solar calendar”, “Lunar
calendar”, and “Day of week” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-
tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
17.7 Pronunciation Dictionary
The “Pronunciation dictionary” is used to register or modify the Braille
Sense OnHand’s pronunciation while it is speaking. You can activate it
by pressing “p (dots 1-2-3-4)” in the “Utilities” menu.
The “Pronunciation dictionary” is composed of the list, “Add Word”
button, “Modify Word” button, “Delete Word” button and “Close” button.
You can move through those controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or
“shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. The list will be shown as “word: xx – yy”
where “xx” is the original word and “yy” is the word you wanted to hear
instead of the original word. For example, if you wanted to hear “world
health organization” for the original word “WHO” and added the word,
the list will be listed as “word: WHO – world health organization”. If
there are many items on the list, you can move up or down through lists
by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. Also you can click the cursor
routing key corresponding to the item position you want to focus. For
377
example, if there are 10 items in the list and you want to focus the 5th
item, you can just click the 5th cursor routing key and you will focus on
the 5th item on the list. The list will not be listed by the alphabetical
order and it will be listed by the sequential order to be added.
If you want to add new word, you can add the word by pressing “Enter”
on “Add Word” button or you can press “Space-i (dots 2-4)”. Then you
will meet “Add entry:” Here you can type in the word you want to
change its pronunciation and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” then you will
meet “Replacement:” Here you can type in the word you want to hear
the pronunciation and then press “Enter” or press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to
move to “Confirm” button and then press “Enter”. The word will be
added completely and the focus will be returned to “Add Word” button.
In case of adding the word by pressing “Space-i (dots 2-4)”, newly added
word will be displayed. If you want to cancel this modification, you can
press “Enter” on “Cancel” button or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or press
“Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
If you want to modify the registered word, in the list, you can move up or
down by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4” so that you focus the item you
want to modify. And after moving to “Modify Word” button by pressing
“tab (“Space-4-5”)”, press “Enter”. Or on the item you want to modify,
just press “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”. Then you will meet “Modify entry:
(focused word)”. At this time, if you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” once, you
will meet “Replacement: (new pronunciation)”. Here you can type in the
pronunciation you want to change and then press “Enter”. Or press
“tab (“Space-4-5”)” again to move to “Confirm” button and then press
“Enter”. Then the word will be modified completely and the focus will
be returned to “Modify Word” button. In case of modifying the word by
pressing “Space-m (dots 1-3-4)”, the modified word will be displayed. If
you want to cancel this modification, you can press “Enter” on “Cancel”
button or press “Space-e (dots 1-5)” or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
If you want to delete the registered word, in the list, you can move up or
down by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4” so that you focus the item you
want to delete. And after moving to “Delete Word” button by pressing
378
“tab (“Space-4-5”)”, press “Enter”. Or on the item you want to delete,
just press “Space-d (dots 1-4-5)”. Then you will meet the prompt,
“Delete xx? Yes”. If you are sure to delete the item, press “Enter”.
Otherwise press “Space” to switch to “No” and then press “Enter”.
If you want to exit “Pronunciation dictionary”, you can press “Enter” on
“Close” button or press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)”.
17.8 Stopwatch
When you press “Enter” on the “Stopwatch”, you will show “00:00:00”.
If you press “Enter”, the stopwatch will start. If you press “Enter” again,
it will pause, and the Braille Sense OnHand will say the elapsed time,
and display it in Braille. Pressing “Enter” again will restart the
stopwatch from where it paused.
If you press “Backspace” on “work” or “pause”, it will let you know the
elapsed time and will clear into “00:00:00”. While the stopwatch is
working, pressing “Space” will make the Braille Sense OnHand say the
elapsed time at the moment. In this case, the Braille display is still just
displaying the clock.
While the stopwatch is running, pressing “Space-F2” will stop displaying
the time while the stopwatch is still running. If you press “Space-F2”,
the time will be displayed again.
If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” before the
start of the stopwatch or while it is running, you can switch to the
“Countdown timer”. If you activate the “Countdown timer”, you will be
asked to put in hours, minutes, and seconds. When typing in the hours,
minutes, and seconds, you should type in a two-digit number for the
hour, minute and the second, regardless of whether you are using
Computer Braille or regular Uncontracted Braille without using a number
sign. If you press “Enter” without typing in any numbers, the
“Countdown timer” will start with the default, which is set to one minute.
When started, the “Countdown timer” will display “count down xx minute”,
379
and it will start running. If you press “Enter” in the “Countdown timer”,
the Braille Sense OnHand will tell you the remaining time, and then it will
pause. If you press “Enter” again, it will restart. Pressing “Backspace”
will clear the “Countdown timer”. If the timer reaches zero, you will hear
a 10-second alarm, and the “Countdown timer” will clear. If you press
“Backspace-Enter” while the alarm is sounding, the alarm will stop and
your timer will clear, and will be ready to accept a new time.
If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)” again
anywhere in the count down timer, the stopwatch will be ready. If you
want to exit the “Stopwatch” or “Countdown timer”, press “Space-z (dots
1-3-5-6)” anywhere within the “Stopwatch” or “Countdown timer”, and
you will return to the “Stopwatch” menu.
17.9 Terminal for Screen reader
The “Terminal for screen reader” function allows the Braille Sense
OnHand to be used as a Braille display when hooked up to a computer
that uses a compatible screen reader such as Window-Eyes or
Supernova. Before using this function, make sure that the Braille
Sense OnHand is connected to your personal computer via a Bluetooth
serial or to the USB client port. To turn on this function, go to the
“Utilities” menu, and press “Enter”. Then, press “Space-4”, until you
hear “Terminal for screen reader”. Then, press “Enter”. If you activate
“Terminal for screen reader”, you will see the list of connection methods.
In the list, you will see “Bluetooth serial port” and “USB port”. Press
“Space-1” or “Space-4” until you reach what you want to select. If you
have selected one, press “Enter” and you will hear “Terminal mode”.
The Braille Sense OnHand will no longer say anything, as it is now
simply acting as a Braille display for your computer. If you fail to
connect, you will be returned to the list of connection methods.
For information and support files on connecting the Braille Sense
OnHand to the USB port with Window-Eyes see:
GWKB1043 - Configuring the Braille Sense OnHand to Work as a Braille
Display via the USB Port
380
http://www.gwmicro.com/Support/Knowledge_Base/?kbnumber=GWKB1
043
For more information on Bluetooth, refer to Section 13.
17.10 Setup Internet
The “Setup internet” function is used to set up your IP configuration. In
“Setup internet”, you will find “Bluetooth DUN” and “Wireless LAN”. You
can move between the four items by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
To connect to the Internet via a wireless network, use the “Wireless
LAN” function.
If you want to activate “Setup internet”, press “Enter” on “Setup internet”
in the “Utilities” menu, or press “i (dots 2-4)” in the “Utilities” menu. You
can move through the “Utilities” menu items with “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
If you want to access to Internet with the Braille Sense OnHand, you
must set the Internet settings at “Setup internet” that is one of the
submenus of “Utilities” menu.
Or, if the PC in which the Active Sync program is installed is connected
to Internet and the Braille Sense OnHand is connected to that PC, then
you can connect the Braille Sense OnHand to Internet.
The functions of this menu are explained in greater detail in the following
sections.
17.10.1 Bluetooth DUN setup
If you wish to connect to Mobile network using Bluetooth DUN, you can
move to “Setup internet” in the “Utilities” menu and select “Bluetooth
DUN” and enter on it.
The Bluetooth DUN setup contains the following: “Connect list”,
“Default”, “Add”, “Modify”, “Delete”, and “Close”. You can move
between these by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-
2”)”. Within each item, you can move by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-
1”.
381
The “connect list” has added connection names. You can move
between these by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
The “Default” is to set to the default connection name in the Internet
setup. If you want to choose a connection as the default, go to the
“Connect list”, and move to “Default” by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)””.
Then, press “Enter”.
“Add” is a dialog box where you can set up the environment regarding
the connect group names. It has “connect name list”, a “Confirm”
button, and a “Cancel” button. You can move between these by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. The “connect
name list” has “Connect name”, “Connect number”, “ID”, “Password”,
and “Modem speed”. In “Connect name”, you can type in the host
name to connect with, and in the “Connect number”, you can type in the
number of the host. Here you can type in numbers and commas (,)
only. You can type in numbers using Computer Braille. In “ID” and
“Password”, use Computer Braille to type the ID and password that are
required by the host server. You can make the connection to Mobile
network without any password according to Mobile server. In the
“Modem speed”, select one from the list by pressing “Backspace” or
“Space”. After completing each item, you can move to the next item by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)””. Finally, with “Modem speed” completed,
you can press “Enter” to save your registration. Before saving it, you
can cancel your choices by moving to “Cancel” by pressing “tab (“Space-
4-5”)””, and press “Enter” on it.
“Modify” is used to modify the connect group. You can do this by
moving to what you want to select in the “Connect list”, and then press
“Enter”. You can also press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to locate “Modify”.
Otherwise, you can press “m (1-3-4)” on the “Connect name” in the
“Connect list” directly. “Modify” has the same items as “Add”, and you
use the menus in the same way.
In “Delete”, if you want to delete an item, you can move to what you
want to delete in the “Connect list”, and then press “Enter” on “Delete”.
382
Use “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move between the items. Or, you can delete
an item by pressing “d (dots 1-4-5)” on what you want to delete in the
“Connect list”.
If you want to exit the “Bluetooth DUN setup”, you can press “Space-z
(dots 1-3-5-6)”, or you can press “Enter” on “Close” by moving to it by
pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”.
17.10.2 Setup Wireless LAN
If you want to connect to a wireless network, you should use the “setup
wireless LAN” function. In order to use the “setup wireless LAN” function,
you must change the wireless option to “On” in the option menu.
Go to the “Utilities” menu that is located in the “program” menu by
pressing “F1”, and then press “Space-4” repeatedly to move to the
“Utilities” menu. Then, press “Enter” on “Utilities”. Next, move to
“Setup internet” by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”, and then press
“Enter” on “Setup internet”. And then press “Enter” on “Wireless LAN”.
The “Wireless LAN” dialog box consists of the “Access point” list,
“Advanced” button and “Close” button. You can move between these
controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”. If
you do not have a wireless LAN turned on, you will hear “no item” when
you press “Enter” on “Wireless LAN”.
When you first open the “Wireless LAN” dialog box, the focus is on the
“access point” list. The list has the information of wireless access points
which is searched.
“Access point” list will let you know the “access point name”, “encryption”,
and “sensitivity” of each item. (Ex: linksys, encryption: WEP, sensitivity:
good.) If there is more than one access point in the list, you can move
between them by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. Move to the “access
point” that you want to connect to. And press “Enter”. And then you will
hear the “Trying to connect with (access point name)” message and
383
connecting sound. If you are using network key in Access Point when
you press “Enter”, “Network key” edit box will be displayed. In edit box,
you have to input the encrypted key and press “Enter”. And if your
settings are correct, then you will hear “Completed setting profile” with
connecting sound.
The “Advanced” common dialog box is used to modify the added profile
or add new profile or check the existed profile. If you press “Enter” on
the “Advanced” button while wireless LAN turned off, “no item” will be
displayed. Pressing “Enter” on the “Advanced” button, while wireless
LAN turned on. The “Advanced” dialog box has 5 controls. You can
navigate among these controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-
tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
The “Advanced” common dialog box contains “Profile list”, “Add”
common dialog button, “Remove” button, “Properties” common dialog
button and “Close” button controls.
1. “Profile list”: Here you will see the profile lists that you have added.
You can move through the list by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”.
2. “Add” common dialog button: You can add a profile here. “Add
common dialog” has the 10 controls.
1) “Setup IP: Automatic” combo box: You can switch between
automatic and manual by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”. If you
select “Manual”, you will need to enter your IP address, subnet
mask, gateway IP address, and DNS IP address by yourself.
You can move between these computer edit boxes by pressing
“Space-4” or “Space-1”. Press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” to move to the
next control.
2) “Network name (SSID)” computer edit box: The edit box is empty
and you can type in network name you prefer.
3) “Network mode” combo box: Here you can select between
“Infrastructure”, and “802.11 ad-hoc” mode by pressing “Space-1”
or “Space-4”.
384
4) “Network authentication mode” combo box: Here you can select
between “Open”, “Shared”, “WPA-PSK”, and “WPA2-PSK” by
pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”.
5) “Data encryption” combo box: Here you can select the data
encryption method by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. If you
select “Open” or “Shared” in network authentication mode, you can
choose between “Disable” and “WEP”. And if you select “WPA-
PSK” or “WPA2-PSK” in network authentication mode, you can
choose “TKIP”.
6) “The key is provided automatically” check box: If the “access point”
does not provide a key for users automatically, uncheck this check
box by pressing “Space”. The default is that the check box is
checked.
7) “Network key” computer edit box: This is a computer edit box to
type the network key if the key is not provided automatically.
8) “Key index” edit box: This is an edit box to type the key number
of the wireless access point that matches the network key input.
9) “Confirm” button: Pressing this button applies the changes.
10) “Cancel” button: You can press this button to cancel the setup.
Selecting “Open” in “Data encryption” skips numbers 6 through 8, and
checking “The key is provided automatically” check box will omit the
numbers 7, 8.
3. “Remove” button: If you want to delete a profile item in the profile list,
select the profile item you wish to delete, and then press “r (dots 1-2-
3-5)” or go to the “Remove” button by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)”,
and then press “Enter” on “Remove” button.
4. “Properties” common dialog button: If you want to get information
about a selected profile item in the profile list, press “Enter” on the
“Properties” common dialog button after focusing on a profile item by
using “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. You can reconfirm the added information in
each item. You can modify an item here directly.
385
In order to exit from “Advance” dialog box, you can press “Space-e(dots
1-5)” or “Space-z(dots 1-3-5-6)”.
17.11 Display network status
Using this program, you can check if the Braille Sense OnHand is
currently connected to the Internet. This program provides you with the
information about the current connection type, the current IP of the unit,
subnet mask, gateway, and MAC address. To run this program, press
“Enter” on “Display network status”, or press “n (dots 1-3-4-5)” in the
“Utilities” menu. If you start the program, a list of information about the
connection type and address will be displayed. If you press “tab
(“Space-4-5”)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will display a “Renew” button.
If you press “tab (“Space-4-5”)” again, “exit” will be displayed. If you
press “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”, the Braille Sense OnHand will move
between these elements in the opposite direction. The first item in the
information list (status) shows if the Braille Sense OnHand is currently
connected to the Internet (online/offline), and what the current
connection type is (Bluetooth DUN or Wireless LAN). The next item is
the “IP address”, followed by “Subnet mask”, “Gateway”, “Primary DNS”,
and finally “MAC address”. You can move between these items by
pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1”. If the Braille Sense OnHand is not
currently connected to the Internet, the status information shows that the
Braille Sense OnHand is offline. If you press “Enter” on the “Renew”
button, it tries to connect to Internet using the parameters specified in
“Setup internet” once again, and displays on/offline status. To end this
program, press “Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)” at any time in the program. Or
pressing “Enter” on the “exit” button will close the program too. You
can also press “Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5)” while you are in the “program”
menu to open Display network status.
17.12 Check Power Status
You can activate “Check power status” function by pressing “b” or press
“Enter” on the “Check power status” in the “Utilities” menu. You can
move to it by pressing “Space-4” or “Space-1” in the “Utilities” menu.
386
Anywhere in the Braille Sense OnHand, you can activate this function by
pressing “Space-1-6”. In “check power status”, you can check two
kinds of information regarding the Braille Sense OnHand's power. It will
let you know the recharging percentage and if the Braille Sense OnHand
is using the AC adapter or the battery. If you activate this function, you
will see “xx% charged, using battery or AC power”. After checking it,
you can exit by pressing “Space-z (1-3-5-6)”, which will return you to the
menu.
17.13 Backup/Restore Personalized settings
“Backup/Restore Personalized settings” is a program where you can
backup/restore personalized settingsfor each program in the Braille
Sense OnHand all at once. This program can be found in the “Utilities”
menu. You can run this program by pressing “k (dots 1-3)” in the
“Utilities” menu. If you run this program, a dialog box will be opened.
This dialog box contains: “program option check box list”, “Select all”
button, “Backup” button, “Restore” button, and “Cancel” button. You can
move between the check boxes in the “program option check box list”,
by pressing “Space-1” or “Space-4”. You can move between these
controls by pressing “tab (“Space-4-5”)” or “shift-tab (“Space-1-2”)”.
The “program option check box list” contains “Options settings”, “File
manager options”, “Word processor options”, “Address manager options”,
“Schedule manager options”, “Media player options”, “Web browser
options”, “E-mail options”, “Bluetooth manager options”, “MSN
messenger options” and “Database manager options”.
In this list, you move to the program option and check it by pressing
“Space”. If you want to uncheck it you can do so by pressing “Space”
again. After you select all the options you want to backup or restore,
press “Enter” on the “Backup” or “Restore” button. If you want to select
all of the programs in the list, press “Enter” on the “Select all” button. If
you press “Enter” on “Backup” or “Restore” button, the dialog box will be
closed.
387
If you press a “Backup” button, it lets you see a list in which you can
select a path where to store a backup file. It shows up “flashdisk” as
default values. Here you move to disk or folder where you want to store
a file, by using navigation key in a “File manager” program. And you
select a folder or disk by pressing “Space”, press “Enter”, it turns up that
a backup file is stored in selected folder. Each one of these options has
its own backup file. This means that when you backup each of the 5
options, it will generate 5 backup files. If you need to store a backup file
in a root of disk, refer to this way. When it comes out a name of disk, you
press “Enter” after selecting a disk by pressing “Space”.
If you press a “Restore” button, it lets you see a list in which you can
select a path where to restore a backup file. A way how to move or
select a folder or disk is the same as “Backup”. If you select a folder that
is not back upped, you can be seen a message which tells that there is
no backup option file.
If you cold reset your Braille Sense OnHand, or its battery is fully
discharged, the main option settings and settings for each program will
be lost, and initialized to the default values. If you backup options using
this program right before you cold reset, you can restore the option
settings you set previously.
17.14 Format
To use the Braille Sense OnHand, you may need to format. This
program can be found in the “Utilities” menu. You can execute this
program by pressing “f” in the “Utilities” menu. When you format Braille
Sense OnHand, all information is erased. Therefore, before you format
Braille Sense OnHand, you are advised to backup important data.
17.14.1 Formatting the disk
To format the disk, two methods are discussed separately below.
First, you can format the disk in utilities program.
1) Go to the “Format” in utilities program.
388
2) Press “Enter”. It will focus the “Disk: flashdisk”.
3) Press “Enter”
4) “Format flashdisk memory? Yes” will appear on the Braille
display.
5) Press “Enter”
6) “All data will be lost. Continue? Yes” will appear on the Braille
display.
7) Press “Enter”.
8) “Now formatting flashdisk memory” will appear on the Braille
display and start format.
9) After completing the format, return to the “Disk” list.
If you want to cancel the format, press the “Space”, press the “Enter” on
“No” in step 4) or 6).
Also, Format of SD and USB memory is available in the same method. If
you inserted the SD card or USB memory in SD card slot or USB port,
SD card and USB memory will be listed on “Disk” list. Any of the disks
can be moved by using the up and down arrows. As above, you can
format in the same process.
Second, you can format the disk in program menu.
1) Press “Space-1-2-3” in program menu.
2) While holding down “Space-1-2-3”, quickly press and release the
reset button.
3) Continue pressing “Space-1-2-3” until you hear the disk
formatting.
4) After completing the format, return to the “File manager”
program.
17.15 Set Sleep Timer
You can set “Sleep Timer” in Braille Sense OnHand. The sleep timer will
turn the unit off at a specified time regardless of what you are doing.
389
Please follow these steps;
1) Execute “Utilities”.
2) Press “Space-1” or “Space-4”, move to “Sleep timer”.
3) Press “Enter” on the “Sleep timer”.
4) Or press “Space-j (dots 2-4-5)”, regardless of location.
5) The edit box will ask “Sleep timer: 0”.
6) Enter the number of minutes for the sleep timer. Enter the number
from 0 to 90.
7) Press “Enter”.
Once the sleep timer is set, even if the device is active, it will power off.
If you set the sleep timer for “5” minutes and press “Space-j (dots 2-4-5)”
after 2 minutes, you will find “3” in edit box. It means the power will be
turned off after “3” minutes.
17.16 Upgrade Braille Sense OnHand firmware
If you activate this function, you can update the Braille Sense OnHand
either through an Internet connection or from a disk that contains the
upgrade file. If you decide to upgrade using an Internet connection,
you must first complete the “Setup internet” function. If you update the
Braille Sense OnHand, all of the settings will be returned to their default
status. Data in the flashdisk will be protected. However, we
recommend that you backup your files before updating the Braille Sense
OnHand firmware.
While updating, you cannot cancel the update. Note that you must not
press the reset button while updating, and you should avoid power
failure. We recommend that you do not touch the Braille Sense
OnHand while it is updating. It may take up to 30 minutes to update the
Braille Sense OnHand, though it depends on the speed of your Internet
connection. On completing the setup, the Braille Sense OnHand will
reboot again to finish the update.
390
17.17.1 Upgrading the Braille Sense OnHand firmware Using the
Internet
To upgrade the Braille Sense OnHand firmware via the Internet,
complete the following steps:
1) Make sure an Internet connection is available. Press “Enter” on
“Upgrade Braille Sense firmware” in the “Utilities” menu. Then,
“Upgrade: Online” will appear.
2) Now, press “Enter” on “Upgrade: Online”. The Braille Sense On
Hand will connect to the HIMS server, and your current software
version will be compared to the HIMS server version. You will
then be asked if you want to continue to upgrade.
If you press “Enter” on “No”, the upgrade will be cancelled. Press
“Space” to toggle between “Yes” and “No”. If you press “Enter” on
“Yes”, the Braille Sense OnHand will download the upgrade file, the
upgrade will stop. If the upgrade fails, it will give you the message
“Internet connection is not available. Check your cable and try
again”. To try the upgrade again, press “Space-z (1-3-5-6)” to
cancel, and then activate upgrade Braille Sense OnHand firmware
again. If the connection is successful, the updated files will be
downloaded, and the Braille Sense OnHand will start upgrading. If
you do not have enough memory available on the flashdisk, the
Braille Sense OnHand will be unable to update until you make room
for the upgrade files by deleting any unnecessary files from the Braille
Sense OnHand.
3) After downloading the upgrade file, Braille Sense OnHand will au
tomatically start the upgrading process. Please remember that y
ou must not do anything to the Braille Sense OnHand until the u
pgrade is complete. When the upgrade is complete, you will be
returned to the “program” menu, and you will hear “File manage
r”.
4) After you have completed the upgrade, you should check the sof
tware version by pressing “Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” while you are
in the “program” menu.
391
17.17.2 Upgrading the Braille Sense OnHand firmware from a Disk
To upgrade the Braille Sense OnHand firmware from a disk, complete
the following steps:
1. Connect a disk (such as a compact flash card, SD card or USB
memory stick) to the Braille Sense OnHand. The disk must have the
upgrade file stored on it. Then, press “Enter” on “Upgrade Braille
Sense OnHand firmware”.
2. Then, “Upgrade: Online” will appear. Press “Space-4” to go to the
“Upgrade: Offline”. Then, press “Enter”. Then, you will see the disk
list. Press “Space-4” repeatedly to go to the disk that contains the
upgrade file. Then, press “Enter”.
3. You will then be asked if you want to continue to upgrade. If you
press “Enter” on “No”, the upgrade will be cancelled. Press “Space”
to toggle between “Yes” and “No”. If you press “Enter” on “Yes”, the
Braille Sense OnHand will start upgrading. This step will not appear
when your current software version is not the latest version.
4. The Braille Sense OnHand will automatically start the upgrading
process. Please remember that you must not do anything to the
Braille Sense OnHand until the upgrade is complete. When the
upgrade is complete, you will be returned to the “program” menu, and
you will hear “File manager”.
5. After you have completed the upgrade, you should check the
software version by pressing “Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6)” while you are in
the “program” menu.
17.17 Hot Keys for Utilities
Calculator: c (dots 1-4)
Calculator initialize: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General function: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Plus: dots 3-4-6
Minus: dots 3-6
392
Division: dots 3-4
Multiplication: dots 1-6
Percent: dots 1-4-6
Power: Backspace-4-5
Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Decimal Point: dots 4-6
Left Parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6
Right Parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6
PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Exp: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Variable Function:
Recall Items: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Delete all saved items: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Save Items: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
Trigonometric Function: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), s (dots 2-3-4)
Arc Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), c (dots 1-4)
Arc Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Arc Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), h (dots 1-2-5)
Logarithm Function: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Natural Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), e (dots 1-5)
Common Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Copy to Clipboard: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Option Setting: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Display compass heading: Enter-5-6
393
Set time and date: t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
Switch Between a.m. and p.m.: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Checking date and time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Calendar: l (dots 1-2-3)
Move items
Move to the previous item: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the next item: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move key for date in calendar
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
Pronunciation dictionary: p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Move to the previous control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
394
Move to the next control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to the previous item in entry: Space-1
Move to the next item in entry: Space-4
Add word: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Modify word: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete word: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Stopwatch: w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter
Check the elapsed time: Backspace
Stop Braille display: Space-F2
Restart Braille display: Space-F2
Switch between stopwatch and countdown timer: Tab (Space-4-5 or
F3) / Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Count down timer pause or restart: Enter
Count down timer Initialize: Backspace
Exit stopwatch or countdown timer: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Setup internet: i (dots 2-4)
Check power status: Space-1-6
Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Backup/Restore Personalized settings: k (dots 1-3)
Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Upgrade Braille Sense firmware: u (dots 1-3-6)
Check download information: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Cancel download and exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
395
18. Using the help menu
The help section consists of various text files that will allow you to read
about the many functions of the Braille Sense OnHand. You will find
the following help sections:
1. Help overview
2. Basic functions help
3. File manager help
4. Word processor help
5. Address manager help
6. Schedule manager help
7. Email help
8. Media player help
9. FM radio help
10. Web browser help
11. Daisy player help
12. Bluetooth manager help
13. MSN messenger help
14. Database manager help
15. Utilities help
16. Using the help menu
17. Using activesync
18. Command summary
19. Command summary for USB keyboard
20. Troubleshooting guide
21. Accessories
22. Information about the Braille Sense OnHand
The section, “Help overview”, gives an entire overview of the Braille
Sense OnHand. This section covers all of the functions of the Braille
Sense OnHand. To access the help file, press “F1” to go to the
“program” menu, and use “Space-4” repeatedly until you find “Help”.
Then, press “Enter” on “Help”. Then, press “Enter” on “Help overview”.
The navigation keys are the same as in the word processor. For a list
of the navigation keys, please see section 20.3.2. When you are
396
reading the manual on the Braille Sense OnHand, you can search for
text in the various sections by pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”, type the
text you wish to find, and then press “Enter”. You can find the next
occurrence of the particular text that you have previously searched for
by pressing “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”.
The section, “Basic functions help”, gives an explanation of the “Global
options” functions and common function, and how to use them. To
access the help file, press “F1” to go to the “program” menu, and use
“Space-4” repeatedly until you find “Help”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Help”. Then, press “Enter” on “Basic functions help”. The navigation
keys are the same as in the word processor. For a list of the navigation
keys, please see section 20.3.2. Remember that when you are reading
the manual on the Braille Sense OnHand, you can search for text in the
various sections by pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”, type the text you
wish to find, and then press “Enter”. You can find the next occurrence of
the particular text that you have previously searched for by pressing
“Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”.
The remaining sections cover each of the functions of the Braille Sense
OnHand in detail. To access these help files, press “F1” to go to the
“program” menu, and use “Space-4” repeatedly until you find “Help”.
Then, press “Enter” on “Help”. Then, press “Enter” on the section that
you want to read. The navigation keys are the same as in the word
processor. For a list of the navigation keys, please see section 20.3.2.
Remember that when you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense
OnHand, you can search for text in the various sections by pressing
“Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”, type the text you wish to find, and then press
“Enter”. Also, you can find the next occurrence of the particular text
that you have previously searched for by pressing “Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)”.
The “Command summary” section 20.3.2, lists the various hot keys that
are available in the Braille Sense OnHand. To access this section,
press “F1” to go to the “program” menu, and use “Space-4” repeatedly
until you find “Help”. Then, press “Enter” on “Help”. Then, press
“Enter” on “Command summary”. The navigation keys are the same as
397
in the word processor. For a list of the navigation keys, please see
section 20.3.2. Remember that when you are reading the manual on
the Braille Sense OnHand, you can search for text in the various
sections by pressing “Space-f (dots 1-2-4)”, type the text you wish to find,
and then press “Enter”. You can find the next occurrence of the
particular text that you have typed previously by pressing “Enter-f (dots
1-2-4)”.
The “Information about the Braille Sense OnHand” section gives the
copyright and version of the Braille Sense OnHand, as well as the
version of Windows CE that the Braille Sense OnHand is using. To
access “Information about the Braille Sense OnHand” section, press
“F1” to go to the “program” menu, and use “Space-4” repeatedly until
you find “Help”. Then, press “Enter” on “Help”. Then, press “Enter” on
“Information about the Braille Sense OnHand”.
If you want to save the information about the Braille Sense OnHand,
press “Enter” on “Information about the Braille Sense OnHand” of “Help”
and press “tab (“Space-4-5”)”. Braille Sense OnHand will display “Save
button”. You press “Enter” on this button. Then Braille Sense OnHand
will display “Successfully saved”. and return to “Save” button.
The saving file is named “bs-information.txt”. And this file is stored in
“flashdisk”.
398
19. Using ActiveSync
19.1 What is ActiveSync?
ActiveSync is a program that allows mobile devices to connect to a
personal computer. This program enables file transfers from a personal
computer to a mobile device and vise versa. Also this program is able to
synchronize the Braille Sense OnHand with Microsoft Outlook.
ActiveSync is not shipped with the Braille Sense OnHand. If you would
like to use ActiveSync, you will have to download it from the Internet on
to your personal computer.
19.2 Connecting the Braille Sense OnHand to a PC
Before connecting the Braille Sense OnHand to your personal computer
for the first time, make sure that the Braille Sense OnHand is turned off.
Once you have ActiveSync installed, you will need to plug a USB cable
in to the USB OTG port on the right panel of the Braille Sense OnHand.
Then, plug the other end of the USB cable in to a USB port on your
personal computer. Now, turn on the Braille Sense OnHand. You will
hear several sounds. First, on the Braille Sense OnHand, you will hear
chimes. Then, you will hear a “ding-dong” sound on your computer,
which lets you know the computer is connected properly to the Braille
Sense OnHand. You will again hear chimes on the Braille Sense
OnHand, and then on your computer.
19.3 Setting up the Braille Sense OnHand in the ActiveSync
Program
After you have turned on the Braille Sense OnHand, and you have heard
all of the sounds, a screen will come up on your computer that has the
heading, “Set Up a Partnership”. You have a “Yes” option and a “No”
option on this screen. If you select “Yes” on this screen, the next time
you connect the Braille Sense OnHand to your computer, you will be
able to have it synchronize with Microsoft Outlook automatically. If you
399
select “No”, the “Set Up a Partnership” screen will come up every time
you connect the Braille Sense OnHand to your computer.
If you want to be able to synchronize the Braille Sense OnHand with
Microsoft Outlook, select “Yes”, and then press the “next” button. Then,
you will be asked to select a name that you want to call the mobile
device. You can only use the following characters: _, A-Z, or 0-9.
You cannot use spaces. Once you have entered an appropriate name,
press “next”. Then, a list of functions will appear on your computer.
Each function has a check box located next to it. Make sure that only
the “Contacts” check box (that corresponds with Microsoft Outlook) is
checked. Then, press “next”. Then, the next dialog box that appears
will say, “setup complete”. Then, press “finish”. ActiveSync will then
look for changes, and synchronize with Microsoft Outlook. For more
information on how to use ActiveSync or Microsoft Outlook, please visit
www.microsoft.com.
19.4 Transferring Files to the Braille Sense OnHand Via ActiveSync
In order to transfer files to the Braille Sense OnHand from your computer,
you will first need to find the file(s) on your PC that you want to transfer.
Once you have found the file(s) that you want to transfer, make sure the
files have been selected by using the “spacebar”. After you have
selected the file(s), press “ctrl-c” on your PC to copy the file(s). Then,
go to the desktop on your computer by pressing “Windows-key-d”.
Press the letter “m” until you find “My computer”. Press “Enter” on “My
computer”. Then, press the letter “m” until you hear “mobile device”,
and press “Enter”. The mobile device is the Braille Sense OnHand.
After you have opened “mobile device”, you will enter in to the file list on
the Braille Sense OnHand. One of the items in the list is “my computer”.
Press the letter “m” until you hear “my computer”, and press “Enter”.
Then, another file list will open. In this list, you will find the folder called
“flashdisk”. This is the same “flashdisk” that you hear under “file
manager”. Press “f” until you hear “flashdisk”, and then press “Enter”.
You will notice that all of the folders that you find in the “flashdisk” under
“file manager” are located here. You can paste the file(s) here directly
400
by pressing “ctrl-v”, or you can paste the file(s) in to one of the folders by
pressing enter on one of the folders, and then pressing “ctrl-v” to paste
the file(s).
If you want to copy folders from the Braille Sense OnHand to your PC
via ActiveSync, follow the same steps; except, you will need to copy files
from the Braille Sense OnHand, and paste the file(s) to your PC in the
directory where you want to store the file(s).
401
20. Command Summary
20.1 Common Combination Keys
Call up the program menu: F1
Run the individual program in the program menu: F1-”shortcut key”
(varies for each program)
Call up the Task Name list: F1-F4
Switch to previous program: Space-F2-F3
Switch to next program: F2-F3
Call up the “menu” in the individual program: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Escape: Space-e (Space-1-5) or F4
Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or
F3-F4)
Move to the previous character: Space-3
Move to the next character: Space-6
Move to the previous line/item: Space-1
Move to the next line/item: Space-4
Move to the beginning of line/item: Home key (Space-1-3 or F2-up scroll
button)
Move to the end of line/item: End key (Space-4-6 or F3-down scroll
button)
Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-
3 or F1-F2-up scroll button)
Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end (Space-4-
5-6 or F3-F4-down scroll button)
Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 18-item
group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-F2)
Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 18-item group:
Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4)
Scroll left: Up scroll button
Scroll right: Down scroll button
Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The corresponding
cursor routing key
402
Capital sign: Space-u (dots 1-3-6)
Read the current item again: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Say current time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Check power status: Space-1-6
Call up the “Global options”: Space-o (dots 1-3-5)
Online help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
Check software version: Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) only in the Braille Sense
OnHand “program” menu.
Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Braille Sense
OnHand “program” menu
Increase the voice volume: Backspace-F4
Decrease the voice volume: Backspace-F1
Increase the voice rate: Space-F4
Decrease the voice rate: Space-F1
Increase the voice pitch: Enter-F4
Decrease the voice pitch: Enter-F1
One-handed mode on: hold down F3 while turning on.
One-handed mode off: hold down F4 while turning on.
Bluetooth on/off: Backspace-3-4-5-6
Wireless LAN on/off: Backspace-1-4-5-6
Scroll voice on/off: F3-up scroll button
Selecting Braille cursor: F4-up scroll button
Selection control information: F2-down scroll button
Eight dot mode on/off: F1-down scroll button
20.2 File Manager
20.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list
Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)
Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)
403
20.2.2 Navigation Keys for the File List
Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Space-5-6
Move between file list and address window: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) /
shift-tab (Space-1-2 or F3-F4)
Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Fast move to the top level disk: Space-1-2-5-6
20.2.3 Item (folder or File) Selection Key
Select item by item: Space
Continuous selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
20.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Open with: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Zip: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Unzip: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Send: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Rename: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
File conversion: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Sort files by: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Set file info: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Display only files of type: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Search file: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
404
Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
20.3 Word Processor
20.3.1 Hot Keys for the Commands
New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Close current document: Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Environment setting: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Add to the clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Clear clipboard: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Insert from file: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Insert date: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Delete blank lines: Backspace-e (dots 1-5)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Change insert/overwrite mode: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Check spelling: Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Check spelling of the current word: Backspace-k (dots 1-3)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Replace: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Go to location: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to previous page: Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2
Go to next page: Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4
Set Mark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
405
Go to the mark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to previous document: Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Go to next document: Shift-tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Read selected text: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Read beginning of selected text: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons
Read status: Space-3-4
Braille document layout: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Braille paragraph layout: Backspace-1-2-4-6
General document layout: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
General paragraph layout: Backspace-2-3-4-6
20.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to previous character: Space-3
Move to next character: Space-6
Move to previous word: Space-2
Move to next word: Space-5
Move to the beginning of the line: Home (Space-1-3)
Move to the end of the line: End (Space-4-6)
Move to previous line: Up arrow (Space-1) or up scroll button
Move to next line: Down arrow (Space-4) or down scroll button
Move to previous paragraph: Space-2-3
Move to next paragraph: Space-5-6
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)
Read current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6
Read current line: Space-1-4
Read current word: Space-2-5
Read current character: Space-3-6
Delete current paragraph: Backspace-1-3-4-6
Delete current line: Backspace-1-4
406
Delete current word: Backspace-2-5
Delete current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Confirm current cursor position: Space-1-5-6
Set view format character: Space-1-4-6
Set reading unit: Space-2-4-6
Set read only: Space-3-4-6
Set reading mode: Space-1-2-4-6
20.4 Address Manager
20.4.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu
Move to the previous field or menu item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next field or menu item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)
Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)
20.4.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the first field: Home (Space-1-3)
Move to the last field: End (Space-4-6)
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
20.4.3 Hot keys for the Commands
Add address: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Find address: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Edit address: Enter-m (dots1-3-4)
Delete address: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
407
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Save as a file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print address: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Backup address list: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore address list: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Setting add/searching address fields: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Import from CSV: Backspace-i (dots 2-4)
Export to CSV: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
20.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Tab: Space-4-5 or F3
Shift-tab: Space-1-2 or Space-F3
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
20.5 Schedule Manager
20.5.1 Hot keys for the commands
Move to the next field: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous field: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Add schedule: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Search schedule: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Modify schedule: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete schedule: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save schedule as file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Print schedule: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
20.5.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List
408
1. Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous appointment in the same day: Space-1 or up
scroll button
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Space-4 or down scroll
button
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Space-1-3
Move to the last appointment in the same day: Space-4-6
2. Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
Move to the previous schedule: Space-2
Move to the next schedule: Space-5
Move to the first schedule: Space-2-3 or Space-1-2-3
Move to the last schedule: Space-5-6 or Space-4-5-6
20.6 E-mail
20.6.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox
Call “Accounts manager”: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Check for new mail: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Write mail: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Reply: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Reply all: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Forward: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Call up “set path”: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Call up “set option”: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Call up “set spam”: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to unread message: Enter-u (dots 1-3-4)
Move to mailbox: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy to mailbox: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Add a sender to the address list: Enter-i (dots 2-4) (This is valid only at
the “from” item of the “inbox”)
Delete received e-mail: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is valid only at the
“Subject” and “date” item in the “inbox”)
409
Save the received e-mail as text file: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print the received e-mail: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
20.6.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and
Save in the Mail Outbox
Search address list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Attach file: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Send e-mail: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Save in mail outbox: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
20.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Copy to the clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Cut to the clipboard: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) (This is not available when
you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
Paste from the clipboard: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) (This is not available
when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
Delete selection and delete a letter: Space-d (dots 1-2) (It is not valid
when you are reading e-mail in the “inbox”)
Cancel block: Space-e (dots 1-5)
20.7 Media Player
20.7.1 Hot keys for commands
Open file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Open folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Add file: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
Add folder: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
410
Save play list: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Save as play list: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Delete item: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Play: Enter, Play button
Pause/continue: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Previous track: Dot 3, previous button
Next track: Dot 6, next button
5th previous track: Dots 2-3
5th next track: Dots 5-6
First track: Dots 1-3
Last track: Dots 4-6
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Slow down: Dots 1-2-6
Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5
Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4
Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), Record button
Record: Record button
Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button
Play: Play button
Pause/continue play: Space, Play button
Stop: Backspace, Stop button
Delete play list during stop: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Set bookmark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete bookmark: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Jump to bookmark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5)
Go to position: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Set mark: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)
Move to mark: Backspace-j (dots 2-4-5)
Move to previous mark: Backspace-dot 3
411
Move to next mark: Backspace-dot 6
Delete mark: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)
Mark manager: Backspace-k (dots 1-3)
Configuration dialog box: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Playback setting dialog box: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Record setting dialog box: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
Effect setting dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
20.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab
Move to the next information: Space-4
Move to the previous information: Space-1
“Pause” when it is play state and “play” when it is pause state: Space
Start playing: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Play the next file: Dot 6
Play the previous file: Dot 3
Play the last file: Dots 4-6
Play the first file: Dots 1-3
Play the fifth file after the current file: Dots 5-6
Play the fifth file before the current file: Dots 2-3
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Slow down: Dots 1-2-6
Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5
Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4
Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1
Open menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Open help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
Move to “play list” tab: Space-4-5/Space-1-2
Exit “media player”: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
20.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
412
Move to the next file: Space-4
Move to the previous file: Space-1
Move to the last file: Space-4-6
Move to the first file: Space-1-3
Select/resume current file (while playing, it is used as play/pause):
Space
Start selecting files: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Start playing the selected files: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Delete the selected files in the play list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
Play the next file: Dot 6
Play the previous file: Dot 3
Play the last file: Dots 4-6
Play the first file: Dots 1-3
Play the fifth file after the current file: Dots 5-6
Play the fifth file before the current file: Dots 2-3
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
Speed up: Dots 3-4-5
Slow down: Dots 1-2-6
Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5
Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4
Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1
Open menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Open help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5)
Move to “playback information” tab: Space-4-5/Space-1-2
Exit “media player”: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
20.8 FM radio
Call up the sets dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Call up the “menu”: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Internal speakers on/off: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Move to next frequency: dot 6
Move to previous frequency: dot 3
Auto previous frequency: dot 2, short press previous button
413
Auto next frequency: dot 5, short press next button
Go to frequency: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to previous preset: dot 1, long press previous button
Move to next preset: dot 4, long press next button
Registry preset: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), long press record button
Delete the preset: long press stop button
Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Record start/pause: short press record button
Record stop: short press stop button
Mute on: short press stop button, space
Muto off: short press play button, space
Volume up: Space-up scroll button
Volume down: Space-down scroll button
20.9 Web Browser
20.9.1 Hot keys for the command
Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Auto scroll: up scroll button-down scroll button
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Copy URL: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5)
Copy link: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)
Go to the home page: Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5)
414
Go to the previous page: Backspace-Space-3 or Backspace-p (dots 1-2-
3-4)
Go to the next page: Backspace-Space-6 or Backspace-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Go to previous heading: Backspace-b (dots 1-2)
Go to next heading: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4)
Go to previous text: Space-2-4-6
Go to next text: Space-1-2-4-5-6
Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Open the history list: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Space-i (dots 2-
4)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Links list: Backspace-i (dots 2-4)
Set current as your home page: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Add to favorites: Backspace-a (dot 1)
Favorites list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Option settings : Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5)
20.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button
Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button
Play: Play button of the front panel
Stop: Stop button of the front panel
20.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-4
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-1
Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6
Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6
415
Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6
Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6
Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3
Move to the next cell: Space-5-6
Move to the upper cell: Space-3-5
Move to the lower cell: Space-2-6
Read current cell: Space-2-3-5-6
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-3
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6
Check the current position: Space-1-5-6
Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6
Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6
Read the current line: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
20.10 Daisy Player
Move to the title list: Space-dots 1-2-5-6
Open daisy file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Voice setting: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Check the book-info: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Space-1-3 or Space-1-2-3
Move to the last phrase: Space-4-6 or Space-4-5-6
Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5
Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6
Increase the volume: Space-up scroll button
Decrease the volume: Space-down scroll button
Move to the next phrase: dot 6 or short press “next” button
Move to the previous phrase: dot 3 or short press “previous” button
Move to the next fifty phrase: dot 4
Move to the previous fifty phrase: dot 1
Move to the next page: Space-3-4-5
Move to the previous page: Space-1-2-6
416
Go to the page: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Move up: dot 2
Move down: dot 5
Set to prior level: dots 2-3
Set to next level: dots 5-6
Move to the next heading: Space-5 or long press “next” button
Move to the previous heading: Space-2 or long press “previous” button
Move to the last heading: Space-5-6
Move to the first heading: Space-2-3
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6)
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5
Find heading: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Move to Specific Heading: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Set mark at current position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Move to the next mark: Space-dot 6
Move to the previous mark: Space-dot 3
Delete mark: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
20.11 Bluetooth Manager
Scanning Bluetooth device: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Connecting device: enter in the device name
Connecting service: enter in the service name
Disconnect the service in Bluetooth service list: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
1. FTP service
Open local folder: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Send to: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Retrieve file: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Delete file/folder: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
417
Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
20.12 MSN messenger
1. Log-in dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Check or uncheck a check box: Space
2. The contact list box
Move to the previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move between online and offline groups: Space-5-6
Open the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2
Logout: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
View chat: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
My status: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)
Exit: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
Add contact: Enter-a (dot 1)
Delete contact: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Contact information: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6).
Send instant message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Last message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Play keyboard sound: Enter-k (dots 1-3)
Message sound notification while in current window: Backspace-s
(dots 2-3-4)
Message sound notification while messenger is in the background:
Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)
Nickname: Enter-p (dots 1-3-4)
Save account: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
Confirm the Received Message, “Enter-l (dots-1-2-3)
3. Instant message dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
418
Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact list
box : Space-1-2-6 or Space-3-4-5, F1-F2, or F3-F4
Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4)
Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Close: Space-e (dots 1-5)
Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4)
Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)
Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)
Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2)
Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4)
Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)
Invitation: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
20.13 Database Manager
Add record: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Search records: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
Table manager: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
List of records found: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Backup database: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)
Restore database: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
1. Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
2. Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button
3. Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space-4, Space, or down scroll button
Move to the previous answer: Space-1, Backspace, or up scroll button
4. Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button
419
Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6
Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3
Move to the next field: Space-5
Move to the previous field: Space-2
Move to previous same field different record: Space-3
Move to next same field different record: Space-6
Move to the last field: Space-4-6
Move to the first field: Space-1-3
20.14 Utilities
20.14.1 Calculator
Calculator initialize: Backspace-c (dots 1-4)
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General function: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5)
Plus: Dots 3-4-6
Minus: Dots 3-6
Division: Dots 3-4
Multiplication: Dots 1-6
Percent: Dots 1-4-6
Power: Backspace-4-5
Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5)
Decimal Point: Dots 4-6
Left Parenthesis: Dots 1-2-3-5-6
Right Parenthesis: Dots 2-3-4-5-6
PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4)
Exp: Enter-e (dots 1-5)
Recall Items: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5)
Delete all save items: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5)
Save Items: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4)
Trigonometric Function: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)
420
Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), s (dots 2-3-4)
Arc Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), c (dots 1-4)
Arc Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), h (dots 1-2-5)
Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), t (dots 2-3-4-5)
Arc Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), a (dot 1)
Hyperbolic Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), h (dots 1-2-5)
Logarithm Function: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)
Natural Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), e (dots 1-5)
Common Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), n (dots 1-3-4-5)
Copy to Clipboard: Enter-i (dots 2-4)
Option Setting: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5)
20.14.2 Set time and date
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
Move to 1 hour after: Space-4
Move to 1 hour before: Space-1
Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5
Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2
Move to 1 minute after: Space-6
Move to 1 minute before: Space-3
Switch between A.M. and P.M.: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6)
421
20.14.3 Checking Date and Time
Checking date and time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5)
20.14.4 Calendar
Move to the previous item: Tab (Space-4-5)
Move to the next item: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to the next day: Space-6
Move to the previous day: Space-3
Move to the next week: Space-5
Move to the previous week: Space-2
Move to the next month: Space-4
Move to the previous month: Space-1
Move to the next year: Space-5-6
Move to the previous year: Space-2-3
20.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary
Move to the previous control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Move to the next control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to the previous item in entry: Space-1
Move to the next item in entry: Space-4
Add word: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Modify word: Space-m (dots 1-3-4)
Delete word: Space-d (dots 1-4-5)
20.14.6 Stopwatch
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter
Check the elapsed time: Backspace
Stop and restart Braille display: Space-F2
Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: Tab (Space-4-
5 or F2) / Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Count down timer pause or restart: Enter
422
Count down timer Initialize: Backspace
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
20.14.7 Display network status
Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5)
20.14.8 Check Power Status
Check power status: Space-1-6
20.14.9 Format
Format: Space-1-2-3
20.14.10 Backup/restore option
Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button
Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button
Move to previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3)
Move to next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3)
Select/unselect check box: Space
20.14.11 Format
Format: Space-1-2-3
20.14.12 Sleep Timer
Set Sleep Timer: Space-j (dots 2-4-5)
20.14.13 Upgrading the Braille Sense firmware
Check download information: Space-i (dots 2-4)
Cancel download and exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)
423
21. Command Summary for USB Keyboards
21.1 Common Combination Keys
Call up the program menu: Win key
Call up the Task Name list: Ctrl-Shift-F10
Call up the “menu” in the individual program: Alt
Run the individual program in the program menu: Win key-”shortcut key”
(varies for each program)
Switch to previous program: Alt-Shift-Tab
Switch to next program: Alt-Tab
Exit: Alt-F4
Escape: ESC
Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab
Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab
Move to the previous character: Left arrow key
Move to the next character: Right arrow key
Move to the previous line item: Up arrow key
Move to the next line item: Down arrow key
Move to the beginning of line item: Home key
Move to the end of line item: End key
Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home
Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end
Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 18-item
group: Page up
Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 18-item group: Page
down
Read the current item again: Ctrl-shift-r
Say current time: Ctrl-shift-t
Check power status: Ctrl-shift-b
Print spool: Alt-shift-p
Call up the “Global options”: F10
Online help: F1
Check your version: Ctrl-shift-v only in the Braille Sense OnHand
“program” menu.
424
Display network status: Ctrl-shift-n in the Braille Sense OnHand
“program” menu
Voice volume up: F6
Voice volume down: Shift-F6
Voice rate up: F7
Voice rate down: Shift-F7
Voice pitch up: F8
Voice pitch down: Shift-F8
Voice on/off: F5
Braille display on/off: F4
Bluetooth on/off: F9
Wireless LAN on/off: F11
21.2 File Manager
21.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list
Move to previous item: Up Arrow key
Move to next item: Down Arrow key
Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-home
Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-end
21.2.2 Navigation Keys in the File List
Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Ctrl-down Arrow
Move between file list and address window: Tab / shift-tab
Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter
Move to the upper level folder: Backspace
Fast move to the top level disk: Shift-Backspace
21.2.3 Item (Folder or File) Selection Keys
Select item by item: Space
Continuous selection: Ctrl-b or F2
Select all: Ctrl-a
425
21.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands
Open: Ctrl-o
Open with: Ctrl-e
Zip: Ctrl-z
Unzip: Ctrl-u
Send: Ctrl-s
Copy: Ctrl-c
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete: DEL
Rename: Ctrl-r
New document: Ctrl-n
New folder: Alt-f
File conversion: Ctrl-t
Select all: Ctrl-a
Sort files by: Ctrl-g
Set file info: Ctrl-l
Display only files of type: Ctrl-w
Search file: Ctrl-f
Information: Ctrl-i
21.3 Word Processor
21.3.1 Hot keys for the command
New document: Ctrl-n
Open: Ctrl-o
Save: Ctrl-s
Save as: Alt-s
Close current document: Ctrl-F4
Print: Ctrl-p
Settings: Ctrl-e
Exit: Alt-f4
Start selection: Ctrl-b or F2
Copy: Ctrl-c
426
Add to the clipboard: Ctrl-Ins
Clear clipboard: Ctrl-Del
Delete: Del
Cut: Ctrl-x
Paste: Ctrl-v
Delete blank lines: Alt-e
Select All: Ctrl-a
Insert from file: Ctrl-i
Insert date: Ctrl-w
Change insert/overwrite mode: Insert
Check spelling: Ctrl-k
Check spelling of the current word: Alt-k
Find: Ctrl -f
Find again: F3
Replace: Ctrl-r
Go to location: Ctrl-l
Go to previous page: Page up
Go to next page: Page down
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Go to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to previous document: Shift-Tab
Go to next document: Tab
Read selected text: Alt-b
Read beginning of selected text: Ctrl-u
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Ctrl-g
Read status: Ctrl-shift-/
Braille document layout: Alt-F5
Print document layout: Alt-F7
Braille paragraph layout: Alt-F6
Print paragraph layout: Alt-F8
427
21.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Move to previous character: Left arrow key
Move to next character: Right arrow key
Move to previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow
Move to next word: Ctrl-Right arrow
Move to the beginning of the line: Home key
Move to the end of the line: End key
Move to previous line: Up arrow key
Move to next line: Down arrow key
Move to previous paragraph: Ctrl-up arrow
Move to next paragraph: Ctrl-down arrow
Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home
Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end
Read current paragraph: Ctrl-shift-v
Read current line: Ctrl-shift-c
Read current word: Ctrl-shift-x
Read current character: Ctrl-shift-z
Delete current paragraph: Alt-Del
Delete current line: Ctrl-Backspace
Delete current word: Alt-Backspace
Delete current character: Del
Confirm current cursor position: Ctrl-Shift-s
Set view format character: Ctrl- 5
Set reading unit: Ctrl-3
Set read only: Ctrl-2
Set reading mode: Ctrl-4
21.4 Address Manager
21.4.1 Move keys for moving from field to field in the record or in
the menu
428
Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow key
Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow key
Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-End
21.4.2 Move Keys for Moving from Record to Record
Move to the previous record: Up arrow key
Move to the next record: Down arrow key
Move to the first field: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last field: Ctrl-End
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last record: Ctrl-End
Move to next same field different record: Left arrow key
Move to previous same field different record: Right arrow key
21.4.3 Hot Keys for the Commands
Add address: Ctrl-i
Find address: Ctrl-s
Modify address: Ctrl-m
Delete address: Del
Select all: Ctrl-a
Save as a file: Alt-s
Print address: Ctrl-p
Backup address list: Ctrl-u
Restore address list: Ctrl-r
Backup option: Ctrl-e
Setting add/searching address fields: Ctrl-o
21.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys
Tab: Tab
429
Shift-tab: Shift-Tab
Cancel: ESC
Exit: Alt-f4
21.5 Schedule Manager
21.5.1 Hot keys for the commands
Move to the next field: Tab
Move to the previous field: Shift-Tab
Add schedule: Ctrl-i
Search schedule: Ctrl-s
Modify schedule: Ctrl-m
Delete schedule: Del
Alarm option: Ctrl-o
Save schedule as file: Alt-s
Print schedule: Ctrl-p
Backup schedule list: Ctrl-u
Restore schedule list: Ctrl-r
Backup option: Ctrl-e
Switch searching mode: Ctrl-F2
21.5.2 Movement Keys for the Search Result List
1. Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list
Move to the previous appointment in the same day: Up arrow key
Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down arrow key
Move to the first appointment in the same day: Home
Move to the last appointment in the same day: End
2. Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments
registered
Move to the previous schedule: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to the next schedule: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the first schedule: Ctrl-Home
Move to the last schedule: Ctrl-End
430
21.6 E-mail
21.6.1 Hot keys for reading e-mails
Call “Accounts manager”: Ctrl-m
Check for new mail: Ctrl-n
Write mail: Ctrl-w
Reply: Ctrl-r
Reply all: Alt-r
Forward: Ctrl-f
Call up “set path”: Ctrl-p
Call up “set option”: Ctrl-o
Call up “set spam”: Ctrl-e
Find: Ctrl-shift-f
Find again: f3
Move to mailbox: Alt-x
Copy to mailbox: Alt-c
Add a sender to the address list: Ctrl-i (This is valid only at the “from”
item).
Delete received e-mail: Del (It is valid only at the “Subject” and “date”
item).
Save the received e-mail as text file: Alt-s
Print the received e-mail: Alt-p
Move to unread message: Ctrl-u (It is valid only at the “Subject” and
“date” item)
Cancel: ESC
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
21.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-mail Including Reply, Forward, and
Save in the Pail Storage Box
Search address list: Ctrl-l
Attach file: Ctrl-f
Send e-mail: Ctrl-s
Save in mail storage box: Ctrl-shift-s
Cancel: ESC
431
Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Alt-F4
21.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-mail messages or Writing an E-mail
Message
Start selection: Ctrl-b or F2
Select all: Ctrl-a
Copy to the clipboard: Ctrl-c
Cut to the clipboard: Ctrl-x (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail).
Paste from the clipboard: Ctrl-v (It is not valid when you are reading e-
mail).
Delete selection and delete a letter: Del (It is not valid when you are
reading e-mail).
Cancel block: ESC
21.7 Media Player
21.7.1 Hot keys for commands
Open file: Ctrl-o
Open folder: Ctrl-f
Add file: Alt-o
Add folder: Alt-f
Save play list: Ctrl-i
Save as play list: Ctrl-shift-s
Delete time: Del
Play: Enter
Previous track: Alt-Left arrow key
Next track: Alt-Right arrow key
5th previous track: Alt-Up arrow key
5th next track: Alt-Down arrow key
First track: Ctrl-home key
Last track: Ctrl-end key
Move to backward by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to forward by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow key
432
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow key or Ctrl-Down arrow key
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow key
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow key
Pause/Continue: Space
Stop: Backspace
Delete play list during stop: DEL
Record: Ctrl-r
Play: Enter
Stop: Backspace
Pause/Continue recording: Space
Configuration dialog box: Alt-c
Set bookmark: Ctrl-m
Delete bookmark: Ctrl-d
Jump to bookmark: Ctrl-j
Go to position: Ctrl-g
Playback setting dialog box: Ctrl-s
Record setting dialog box: Alt-s
21.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab
Move to the next information: Down arrow key
Move to the previous information: Up arrow
Pause/Play when it is pause state: Space
Start playing: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Play the next file: Alt-Right arrow key
Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow key
Play the last file: Ctrl-End key
Play the first file: Ctrl-Home key
Play the fifth file after the current file: Alt-Down arrow key
Play the fifth file before the current file: Alt-Up arrow key
433
Move to backward by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to forward by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow key or Ctrl-Down arrow key
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow key
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow key
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1
Move to “play list” tab: Tab/Shift-Tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4
21.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab
Move to the next file: Down arrow key
Move to the previous file: Up arrow key
Move to the last file: End key
Move to the first file: Home key
Select resume current file (while playing, it is used as plays/pause):
Space
Start selecting files: Ctrl-b or F2
Start playing the selected files: Enter
Stop playing: Backspace
Delete the selected files in the play list: Del
Play the next file: Alt-Right arrow key
Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow key
Play the last file: Ctrl-end key
Play the first file: Ctrl-home key
Play the fifth file after the current file: Alt-Down arrow
Play the fifth file before the current file: Alt-Up arrow
Move to backward by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to forward by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow key or Ctrl-Down arrow key
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key
Speed up: Shift-Left arrow key
434
Slow down: Shift-Right arrow key
Open menu: Alt
Open help: F1
Move to “playback information” tab: Tab/Shift-Tab
Exit “media player”: Alt-F4
21.8 FM radio
Call up the sets dialog box: Ctrl-e
Call up the “menu”: Alt
Internal speakers on/off: x or Ctrl-shift-x
Move to next frequency: Ctrl-Down arrow key
Move to previous frequency: Ctrl-Up arrow key
Auto previous frequency: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Auto next frequency: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Go to frequency: Ctrl -f
Move to previous preset: Alt-Left arrow key
Move to next preset: Alt-Right arrow key
Delete the preset: Del
Registry preset: Ctrl-s
Call up the record dialog box: Ctrl-r
Mute on/off: Space
Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key
Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key
Recoding settings: Alt-s
21.9 Web Browser
21.9.1 Hot keys for the command
Open URL: Ctrl-u
Open: Ctrl-o
Save as: Alt-s
Page information: Ctrl-i
Exit: Alt-F4
435
Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g
Read from cursor to end: Ctrl-Shift-Enter
Copy selection: Ctrl-b or F2
Copy: Ctrl-c
Add clipboard: Ctrl-Ins
Copy URL: Alt-d
Copy link address: Alt-l
Go to the home page: Alt-h
Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow key
Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow key
Go to previous text: Ctrl-F5Go to next text: Ctrl-F6
Go to previous heading: Alt-b or Ctrl-F3
Go to next heading: Alt-f or Ctrl-F4
Refresh: Ctrl-r
Open the history list: Ctrl-h
Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Ctrl-shift-i
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Links list: Alt-i
Register as your home page: Ctrl-s
Add to favorites: Alt-a
Favorites list: Ctrl-l
21.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser
Turn up the volume: Shift-Up arrow key
Turn down the volume: Shift-Down arrow key
21.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
Move to the next control: Tab
436
Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow key
Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow key
Move to the previous form: Ctrl-F1
Move to the next form: Ctrl-F2
Move to the previous table: Ctrl-F7
Move to the next table: Ctrl-F8
Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-Shift-Left arrow key
Move to the next cell: Ctrl-Shift-Right arrow key
Move to the upper cell: Ctrl-Shift-Up arrow key
Move to the lower cell: Ctrl-Shift-Down arrow
Read current cell: Ctrl-Shift-F
Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Up arrow key
Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Down arrow key
Check the current position: Ctrl-shift-s
Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-F9
Move to the next frame: Ctrl-F10
Read the current line: Ctrl-Shift-r
21.10 Daisy Player
Play/Pause: Space
Move to the beginning of document: Home
Move to the last phrase: End
Increase the speed: Shift-Left arrow key
Decrease the speed: Shift-Right arrow key
Increase the volume: Shift-Up arrow key
Decrease the volume: Shift-Down arrow key
Move to the next phrase: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the previous phrase: Ctrl-Left arrow key
437
Move to the next fifty phrase: Ctrl-Up arrow key
Move to the previous fifty phrase: Ctrl-Down arrow key
Move to the next page: Page down
Move to the previous page: Page up
Go to the page: Ctrl-g
Move to the upper-level: Alt-Left arrow key
Move to the down-level: Alt-Right arrow key
Move to the next level at the preset level: Alt-Up arrow key
Move to the previous level at the preset level: Alt-Down arrow key
Move to the next heading: Ctrl-F6
Move to the previous heading: Ctrl-F5
Move to the first heading: Ctrl-F7
Move to the last heading: Ctrl-F8
Check the currently-reading level and heading: Ctrl-w
Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Ctrl-n
Find heading: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Set mark at current position: Ctrl-m
Move to the next mark: N
Move to the previous mark: V
Delete mark: Del
Move to the title list: Shift-Backspace
Open daisy file: Ctrl-o
Check the book-info: Ctrl-i
Voice setting: Ctrl-s
21.11 Bluetooth Manager
Scanning Bluetooth device: Ctrl-r
Connecting device: Enter in the device name
Connecting service: Enter in the service name
Disconnect the service: Ctrl-d
438
Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace
1. FTP service
Open local/remote folder: Ctrl-o
Copy: Ctrl-c
Paste: Ctrl-v
Send to: Ctrl-s
Retrieve file: Ctrl-r
New folder: Ctrl-f
Delete file/folder: DEL
Information: Ctrl-i
21.12 MSN messenger
1. Log-in dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
Check or uncheck a check box: Space
2. The contact list box
Move to the previous item: Up arrow key
Move to the next item: Down arrow key
Move between online and offline groups: Ctrl-Down arrow key
Open the menu: Alt
Logout: Ctrl-n
View chat: Ctrl-r
My status: Ctrl-m
Exit: Alt-F4
Add contact: Ctrl-a
Delete contact: Ctrl-d
Contact information: Ctrl-v
Send instant message: Ctrl-s
Last message: Alt-r
Play keyboard sound: Ctrl-k
Message sound notification while in current window: Ctrl-Shift-s
439
Message sound notification while messenger is in the background: Alt-
m
Nickname: Ctrl-p
Save account: Ctrl-o
Confirm the Received Message: Ctrl-l
3. Instant message dialog box
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact listbox:
Page up, Page down
Save as: Alt-s
Print: Ctrl-p
Close: ESC
Cut: Ctrl-x
Copy: Ctrl-c
Delete: Del
Paste: Ctrl-v
Select all: Ctrl-a
Start selection: Ctrl-b or F2
Find: Ctrl-f
Find again: F3
Invitation: Ctrl-i
Change my status: Ctrl-t
Line break in the message box: Ctrl-Enter
21.13 Database Manager
Add record: Ctrl-i
Search records: Ctrl-s
Modify record: Ctrl-m
Table manager: Ctrl-t
List of records found: Ctrl-r
Setting backup option: Ctrl-e
Backup database: Ctrl-u
Restore database: Ctrl-o
440
Print: Ctrl-p
Save as: Alt-s
1. Move by controls
Move to the next control: Tab
Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab
2. Move in a list box
Move to the next list item: Down arrow key
Move to the previous list item: Up arrow key
3. Select your answer in the prompt box
Move to the next answer: Space, or Down arrow key
Move to the previous answer: Backspace, or Up arrow key
4. Move in the “list of records found”
Move to the next record: Down arrow key
Move to the previous record: Up arrow key
Move to the last record: Ctrl-end
Move to the first record: Ctrl-home
Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow key
Move to next same field different record: Right arrow key
Move to the last field: End
Move to the first field: Home
21.14 Utilities
21.14.1 Calculator
Calculator initialize: Alt-c
Delete numbers or operators: Backspace
General function: Ctrl-g
Plus: +
Minus: -
Division: /
Multiplication: *
441
Percent: %
Power: ^
Square Root: Ctrl-q
Decimal Point: .
Left Parenthesis: (
Right Parenthesis: )
PI: Ctrl-p
Exp: Ctrl-e
Recall Items: Alt-r
Delete all saved items: Ctrl-d
Save Items: Alt-s
Trigonometric Function: Ctrl-s
Sine: Ctrl-s, s
Arc Sine: Ctrl-s, a
Hyperbolic Sine: Ctrl-s, h
Cosine: Ctrl-c, c
Arc Cosine: Ctrl-c, a
Hyperbolic Cosine: Ctrl-c, h
Tangent: Ctrl-t, t
Arc Tangent: Ctrl-t, a
Hyperbolic Tangent: Ctrl-t, h
Logarithm Function: Ctrl-l
Natural Logarithm: Ctrl-l, e
Common Logarithm: Ctrl-l, n
Copy to Clipboard: Ctrl-Ins
Option Setting: Ctrl-o
Statistics function: Alt-t
21.14.2 Setting the Date and Time
Move to the next day: Right arrow key
Move to the previous day: Left arrow key
442
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to the next month: Down arrow key
Move to the previous month: Up arrow key
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow key
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow key
Move to 1 hour after: Down arrow key
Move to 1 hour before: Up arrow key
Move to 10 minutes after: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to 10 minutes before: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to 1 minute after: Right arrow key
Move to 1 minute before: Left arrow key
Switch Between A.M. and P.M.: Ctrl-Shift-x
21.14.3 Checking the Date and Time
Checking date and time: Ctrl-shift-t
21.14.4 Calendar
Move to the previous item: Tab
Move to the next item: Shift-Tab
Move to the next day: Right arrow key
Move to the previous day: Left arrow key
Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow key
Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow key
Move to the next month: Down arrow key
Move to the previous month: Up arrow key
Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow key
Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow key
21.14.5 Pronunciation dictionary
Move to the previous control: Tab
443
Move to the next control: Shift-Tab
Move to the previous item in entry: Up arrow key
Move to the next item in entry: Down arrow key
Add word: Alt-i
Modify word: Alt-m
Delete word: Del
21.14.6 Stopwatch
Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter
Check the elapsed time: Space
Stop Braille display: Ctrl-Shift-Space
Restart Braille display: Ctrl-Shift-Space
Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: Tab
Count down timer pause or restart: Enter
Count down timer Initialize: Backspace
Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Alt-F4
21.14.7 Display network status
Display network status: Ctrl-Shift-n
21.14.8 Check Power Status
Check power status: Ctrl-Shift-b
21.14.9 Backup/restore option
Move to previous item: Up arrow key
Move to next item: Down arrow key
Move to previous control: Shift-Tab
Move to next control: Tab
Select/unselect check box: Space
21.14.10 Upgrading Braille Sense OnHand firmware
444
Check download information: Space
Cancel download and exit: Alt-F4
445
22. Troubleshooting Guide
If you are having trouble with the Braille Sense OnHand, please try the
following suggestions according to your problem:
22.1 The Braille Sense OnHand Will Not Turn On
1. Check to make sure that the battery is inserted in to its compartment
properly.
2. If the battery is inserted properly, connect the AC adapter, and plug
the AC adapter in to an electrical outlet. The battery may need to be
charged.
3. Or check the location of keyboard lock switch. If this switch put on
“lock”, power switch does not work.
22.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard
1. Make sure the volume is turned up. Press “Backspace-F4” to turn up
the volume.
2. Make sure the voice is turned on. Press “Space-o (dots 1-3-5)” to
open the “Global options”. Press “F3-F4” once. Then, press “space”.
Then, press “Enter”. This will turn on the voice.
22.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand
1. Press “Space-F1” to slow down the voice rate.
22.4 The Voice Pitch Is Too Low or Too High to Understand
1. Press “Enter-F1” to lower the pitch, or press “Enter-F4” to raise the
voice pitch.
22.5 Lost Your Place
1. If you have lost your place in the Braille Sense OnHand, and cannot
remember where you are press “F1” to access the “program” menu.
446
Then, press “F2-F3” to switch between programs that are open. If you
are in the word processor, pressing “space1-5-6” will give you your
current location.
22.6 Email
1. If you are having trouble downloading email, please contact your
Internet service provider to make sure that you have the correct
POP3 and SMTP settings.
22.7 The Braille display Does Not Display Braille
1. If the Braille display does not display Braille, make sure that the
Braille display is turned on. In order to do this, press “Space-o (dots
1-3-5)”, and press “space”. Then, press “Enter”. The Braille display
will now be turned on if this option was set to off.
22.8 The Braille Sense OnHand Does Not Respond
1. If the Braille Sense OnHand does not respond to keystrokes or
commands, it may be necessary to reset the unit. To reset the Braille
Sense OnHand, press the reset button, or press “1-2-3-4-5-6-F2-F3”.
Do NOT hold the reset button for more than 5 seconds.
447
23. Accessories
For information on available accessories for the Braille Sense OnHand,
please contact HIMS. You can contact HIMS at hims@himsintl.com.
Or, you can contact HIMS by phone at +82-42-864-4460. You can also
visit HIMS on the web at www.himsintl.com.
.
448
24. Obtaining Support
If you are having any problems with your Braille Sense OnHand, please
contact the dealer from whom you bought your unit. If you require
further assistance, please contact us at hims@himsintl.com. Or, you
can contact HIMS by phone at +82-42-864-4460.